Revit Architecture 2009

Metric Tutorials

240A1-050000-PM04A

April 2008

©

2008 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Except as otherwise permitted by Autodesk, Inc., this publication, or parts thereof, may not be reproduced in any form, by any method, for any purpose. Certain materials included in this publication are reprinted with the permission of the copyright holder. Disclaimer THIS PUBLICATION AND THE INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN IS MADE AVAILABLE BY AUTODESK, INC. "AS IS." AUTODESK, INC. DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE REGARDING THESE MATERIALS. Trademarks The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk, Inc., in the USA and other countries: 3DEC (design/logo), 3December, 3December.com, 3ds Max, ActiveShapes, Actrix, ADI, Alias, Alias (swirl design/logo), AliasStudio, Alias|Wavefront (design/logo), ATC, AUGI, AutoCAD, AutoCAD Learning Assistance, AutoCAD LT, AutoCAD Simulator, AutoCAD SQL Extension, AutoCAD SQL Interface, Autodesk, Autodesk Envision, Autodesk Insight, Autodesk Intent, Autodesk Inventor, Autodesk Map, Autodesk MapGuide, Autodesk Streamline, AutoLISP, AutoSnap, AutoSketch, AutoTrack, Backdraft, Built with ObjectARX (logo), Burn, Buzzsaw, CAiCE, Can You Imagine, Character Studio, Cinestream, Civil 3D, Cleaner, Cleaner Central, ClearScale, Colour Warper, Combustion, Communication Specification, Constructware, Content Explorer, Create>what's>Next> (design/logo), Dancing Baby (image), DesignCenter, Design Doctor, Designer's Toolkit, DesignKids, DesignProf, DesignServer, DesignStudio, Design|Studio (design/logo), Design Your World, Design Your World (design/logo), DWF, DWG, DWG (logo), DWG TrueConvert, DWG TrueView, DXF, EditDV, Education by Design, Exposure, Extending the Design Team, FBX, Filmbox, FMDesktop, Freewheel, GDX Driver, Gmax, Heads-up Design, Heidi, HOOPS, HumanIK, i-drop, iMOUT, Incinerator, IntroDV, Inventor, Inventor LT, Kaydara, Kaydara (design/logo), LocationLogic, Lustre, Maya, Mechanical Desktop, MotionBuilder, Mudbox, NavisWorks, ObjectARX, ObjectDBX, Open Reality, Opticore, Opticore Opus, PolarSnap, PortfolioWall, Powered with Autodesk Technology, Productstream, ProjectPoint, ProMaterials, Reactor, RealDWG, Real-time Roto, Recognize, Render Queue, Reveal, Revit, Showcase, ShowMotion, SketchBook, SteeringWheels, StudioTools, Topobase, Toxik, ViewCube, Visual, Visual Bridge, Visual Construction, Visual Drainage, Visual Hydro, Visual Landscape, Visual Roads, Visual Survey, Visual Syllabus, Visual Toolbox, Visual Tugboat, Visual LISP, Voice Reality, Volo, Wiretap, and WiretapCentral The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk Canada Co. in the USA and/or Canada and other countries: Backburner, Discreet, Fire, Flame, Flint, Frost, Inferno, Multi-Master Editing, River, Smoke, Sparks, Stone, and Wire All other brand names, product names or trademarks belong to their respective holders. Third Party Software Program Credits ACIS Copyright© 1989-2001 Spatial Corp. Portions Copyright© 2002 Autodesk, Inc. Flash ® is a registered trademark of Macromedia, Inc. in the United States and/or other countries. International CorrectSpell™ Spelling Correction System© 1995 by Lernout & Hauspie Speech Products, N.V. All rights reserved. InstallShield™ 3.0. Copyright© 1997 InstallShield Software Corporation. All rights reserved. PANTONE® Colors displayed in the software application or in the user documentation may not match PANTONE-identified standards. Consult current PANTONE Color Publications for accurate color. PANTONE Color Data and/or Software shall not be copied onto another disk or into memory unless as part of the execution of this Autodesk software product. Portions Copyright© 1991-1996 Arthur D. Applegate. All rights reserved. Portions of this software are based on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. RAL DESIGN© RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 RAL CLASSIC© RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 Representation of the RAL Colors is done with the approval of RAL Deutsches Institut für Gütesicherung und Kennzeichnung e.V. (RAL German Institute for Quality Assurance and Certification, re. Assoc.), D-53757 Sankt Augustin. Typefaces from the Bitstream® typeface library copyright 1992. Typefaces from Payne Loving Trust© 1996. All rights reserved. Printed manual and help produced with Idiom WorldServer™. WindowBlinds: DirectSkin™ OCX © Stardock® AnswerWorks 4.0 ©; 1997-2003 WexTech Systems, Inc. Portions of this software © Vantage-Knexys. All rights reserved. The Director General of the Geographic Survey Institute has issued the approval for the coordinates exchange numbered TKY2JGD for Japan Geodetic Datum 2000, also known as technical information No H1-N0.2 of the Geographic Survey Institute, to be installed and used within this software product (Approval No.: 646 issued by GSI, April 8, 2002). Portions of this computer program are copyright © 1995-1999 LizardTech, Inc. All rights reserved. MrSID is protected by U.S. Patent No. 5,710,835. Foreign Patents Pending. Portions of this computer program are Copyright ©; 2000 Earth Resource Mapping, Inc. OSTN97 © Crown Copyright 1997. All rights reserved. OSTN02 © Crown copyright 2002. All rights reserved. OSGM02 © Crown copyright 2002, © Ordnance Survey Ireland, 2002. FME Objects Engine © 2005 SAFE Software. All rights reserved. ETABS is a registered trademark of Computers and Structures, Inc. ETABS © copyright 1984-2005 Computers and Structures, Inc. All rights reserved. RISA is a trademark of RISA Technologies. RISA-3D copyright © 1993-2005 RISA Technologies. All rights reserved. Portions relating to JPEG © Copyright 1991-1998 Thomas G. Lane. All rights reserved. This software is based in part on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. Portions relating to TIFF © Copyright 1997-1998 Sam Leffler. © Copyright 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc. All rights reserved. The Tiff portions of this software are provided by the copyright holders and contributors “as is” and any express or implied warranties, including, but not limited to, the implied warranties or merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose are disclaimed. In no event shall the

copyright owner or contributors of the TIFF portions be liable for any direct, indirect, incidental, special, exemplary, or consequential damages (including, but not limited to, procurement of substitute goods or services; loss of use, data, or profits; or business interruption) however caused and on any theory of liability, whether in contract, strict liability, or tort (including negligence or otherwise) arising in any way out of the use of the TIFF portions of this software, even if advised of the possibility of such damage. Portions of Libtiff 3.5.7 Copyright © 1988-1997 Sam Leffler. Copyright © 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc. Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted without fee, provided that (i) the above copyright notices and this permission notice appear in all copies of the software and related documentation, and (ii) the names of Sam Leffler and Silicon Graphics may not be used in any advertising or publicity relating to the software without the specific, prior written permission of Sam Leffler and Silicon Graphics. Portions of Libxml2 2.6.4 Copyright © 1998-2003 Daniel Veillard. All Rights Reserved. Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the “Software”), to deal in the Software without restriction, including without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions: The above copyright notices and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software. Government Use Use, duplication, or disclosure by the U.S. Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in FAR 12.212 (Commercial Computer Software-Restricted Rights) and DFAR 227.7202 (Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software), as applicable.

Contents

Getting Chapter 1

Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Using the Tutorials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Accessing Training Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Understanding the Basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Navigating the User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Performing Common Tasks in Revit Architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

Express Workshop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Chapter 2 Express Workshop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Creating Details with Revit Architecture . . . . . Create a Detail with Imported DWG Data . Model-Based Detailing . . . . . . . . . . . . Keynoting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Drawing Sheets with Revit Architecture . Project Sheet Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . Project Detail Sheet Layout . . . . . . . . . Project Title Sheet Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 . 28 . 31 . 38 . 41 . 42 . 47 . 51

Developing Your Designs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Creating the Project . . . . . . . . . Adding Project Levels . . . . . . . . Creating a Column Grid . . . . . . . Adding Beams . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Braces . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Foundation . . . . . . . . Changing Structural Member Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 . 60 . 64 . 72 . 77 . 82 . 85

v

Linking the Structural Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 Adding Floors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 Adding a Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 Adding a Curtain Wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 Creating an Entrance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 Creating a Drop Ceiling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 Creating Multi-Level Stairs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 Creating a Wall with a Non-Uniform Height . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 Adding Entourage and Site Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 Adding a Service Core to the Building Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142 Modifying a Floor and Adding Railings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146

Documenting Your Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153 Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Creating Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Duplicating Plan Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Elevation and Section Views . . . . . . . Creating Callout Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying View Tag Appearance . . . . . . . . . . Setting Visibility and Graphics Options in Views . . . . Creating a View Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . View Range and Plan Regions . . . . . . . . . . . Using Filters to Control Visibility . . . . . . . . . Masking Portions of a View . . . . . . . . . . . . Working with Visual Overrides . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Drawing Sheets in a Project . . . . . . . . . . Creating Drawing Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Views to Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying the Building Model from a Sheet View . Creating and Modifying a Title Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 . 155 . 159 . 166 . 172 . 175 . 176 . 179 . 182 . 184 . 187 . 192 . 192 . 196 . 201 . 202

Chapter 5

Tagging and Scheduling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Tagging Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sequentially Placing and Tagging Rooms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tagging Doors and Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tagging Other Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Defining Schedules and Color Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Window Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Project Parameters to a Window Schedule . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Unit-Based Door Schedule with a Filter . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Room Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scheduling Rooms from a Program List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Room Color Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Material Takeoff . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scheduling Shared Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Shared Parameter File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Shared Parameters to a Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Placing, Tagging, and Scheduling a Family with Shared Parameters . Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes and Descriptions . . . . . . . Exporting Project Information with ODBC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exporting Schedule Information to Microsoft Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207 . 207 . 213 . 217 . 220 . 221 . 226 . 228 . 230 . 232 . 238 . 246 . 249 . 249 . 251 . 254 . 258 . 258 . 260 . 260

Chapter 6

Annotating and Dimensioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Changing the Base Elevation of a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263 Relocating a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265

vi | Contents

Dimensioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Automatic Wall Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Controlling Witness Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Office Standard Dimension Type from Existing Dimensions . Creating Text Annotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Text Notes to the Floor Plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. 270 . 270 . 279 . 281 . 286 . 289 . 290

Chapter 7

Detailing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
Creating a Detail from a Building Model . . . . Detailing the View . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Detail Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Text Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Detail Components . . . . . . . . Adding Keynotes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Line-based Detail Components . Modifying a Keynote Database . . . . . . . Creating a Drafted Detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . Importing a Detail into a Drafting View . . Creating a Reference Callout . . . . . . . . Creating a Detail in a Drafting View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297 . 298 . 304 . 308 . 310 . 312 . 314 . 319 . 320 . 321 . 321 . 323

Chapter 8

Finishing the Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
Using Note Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Note Block . . . . . . Using Drawing Lists . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Drawing List . . . . . Using Legends . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Symbol Legend . . . . Creating a Component Legend . Using Revision Tracking . . . . . . . . Setting Up a Revision Table . . . Sketching Revision Clouds . . . . Tagging Revision Clouds . . . . . Working with Revisions . . . . . Importing from Other Applications . . Importing Image Files . . . . . . Importing Text Documents . . . Importing Spreadsheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339 . 339 . 345 . 345 . 347 . 347 . 351 . 356 . 356 . 358 . 360 . 361 . 367 . 368 . 368 . 369

Chapter 9

Using Dependent Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
Using Dependent Views in Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373 Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373 Using Dependent Views for Elevation Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384

Viewing and Rendering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389 Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391
Rendering an Exterior View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Applying Materials and Textures to the Building Model . Adding Trees to the Site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Perspective View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating the Exterior Rendering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rendering an Interior View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding RPC People . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating the Interior Perspective View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391 . 392 . 399 . 403 . 407 . 411 . 412 . 415

Contents | vii

Creating the Interior Rendering . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating and Recording Walkthroughs . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Walkthrough . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing the Walkthrough Path and Camera Position . Recording the Walkthrough . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. 419 . 424 . 425 . 428 . 430

Chapter 11

Creating Solar Studies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431
Creating Views for Solar Studies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Solar Study - Courtyard View . . . . . . . . Creating a Solar Study Section Cutaway View . . . . . Creating a Solar Study Plan Cutaway View . . . . . . Saving Solar Study Settings and Previewing Animations . . Creating Solar Studies - Summer and Winter Solstice . Previewing Solar Study Animation . . . . . . . . . . . Exporting Solar Studies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exporting the Study as AVI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exporting a Study as PNG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Internal Plan Solar Study . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Internal Plan Study . . . . . . . . . . . . Re-orienting the Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mirroring the Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Orienting to True North . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rendering Interior Shadow Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rendering an Interior View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431 . 432 . 433 . 435 . 437 . 438 . 439 . 440 . 440 . 443 . 444 . 444 . 447 . 447 . 448 . 454 . 454

Chapter 12

Presentation Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 457
Adding a Floor Plan View to the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preparing a Floor Plan for the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Advanced Model Graphics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding the Floor Plan to a Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding an Elevation View to the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preparing the Elevation Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding the Presentation Elevation View to the Presentation Sheet . Adding Section Views to the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preparing a Section View for the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Shadows and Silhouettes to a Section View . . . . . . . . . Adding the Presentation Section to the Analytique . . . . . . . . . Working with a Presentation View Template . . . . . . . . . . . . Working in a Callout Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Cutaway Isometric Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Cutaway Perspective Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Annotating the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 458 . 459 . 460 . 462 . 466 . 467 . 469 . 471 . 472 . 476 . 478 . 481 . 484 . 491 . 492 . 499 . 503

Importing and Exporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 505 Chapter 13 Importing SketchUp Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 507
Importing a SketchUp Model as a Mass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 508 Creating a Building from Mass Faces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 510

Using Advanced Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 523 Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 525
Flat Curtain System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 525 Creating an Entrance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 525 Adding Mullions to the Curtain System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 536

viii | Contents

Curved Curtain System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding a Curved Curtain System . . . . . . . Adding a Custom Curtain Panel . . . . . . . . Adding Mullions to the Curved Curtain Panel Additional Curtain Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sloped Glazings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Storefront System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Curtain System by Lines . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. 539 . 539 . 541 . 544 . 548 . 548 . 550 . 552

Chapter 15

Roofs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 557
Creating Roofs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Extruded Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Gable Roof from a Footprint . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Roof with a Vertical Penetration from a Footprint . Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Shed Roof from a Footprint . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Slope Arrows to a Shed Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Aligning Roof Eaves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Mansard Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Low Slope Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Fascia, Gutters, and Soffits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Roof Fascia . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Gutters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Soffits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 557 . 557 . 562 . 565 . 567 . 571 . 572 . 574 . 576 . 578 . 586 . 587 . 588 . 590

Chapter 16

Area

Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 593

Using Area Analysis Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 593 Creating Area Schemes and Plans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 593 Creating Area Schedules and Color Fill Area Plans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 600

Chapter 17

Massing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 603
Using Massing Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Massing Elements to a Building Model . . . . . . . . . . Using Massing Tools to Cut Geometry from the Building Model . Using Swept Blends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Mass Family Files in a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating New Mass Family Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Loading and Placing New Mass Families . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Joining Mass Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Mass Elements with Design Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mass Elements in Design Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Building Components from Mass Elements . . . . . . . . . . Creating Walls by Picking Faces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Floors by Picking Masses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Mass Study Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Roofs by Picking Faces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Curtain Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Editing Elements Created from Massings . . . . . . . . . . . . . Controlling Mass/Shell Visibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 603 . 604 . 610 . 611 . 616 . 616 . 618 . 621 . 624 . 624 . 627 . 628 . 631 . 634 . 638 . 640 . 644 . 649

Chapter 18

Grouping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 653
Creating, Modifying, and Nesting Groups . Creating and Placing a Group . . . . Modifying a Group . . . . . . . . . . Nesting Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . Working with Detail Groups . . . . . . . . Creating a Detail Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 653 . 653 . 661 . 665 . 668 . 668

Contents | ix

Using Attached Detail Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 671 Saving and Loading Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 674 Saving and Loading Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 674

Chapter 19

Site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 677
Using Site Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Toposurface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Property Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Contour Visibility and Site Settings . Creating Topographic Subregions . . . . . . . . Grading the Toposurface . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding a Building Pad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Site Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tagging Site and Parking Components . . . . . Creating Parking Space Schedules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 677 . 678 . 684 . 689 . 690 . 698 . 703 . 706 . 710 . 713

Chapter 20

Sharing Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 717
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Worksharing in a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Understanding Worksharing Fundamentals . . . . . . . Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets . . . . Working Individually with Worksets . . . . . . . . . . . Using Worksets with Multiple Users . . . . . . . . . . . Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 717 . 718 . 718 . 722 . 726 . 729 . 734

Chapter 21

Creating Multiple Design Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 739
Creating Multiple Design Options in a Project . Creating the Structural Design Options . . Creating the Roof System Design Options . Managing Design Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 739 . 740 . 750 . 757

Chapter 22

Project Phasing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 761
Using Phasing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 761 Phasing Your Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 762 Using Phase-Specific Room Tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 768

Chapter 23

Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 771
Linking Building Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Linking Building Models from Different Project Files . Repositioning Linked Building Models . . . . . . . . Controlling Linked Building Model Visibility . . . . . Managing Linked Building Models . . . . . . . . . . . Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models . . . . . . . Acquiring and Publishing Coordinates . . . . . . . . Relocating a Project with Shared Coordinates . . . . . Working with a Linked Building Model . . . . . . . . Managing Shared Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scheduling Components of Linked Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 772 . 772 . 781 . 784 . 786 . 789 . 789 . 791 . 795 . 796 . 797

Customizing Project Settings and Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 801 Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 803
Modifying System Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 803 Modifying General System Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 803 Specifying File Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 805

x | Contents

Specifying Spelling Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Snap Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Project Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating and Applying Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating and Applying Fill Patterns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Controlling Object Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Line Patterns and Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Annotations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying Units of Measurement, Temporary Dimensions, and Detail Level Options . Modifying Project Browser Organization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Office Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Choosing the Base Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Project Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Loading and Modifying Families and Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Views and View Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Import/Export Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting up Shared and Project Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Named Print Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. 807 . 808 . 811 . 811 . 815 . 817 . 820 . 825 . 827 . 828 . 831 . 831 . 832 . 837 . 839 . 842 . 843 . 845

Contents | xi

xii

Getting Started

1

2

Introduction

1

This introduction helps you get started with the Revit Architecture 2009 tutorials and presents the fundamental concepts of the product, including:
■ ■ ■ ■

how Revit Architecture works. the terms used when working with the product. how to navigate the user interface. how to perform some common tasks in the product.

Using the Tutorials
In this lesson, you learn how to use the Revit Architecture tutorials, including where to find the training files and how to create a new Revit Architecture project from a template file.

3

The Contents tab of the Revit Architecture Tutorials window displays the available tutorial titles. Expand a title for a list of lessons in the tutorial. Expand a lesson title for a list of exercises in the lesson. NOTE You may find it helpful to print a tutorial to make it easier to reference the instructions as you work in Revit Architecture. The tutorials are also available in PDF format by clicking Help menu ➤ Documents on the Web in Revit Architecture.

Accessing Training Files
Training files are Revit Architecture projects, templates, and families that were created specifically for use with the tutorials. In this exercise, you learn where the training files are located, as well as how to open and save them.

Where are the training files located?
Training files, by default, are located in C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\RAC 2009\Training. Training files are grouped into 3 folders within the training folder:

Common: generic files often used to teach a concept. These files are not dependent on imperial or metric units. Common file names have a c_ prefix. Imperial: files for users working with imperial units. Imperial file names have an i_ prefix. Metric: files for users working with metric units. Metric file names have an m_ prefix.

■ ■

NOTE Depending on your installation, your training folder may be in a different location. Contact your CAD manager for more information. IMPORTANT Content used in the tutorials, such as templates and families, is located and accessed in the training files location. Although this content may be installed in other locations on your system, all content used in the tutorials is included in the training files location to ensure that all audiences access the correct files.

What is a training file?
A training file is a Revit Architecture project that defines a building information model and views of the model that are used to complete the steps in a tutorial. Many tutorials include a Training File section that references the training file to be used with the tutorial. In other tutorials, you create a project from a template, rather than opening an existing training file. Open a training file 1 Click File menu ➤ Open. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog, scroll down, and click the Training Files icon. 3 In the right pane, double-click Common, Imperial, or Metric, depending on the type of training file.

4 | Chapter 1 Introduction

4 Click the training file name, and click Open. Save a training file 5 To save a training file with a new name, click File menu ➤ Save As. In many cases, the work you do in a project during a tutorial exercise becomes the starting point for the next exercise. In many tutorials, you create a project or modify an existing project, save the changes, and use the saved version of the file to begin the next exercise or lesson. 6 Complete the information in the Save As dialog:

For Save in, select the folder in which to save the new file. You can save the file in the appropriate Training Files folder or in another location. Note where you save the file so you can open it for additional exercises as required. For File name, enter the new file name. A good practice is to save the training file with a unique name after you have made changes. For example, if you open c_settings.rvt and make changes, you should save this file with a new name such as c_settings_modified.rvt. For Files of type, verify that Project Files (*.rvt) is selected, and then click Save.

Create a project from a template 7 To create a project from a template, rather than using an existing training file, click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project.

8 In the New Project dialog, under Create new, select Project. 9 Under Template file, verify the second option is selected, and click Browse.

Accessing Training Files | 5

12 Select DefaultMetric. Each template contains predefined settings and views appropriate for the corresponding building type. ■ ■ How does Revit Architecture 2009 keep things updated? A fundamental characteristic of a building information modelling application is the ability to coordinate changes and maintain consistency at all times. Building information modelling (BIM) delivers information about project design. The following are examples of these element relationships: ■ The outside of a door frame is a fixed dimension on the hinge side from a perpendicular partition. Templates are available for specific building types: commercial. In mathematics and mechanical CAD.10 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. What is meant by parametric? The term parametric refers to the relationships among all elements of the model that enable the coordination and change management that Revit Architecture provides. review the Revit Architecture templates. 11 In the Choose Template dialog. the floor or roof remains connected. the numbers or characteristics that define these kinds of relationships are called parameters. Revit Architecture collects information about the building project and coordinates this information across all other representations of the project. hence. drawing sheets. and customize the project as necessary. and Revit Architecture coordinates that change through the entire project. the parameter is one of association or connection.rte. The Revit Architecture parametric change engine automatically coordinates changes made anywhere—in model views. 2D and 3D view. You begin with the fundamental concepts on which Revit Architecture is built. Windows or pilasters are spaced equally across a given elevation. If you move the partition. and how to perform some common tasks in the product. You learn the terminology. the parameter is not a number but a proportional characteristic. click Training Files. every drawing sheet. The edge of a floor or roof is related to the exterior wall such that when the exterior wall is moved. If the length of the elevation is changed. 13 Click OK. and click Open. In the Revit Architecture model. construction. What is Revit Architecture 2009? The Revit Architecture platform for building information modelling is a design and documentation system that supports the design. In this case. and open Metric\Templates. and phases when you need it. In this case. and schedule is a presentation of information from the same underlying building model database. and residential. schedules. and schedules required for a building project. scope. For most tutorial projects. These relationships are created either automatically by the software or by you as you work. You do not have to intervene to update drawings or links. how to navigate the user interface. 6 | Chapter 1 Introduction . This capability delivers the fundamental coordination and productivity benefits of Revit Architecture: Change anything at any time anywhere in the project. and plans. you learn what Revit Architecture is and how its parametric change engine benefits you and your work. the operation of the software is parametric. the door retains this relationship to the partition. the relationship of equal spacing is maintained. Understanding the Basics In this lesson. drawings. you will use the default template. sections. quantities. As you work in drawing and schedule views. the hierarchy of elements.

They display in relevant views of the model. and 2D detail components are view-specific elements. dimensions. windows. and reference planes are datum elements. doors. without requiring entry of data that is unimportant to your design. ■ There are 2 types of view-specific elements: ■ Annotation elements are 2D components that document the model and maintain scale on paper. Understanding the Basics | 7 . The first is the capturing of relationships while the designer works. Revit Architecture uses 3 types of elements: ■ Model elements represent the actual 3D geometry of the building. programming is not required. and cabinets are model components. walls. View-specific elements display only in the views in which they are placed. and keynotes are annotation elements. grids. Model components are all the other types of elements in the building model. tags. filled regions. For example. Revit Architecture immediately determines what is affected by the change and reflects that change to any affected elements. For example. levels. dimensions. and roofs are model elements. For example.When you change something. Revit Architecture elements are designed to be created and modified by you directly. Details are 2D items that provide details about the building model in a particular view. Examples include detail lines. Revit Architecture uses 2 key concepts that make it especially powerful and easy to use. They help to describe or document the model. windows. For example. For example. Element behavior in a parametric modeler In projects. you can define new parametric elements in Revit Architecture. Datum elements help to define project context. ■ This implementation provides flexibility for designers. If you can draw. The result of these concepts is software that works like you do. ■ ■ There are 2 types of model elements: ■ Hosts (or host elements) are generally built in place at the construction site. For example. tags. doors. walls and roofs are hosts. and 2D detail components. The second is its approach to propagating building changes.

However. section views. elevation views. you must be in a section or elevation view. schedules.In Revit Architecture. Often. To place levels. Project: In Revit Architecture. by locking a dimension or aligning 2 walls. for example. Having only one file to track also makes it easier to manage the project. Revit Architecture makes it easy for you to alter the design and have changes reflected in all associated areas (plan views. 8 | Chapter 1 Introduction . some terms are unique to Revit Architecture. The project file contains all information for the building design. views of the project. In other cases. top of wall. Understanding Revit Architecture 2009 terms Most of the terms used to identify objects in Revit Architecture are common. Understanding the following terms is crucial to understanding the software. You create a level for each known story or other needed reference of the building. such as roofs. and drawings of the design. the project is the single database of information for your design—the building information model. for example. floors. The context is determined by how you draw the component and the constraint relationships that are established with other components. they are implied by what you do and how you draw. you can explicitly control them. you add Revit Architecture parametric building elements to the design. Level 2 work plane cutting through the 3D view with the corresponding floor plan next to it Element: When creating a project. By using a single project file. the elements determine their behavior largely from their context in the building. and so forth). from geometry to construction data. you use levels to define a vertical height or story within a building. Most often. first floor. This information includes components used to design the model. families. industry-standard terms familiar to most architects. Revit Architecture classifies elements by categories. Level: Levels are infinite horizontal planes that act as a reference for level-hosted elements. you do nothing to establish these relationships. and ceilings. and types. or bottom of foundation.

You can determine the set of properties and the graphical representation of the family. In the steps that follow. Navigating the User Interface | 9 . A family groups elements with a common set of parameters (properties). For example. the behavior of a wall is predefined in the system. the user interface is labeled. Revit Architecture uses standard Microsoft® Windows® conventions.Category: A category is a group of elements that you use to model or document a building design. However. dimensions. making it easy to understand what each button represents. The Revit Architecture window is arranged to make navigation easy. Categories of annotation elements include tags and text notes. such as default aligned or default angular style for dimensions. Instance: Instances are the actual items (individual elements) that are placed in the project and have specific locations in the building (model instances) or on a drawing sheet (annotation instances). roofs. such as a A0 title block or a 910 x 2110 door. learning Revit Architecture is much easier. specifically its clear user interface. Family: Families are classes of elements in a category. ■ ■ ■ Revit Architecture predefines the set of properties and the graphical representation of system families. You can use the predefined types to generate new types that belong to this family within the project. A type can also be a style. categories of model elements include walls and beams. Different elements in a family may have different values for some or all properties. They are not available for loading or creating as separate files. ceilings. If you have used any other product that follows these conventions. Even the toolbar buttons are labeled. A type can be a specific size of a family. although the doors that compose the family come in different sizes and materials. For example. For example. floors. 6-panel colonial doors could be considered one family. you can create different types of walls with different compositions. identical use. but the set of properties—their names and meaning—is the same. System families include walls. In the following illustration. Navigating the User Interface One of the advantages of Revit Architecture is its ease of use. you navigate and become familiar with the user interface. and levels. System families can be transferred between projects. ■ Type: Each family can have several types. and similar graphical representation. Families are either component families or system families: ■ Component families can be loaded into a project and created from family templates.

the Level 1 floor plan view is the default open view. In addition. The Title Bar 2 Place the cursor at the top of the user interface. By default. click (New).Start a new project 1 On the Standard toolbar. new projects are numbered consecutively until saved with a new name. 10 | Chapter 1 Introduction . TIP The view opened and the view names are dependent on the template on which the project is based. This creates a new project based on the default template. The title bar contains the name of the project and the view that is currently open.

the shortcut key for Zoom in Region is ZR. The Options Bar 5 Click Modelling menu ➤ Wall.The Menu Bar 3 The menu bar across the top of the window includes standard menu names such as File. You can control the visibility of the toolbars and turn the text labels on or off using the Window ➤ Toolbar menu. and View. The Toolbar 4 Click Window menu ➤ Toolbar. There are several toolbars across the top of the window beneath the menu bar. Click View menu ➤ Zoom. The Options Bar is context-sensitive and varies depending on the tool or selected component. You can use the toolbar grips to resize and move each toolbar. Another time-saving tool for selecting commands is to place the cursor in the drawing area and right-click. The toolbar buttons represent common commands. Edit. depending on the function you are performing and what is currently selected. you type the required key combination to perform the command. Navigating the User Interface | 11 . For example. While working in the drawing area. The bar beneath the toolbars contains wall design options. which are listed on the menu. A shortcut menu displays a list of available commands. Many of the commands have shortcut keys.

The Type Selector 7 The drop-down list on the left side of the Options Bar is called the Type Selector. You can use the Type Selector in 2 ways: ■ You can select an element type before you add the element to the building model.6 Click Modelling menu ➤ Door. select the drop-down list to see the walls that are available. The Type Selector is a context-sensitive drop-down list. When you select the Door tool. the door type that displays in the Type Selector is the door type that will be added to the building model. The design options available on the Options Bar are now applicable to doors. 12 | Chapter 1 Introduction . For example. 8 Click Modelling menu ➤ Wall. The list of elements in the Type Selector is identical to the elements listed in the Families branch of the Project Browser under the respective category. On the left side of the Options Bar. a door type is specified. when you add a door. 9 In the Type Selector. the Type Selector displays a list of doors available in the project. Select the drop-down list to view the list of doors.

Navigating the User Interface | 13 . containing buttons grouped by function. you can select any element and then change its type using the Type Selector. The Design Bar is located on the left side of the interface. The Design Bar 10 Click Window menu ➤ Design Bars. immediately below the Type Selector. The Show Design Bars dialog displays.■ You can use the Type Selector to change an element type after it has been added to the building model. In the drawing area. You can control which tabs display by selecting them in the Show Design Bars dialog. There are 10 tabs in the Design Bar.

14 | Chapter 1 Introduction . In the Project Browser. select Views (all). ■ ■ ■ ■ Basics tab: commands for creating most basic building model components View tab: commands for creating different views in the project Modelling tab: commands to create model elements Drafting tab: commands for adding annotation symbols and creating sheet details for construction documents Rendering tab: commands for creating rendered images Site tab: commands for adding site components and producing site plans Massing tab: commands for creating conceptual designs with masses Room and Area tab: commands for making room and area schemes and plans Structural tab: commands for adding structural components to the project Construction tab: commands for creating construction industry information ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ To access the commands in a tab.11 Click OK. TIP You can control the visibility of each tab by right-clicking on the Design Bar and selecting the tab from the shortcut menu. Each tab contains frequently used commands that are also available from the menu bar. click the tab in the Design Bar. The respective commands display on the Design Bar. The Project Browser 12 To the right of the Design Bar is the Project Browser.

scroll through the sorting options available for the Project Browser.You can use the Project Browser to quickly manage the views. and group name. delete. and rename views. and groups. You can also drag and drop from the browser into the drawing area. To open a view. The browser is dockable. 3D). sheets. reports. families. so you can reposition it by dragging the Project Browser title bar to a new location. families. The browser is organized by view type (floor plans. Expand or collapse the browser list by clicking the + or – next to the name. family category (doors. elevations. ■ ■ ■ 13 In the Type Selector. walls. windows). double-click its name. making it easy to add a family or group to the project or add a view to a sheet. Navigating the User Interface | 15 . and groups of your current project: ■ ■ Right-click in the browser to add. schedules.

" TIP The tooltip that displays is identical to the note in the status bar. 17 Place the cursor near the center of the drawing area. Do not click. the status bar provides information regarding what you should do next. you can instantly change the sorting within the Project Browser by selecting the scheme in the Type Selector. In this case. After creating a browser organization scheme. click Cancel. The cursor displays as a pencil. The Status Bar 16 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Wall. You can create and modify Project Browser organization schemes for views and sheets. 16 | Chapter 1 Introduction . it tells you to "Click to enter wall start point. In the bottom left corner of the window. 15 In the Browser Organization dialog.14 Click Settings menu ➤ Browser Organization.

After you are familiar with these tasks. 19 Place the cursor over the elevation symbol arrow on the left side of the drawing area. search for all instances of a word or phrase on the Search tab. TIP You can control the level of tooltip assistance using Settings menu ➤ Options. Help is available online at all times during a Revit Architecture session. When attempting to select a specific element in a complex or crowded view. and then click a specific menu command or button for help. and notice that the highlighted element switches to the main elevation symbol. context-sensitive help is available for many parts of the user interface. Revit Architecture 2009 Help 21 Click Help menu ➤ Revit Architecture 2009 Help. rest the cursor over the Toolbar button until the tooltip displays. If no Help button displays. When you place the cursor over an element. Performing Common Tasks in Revit Architecture In this exercise. The elevation symbol consists of two parts: the main symbol and the elevation directional arrow (a triangle). It highlights when the cursor is over it. You can select a topic on the Contents tab. or save commonly used pages on the Favorites tab. you can use the status bar and TAB to switch between elements and select the desired element.18 On the Design Bar. in conjunction with tooltips. click on the Standard toolbar. press F1 for help. You can access context-sensitive help in the following ways: ■ Dialogs: Many dialogs include Help buttons. Performing Common Tasks in Revit Architecture | 17 . you learn to perform some of the common Revit Architecture tasks that are included in the tutorials. regarding selected elements in a view. Elevations : Elevation : Elevation 5. You can use this tri-pane. The status bar also provides information. it will be easier to work in Revit Architecture and focus on the lessons of each tutorial. click Modify to end the Wall command. HTML help window to search for information and quickly display it to read or print. find a keyword on the Index tab. ■ ■ ■ 22 Close the Revit Architecture Help window. 20 Press TAB. notice that the name of the highlighted element is Views : Elevation : West. Click the Help button. In the status bar. Make sure you place the cursor over the elevation directional arrow. press F1 for context-sensitive help. There are several tools that help you find information. and the topic specific to the dialog opens. Tooltips: To see tooltips. You can also press SHIFT+F1. Windows: From any window. Toolbar: From the toolbar. it highlights and the status bar displays the element name. In addition. You can control the status bar visibility from the Window menu.

18 | Chapter 1 Introduction . Understanding how to adjust the view will make it easier to work with the building model in the window. you open a training file and practice adjusting the view with the different zoom commands. and open Metric\m_Cohouse. In the following steps. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. The zoom menu lists the zoom options and their shortcut keys. The 3D isometric view displays: 3 Click View menu ➤ Zoom to display the zoom menu. the view zooms out from the building model. In the drawing area. 4 Click Zoom Out (2x). you may be asked to zoom to a specific region of a view or to zoom to fit the entire building or floor plan in the view. click Training Files. click the drop-down menu next to the Zoom command to display the zoom options.rvt. 5 On the View toolbar. you are instructed to use a zoom command to adjust the viewable area in the window.Use zoom commands to adjust the view In the tutorials. For example. 1 Click File menu ➤ Open. There are several ways to access zoom options.

7 Click in the drawing area. Revit Architecture uses the largest snap increment that represents less than 2mm in the drawing area. Zoom is also available using SteeringWheels. the view zooms in on the selected area.NOTE Clicking the Zoom icon itself activates the Zoom In Region command. click The Full Navigation wheel displays in the drawing area. 10 To display SteeringWheels. When you release the mouse button. the wheel follows the cursor around the drawing area. click Settings menu ➤ Snaps. NOTE As you zoom in and out. The view of the building model is sized to fit the available window. and type the shortcut ZR to zoom in on a region. 8 Click the upper left corner and lower right corner of the region to magnify. 11 Move the cursor over the Zoom wedge of the wheel so that it highlights. you can roll the wheel to zoom the view. SteeringWheels provide 2D and 3D navigation tools. . 9 If you use a mouse that has a wheel as the middle button. If you do not have a wheel mouse. The cursor displays a pivot point for the Zoom tool. this is referred to as a crossing selection. use a zoom menu command or the toolbar option to zoom out. Performing Common Tasks in Revit Architecture | 19 . on the View toolbar. 6 Click Zoom To Fit. 12 Click and hold the mouse button. As you move the mouse. The cursor becomes a magnifying glass. Use the wheel mouse to zoom out to see the entire building again. To modify or add snap increments.

and then using the Zoom tool again. expand Views (all). 20 | Chapter 1 Introduction . 15 To exit the wheel. display along the ends. expand Floor Plans. To define settings for SteeringWheels. zoom in on the upper-left corner of the floor plan. and tops of selected walls in elevation views and 3D views. bottoms. and select the wall. display at the ends of selected lines and walls in a plan view. press ESC. and click Help. moving the wheel to the desired location. 14 Drag the cursor up or right to zoom in. You can change the pivot point by releasing the mouse button. Cnst. click Settings menu ➤ Options. as shown. Resize elements using drag controls 16 In the Project Browser. called drag controls. Notice the small blue dots that display at both ends of the wall. 17 Type ZR. When drawing or modifying a building model. For more information about SteeringWheels. Similar controls. These are the drag controls. Small blue dots. referred to as shape handles. it is important to understand how to adjust the size of components in the drawing area.13 Drag the cursor down or left to zoom out. click the pull-down menu on the Full Navigation wheel. and double-click 2nd Flr. and click the SteeringWheels tab.

for example. click (Move). and click again to specify the ending position. 22 Click the lower-left endpoint of the table. 19 Click in the drawing area to deselect the wall. and the lower-left corner is placed at the move endpoint. as shown. Move an element 20 Scroll the view down so you can see the couch and table in the floor plan. Some commands. require 2 clicks to complete the command. and on the Tools toolbar. 23 Click next to the lower wall. click to specify the starting position. such as Move and Copy.18 Click and drag the left control. The table moves down. 21 Select the Craftsman02 table. you want to move the table closer to the wall. After selecting the element to move. In this case. Performing Common Tasks in Revit Architecture | 21 . moving the cursor to the left horizontally. to lengthen the wall.

click the Undo command. Move. All commands are canceled up to and including the selected command. on the Standard toolbar. 28 Click in the drawing area to start the line. Undo commands 25 On the Standard toolbar. 24 Select the plant.Another way to move an element is to select it and drag it to a new location. End a command 27 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click the drop-down menu next to (Undo). In this example. and click again to end it. Some commands. 26 On the Undo menu. Notice that the Lines command is still active and you could continue to draw lines. The table and plant are returned to their original locations. All changes you make to a project are tracked. and drag it on top of the table. such as the Lines command. stay active or current until you choose another command or end the current command. or press CTRL+Z. select the second item in the list. click Lines. Selecting the second item in the list will undo the last 2 actions. 22 | Chapter 1 Introduction . The Undo command allows you to reverse the effects of one or more commands. NOTE To quickly undo the previous action. you decide that you prefer the table in its original position.

click Modify.29 To end the command. Performing Common Tasks in Revit Architecture | 23 . use one of the following methods: ■ ■ ■ Choose another command. On the Design Bar. 30 Close the file without saving your changes. Press ESC twice.

24 .

Express Workshop 25 .

26 .

Insert a Callout and create a model-based detail view. as well as some of the best practices that help you efficiently design and develop an architectural building project. 27 . When you have finished these tutorials. Use detail components to define an assembly. but for training purposes. with parametric tags that automatically track and display detail view and drawing sheet placement. this tutorial uses imperial units only. NOTE Revit Architecture is available in both imperial and metric versions. Each tutorial demonstrates tools you can use to complete tasks that are common to an overall workflow. you will create building assembly details by performing the following tasks: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Create a drafting view detail by importing a DWG file. Creating Details with Revit Architecture Revit Architecture provides intuitive native tools to create. Use keynotes to annotate a detail. highlighting powerful features that are integral to the most common architectural workflows. In this tutorial. detail. In Revit Architecture. and annotate building assemblies.Express Workshop 2 The Express Workshop tutorials focus on specific areas of functionality. you will have a basic understanding of the design and documentation tools. Create a detail callout and reference a drafting view. or referenced as a drafting view. details are either based upon the geometry of the building model as a detail view. illustrating how building components work together.

create a reference callout. and reference a drafting view. If necessary. you will create a drafting view.rvt. 3 In the Scale list. Create a drafting view 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 28 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop .Create a Detail with Imported DWG Data In this exercise. ■ Open Common\Express Workshop\Detailing folder\c_express_workshop_details_start. scroll until the folder is displayed. verify 1 1/2''= 1'-0'' is selected. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. for Name. In the left pane of the Open dialog. import a DWG detail. click Drafting View. and click OK. enter Window Head Detail. click Training Files. 2 In the Drafting View dialog.

).In the Project Browser. drag the cursor to draw a rectangle around the Level 1 section area. and click Open. 10 In the drawing area. as shown. The drawing area is still blank. 9 Type ZR. select Black and White. The model zooms out. displaying the extents of the detail. 5 In the left pane of the Import/Link CAD Formats dialog. located directly to the left of the drawing area. 6 In the Colors field list.dwg. Create a Detail with Imported DWG Data | 29 . Import a drawing detail 4 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ CAD Formats. click Training Files. the new drafting view is listed under Drafting Views(Detail-Sim. which is the keyboard shortcut for the Zoom in Region command. Create a reference callout 8 In the Project Browser. The cursor displays as a magnifying glass. NOTE The drafting view you have created is a container into which you have not yet added any graphical information. and navigate to Express Workshop\Detailing\ew_window_head_detail. expand Sections (Wall Sections) view heading and double-click Wall Section 1. 7 Type ZE to zoom out to the extents of the model.

30 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . 12 On the Options Bar. and in the Scale list. click 2 points to specify opposite corners of the callout bubble as shown. click Callout. Select Drafting View: Window Head Detail. select Detail View: Detail. 11 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 14 In the drawing area. 13 Click Reference other view.The view displays to the specified area. to activate the view selection list. select 1 1/2” = 1’-0”. in the Type Selector.

3 In the drawing area. select Detail View: Detail. and in the Scale list.rvt. 16 Close the Window Head Detail drafting view. adjust the detail view display settings. Model-Based Detailing | 31 . 2 On the Options Bar. click 2 points to specify opposite corners of the callout bubble as shown. select Callout. in the Type Selector. you will create a detail view defined by a callout. Create a detail view 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. The model view displays the linked Window Head Detail drafting view in the drawing area. select 1 1/2” = 1’-0”.The reference callout is created. Model-Based Detailing In this exercise. linked to the Window Head Detail drafting view 15 In the drawing area. c_express_workshop_details_start. Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. double-click the reference callout tag head. Next you will create a detail view and add detail components. and then add detail components and detail groups to build a model-based detail assembly.

and click Rename. 8 On the Design Bar. click Modify to clear the selection. under Detail Views (Detail). 4 Right-click Detail 0. and click OK. Adjust display settings 9 In the Project Browser. under Detail Views(Detail). select the Wall Base 1 Callout to expose grips. 5 In the Rename View dialog. enter Wall Base 1.The new detail view is listed as Detail 0 in the Project Browser. 7 Drag the grip closest to the Callout Head as shown. double-click Wall Base 1. for Name. 32 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . 6 In the drawing area.

Model-Based Detailing | 33 . This is the view crop region.The region you defined with the callout bubble displays in the drawing area. 11 Click the boundary of the view crop region to display grips for both regions. bordered by a solid line. 10 Move the cursor over the boundary of the view crop region to display a dashed line indicating the boundary of the annotation crop region.

for Display Model. allowing you to see the difference between the model geometry and any added detail components. and click OK. 16 Click OK. 34 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . under Graphics. The model elements in the view display as half-tones. click (Hide Crop Region).12 Drag the annotation crop region grips as shown. 14 In the drawing area. The view and annotation crop regions are no longer visible. right-click. 15 In the Element Properties dialog. 13 On the View Control Bar. and click View Properties. select As Underlay.

Detail components and detail groups Model based details are created using the model geometry as a background. 19 In the Type Selector. type 1' 6''. 17 On the View Control Bar. 20 In the drawing area. Directly above the drawing area. Model-Based Detailing | 35 . the Type Selector displays the detail components that are pre-loaded in the model. click the lower-right endpoint of the Basic Wall:Exterior .Brick on Mtl. 21 Move the cursor up slightly. NOTE The detail component is created passing outside of the crop region. and press ENTER. typical details can easily be placed. By including the model geometry at a medium or fine level of detail. 18 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. By grouping detail components. click Detail Components. the endpoints of the detail components may become visible. Stud. select Gypsum Wallboard-Section : 5/8”. If the crop region is enlarged. on the Options Bar. verify that the view detail level is set to Medium. you can accurately place detail components based on the model component assembly.

36 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . as shown. click Modify to end the command. ■ ■ ■ ■ Plywood-Section1 : 3/4" Rigid Insulation-Section : 1'' Resilient Flooring-Section Resilient Topset Base-Section: 6'' 24 On the Design Bar. Typical construction details have been saved as assemblies by grouping detail components. 26 Right-click Typical 8" Metal Stud NLB Wall. and click Create Instance. expand Groups ➤ Detail. 27 Click the top-left corner of the 12'' concrete foundation wall to place the detail.22 Press ESC twice to end the command. 23 Using the same method. 25 In the Project Browser. add the following detail components as shown.

Typical Standard Brick Base Model-Based Detailing | 37 . ■ ■ Typical 12" Foundation. select the same top-left corner of the 12'' concrete foundation wall used previously. 29 Repeat this process for the following: NOTE For each detail group.4" Slab detail.28 Press ESC to end the command.

Continue to work in the Wall Base 1 view of the training file you used in the previous exercise. and under Keynote Table. 3 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Keynoting In this exercise you will keynote detail components by element. and Free End are selected. The text files can then be referenced into a Revit Architecture project. For more information about customizing a keynote database. Revit Architecture provides a link to a central text file that contains a master list of keynote definitions. for Full Path. c_express_workshop_details_start. In the next exercise. 38 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . and format keynote styles. 4 On the Options Bar. map keynotes by material.rvt. see Modifying a Keynote Database on page 319. or instructions within a construction documentation package. Keynoting detail components 1 Click File menu ➤ Keynoting. select Keynote Tag : Keynote Text.30 Type ZE to zoom the view extents. and verify that Horizontal. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. consistent means of identifying building assembly components. or create a series of text files specific to a building or project type. and open Common\Express Workshop\Detailing\c_express_workshop_RevitKeynotes_Imperial_2004. click Keynote ➤ Element. in the type selector. special notes. You can customize this list. click Browse. you will add and modify keynotes to further develop the detail. Leader.txt. click Training Files. The Keynoting feature in Revit Architecture provides a simple.

9 Press ESC to end the command.5 In the drawing area. 8 Click to place the tag. If no value has been specified. a question mark displays. 7 Click to place the leader arm. Either move the text inside. 6 Click the brick detail component to place the arrow end of the leader. use the same method to place the keynotes as shown. TIP Annotation that intersects or is outside of the annotation crop region will not be visible in the drawing area. If you would like to complete keynoting the detail. place the cursor over Bricks-Section : Standard . Keynoting | 39 .3/8" Joint to display the value specified for the keynote parameter in the element’s properties. or increase the size of the annotation crop region.

12 Click to place the leader arm. 11 Click the batt insulation component to place the arrow end of the leader. 15 Select 07 21 00. 16 In the drawing area. Format keynote styles The keynotes previously inserted were text only. navigate to Division 07_Thermal and Moisture Protection ➤ 07 21 00_Thermal Insulation.Map keynotes by material 10 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. and click OK. click Keynote ➤ Material. 40 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . 14 In the Keynotes dialog.A4_R-19 Batt Insulation. draw a selection box that encloses the entire detail. You will now change all keynotes to keys only. 13 Click to place the tag.

19 In the Type Selector. legends. Click OK. Creating Drawing Sheets with Revit Architecture | 41 . select Keynote Tag : Keynote Number . Only the keynotes remain selected. Creating Drawing Sheets with Revit Architecture Revit Architecture provides the tools you need to develop drawing sheet documents. Click Check None. 17 On the Options Bar.All items within the selection display in red.Boxed. The keynotes show the CSI Masterformat division key values. click 18 In the Filter dialog: ■ ■ ■ (Filter Selection). and schedules that communicate design requirements and project-specific information. You have completed the first Express Workshop lesson. Select Keynote Tags. 20 Press ESC to clear the selection. You can specify title blocks and place multiple views. Creating Details with Revit Architecture.

you will create a sheet. Update drawing sheet and project information. update the project information element properties. this tutorial uses imperial units only. Add and modify a keynote legend on a drawing sheet. Add and modify a drawing list on a drawing sheet.NOTE Revit Architecture is available in both imperial and metric versions. Place views on drawing sheets. but for training purposes. Add labels to a title block. 42 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . you will perform the following tasks: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Create a drawing sheet. and modify and update the project sheet title block. In this exercise. In this lesson. Project Sheet Layout The Project Browser displays all sheets added to a Revit project and all sheet views and schedules placed on specific sheets.

Create a new sheet 1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Sheet. select E1 30 x 42 Horizontal : Working Drawing. click Training Files.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt. Project Sheet Layout | 43 . 2 In the Select A Title Block dialog. If necessary. the new drawing sheet is listed under Sheets(all). In the Project Browser. Enter sheet specific information You can enter sheet-specific information either directly on the sheet. a title block is a container that includes placeholders for sheet-specific and project-specific information. The sheet name and sheet number can also be entered in the Sheet Title dialog. and the title block is displayed in the drawing area. or in the element properties of the title block. ■ Open Common\Express Workshop\Sheet Layout\c_express_workshop_sheet layout_start. 3 Click OK. scroll until the folder is displayed. In Revit Architecture. accessed from the sheet in the Project Browser.

enter A602. 9 In the Project Browser. under Sheets(all). 10 In the Sheet Title dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Number. and click Rename. 6 In the Title Block. To zoom in and out. 5 In the drawing area. click Modify to clear the selection. drag the cursor to draw a rectangle. when you want to change the area of the model you are working on. as shown: The display zooms to the specified area. You can also zoom and pan using the mouse wheel. 44 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . double-click Checker. In this tutorial.Unnamed. For Name. which is the keyboard shortcut for the Zoom in Region command. or in the project information Element Properties dialog. right-click A602 . 7 Enter K. Then. enter ZR and specify a zoom region to zoom in.4 Type ZR. NOTE The sheet number and sheet name are automatically updated in the Project Browser and the title block. Click OK. roll the wheel. Enter project information Project-specific information is data common to all project sheets. The cursor displays as a magnifying glass. enter Sections/Details. you can enter ZE to zoom out. 8 On the Design Bar. Smith and press ENTER. hold down the wheel and drag. It can be entered or changed directly on a sheet. To pan.

The Family Editor opens. in the Type Selector. select the title block. Smith. Project Sheet Layout | 45 . 18 On the Options Bar. 16 Type ZR. 15 In the Options Bar. enter Freighthouse Flats. 13 Click OK. enter Design Development. select Text : 1/8''. For Project Name.11 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Information. For Project Status. and verify that 19 Position the cursor at the left side of the top row as shown. enter J. 12 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Project Issue Date. and zoom in on the top of the Revision Schedule. For Client Name. 17 On the Design Bar. (Left) is selected. Modify the title block family 14 In the drawing area. displaying the E1 30 x 42 Horizontal title block. 20 Click and type Project Status. click Edit Family and click Yes to open E1 30 x 42 Horizontal for editing. click Text. enter 4/10/2008.

21 On the Design Bar. and verify that (Top) are selected. in the Type Selector. click Label. select Label : 3/16''. 46 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . and click OK. under Category Parameters. as shown. 29 On the Design Bar. 26 In the Edit Label dialog. click Modify to exit the command. 23 On the Design Bar. (Left) and 24 On the Options Bar. and click. 27 Select Wrap between parameters only. add Project Issue Date parameter. as shown. select Project Status and click the parameter under Label Parameters. to add 28 Using the same method. enter Project Issue Date below Project Status. 22 Using the same method. 25 Position the cursor in the middle of the row as shown. click (Load into Project).

for Name. place and modify a keynote legend. click Training Files. you will create. representing the view or schedule. Project Detail Sheet Layout As views and schedules are placed onto a sheet. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog.Project. to a drawing sheet. 3 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Keynote Legend. Next you will create. for Full Path. and open Common\Express Workshop\Sheet Layout \c_express_workshop_RevitKeynotes_Imperial_2004. The title block is updated in the Freighthouse Flats project. 4 In the New Keynote Legend dialog. In this exercise. a viewport displays. by adding a detail view that contains keynotes. and under Keynote Table. select Override parameter values of existing types. enter Keynote Legend . Project Detail Sheet Layout | 47 .txt. and add a keynote legend and a detail view to a sheet. The viewport can be accessed and edited directly from the sheet.30 In the Reload Family dialog. click Browse. Create a keynote legend 1 Click File menu ➤ Keynoting. and click Yes.

clear Show Headers.5 In the Keynote Legend Properties dialog. 48 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . under Sheets (all). TIP Double-click the column dividers to expand the columns to fit the text. expand Legends. 6 Expand the column widths to see all of the information. on the Appearance tab. as shown. under Text. The drawing sheet is displayed in the drawing area. Add a keynote legend 7 In the Project Browser. and click OK.Project to the lower-left detail area on the drawing sheet. and drag Keynote Legend . 8 In the Project Browser. double-click A601 .Sections/Details.

Project Detail Sheet Layout | 49 . Modify the keynote legend display 10 Type ZR. and zoom in on the Keynote Legend . 12 Select the left control of the schedule and drag it to the right to expand the left column width as shown. 11 Select the keynote schedule on the sheet.9 Press ESC to clear the selection.Project as shown. 13 Expand the right column width as shown and press ESC to clear the selection. The keynote legend is visible. displaying all keys and corresponding text for keynotes contained within the project.

18 In the Element Properties dialog. expand Detail Views (Detail). not keynotes. select Filter by sheet. and click OK. under Legends. as shown. 15 In the Project Browser. 17 In the Keynote Legend Properties dialog. enter Keynote Legend .14 Zoom out and pan to include the keynote legend and the detail box to the right as shown. at the bottom of the Filter tab. 16 In the Element Properties dialog. for View Name. Add a detail view 20 In the Project Browser. and click OK. 50 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . for Filter. NOTE The detail components of the Window Head detail contained on this sheet do not appear in the Keynote Legend because they are annotated with text. right-click Keynote Legend .Sheet.Project. The Keynote Legend is now blank. click Edit. and drag Wall Base 1 to the detail area between the keynote legend and the Window Head detail on the drawing sheet. 19 Click OK twice. and click Properties. the keynote legend has no keynote text or key values to display. Because no views containing keynotes have been placed in the drawing sheet.

Add a view without a view title 1 In the Project Browser. as shown. Project Title Sheet Layout | 51 . you will add a view without a view title to the Title sheet drawing. and then add and update a Drawing list. The view remains selected. The Title sheet is displayed in the drawing area. expand Views (all) ➤ 3D Views.The keynote legend is automatically updated. Project Title Sheet Layout In this exercise. under Sheets (all). 2 In the Project Browser. displaying all keynote text and key values present on the drawing sheet. double-click A0 . and drag Title Sheet view to the upper-left area of the drawing sheet. The view title with line displays below the viewport.Title Sheet 1.

and zoom in on the drawing list. drawing lists are schedules that display all drawing sheets that have the Appears In Drawing List parameter selected within the sheet’s element properties. expand Schedules/Quantities. by default. and drag Drawing List to the upper-right area on the drawing sheet. You can specify text attributes for view titles. 5 In the Project Browser. sheets that are external to Revit Architecture can also be included in the drawing list. The Title Sheet view title is no longer displayed. As part of a construction document set. Press ESC to clear the selection. 3 In the Type Selector. as shown. 6 Type ZR. define the information to include in a view title. Add a drawing list In Revit Architecture. or omit view titles from sheets. 52 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . 4 Press ESC to clear the selection. The drawing list remains selected. Revit Architecture displays a view title. select Viewport : Viewport /no title mark. You can also define these attributes for individual view titles on sheets.When you place a view on a sheet.

9 In the Element Properties dialog.Ceiling Plans. and click OK. right-click the selected sheets. select A602 . Project Title Sheet Layout | 53 .Update the drawing list 7 In the Project Browser. under Identity Data. 8 In the Project Browser. The drawing list display is updated. You have completed the Express Workshop lesson Creating Drawing Sheets with Revit Architecture.Sections/Details and select A801 . including only sheets that contain views. while pressing SHIFT. clear Appears In Drawing List. under Sheets (all). NOTE The selected sheets do not have any views placed on them. and click Properties.

54 .

Developing Your Designs 55 .

56 .

Dimensions and other positional constraints define relationships between elements in the model. As you develop the building design. For example. You create a retail building that contains 5 floors. You set up the project and create the structural frame and foundation of the building. a wall or a column can be constrained to the grid. you learn how to use parametric design techniques. a curtain wall. After the beginning exercises. If the grid moves. a central service core. it is good practice to test the constraints. As you complete the exercises in this tutorial. This project will serve as the structural model and will then be linked into an architectural project for further development. When you constrain Revit Architecture elements to each other. 57 . the wall or column will move with it. Using this Tutorial In the first 6 exercises of this tutorial. and a sloped roof over one corner of the building.Creating a Building Information Model 3 In this tutorial. or “flex the model” by changing parameters. Parametric design allows you to incorporate design intent into your model. you create a Revit Architecture project from a template provided with the software. you learn how to constrain elements and how to test the parametric relationships between them. you learn how to design a building information model (BIM) in Revit® Architecture 2009.

click New. under Projects. The template file has an RTE extension and provides default project units. and click Browse. 58 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . you design inside the elevation markers. select Project. To create the project file. Create the project from the default template 1 In the drawing area. and customize the project as necessary. The new project opens. Each marker corresponds to an elevation view in the project: North. and open Metric\Templates\DefaultMetric. 5 Click OK. Each template contains predefined settings and views appropriate for the corresponding building type. You can access these views by double-clicking the elevation marker arrow. click Training Files. you will use the default template. under Create new. from the product library. such as a door or window.subsequent exercises instruct you to open a project training file. views. West. you load any required family type that is not in your project. verify that the second option is selected. The project is stored as a single file. Revit Architecture templates are available for specific building types: commercial. so there is no dependency on previously completed exercises. and residential. with an RVT extension. or by opening the view in the Project Browser. In views that display elevation markers. and settings. For this project.rte. The project training files have pre-loaded family types and represent the correct state for beginning the exercise. 2 In the New Project dialog. 4 In the left pane of the dialog. Creating the Project In this exercise. you create the project that will store the retail building design and different views of the building. you use a template that is provided with the software. 3 Under Template file. In practice. construction. East. levels. South. notice four elevation markers. but contains no geometry. In the drawing area in the right pane. Explore the project with the Project Browser 6 On the left side of the drawing screen. locate the Project Browser.

heights. These views are customizable: you can rename them. delete. then expand Floor Plans. will be accessible from the Project Browser. you will want to save your work frequently. notice the Legends. and Revit Links branches that display at the same level as Views (all). You can also add views to your project as you develop and document the building information model. As you design and document your building model. Level lines are finite horizontal planes that you use to define the levels (stories) of your building information model. 15 For Save as type. As you complete the exercises in this tutorial. 10 In the Project Browser. Ceiling Plans. as well as change their names. expand Views (all). verify that Project Files (*. verify that Level 1 displays as bold. Save the project 11 Click File menu ➤ Save As. duplicate them. Creating the Project | 59 . created by the template. double-click Metric. only a single floor plan view and a single ceiling plan view are created. 16 Click Save.rvt) is selected. You use levels to position Revit Architecture elements in your building model. content and building model reports. Sheets (all). You can add. and delete them. schedules. sheets. such as schedules and legends. double-click South. enter Revit Retail Building. the software title bar contains the name of the software and Project 1. and Elevations (Building Elevation). NOTE If you create a project without a template.The Project Browser contains a hierarchical tree structure that you use to navigate the views. The bold type indicates that the Level 1 Floor Plan view is the current view. 12 In the left pane of the Save As dialog. 13 In the file window. reflected ceiling plan views. click to scroll down to the bottom of the list. view the Save reminder interval. The views that display under each of these branches of the tree are the default floor plan views. You can control how often the software will prompt you to save your work. 14 For File name.Floor Plan: Level 1 to indicate that the Level 1 Floor plan view is current. Families. and on the General tab. Click Settings menu ➤ Options. and elevation views created in the project by the template. 7 If necessary. Notice that in the top left corner of your screen. and other properties. and families in your project. This folder contains the Revit Architecture files that you need to complete all of the Revit Architecture tutorials. display in the south elevation. change their properties. the view you see in the drawing area. and duplicate levels. 8 Under Floor Plans. Two level lines. 9 Under Elevations (Building Elevation). Schedules/Quantities. and click Training Files. Groups.

expand Elevations (Building Elevation). 3 Double-click the Level 1 text. as well as the corresponding floor and ceiling plan views to create foundation and entry levels for the building. TIP Because views list alphabetically or sequentially in the Project Browser.17 Proceed to the next exercise. After you modify the two default levels. When you begin designing. to each other. 2 Zoom to the level names at the right end of each level line. You change the names of the 2 default levels. or constrained. so that when one level moves. you will use the levels to position building elements such as walls. you modify the 2 default project levels and add 5 levels to the project to define the 7 vertical levels of the building model. enter 00 Foundation. You learn how the levels are locked. and double-click South. and press ENTER. Adding Project Levels on page 60. expand Views (all). You also change the elevation of the two levels lines to the appropriate heights for the first two stories of the building. 60 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . and windows within the building model. the other levels move and change with it. Modify the two default project levels 1 In the Project Browser. you add the remaining 5 levels using different techniques. Adding Project Levels In this exercise. doors. it is good practice to precede the level names with level numbers so the corresponding views will list sequentially in the Project Browser.

and press ENTER to specify the start point of the new level line. By default. 9 Click the 01 Entry Level elevation height. click Level. The Design Bar provides tabs that provide quick access to many commands. 5 In the Project Browser. notice the Level 1 floor and ceiling plan views are now named 00 Foundation. Adding Project Levels | 61 . and press ESC. The command that you use to add levels is on the Basics tab. and click Basics. verify that (Draw) and Make Plan View are selected. not all the tabs are visible. Use the Draw option to add a level 10 Zoom out so you can see both levels in the view. enter 01 Entry Level. Next. a temporary dimension displays the height between 01 Entry Level and the cursor position. 15 Move the cursor to the left endpoint of the 01 Entry Level line. If it does not. right-click.4 Click Yes to rename the corresponding floor and ceiling plan views. (You do not have to click to specify the start point. 12 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. a corresponding ceiling plan and floor plan view will be created. view the Design Bar. enter 0. Notice that the bar above the drawing area changes to display new tools and settings. verify that Ceiling Plan and Floor Plan are selected. place the cursor anywhere on the Design Bar. 6 Click the 00 Foundation elevation height. 7 Double-click the Level 2 text. 13 On the Options Bar. When you add the new level. 11 On the left side of the Project Browser. you add a level by drawing it above the 01 Entry Level. which should display by default.) 17 Move the cursor horizontally until a dashed blue line displays alignment with the two existing levels. under Floor Plans and Ceiling Plans. The Options Bar displays appropriate options and settings for every command that you select on the Design Bar. and press ENTER. and press ENTER. click to specify the endpoint of the level line. and press ENTER. and click OK. 16 Enter 3750. 3750 mm above 01 Entry Level. As you move the cursor. enter -1800. and then move it up. 8 Click Yes to rename the corresponding views. 14 Click Plan View Types. This is the Options Bar.

click (Pick Lines). 20 Click Yes to rename the corresponding level and view. click Level. add 3 levels 3750 mm apart above 03 Level. and rename the corresponding views. right-click Level 3. click Modify to end the command. verify that you have created an 02 Level ceiling plan view as well. the associated floor and ceiling plan views are not created. Notice that the name of the level line changes to 02 Level in the current view. and for Offset. enter 3750. 19 Click OK. 25 Click to place the level line. click Rename.18 In the Project Browser. 24 Place the cursor on the 02 Level line. 21 In the Project Browser. 26 Press ESC. using a different option. Next. you add another level. 3750 mm above the 02 Level line. under Floor Plans. 62 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . or on the Design Bar. 23 On the Options Bar. 27 Rename the level 03 Level. Copy levels only when you want to use them for reference. A dashed blue line indicates where the new level will be drawn. and move it slightly upward. If you create a level by copying it. Use the Pick option to add a level 22 On Design Bar. Name the levels: ■ ■ ■ 04 Level 05 Roof Garden 06 Roof NOTE Do not use the Copy command to create the levels. Add the remaining 3 levels 28 Using either the Draw or Pick option. and enter 02 Level.

The lock icon that displays indicates that the levels are vertically constrained. Verify that the levels are vertically constrained with locks before you continue on to the next exercise. the levels are no longer constrained. all the levels move. as shown. Notice that by moving the top level. Adding Project Levels | 63 . Creating a Column Grid on page 64. 31 Clear the box to redisplay the level symbol on the right side only. 33 Proceed to the next exercise. and zoom to the left endpoint of the line.Display a symbol at the left endpoint of the 06 level line 29 Click the 06 Roof Level line. Test the level constraints 32 Select and drag the blue circle to the right or left to shorten or lengthen the level lines. If you select a level and click its lock. 30 Select the empty blue box on the left to display a level symbol at the left endpoint of the line. and you can move them independently.

you ensure a level of accuracy early in your design. until it is positioned under the top elevation marker. select (Draw). 64 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . you place the building columns at the grid line intersections. double-click 00 Foundation. Create vertical column grid lines 1 In the Project Browser. so that if the roof elevation changes. On the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. In a later exercise.Creating a Column Grid In this exercise. specify a start point for the grid line. When the grid is complete. you change the columns to round hollow steel columns. Notice that the status bar prompts you to specify a start point for the grid line. Move the cursor up. 4 Draw the first vertical grid line: ■ ■ In the lower left corner of the drawing area. you create a structural grid in the 00 Foundation floor plan view of the building model. you constrain the column heights to the roof level. click Grid. 3 On the Options Bar. ■ The number 1 displays inside the bubble at the endpoint of the completed grid line. By using the grid to control the placement of columns. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Modify. the column height changes as well. In the following exercise. and specify the grid line endpoint.

You can change what displays in grid bubbles at any point in your project. and press ENTER. On the Options Bar. click Grid. and click to place the line. and click to place the line. Creating a Column Grid | 65 . enter 7500 mm. Next. for Offset. and for Offset. and then place the cursor on the grid line to display the location of the second grid line. 6 Offset a second vertical grid line from the first grid line: ■ On the Design Bar. On the Options Bar. use the Pick option to create another vertical grid line by offsetting it a specific distance from the existing line. Click to place the grid line. ■ ■ Move the cursor to the right side of the grid line.5 Change the grid bubble number to a letter: ■ ■ Double-click 1 inside the grid bubble. and click to place the line. Enter A. enter 4500 mm. Move the cursor to the right side of grid line B. click (Pick Lines). for Offset. ■ 7 Add 3 vertical grid lines: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Options Bar. Move the cursor to the right side of grid line D. Move the cursor to the right side of grid line C. enter 7500 mm.

11 On the Design Bar. Move the cursor horizontally past the vertical grid line E. add horizontal grid lines to complete the grid. click (Draw) and specify an Offset of 0 mm. 12 Using the Pick option and offsets of 7500 mm and 4500 mm. 66 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . click Grid. click Grid. specify a start point for the grid line just below grid line A. Create horizontal grid lines 9 Draw the first horizontal grid line: ■ On the Design Bar. 10 Change the grid bubble letter to 1. as shown.8 Press ESC. and specify the grid line endpoint. ■ ■ On the upper left side of the grid. On the Options Bar. ■ The letter F displays inside the bubble at the endpoint of the completed grid line.

select grid lines C and 3. 18 On the Design Bar. 17 Click all 4 lock icons on the dimension string to lock the grid bay spacing. click the drawing area to the right of the line to place the dimension. 21 Press ESC twice. 22 While pressing CTRL. 19 Dimension the horizontal grid lines as shown. Creating a Column Grid | 67 . 20 Click the 4 lock icons to lock the horizontal grid dimensions. select each vertical grid line just under its grid bubble. 15 Starting with grid line A. 14 On the Options Bar. click (Aligned). 16 When you select the last vertical grid line. click Dimension.Dimension the grid and lock the grid spacing 13 On the Design Bar. The locks ensure that the grid spacing cannot be accidentally changed. click Dimension.

(Element Properties). You must select the grid lines to redisplay the pins. enter 6. 30 In the Type Properties dialog. until it is closer to grid line A. 32 Click OK twice. select grid line 5. and press ESC. At the bottom endpoint of the grid line. The Center Segment parameter can be set to not display or to display in a different loaded line pattern. The following steps illustrate how to create a grid family type with a gap in the middle of the display. click Edit/New. and on the Options Bar. and press ESC. click Modify. enter 50mm. If necessary. At the left endpoint of the grid line. Two pins display on the grid lines. By pinning these central grid lines. click Duplicate. click the value for Center Segment. and select None. and click OK. 31 For End Segments Length. click and drag the blue circular grip to the right. 25 Adjust the grid: ■ ■ On the Design Bar. ■ Create a custom grid family type In some cases. Additional parameters in this dialog allow you to control the display of the grid line in both plan and section/elevation views. building geometry requires the need for grid lines to contain breaks or display differently. 68 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 29 In the Name dialog. adjust the position of the dimension strings by selecting and dragging them.5mm Bubble with Gap. and select grid line A. The pins are hidden. click .23 Click Edit menu ➤ Pin Position. ■ ■ Select grid line 1. click Modify. you ensure that the grid remains centered and the building will grow out from the center if its grid dimensions are changed. until it is closer to grid line 5. 28 In the Type Properties dialog. 24 Press ESC. click and drag the blue circular grip up. 26 In the drawing area. 33 On the Design Bar. click 27 In the Element Properties dialog.

39 In the Type Selector. select UC-Universal Column : 305x305x97UC. and on the Options Bar.34 Draw a selection box to select all of the grid lines. select Grid : 6. click Finish. 42 Verify that all the grid lines are selected (red). and press ESC. ■ 41 While pressing CTRL. select Grid : 6. and in the Type Selector.5mm Bubble with Gap. Select and change all grids to use the newly created family type. Creating a Column Grid | 69 . click Modify. 40 On the Options Bar: ■ Select Height and 05 Roof Garden. 36 On the Design Bar. The original continuous grid lines are restored. Add columns to the grid 38 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. 35 In the Type Selector. select all of the grid lines. click Structural Column. click (Grid Intersection). For Place By.5mm Bubble. 37 Select the grid lines again.

double-click 01 Entry Level. 47 Enter 9000.Columns that span from the 00 Foundation level to the 05 Roof Garden level are added at the grid line intersections of the column grid. 43 Press ESC. select 01 Entry Level. and unlock it. click (Undo) twice to restore the original locked grid dimension. create a 3D perspective view with a camera in which to better view the columns. 44 Select the dimension string between grid line A and B. You want to view the columns as if you were walking toward them. click Camera. 46 On the Options Bar. and press ENTER. Create a 3D perspective view of the building 50 In the Project Browser. Next. and then select the dimension value between grid lines A and B. and click to specify a point beyond the last horizontal grid line to place the camera. 45 While pressing CTRL. 53 Place the camera and select its target point: ■ Zoom to the lower right corner of the column grid. 52 On the Options Bar. If it is unlocked. 49 Select the dimension string and verify that it is locked. lock it. select grid line A. for From. under Floor Plans. 70 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . click Activate Dimensions. 48 On the Standard toolbar. The columns move to the new location at the intersection of the grid lines. 51 On the View tab of the Design Bar.

■ Move the cursor next to grid bubble A. and click to place the target point of the camera. The view frame is highlighted in red and its grips display. 54 Zoom out and resize the view by moving the frame grips until you can see all of the columns. Creating a Column Grid | 71 . The 3D perspective view created by the camera displays.

Right-click 3D View 1. and click OK. expand 3D Views. under Views (all). When you finish adding beams. and then copy them to subsequent levels. and click Rename. enter To Building. 72 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . The current view. ■ ■ 56 Save the drawing. displays in bold under 3D Views. 57 Proceed to the next exercise. You begin by adding beams to the 01 Entry Level floor plan. you add beams to build the structure of the building model.55 Name the view: ■ In the Project Browser. In the Rename View dialog. Adding Beams on page 72. you change the height of the columns so they extend to the 06 Roof level. named 3D View 1 by default. Adding Beams In this exercise.

6 In the Type Selector. double-click To Building to view all of the beams. click Finish. The view is currently set to Coarse. 3 Click the Detail Level icon . 4 Click Medium. A flyout menu displays the level of detail in which you can display the elements in the current view. 9 On the Options Bar. click Beam. under Floor Plans. 7 On the Options Bar. the icon on the right side of the scale. 10 In the Project Browser. The View Control Bar offers graphical shortcuts to view settings and commands. select each grid line. which displays the structural elements in your view as single lines.Add beams to the first level of the building 1 In the Project Browser. verify that UB-Universal Beam : 305x165x40UB is selected. click (Create Beam On Grid). under 3D Views. 8 While pressing CTRL. 5 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. Adding Beams | 73 . double-click 01 Entry Level. The selected grid lines display as red. 2 At the bottom left corner of the drawing area. view the icons on the View Control Bar.

click (Default 3D View). 17 In the Select Levels dialog. 14 Select one of the beams. press and hold SHIFT. Notice that top level beams are not connected to the columns. click Modify. 16 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste Aligned ➤ Select Levels by Name. The default 3D view is a southeast isometric view with hidden lines. right-click. 12 On the View toolbar. select 02 Level. double-click 01 Entry Level.Copy beams from 01 Entry Level to levels 02 through 06 11 In the Project Browser. The beams that you copied from the 01 Entry Level are pasted onto each subsequent level of the building. NOTE The default 3D view is not available in a perspective or camera view. select 06 Roof. All of the beams attached to the columns display as red. and click Select All Instances. 15 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. under Floor Plans. 13 On the Design Bar. which only extend 74 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . and click OK.

and click Element Properties. under 3D Views. but it would only change the height of the single selected column. right-click. The columns now extend to the top level of the building. under Constraints. 25 In the Project Browser. view the Top Level parameter. and if necessary. 20 Click Cancel. 06 Roof. and click OK. select 06 Roof. 19 In the Element Properties dialog. 21 With the column selected. you specified their height to reach only the 05 Roof Garden level. under Instance Parameters. (Element Properties). When you created the columns. and click Select All Instances. Change the height of the columns 18 Select one of the columns. 22 On the Options Bar. for Top Level. resize the view to see the entire structure. click 24 Press ESC. Adding Beams | 75 . All of the columns display as red. right-click. 23 In the Element Properties dialog. double-click To Building. You could change this parameter to 06 Roof in this dialog to change the height of the column.to the 5th level. The parameter is set to 05 Roof Garden.

NOTE If you select the camera to resize the view. but you want to display them in less detail. The structural elements (columns and beams) display only as lines. as lines only. under Elevations. double-click South. You can view the columns and beams in the elevation. 27 At the lower left corner of the drawing area. Click Detail Level ➤ Coarse. 76 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 28 Save the drawing. on the View Control Bar: ■ ■ Click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. press ESC to exit the command before continuing. View the south elevation of the structure 26 In the Project Browser.

Adding Braces on page 77. 4 Click near the outer grid lines to place 8 elevation markers around the outside of the grid as shown. Adding Braces In this exercise.29 Proceed to the next exercise. click Framing Elevation. you add braces to the 4 corners of the building structure. under Floor Plans. verify that Attach to Grid is selected. you create 8 framing elevation views. 3 On the Options Bar. To better add the braces to the structure. double-click 00 Foundation. Each elevation marker aligns perpendicularly to the grid. and press ESC to end the command. Adding Braces | 77 . 2 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. Create framing elevation views 1 In the Project Browser.

11 Using the same technique. click to specify the start point of the brace. and click to specify the endpoint of the brace. double-click the elevation marker arrow. but when placed the braces are placed. 7 On the Design Bar. press ESC twice. 8 In the Type Selector. click Brace. visible offsets between the beam and the brace connection points displays. 9 Move the cursor to the left endpoint of the beam on 01 Entry Level. After you add the final brace. NOTE Do not copy or array braces. 78 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . The endpoints will display when you move the cursor over them. 6 Select the crop region (if necessary). NOTE Make sure you snap to the endpoints of the beams when adding braces to ensure proper connectivity in the building model. and when the endpoint snap displays. The associated framing elevation view displays. so that you can see vertical columns located on grid lines A and B. 10 Move the cursor diagonally to the right endpoint of the beam on 02 Level. verify that UB-Universal Beam : 305x165x40UB is selected.Add braces in a framing elevation view 5 On the bottom left side of the grid. You must place them one by one to establish the proper connections between elements. add 4 braces on the subsequent levels of the building as shown. and use the grips that display to adjust both sides of the view.

Adding Braces | 79 .Lower the height of the roof (06 Roof) and the 04 Level to test the connectivity 12 Double-click the 06 Roof level height. Make sure that you use the endpoint snap to connect the brace to the beams. delete it and redraw it. IMPORTANT If the brace does not move with the level. enter 18000 mm. and press ENTER. The height of the roof lowers.

click Add braces in another framing elevation view 15 In the Project Browser. and press ENTER. 80 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . (Undo) twice to restore the original level heights. under Floor Plans. 17 Add diagonal braces to the structure. but this time add them from right to left. enter 10000 mm.13 Double-click the 04 Level height. 14 On the Standard toolbar. double-click the framing elevation marker arrow. 16 On the bottom right side of the grid. double-click 00 Foundation.

23 In the Project Browser. enter 12000 mm. double-click 00 Foundation. open the 3D view and notice the change in the size. click Activate Dimensions. 22 Click the dimension value of the first vertical grid bay (the one that you unlocked). as shown in the 3D view below. Adding Braces | 81 . and click the lock that displays to unlock it. under Floor Plans.Add braces in the remaining views and test the connectivity of the building model structure 18 Add braces to the structure in the remaining framing elevation views. periodically open the 3D view to see that the braces are positioned as expected. and press ENTER. 19 In the Project Browser. 20 Select the dimension string between grid lines A and B. 21 Select grid line A. NOTE As you add braces. and on the Options Bar.

Test connectivity of the columns. 82 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 26 In the Project Browser. under 3D Views. grid size. (Undo) 3 times to restore the locked dimension. double-click South. 31 Save the drawing. Creating a Foundation In this exercise. and braces 27 Select one of the columns in the structure. lock it. under Floor Plans.24 In the Project Browser. The connected beams and braces resize as the columns move. and if necessary. Creating a Foundation on page 82. 29 In the Project Browser. 30 Select the dimension string of the first vertical grid bay. click and roof height. 25 Change the height of the 06 Roof level to 24000 mm. 28 On the Standard toolbar. double-click 00 Foundation. double-click {3D}. beams. and drag it away from the structure. you place isolated pile caps under the building columns to create a foundation system that distributes the building load to the ground. under Elevations. 32 Proceed to the next exercise.

2 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. expand Families. A warning displays. Creating a Foundation | 83 . 7 Select 2000 x 2000 x 900mm. 6 Expand M_Pile Cap-Rectangular to display the available pile cap types (sizes). 3 In the Revit dialog that displays. for Level. Verify that the pile cap family is loaded in the project 5 In the Project Browser. you add the pile caps in the 00 Foundation floor plan view. 10 Edit the 00 Foundation view range: ■ ■ ■ ■ Right-click in the view. click the intersection of grid line A and grid line 1. and click View Properties. 4 In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open Metric\Families\Structural\Foundations\M_Pile Cap-Rectangular. select Unlimited. You learn how to access the families that are stored in libraries included with software.rfa. click Yes to load a new structural foundation family. and how to load specific families into a project. Load a pile cap family 1 In the Project Browser. click Edit. and drag it to the drawing area. double-click 00 Foundation. under Extents. After you load the pile cap family. but the current depth of the view does not allow you to view it. Click OK twice. click Training Files. In the Element Properties dialog. for View Range. you must load the appropriate pile cap family into the project. under View Depth. The foundation pile cap now displays.Before you can add the pile caps. under Floor Plans. In the View Range dialog. The M_Pile Cap-Rectangular family displays in the tree. click Foundation ➤ Isolated. The pile cap has been added in the view. where you must adjust the view range before you can see them. 9 Close the warning dialog. and expand Structural Foundations. Add the first pile cap 8 At the top left of the grid. and press ESC twice.

84 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . under 3D Views. press ESC twice.Add pile caps to complete the foundation 11 Right-click the pile cap. 12 Select each grid intersection to add pile caps that form the foundation. 13 In the Project Browser. double-click {3D} to view the complete foundation. When the final pile cap is placed. and click Create Similar.

2 Select one of the columns. and brace families into the project. It is not available in a perspective or camera view. beam. and open Metric\m_RRB_update_structure. All columns in the building model display as red. and learn how to select and change multiple structural element types to refine the building structure. and click Select All Instances. right-click.rvt. 15 Proceed to the next exercise. and braces that you used to create the building structure. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog. under 3D Views. NOTE The default 3D view is the only 3D view in which the Select All Instances command is available.14 Close the file with or without saving it. Changing Structural Member Types In this exercise. you change the types of the columns. double-click {3D}. beams. You load new column. Change the column type 1 In the Project Browser. Changing Structural Member Types | 85 . click Training Files. Changing Structural Member Types on page 85.

select M_Round Bar: 75mm. 19 On the Design Bar. Change the beam type 5 Select one of the beams. select M_Round Bar : 25mm. the braces as well as the beams change. click (Element Properties). 11 In the Element Properties dialog. The brace type changes. 15 In the Project Browser.6X15. click Modify. click Edit/New. select the braces in the elevation one by one. click (Default 3D View). 7 On the Design Bar. 20 Open the other building elevations and change the braces to M_Round Bar: 75mm. 12 In the Type Properties dialog. This not the size that you want to use. and changing its size parameter. 13 In the Name dialog. Because the braces that you added were actually a beam type. you change the brace type. 18 In the Type Selector. for Type. 4 On the Design Bar. click Modify to view the new beam type in the building model. click Modify. 86 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model .9. although the framing elevation displays the braces as lines only. double-click Elevation 1-a.2X101. under Dimensions. and click OK. under Elevations (Interior Elevation). 9 In the Type Selector. The building model displays the round hollow columns. and click OK twice. enter 75mm.5CHS. select CHS-Circular Hollow Section-Column : 508x12. enter 75mm. 16 On the Design Bar. right-click. 10 On the Options Bar.3 In the Type Selector. click Modify. You need to create a new bar type by duplicating the 25mm bar type. 6 In the Type Selector. select M_HSS-Hollow Structural Section : HSS203. 17 While pressing CTRL. View the building model with the new structural element types 21 On the View toolbar. but it is the only size of its type currently available. In the following steps. and click Select All Instances. Change the brace type 8 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. click Duplicate. for d. 14 In the Type Properties dialog. click Brace.

Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. the structural model created in the previous exercises is linked to an architectural project containing site information. and click Open. the architectural file will be used to further develop the building information model.NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. After the files are linked.rvt. 3 Under Positioning. Use the Origin to Origin option to ensure proper alignment with the site in the architectural file. Linking the Structural Model | 87 . select Auto . In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt. 2 In the Import/Link RVT dialog. 22 Proceed to the next exercise. click Training Files. Link the structural model 1 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ Revit. and open Metric\m_RRB_architectural.Origin to Origin. Linking the Structural Model on page 87. Linking the Structural Model In this exercise. select m_RRB_structure_complete.

structural members. you use the copy/monitor function to place the correct levels into the host project. however. 5 On the Tools toolbar. select Multiple. click Copy. You use the Link option because it is likely that the structural model will change. it is also possible to design the structural components as part of the architectural model. Grids. The Copy/Monitor tool allows you to establish and monitor relationships between elements in a host project and linked projects. select the linked Revit model. select Levels 00 through 06.4 In the Project Browser. double-click South. under Elevations. The standard workflow when working with outside consultants is to link in the structural model. and walls could also be copy/monitored. After the link is established. click (Copy/Monitor). 6 In the drawing area. In this case. 88 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . and click Select Link. depending on the project. the host project is the architectural file and the linked project is the structural model. 8 On the Options Bar. while pressing CTRL. 9 In the drawing area. 7 On the Copy/Monitor tab of the Design Bar.

and click Delete. while pressing SHIFT. select 06 Roof (selecting all levels 00 through 06). click Finish. Create views for each of the new levels 14 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Floor Plan. delete the Level 2 floor plan.10 On the Options Bar. 11 In the Duplicate Types dialog. click Finish mode. 15 In the New Plan dialog. right-click Level 1. The 06 Roof floor plan opens. 12 Ignore and close any warnings that display. Delete existing views 17 In the Project Browser. Linking the Structural Model | 89 . Turn off visibility of the site elements To get the plans to display without the site information. 18 Using the same method. under Floor Plans. you turn off the visibility of the site elements from the Foundation view. for Floor Plan views. click OK. First. you create a view template and assign it to the new floor plans. 13 On the Design Bar. 16 Click OK.

19 In the Project Browser. and click Hide in view ➤ Category. double-click 01 Entry Level. 20 In the drawing area. click OK. and click OK. under Floor Plans. 22 Zoom to fit the drawing in the view. right-click. select Entourage: Stuart Hall 1 : Stuart Hall 1. under Floor Plans. 26 In the Project Browser. Create a template from the current view 23 Click View menu ➤ Create View Template from View. 24 In the New View Template dialog. enter Floor Plans. right-click. 25 In the View Templates dialog. 21 In the drawing area. 90 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . for Name. select the Topography : Surface. double-click 00 Foundation. and click Hide in view ➤ Category.

adjust the borders so that the entire building is visible. 28 In the Apply View Template dialog. 33 Click at the upper left of the grid. 32 Click in the road intersection at the bottom right corner of the building grid. under Floor Plans. under Names. 31 On the View tab of the Design Bar.Apply the view template to new views 27 Click View menu ➤ Apply View Template. Recreate the To Building camera view 30 In the Project Browser. click Camera. 34 In the 3D view that displays. Linking the Structural Model | 91 . double-click Site. and click OK. select Floor Plans. 29 Zoom to fit the plan in the view.

and open Metric\m_RRB_add_floors. expand 3D Views. stairs. and railings are also created from sketches. and click OK. right-click 3D View 1. enter To Building. and click Rename. click Training Files. such as roofs. you add floors to the 01 Entry Level through the 05 Roof Garden level of the building. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Adding Floors In this exercise. you learn some different techniques that you can use when sketching objects. 36 In the Rename View dialog. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Some other Revit Architecture elements.rvt.35 In the Project Browser. Adding Floors on page 92. NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. To create floors. 37 Proceed to the next exercise. In this exercise. 92 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . you must sketch them first in a Sketch Editor.

and then the first horizontal grid line. and elements in the current view display as gray. the 01 Entry Level floor will resize with it. and click above the first horizontal grid line to place the dimension. past the first vertical grid line. Adding Floors | 93 . At the top left corner of the grid. The exact dimensions of the sketched floor are not important because you resize it in the next steps. click Dimension. click Floor. 3 Place a dimension between the first horizontal grid line and the left floor edge: ■ ■ On the Design Bar. click (Rectangle). sketch a rectangular floor inside the extents of the grid. 2 Sketch the floor: ■ On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Move the cursor to the left. You are now in the Sketch Editor. under Floor Plans.Add the 01 Entry Level Floor 1 In the Project Browser. double-click 01 Entry Level. Notice the Design Bar now displays the Sketch tab. ■ 4 Dimension the space between the left floor edge and the first vertical grid line. Do not lock the dimension. Leave this dimension unlocked. If the grid changes size. click Lines. select the top floor line. On the Sketch tab. ■ ■ ■ Using a crossing window. On the Options Bar.

At the top left corner of the grid. Select the left floor edge and change the top dimension value to 300. and then press ESC. Enter 300. Move the cursor to the left dimension. 6 Resize the floor sketch by changing its dimensions: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Design Bar. select the top floor line.5 Dimension the bottom right corner of the grid. and change their values to 300 mm. click Modify. Move the cursor to dimensions at the bottom of the grid. The dimensions are not visible on the finished floor. ■ 7 On the Design Bar. and click the temporary dimension value. click Finish Sketch to create the floor. 94 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . Select and lock the dimensions. They display on the floor sketch. press ENTER. Do not lock the dimensions.

enter 1500mm. and on the Options Bar. dimension the space between the 02 Level floor and the grid as shown. you will add a floor to the 02 Level of the building model. You use the Pick option to create a floor from the 01 Entry Level floor geometry. 9 Because you do not need to modify the floor. The 02 Level floor sketch displays. under Floor Plans. Select the three remaining floor lines. and lock the dimensions. and for Offset. click Edit. On the Options Bar. This is how you could modify the floor if you needed to after creating it. on the Design Bar. Adding Floors | 95 . click Floor. The floor sketch and dimensions redisplay. ■ ■ Select the right vertical 01 Entry Level floor line. click (Pick Lines). using a different sketching technique. and press ESC. click Lines. 11 Sketch the floor: ■ ■ On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. ■ 12 At the top left corner of the grid. On the Sketch tab. double-click 02 Level. and move the cursor until the dashed blue line displays in the inside of the 01 Entry Level floor. Add the 02 Level floor 10 In the Project Browser. click Quit Sketch. IMPORTANT Make sure you select the 01 Entry Level floor lines and not the grid lines. Next.8 Select the floor.

19 Sketch a floor inside the 02 Level floor. double-click 03 Level. Click the locks to constrain the floors. 96 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . under Floor Plans. The 02 Level floor displays. and a lock icon displays. 16 On the Design Bar. and then select the top line of the 03 Level floor sketch. 23 Continue to align the remaining 3 floor sketch lines with the 02 Level floor. dimension and lock the space between the 02 Level floor and the grid. click (Align). click Lines. 18 On the Options Bar. click Finish Sketch. Add the 03 Level floor 15 In the Project Browser. 20 On the Tools toolbar. click Floor. click (Rectangle). The 02 Level floor is visible in the view. 21 Select the top 02 Level floor line. 22 Click the lock to constrain the 03 Level floor line to the 02 Level floor. The sketched floor line is aligned with the top 03 Level floor line. 14 On the Design Bar.13 At the bottom right corner of the grid. 17 On the Sketch tab. The cursor changes to 2 arrows to indicate that the Align tool is active.

select 05 Roof Garden. Adding Floors | 97 . double-click 01 Entry Level. Alternatively. and lock the edges. under Views ➤ 3D Views. and click OK. The 01 Entry Level floor is copied at the same location onto the 05 Roof Garden level. click Finish Sketch. dimension the space between 05 Roof Garden level floor and the grid. 30 In the Select Levels dialog. you could place the rectangular sketch on the 04 Level.24 On the Design Bar. and on the Options Bar. dimension the space between the 05 Roof Garden level floor and the grid. 35 On the Sketch tab. 34 At the bottom right corner of the grid. 32 Select the floor. 33 At the top left corner of the grid. under Floor Plans. double-click 05 Roof Garden. 27 Select the 01 Entry Level Floor. Lock the dimensions to constrain the floor. Click the lock icons that display next to the dimensions to constrain the 05 Roof Garden level floor to the grid. 29 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste Aligned ➤ Select Levels by Name. double-click {3D}. 31 In the Project Browser. View the floors in the 3D building model 36 In the Project Browser. click Finish Sketch. 28 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. 25 Repeat the previous procedure to create a floor on the 04 Level. under Floor Plans. and constrain the 04 Level floor to the 03 Level floor. click Edit. Copy and paste the 01 Entry Level floor to the 05 Roof Garden level 26 In the Project Browser.

and open Metric\m_RRB_add_roof. click to place the roof line. and press ENTER. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 5 Move the cursor over grid line E. To create the roof. You shape the flat roof of the roof garden to have a roof drain sloping to the center structural member under the roof. Add the roof 1 In the Project Browser. When a blue dashed line displays. and then move the cursor slightly to the right of the grid line. ■ ■ For Offset. click Lines. You sketch the footprint (perimeter) of the roof in a plan view.rvt. Adding a Roof In this exercise. You edit the section of the roof slab so it stays flat across the bottom of the roof slab. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Click (Pick Lines). you add a low slope roof over the roof garden on the building. 3 On the Design Bar. enter 1800 mm. 4 On the Options Bar: ■ Clear Defines slope.NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. click Training Files. 37 Proceed to the next exercise. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. double-click 06 Roof. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. 98 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . you use the Roof by Footprint option in Revit Architecture. Adding a Roof on page 98. under Floor Plans.

8 Select grid line C to place another roof line (blue line to the left). click to place the roof line. and when the blue dashed line displays. Adding a Roof | 99 . move the cursor slightly below the grid line. 9 Select grid line 3 to place the final roof line (blue line above).6 Select grid line 5. 7 On the Options Bar. for Offset. enter 300 mm.

select the roof. 100 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model .10 Press ESC. Select the lower portion of the roof line that you created from grid line E (the part you want to keep). 11 Trim the rooflines: ■ ■ On the Tools toolbar. Add the roof drain 13 In the drawing area. ■ 12 On the Design Bar. click Finish Roof. Continue to trim the lines until you complete the roof as shown. click (Trim/Extend). and then select the right portion of the roof line that you created from grid line 5.

16 Select the intersection of grid lines D and 4. and click to specify the section. click (Add new points to the slab shape). enter -100 mm. 19 Click above the top horizontal line of the roof. for Elevation. on grid D.14 On the Options Bar. click Section. Adding a Roof | 101 . The result is a roof slab which slopes down to a single point. click Modify. Create a section view 18 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and press ENTER. move the cursor down below the roof. 17 On the Design Bar. 15 On the Options Bar.

under Floor Plans. click Edit/New. Modify the roof structure 26 In the plan view. This command tiles the windows so the roof can be seen in section and plan views. 24 In the Project Browser. The variable check box allows the lower face of the roof to stay flat while the upper face follows the desired slope. click 27 In the Element Properties dialog. double-click 06 Roof. 21 Double-click the section head to open the section. click Modify. (Element Properties). 23 Click Window menu ➤ Close Hidden Windows. 29 In the Edit Assembly dialog. under Construction. select Variable. The design intent is to have the underside of the roof flat rather than sloped. 25 Click Window menu ➤ Tile. 28 In the Type Properties dialog. 30 Click OK 3 times. 102 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . select the roof. and on the Options Bar. for Structure [1].20 On the Design Bar. In section. click Edit. for Structure. 22 Zoom in to the upper left corner of the section. you see that the roof slab is sloped on both faces (upper and lower).

click OK. You select the upper edge of the roof around the perimeter to define the host sweep path. Only the family and the path of the sweep must be defined. Add swept fascias 36 On the View toolbar. click (Default 3D View). In this case. 41 Starting with the left front edge. 40 In the Type Selector. 35 Zoom to fit the floor plan in the window. select Fascia : Fascia .Roof Edge. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. Adding a Roof | 103 . and press DELETE. Delete the section view 32 In the floor plan. 37 If necessary. click Host Sweep ➤ Roof Fascia. moving counter-clockwise. Host sweeps are profile driven shapes. zoom in to the roof. click Modify. 34 Maximize the window for the 06 Roof floor plan. 38 In the 3D view.31 On the Design Bar. 39 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 33 In the warning dialog. on the View Control Bar. select each edge. select the section line. the correct profile and fascia have been defined beforehand.

you add a curtain wall. double-click To Building. Adding a Curtain Wall In this exercise.42 On the Design Bar. 44 Proceed to the next exercise. Adding a Curtain Wall on page 104. View the roof 43 In the Project Browser. click Modify. 104 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . so if you resize the grid. under 3D Views. the curtain wall resizes with it. You constrain the curtain wall to the grid. NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it.

In the left pane of the Open dialog. you copy an existing family type and change its name and parameters to create a new unique type. enter 600 mm. click Training Files. Under Horizontal Grid Pattern. under Floor Plans. For Level. click Wall. Adding a Curtain Wall | 105 . For Height. Under Vertical Grid Pattern. for Spacing. 7 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ (Element Properties). for Spacing. Click OK twice. 3 In the Type Selector. and click 4 In the Element Properties dialog. enter Retail Storefront.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.rvt. 9 Move the cursor over grid line 1 near its endpoint. For Offset. for Type. click to place the first curtain wall segment. select 05 Roof Garden. enter 1050 mm. When you duplicate a type. select 01 Entry Level. click 01 Entry Level. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Edit/New. select Curtain Wall : Storefront. and click OK. click Duplicate. Under Construction. 5 In the Type Properties dialog. Add curtain wall segments 1 In the Project Browser. enter 2100 mm. 10 When a blue dashed line displays. 6 In the Name dialog. for Join Condition. 8 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). and open Metric\m_RRB_add_curtainwall. The type is saved in the project. select Horizontal Grid Continuous. and move it slightly toward the building interior.

so they remain in the view. 15 On the View Control Bar. you can delete the dimensions. but opt to keep the constraints when prompted. click (Trim/Extend). double-click To Building. If the grid moves. and lock the dimensions. 13 On the Design Bar. under 3D Views. and trim each curtain wall segment. If you want to hide them. dimension both (opposite) corners of the curtain wall to the grid.11 Select the 3 remaining outermost grid lines to create 3 more curtain wall segments that are offset 600 mm from the grid lines toward the building interior. View the curtain wall 14 In the Project Browser. click Dimension. the locks ensure that the curtain wall moves with it. 106 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . Click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. verify the view settings: ■ ■ Click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. These dimensions are not in a sketch. Trim the curtain wall segments 12 On the Tools toolbar.

you replace 4 curtain wall panels with doors in the front of the building to create the main building entrance. Creating an Entrance on page 107.rvt. and open Metric\m_RRB_modify_curtainwall. Creating an Entrance In this exercise. You also modify the panels around the doors so they are solid rather than glass. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Creating an Entrance | 107 . click Training Files.NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. 16 Proceed to the next exercise. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.

under Views (all). 4 On the Model Categories tab. you want to change the view so only curtain wall panels and columns display. in the center of the 01 Entry Level. 6 Under Visibility. To better work with the curtain wall panels. as these usually represent internal pilasters. expand Elevations (Building Elevation). All the elements in the list are selected. 108 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . clear one element to clear all the elements. and double-click South. Do not select Columns.Modify the South elevation view 1 In the Project Browser. 3 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. and click None. click All. click Detail Level ➤ Medium. 7 Click OK. 8 Zoom in to the entrance area. 2 On the View Control Bar. select Curtain Panels and Structural Columns. 5 Under Visibility. under the element list.

double-click {3D}. Creating an Entrance | 109 . 17 In the Project Browser. click the pin to remove it from each of the panels. select Architectural Elevation. 15 Zoom so you can see the entire drawing. 16 On the View Control Bar. 12 With the panels selected. click Modify. in this case an architectural elevation. select System Panel : Solid. click Detail Level ➤ Medium. press and hold CTRL.9 On the Design Bar. 13 Click View menu ➤ Apply View Template. and click OK. If you select View ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 14 In the Apply View Template dialog. 18 On the View Control Bar. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. you see that the visibility of many of the model element categories that you cleared in a previous step are selected. 10 Select 1 panel. and select the other panels around the entrance as shown. The view template applies a collection of visibility graphics appropriate to the view it is named for. 11 When all 9 panels are selected. under 3D Views. in the Type Selector.

under 3D Views.19 In the Project Browser. under Elevations (Building Elevation). 20 In the Project Browser. 21 Zoom to the front of the building. 110 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . double-click To Building. 22 Move the cursor over the curtain wall mullion as shown. double-click South.

and press ESC to remove the grid lines as shown. Creating an Entrance | 111 . click Modify. 25 Select the mullion that you selected previously. 30 On the Design Bar. click Add or Remove Segments. select One Segment. 31 Select the newly created curtain wall panel (press TAB to cycle through selections).23 Press TAB until you are notified that you have selected a grid line. and unpin it. select M_Curtain Wall Sgl Glass. select another mullion to the right. 27 On the Options Bar. click Curtain Grid. 24 On the Options Bar. and click to select it. 32 In the Type Selector. 28 Select the center of the upper horizontal mullion. 29 Select the center of the upper horizontal mullion to the right. 26 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar.

37 Move the cursor over the bottom mullion. 112 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . and view the new entrance. and unpin it. 35 Zoom in to the front of the building. 34 On the View toolbar. press TAB until it is selected.33 Repeat for the next 3 panels. select it. 36 Zoom in to the first panel. click (Default 3D View).

Creating a Drop Ceiling In this exercise. you create a drop ceiling on the 01 Entry Level of the building. and 4th panels. NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. 3rd. and add an entrance to the north side of the building. remove the mullions from the 2nd. 40 Optionally. open the North elevation. 41 Proceed to the next exercise.38 Press DELETE. Use the same steps that you used to create the south entrance. Creating a Drop Ceiling on page 113. 39 Using the same process. Creating a Drop Ceiling | 113 .

under Graphics. 2 Zoom in to the lower right corner of the building. and open Metric\m_RRB_add_drop_ceiling. under Floor Plans. 5 Click OK. double-click 01 Entry Level. Display 02 Level as an underlay 1 In the Project Browser. click Training Files. 4 In the Element Properties dialog. select 02 Level.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and click View Properties.rvt. 114 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 3 Right-click in the view. for Underlay.

The cursor changes to a pencil. right-click Callout of 01 Entry Level. enter Display Area. 9 In the Project Browser. select the grip closest to the callout head. 7 Place the callout: ■ Specify a point above the top left column. and click Rename. and drag the grip down to position the callout head below the grid as shown. which indicates you must draw the callout. under Floor Plans. click Callout. 10 In the Rename View dialog.Create a callout 6 On the View tab of the Design Bar. ■ Move the cursor horizontally below the bottom right column. Creating a Drop Ceiling | 115 . and click to complete the callout. and click OK. 8 Select the callout.

Create a section 11 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 16 Select the section box. 15 Double-click the section marker to view the section. and drag the top grip down to display only 01 Entry Level and 02 Level. 12 Draw a section line. click Section. right-click. and click Flip Section. as shown. 116 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 13 Select the section line. 14 Press ESC.

27 On the Options Bar. Click (Rectangle). 18 In the Rename View dialog. 20 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Wall. For Loc Line. double-click 01 Entry Level. select Basic Wall : Interior . right-click Section 1. and click OK. 26 On the Design Bar. 24 On the Tools toolbar. Creating a Drop Ceiling | 117 . 21 In the Type Selector. Lock both alignments. Draw interior walls 19 In the Project Browser. and then specify a point near the intersection of grid lines D and 4 to draw a 5000 x 5000 mm square wall inside the grid lines. click Dimension. 22 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Draw). select Wall faces. and align the exterior faces of the right vertical wall and the bottom horizontal wall with the 02 Level underlay. select Finish Face: Exterior. under Floor Plans.17 In the Project Browser. for Prefer. ■ 23 Select the bottom corner of the overhead floor. 25 Press ESC twice.135mm Partition (2-hr). click (Align). enter Section Display Area. and click Rename. expand Sections (Building Section).

and lock the dimension.) 36 Press ESC twice. 35 Align and lock each ceiling line to the interior wall faces. select Compound Ceiling : 600 x 600mm Grid. Add a ceiling 30 In the Project Browser. double-click Section Display Area. and lock the dimension. 29 Dimension the space between the exterior face of the top horizontal wall and the grid. 32 In the Type Selector.28 Dimension the space between the exterior face of the left vertical wall and the grid. 31 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. double-click 01 Entry Level. under Sections (Building Section). you modify them to be bulkhead walls. (Press TAB to highlight the ceiling line or wall face before selecting. 34 Press ESC to exit ceiling mode. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe. 33 Click inside the newly placed walls to place a ceiling in that space. 37 In the Project Browser. Next. 38 On the View Control Bar. 118 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . Notice that the walls extend to the floor. under Ceiling Plans. click Ceiling.

for Base Offset. 40 Move the cursor over one of the walls. click to select it. 48 Attach the walls to the 02 Level floor: ■ Select one of the vertical walls above the ceiling. 42 In the Element Properties dialog. and press ESC. press TAB until the chain of walls is selected. 47 In the Project Browser. 43 On the Design Bar. click Modify. and click to select the walls. 45 In the Element Properties dialog. under Ceiling Plans. click Attach. under Sections. for Top/Base. enter 2700 mm. Select the 02 Level Floor. press TAB until you select the wall chain. 46 Press ESC. and click to select the walls. under Constraints. double-click Section Display Area. and click (Element Properties). enter 2700 mm.Make bulkhead walls 39 In the Project Browser. double-click 01 Entry Level. and click OK. ■ ■ The walls attach to the 02 Level floor. and click OK. under Constraints. 41 On the Options Bar. On the Options Bar. 44 Press TAB to highlight the ceiling. for Height Offset From Level. click (Element Properties). Creating a Drop Ceiling | 119 .

Rotate the ceiling grid 57 Select the center ceiling grid line. and click . under Ceiling Plans. under Construction. click (Rotate). click Cancel. click Edit/New. 51 In the Element Properties dialog. click Cancel. 120 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . for Structure. View the ceiling structure 50 Select the ceiling. 53 In the Edit Assembly dialog. view the ceiling structure. 52 In the Type Properties dialog. 55 In the Type Properties dialog. click Edit. 59 Move the cursor toward the top left corner of the grid. 56 In the Element Properties dialog. 58 On the Edit toolbar. for Type. 54 Click OK.49 In the Project Browser. double-click 01 Entry Level.

62 Select and drag the diagonal center grid line until it spans the corners of the ceiling grid. Creating a Drop Ceiling | 121 . and press ENTER. 61 Press ESC.60 Click. enter 45.

65 On the View Control Bar. NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. double-click To Building. copy the drop ceiling to the other building levels. click Shadows On. Creating Multi-Level Stairs on page 123. 67 Proceed to the next exercise.View the building in 3D with shadows 63 In the Project Browser. under 3D Views. 64 On the View Control Bar. click Shadows Off. 122 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 66 Optionally.

Creating Multi-Level Stairs In this exercise. and click to create a reference plane to the left. 3 On the Options Bar. double-click 01 Entry Level. click Ref Plane. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Creating Multi-Level Stairs | 123 . under Floor Plans. click ■ ■ (Pick Lines). Create the stair 1 In the Project Browser. and for Offset. and copy it to the 05 Level. 4 Draw 2 reference planes that you will use to locate the flight of stairs: Move the cursor over grid line C. click Training Files. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Move the cursor over grid line B. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. enter 1500 mm. you create multi-level stairs and a stairwell that span the levels of the building. You then cut an opening through the floors on each level. and click to create a reference plane to the right.rvt. and open Metric\m_RRB_add_stair. You create a flight of stairs and stairwell on the 01 Entry Level of the building.

Move the cursor vertically along the reference plane until the text below the stair flight displays an equal number of risers created and risers remaining. 7 Using the same method. 6 Select the left reference plane.5 On the Design Bar. click Stairs. click Modify. 9 Sketch the stair: ■ ■ Select the bottom endpoint of the right reference plane. You will create the stair in the area between grid lines B. and specify a point to create first stair flight. 8 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. and drag the model ends so the reference plane only displays between grid lines 2 and 3. C. 124 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . shorten the right reference plane. 2. and 3.

Move the cursor down. 12 In the Type Selector. ■ 14 Draw walls around the stair. select Basic Wall : Generic . click Wall. and specify a point.225mm Masonry. select Finish Face: Interior. The complete stair displays. with a message that 20 risers have been created and 0 remain. Creating Multi-Level Stairs | 125 . 10 On the Options Bar. and select the 2nd reference plane. including its handrails. 13 On the Options Bar: ■ For Loc Line.■ ■ Move the cursor horizontally to the left. click Finish Sketch to create the complete stair. Click (Rectangle). beyond the end of the stair. Draw walls around the stair 11 On the Design Bar.

select Wall faces. select the dimension value. Select the wall. Lock the dimension. 20 Dimension the distance from the bottom of the stair to the interior face of the bottom horizontal wall: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Options Bar. 126 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 17 Select the interior face of the top horizontal wall. Click Modify. Select the interior face of the wall. for Prefer. Select the bottom of the stair. align the 2 vertical side edges of the stair with the 2 vertical walls and lock the alignments. click Dimension.15 On the Tools toolbar. click Align. Make sure you select the stair and not the railing. 16 Move the cursor over the top horizontal outside edge of the stair. enter 1200 mm. press TAB until the stair edge is selected. and press ENTER. 18 Using the same technique. 19 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and specify a point away from the wall. and click to select it. and lock the alignment.

25 While pressing CTRL. Creating Multi-Level Stairs | 127 .21 Select the dimension. and press DELETE. The stair and walls move to the left. TIP To flip the door swing. clear Tag on Placement. 22 Click OK to delete the dimension. press the SPACEBAR before you place the door. Because the dimension is constrained. and drag it to the left to test the stair and wall constraints. 23 Select the stair. a warning displays. 27 In the Type Selector. 24 On the Standard toolbar. select both reference planes. click Add a door to the stairwell 26 On the Design Bar. select M_Single-Flush : 0915 x 2134mm. click Door. but leave the stair and wall constrained to each other. 29 Select the right side of the lower horizontal wall to place the door. and press DELETE. (Undo). 28 On the Options Bar.

Span the height of the building 31 While pressing CTRL. Click OK. (Default 3D View). and click ■ ■ 34 In the Element Properties dialog: Under Constraints. click Align. verify that Up to level: 05 Roof Garden is selected. 42 On the Options Bar: ■ Click Click (Draw). for Multistory Top Level. select 00 Foundation. For Top Constraint. 33 Select the stair. and move the cursor to spin the building model. You must cut an opening through the building to accommodate the multi-level stairs. 128 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . and click 32 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ (Element Properties). (Element Properties). but if you view the top level of the building. click 37 Press and hold the Orbit button. you can see that the stair railings penetrate the floors. click Modify. You can see that the walls and stairs span the vertical height of the building. select all 4 walls. for Base Constraint. Click OK.30 On the Design Bar. click 36 On the View toolbar. (SteeringWheels). select 05 Roof Garden. Create a shaft opening 39 In the Project Browser. ■ 43 Draw a rectangular shaft opening around the stairs. 44 On the Tools toolbar. 40 Zoom in to the stairs. Under Constraints. click Opening ➤ Shaft Opening. double-click 01 Entry Level. (Rectangle). under Floor Plans. 38 Press ESC to close the SteeringWheels. 41 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 35 On the View toolbar. 45 Align the top horizontal shaft sketch line with the top horizontal interior wall face and lock the alignment.

47 Align the bottom horizontal shaft sketch line with the bottom tread of the stair. and spin the building so you can 54 If necessary.46 Align the 2 vertical shaft sketch lines with the interior face of the 2 vertical walls. Look at the top of building and notice that the shaft is not cutting an opening. and lock the alignments. click see the roof. and click OK. Copy the door to multiple levels 49 Select the door. Creating Multi-Level Stairs | 129 . (SteeringWheels). 48 Click Finish Sketch to complete the shaft. 52 In the Select Levels dialog. on the View toolbar. click (Default 3D View). select 02 Level through 05 Roof Garden. 51 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste Aligned ➤ Select Levels by Name. View the shaft and stair 53 On the View toolbar. 50 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. and lock the alignment.

By offsetting the base. 62 Proceed to the next exercise. You learn how to access and modify the profile and height of the wall to create a decorative wall that extends past the height of the 06 Roof level. ■ 58 On the View toolbar. enter 300 mm. NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. and click 57 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ (Element Properties). and click OK. (Default 3D View). double-click 01 Entry Level. for Base Offset.55 In the Project Browser. 130 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . click 59 On the View toolbar. click 60 Spin the building so that you can see the shaft opening. select Up to Level: 06 Roof. Creating a Wall with a Non-Uniform Height on page 130. Under Constraints. 61 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Southwest. you create a wall on the 05 Roof Garden level. The shaft opening will cut through any level it touches. For Top Constraint. 56 Select the shaft. you prevent it from cutting through the 01 Entry Level floor. (SteeringWheels). under Floor Plans. Creating a Wall with a Non-Uniform Height In this exercise.

select 06 Roof. under Graphics. for Underlay. double-click 05 Roof Garden. and click OK.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Add a basic wall to the 05 Roof Garden level 1 In the Project Browser. 2 Right-click in the view. In the left pane of the Open dialog. under Floor Plans. Creating a Wall with a Non-Uniform Height | 131 . 4 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and click View Properties. click Training Files. click Wall.rvt. and open Metric\m_RRB_wall_profile. 3 In the Element Properties dialog.

225mm Masonry. click Edit Profile. Modify the profile of the wall 10 Select the wall. 16 On the Design Bar. and on the Options Bar. The exact placement is not important. 9 Click the lock that displays to constrain the 2 elements. 14 Select the 3750 mm vertical dimension value.5 In the Type Selector. click Lines. click Remove Constraints. and click Open View. 15 In the error dialog. and press ENTER. click . You must draw the wall from left to right to position it on the correct side of grid line 3. enter 9750. 12 Zoom in to the top right area between the C and E grid lines. 6 Draw the wall above the edge of the roof shown in the underlay. click (Align). select Basic Wall : Generic . 132 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 8 Select the floor on the right side of the wall. 13 Select the top sketch line for the wall. 11 In the Go To View dialog. and click (Fillet arc). 7 On the Tools toolbar. select Elevation: South. 17 On the Options Bar. and then select the right face of the wall.

and click (Circle). as shown: 19 On the Options Bar. and select a third point within the corner to create a rounded corner. Creating a Wall with a Non-Uniform Height | 133 . select a point on the profile to the left of the corner. select a point on the vertical sketch line below the corner. as shown: 21 On the Design Bar. click Finish Sketch. double-click {3D}. click .18 In the upper right corner of the profile. 20 Draw a circle with a 1200 mm radius just below the fillet arc. 22 In the Project Browser. under 3D Views. 23 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Northwest.

You learn how to place and adjust these components in project views. 24 Proceed to the next exercise. 134 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . and place people and a car on and next to the sidewalk. Adding Entourage and Site Components In this exercise. you place planters on the 05 Roof Garden level to create a roof garden. create a sidewalk on 2 sides of the building. Adding Entourage and Site Components on page 134.NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it.

Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.Deciduous : Japanese Cherry . TIP After you place the 1st planter. under Floor Plans. click Component. 4 Add 3 planters on the inside of the floor and grid line 5. 6 In the Type Selector. and open Metric\m_RRB_host. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and press ESC twice. Create the roof garden 1 In the Project Browser. click Training Files. click Component. as shown.5 Meters.rvt. In the left pane of the Open dialog. move the cursor over the planter and move it to the right to display a dashed blue line that helps you to place the next planter. Adding Entourage and Site Components | 135 . 7 Click to place a tree in the center of each planter. 3 In the Type Selector. between grid lines C and D. select M_RPC Tree . 5 On the Basics tab. select Planter : 1220 x 1220. double-click 05 Roof Garden.4.

click Lines. for Type. and click OK. For Offset. enter 2400 mm. select M_RPC Tree . The height of the trees no longer extends past the roof. double-click 01 Entry Level. click Duplicate. double-click 05 Roof Garden. 14 In the Name dialog.5 Meters. under Dimensions. 136 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 15 In the Type Properties dialog.8 On the View toolbar. click Edit/New. for Height. 17 While pressing CTRL. 20 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Create a sidewalk outside of the building 19 In the Project Browser. and move the mouse to orient the view to the Southwest. enter 1500 mm. 9 Click and hold the left mouse button on the ViewCube. under Floor Plans. and then click OK twice.Deciduous : Japanese Cherry 1. double-click {3D}. 11 Select one of the trees. click Floor.5 Meters. under Floor Plans. and on the Options Bar. (Element Properties). enter Japanese Cherry 1. 21 On the Design Bar. View the roof. and in the Type Selector. click 12 In the Element Properties dialog. 18 In the Project Browser. 10 In the Project Browser. and notice that the trees that you placed in the planters protrude through the roof. 13 In the Type Properties dialog. under 3D Views. 16 Click Apply. click (Default 3D View). as shown. 22 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). select the 2 remaining trees.

29 On the Options Bar. for Offset. 27 Select the bottom horizontal floor line. enter 0 mm. Adding Entourage and Site Components | 137 . 25 Using the same method. and click to sketch a line. 26 On the Options Bar. sketch a line between grid lines 4 and 5. and click to place the line. 24 Press TAB until a line that is offset 2400 mm below grid line 5 displays between grid lines A and B. 28 Select the right vertical floor line.23 Move the cursor over grid line 5 between grid lines A and B. click (Draw). and click to sketch a line.

32 Press ESC. 138 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model .30 On the Options Bar. and click to finish the line. 34 On the Tools toolbar. 36 Select the line between grid lines A and B. click (Trim/Extend). 33 Select the left endpoint of the line between grid lines A and B. move the cursor to the right approximately 1200 mm. 35 Select the line that you just drew. and then select the horizontal line near grid line 1. move the cursor up 900 mm. and then select the line that you sketched along the bottom horizontal line of the floor. and click to finish the line. clear Chain. and then select the line that you sketched between grid lines 4 and 5. 37 Select the line that you sketched between grid lines 4 and 5. 31 Select the top endpoint of the right vertical line.

as shown: (Element Properties). 50 Click to place Alex on the sidewalk. click Component. under Constraints. enter -250 mm. Adding Entourage and Site Components | 139 . Placeholders for RPC content display in 2D and 3D views only. 39 Select the sidewalk. 40 In the Element Properties dialog. click Duplicate. Next. The completed sidewalk displays. 47 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. The pointed end of the shape indicates the person’s line of sight. select M_RPC Male : Alex. click 41 In the Type Properties dialog. Place 2 people on the sidewalk 46 Zoom to the lower right corner of the sidewalk. 49 On the Options Bar. 51 Move the cursor to rotate approximately 150 degrees. a photorealistic image displays.38 On the Design Bar. select Rotate after placement. near Column E5. 45 Click OK. 44 In the Element Properties dialog. for Type. When you render an image. for Height Offset from Level. RPC people are represented by a tear drop shape. enter Sidewalk. and click so he is facing the column. create a new type for the sidewalk element because it is currently a floor element. click Edit/New. 43 Click OK twice. and on the Options Bar. 48 In the Type Selector. click Finish Sketch. In plan view. 42 In the Name dialog.

and click (Element Properties). you can use the Rotate tool to further adjust the component placement. click Camera. select M_RPC Beetle. and click to place Cathy so she is facing Alex. and place it along the sidewalk behind him. 58 In the camera view (3D View 1). 55 Press the spacebar to rotate it until it is facing away from Alex. 53 Move the cursor clockwise. 57 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 140 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . about 30 degrees. and place it in the corner of the scene as shown. and click to place her on the sidewalk. click the car. select M_RPC Female : Cathy. 56 Press ESC twice. 54 In the Type Selector.NOTE If necessary. 52 In the Type Selector.

View the front of the building 67 In the Project Browser. When you select a host for a component. Adding Entourage and Site Components | 141 . 66 Using the same method. double-click To Building. click Pick Host. 60 In the Project Browser. double-click West. and on the Options Bar. If the sidewalk changes height. pick the sidewalk as the host for the car. under Constraints. 61 Zoom in to the area where Alex and Cathy are standing. under Elevations. 63 Click the sidewalk. you ensure that the components remain on the same plane as the host. Select a host for the RPC components 62 Select Cathy.59 In the Element Properties dialog. Next. and on the Options Bar. for Offset. you select the sidewalk as a host for both the Alex and Cathy RPC components. both Cathy and Alex will move with it. and click OK. under 3D Views. 65 Click the sidewalk. click Pick Host. 64 Select Alex. enter -300 mm.

142 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 68 Proceed to the next exercise. Adding a Service Core to the Building Project In this exercise. The service core is contained in an external file that you bring into the current project as a group. you remove the multi-level stairs and stairwell that you created in a previous exercise from the building. After the service core is positioned. the elements will be ungrouped in the project.NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. and replace them with a service core. Adding a Service Core to the Building Project on page 142.

4 Press DELETE. Adding a Service Core to the Building Project | 143 . By deleting the stairwell from the 05 Roof Garden. 3 Select the entire stairwell. 2 Zoom in to the stairwell. double-click 05 Roof Garden.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and shaft opening. and use the Orbit tool to spin the building. and open Metric\m_RRB_add_service_core. under Floor Plans. click Training Files. Notice that there is no longer a stairwell in the building. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click 6 On the View toolbar. (SteeringWheels). click (Default 3D View). Remove the stairwell from the building model 1 In the Project Browser. you delete the entire stairwell.rvt. walls. including the stairs. 5 On the View toolbar.

and zoom in to the linked instance. 8 In the left pane of the Load File as Group dialog. Ignore and close any warnings that are displayed as the file is imported as a group. 14 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. expand Groups. double-click 01 Entry Level. expand Model. click (Align). 10 In the Project Browser. and open Metric\m_RRB_core. and notice that the linked file is listed. double-click 00 Foundation. and on the Design Bar. click to place an instance of the service core between grid lines B and D and 1 and 2.rvt. click OK. 13 In the drawing area. 11 In the Project Browser. Position and align the group 15 On the Tools toolbar. right-click m_RRB_core. 9 In the Duplicate Types dialog. and click Create Instance. under Floor Plans. 144 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . Create an instance of the group 12 In the Project Browser. click Training Files.Add the service core as a group 7 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load File as Group. click Modify.

click Ungroup. click 21 On the View toolbar. Press TAB to select the wall centerline of the wall between the top 2 rooms. 20 On the View toolbar. NOTE This step is not required and may not be recommended if there is more than one instance of the group. and click to align the center. Click the exterior face of the top horizontal wall of the core. click (top down view). click Modify. ■ ■ Click grid line C. Adding a Service Core to the Building Project | 145 . and spin the building to see the inserted group Shaft openings were included as part of the group geometry and are created automatically as the group is placed. 19 On the Design Bar. 17 On the Design Bar.16 Align the core: ■ ■ Click the inner top horizontal floor line. 18 Select the core. (Default 3D View). or if the group layout is expected to change. and on the Options Bar. click Modify. (SteeringWheels).

Modifying a Floor and Adding Railings on page 146.NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. After you modify it. Modifying a Floor and Adding Railings In this exercise. 22 Proceed to the final exercise. You copy the railing type into your project from another project. and open Metric\m_RRB_modify_floor_add_railings_. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.rvt. click Training Files. you add glass railings around the floor edges. where it is hosted within a railing family. you cut away a portion of the floor on the 02 Level of the building. 146 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . In the left pane of the Open dialog.

Copy the railing types into the retail building project 4 In the Project Browser. Handrail only. Modifying a Floor and Adding Railings | 147 . click (Split). and expand Railings. 8 In the Project Browser. and Parapet. under Floor Plans. 10 In the Duplicate Types dialog.rvt. press and hold CTRL. and open Metric\m_Conference. and double-click Lounge Perspective. Modify the 02 Level floor 12 Select the floor. 13 On the Tools toolbar. 7 Click Window menu ➤ m_RRB_modify_floor_add_railings. and click to split the floor. 5 Expand Railing. double-click 02 Level. 3 In the Conference project. and on the Options Bar. and select Glass. Notice the glass railing in the foreground. click OK. 2 In the left pane of the dialog. 14 Select the bottom horizontal floor 700 mm to the left of grid line C. 6 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. click Edit.rvt. expand Families.Open a different project and view a rendering of the building lounge 1 Click File menu ➤ Open. in the Project Browser. 9 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste from Clipboard. This is the railing that you want to add to your model. The floor sketch displays. 11 Close the warning dialog that displays. expand Renderings. The rendering displays. click Training Files.

and click to draw another line. and drag to the left until it intersects with grid line B.15 On the Design Bar. 19 Select the left endpoint of the floor. 23 Complete the sketch as shown. move the cursor horizontally to the right 1500 mm. and click to place it. move the cursor vertically 1500 mm. 16 Select the left endpoint of the floor where you split it. and on the Options Bar. and drag it to the right until it intersects with grid line D. click Modify. verify that Chain is not selected. 22 Select the endpoint of the right horizontal line that you just sketched. and click to draw another line. click Lines. 20 Click to create a line starting from the endpoint of the line that you just drew. 24 On the Tools toolbar. move the cursor vertically until the line is 1500 mm long. 21 Sketch the same lines in the opposite direction on the right side of the floor sketch. 25 Select grid line B. select the left vertical sketch line along grid line B. 17 Select the right endpoint of the floor where you split it. and click the lock to lock the alignment. click (Align). 148 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 18 On the Design Bar.

and lock the alignment.26 Select grid line D.rvt project. enter 100 mm. click Yes to attach the top of the walls on 01 Entry Level to the bottom of the 02 Level floor. select the right vertical sketch line along grid line D. and click OK. for Type. click Railing Properties. 28 Align the horizontal sketch lines with each other as shown. 29 On the Design Bar. Add railings around the floor 32 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. Modifying a Floor and Adding Railings | 149 . For Offset. and click the lock to lock the alignment. 33 On the Design Bar. click Finish Sketch. 36 Select the floor lines to sketch the railing around the inside of the floor line as shown. 31 In the Revit dialog. select Glass. Lock the dimensions. click Dimension. 30 On the Design Bar. 34 In the Element Properties dialog. click Railing. This is the railing type that you copied from the Conference. click (Align). 35 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). 27 On the Tools toolbar. and dimension the floor sketch lines as shown.

click Dimension. View the floor and railings 40 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 38 Dimension the railing sketch to the edge of the floor and lock the dimension. click Camera. 150 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 39 Click Finish Sketch.37 On the Design Bar. 41 Place the camera and camera target as shown.

You can view the railing that you just added.A new 3D view of the interior of the 02 Level displays. ■ Modifying a Floor and Adding Railings | 151 . 42 On the View Control Bar: ■ Click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. Click (Hide Crop Region) to hide the frame around the view.

152 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model .43 Close all project drawings.

a Kansas City-based architectural firm for providing their Freighthouse Flats renovation project to use for the tutorial training files in this section. you learn to create construction documentation in Revit Architecture 2009. the existing building shell will be maintained and restored. exterior fire stairs.Documenting Your Projects In this section of the tutorials. As the building is slated to receive historic tax credits. the Freighthouse Flats project is an exciting renovation of an historic three-story warehouse into new urban luxury loft living spaces. BNIM Architects was selected to convert the existing building into a 22-unit condominium featuring concrete floors. and north facing balconies for the 2nd and 3rd floor units. 153 . The additional 4th floor and non-historic north facade will be modernized to include a 4th floor penthouse. slight modifications to the building design have been made. and a roof garden. We wish to thank BNIM Architects. lofty ceilings. balconies. NOTE For training purposes. Located in Kansas City’s popular Crossroads Arts District.

154 .

how to create section and elevation views.Adding Views and Sheets to a Project 4 In this tutorial. You learn to: ■ ■ ■ ■ Create new project views. elevation. you learn how to create views from a building model. and detail views Modify the appearance of tags and other annotation on plans Set visibility and graphic controls in views to produce different presentation effects Create projects sheets that contain project views Creating Views In this lesson. you begin the construction documentation for the Freighthouse Flats project. Duplicating Plan Views In this exercise. including plan. section. you create new plan views of the building model by copying existing views and then modifying the copied views. You learn how to create new views from existing views. You duplicate the Level 1 and Level 2 floor plans to create Level 1 and Level 2 furniture plans. 155 . You also duplicate the project site plan to create a vicinity plan. and how to create views from callouts that you place in other views.

Level 1 Furniture Plan created from the Level 1 floor plan Vicinity Plan created from the Site plan Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.rvt. and right-click Level 1 ➤ Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. 156 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . expand Floor Plans. Duplicate the Level 1 floor plan to create a Level 1 furniture plan 1 In the Project Browser. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views.

enter Level 2 Furniture Plan. and click OK. 6 Click View menu ➤ Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. 4 In the Project Browser. Use an alternate method of view duplication to create a Level 2 furniture plan 5 In the Project Browser.2 In the Project Browser. double-click Level 1 Furniture Plan. 9 In the Project Browser. enter Level 1 Furniture Plan. right-click Copy of Level 2 ➤ Rename. under Floor Plans. Duplicating Plan Views | 157 . select Level 2. right-click Copy of Level 1 ➤ Rename. 7 In the Project Browser. and click OK. 3 In the Rename View dialog. under Floor Plans. double-click Level 2 Furniture Plan. 8 In the Rename View dialog.

Next. 11 Under Floor Plans. click the current scale. and click OK. 158 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . 12 In the Rename View dialog. enter Vicinity Plan. hide the display of the elevation markers in the view. and click 1: 1000. double-click Vicinity Plan.Duplicate a view and change the scale as required 10 In the Project Browser. right-click Site ➤ Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. 14 On the View Control Bar. right-click Copy of Site ➤ Rename. under Floor Plans. 13 In the Project Browser.

you create an additional section and elevation view of the building model. 17 Click File menu ➤ Save As. Creating Elevation and Section Views | 159 . All of the elevation markers on the plan are hidden. 18 Save the file as Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views_in_progress. 16 Right-click. Creating Elevation and Section Views In this exercise.rvt.15 Select the body of the south elevation marker. and click Hide in view ➤ Category.

Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views_in_progress.rvt.South East elevation view Section view Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. click Elevation. for Scale. 3 In the Type Selector. 4 On the Options Bar. 5 Specify a point in the drawing in front of the angular wall to place an elevation marker. under Floor Plans. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. Add an elevation marker to the Level 1 floor plan 1 In the Project Browser. select 1:100. NOTE Elevation markers are context sensitive and will automatically try to align parallel to model geometry. select Elevation: Building Elevation. double-click Level 1. 160 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project .

Creating Elevation and Section Views | 161 . 8 On the Design Bar. 7 Select and drag the upper horizontal line of the elevation until it extends past the upper-left corner of the building. and select the head of the elevation marker that you just placed. click Modify. click Modify.Modify the elevation extents 6 On the Design Bar.

select 1:100.Rename and view the new elevation 9 In the Project Browser. and double-click Level 1. under Views (all). enter South East. under Elevations (Building Elevation). Draw a section line on the Level 1 floor plan 12 In the Project Browser. 162 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . select Section: Building Section. for Scale. right-click Elevation 1-a ➤ Rename. under Elevations. 15 On the Options Bar. 10 In the Rename View dialog. click Section. expand Floor Plans. and click OK. 14 In the Type Selector. double-click South East. 16 Draw a section line through the building: ■ Specify a point above the top wall of the building between grid lines 2 and 3. 13 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 11 In the Project Browser. ■ Move the cursor down. and specify the section line endpoint between the endpoints of grid lines 2 and 3.

18 Select the blue triangular grips on the left side of the section extents. Creating Elevation and Section Views | 163 . and move them to just outside of the left side of the building.Modify the section line 17 Click the blue arrows below the section line head to reverse the direction in which the section is cut through the building.

164 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . click Split Segment. drag it to the right (keeping it below the split) until it cuts through the stair. Click the midpoint of the section line.19 Click the blue arrows below the section tail twice to cycle through the section tail options and add a section head to the section line endpoint. and click to place it. 20 Add a jog to the section line: ■ ■ On the Options Bar.

click Detail Level: Coarse ➤ Medium. Creating Elevation and Section Views | 165 . select the blue break mark that displays under the grid bubble. and drag the top segment of gridline F to the right. 23 On the View Control Bar. 24 Select gridline F. and double-click Section 1. click Modify. using the blue circular drag grip. View the new section 22 In the Project Browser.21 On the Design Bar. expand Sections (Building Section).

To create each view.25 On the Design Bar. you create new views: an enlarged stair plan view and a detail view. Creating Callout Views In this exercise. Stair callout on the Level 1 floor plan 166 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . 26 Click File menu ➤ Save. click Modify. you draw a callout around the geometry in another view to specify the contents of each new callout view.

select 1:50. ■ Move the cursor to the lower-left of the stair. click Callout. select Floor Plan. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views_in_progress. Create a floor plan callout 1 In the Project Browser. 5 Draw the callout around the large stairs in the center of the plan: ■ Click to specify a point to the upper-right of the stair. Creating Callout Views | 167 .rvt. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. double-click Level 1.Resulting callout view .Enlarged Stair Plan Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. 3 In the Type Selector. 4 On the Options Bar. and click to specify a point to complete the callout. for Scale. under Floor Plans.

Select the grip on the leader line that is closest to the callout head. ■ Select the middle grip. and select the callout boundary.6 Modify the callout leader: ■ ■ On the Design Bar. 168 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . and drag it down slightly to create a jog in the leader line. click Modify. and move it to the left side of the callout boundary.

under Sections (Building Sections).7 On the Design Bar. Create a detail view callout 11 In the Project Browser. Creating Callout Views | 169 . and click to specify a point above and to the right of the roof overhang. 15 Create the callout: ■ Zoom in to the upper-left corner of the building. right-click Callout of Level 1 ➤ Rename. 13 In the Type Selector. 8 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. 9 In the Rename View dialog. click Callout. select 1:50. enter Enlarged Stair Plan. click Modify. and click OK. select Detail View: Detail. 12 On the View tab of the Design Bar. The Enlarged Stair Plan view displays. Open the callout view 10 Double-click the callout head. double-click Section 1. 14 On the Options Bar. for Scale.

16 Modify the callout leader as shown. 170 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . and click to specify a point to the left and below the roof overhang.■ Move the cursor diagonally down.

18 In the Rename View dialog. expand Detail Views (Details). enter Roof Overhang Detail. and right-click Detail 0 ➤ Rename. double-click Roof Overhang Detail. Open the detail callout view 19 In the Project Browser. 20 Click File menu ➤ Save.17 In the Project Browser. under Detail Views (Details). and click OK. Creating Callout Views | 171 .

Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views_in_progress. You change the appearance of the section mark head. under Floor Plans. and click Open.rfa. 2 Click File menu ➤ Open.rvt.Modifying View Tag Appearance In this exercise. double-click Level 1. select Custom-Section Head. 172 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . 3 In the left pane of the Open dialog. and the callout head and boundary that you placed in previous exercises. the elevation markers. you modify the appearance of tags in a view so that they conform to office CAD standards. open Metric\Families\Annotations. Existing stair callout head and boundary Modified stair callout head and boundary Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. click Training Files. Modify the section mark head 1 In the Project Browser.

scroll to Section Marks.5mm Square. 8 In the Name dialog. notice the updated section marks that display at each endpoint of the section line. 9 In the Type Properties dialog. click the Annotation Objects tab. and can be applied to the section line. click Duplicate. and select 3. 21 In the Type Properties dialog. . Section Tail . select Section Head . enter Section Head – Custom. 16 Click in the Line Weight/Projection field. and click OK. 22 In the Name dialog.Custom. 15 Under Category. and click 11 In the Element Properties dialog. enter 12. and click OK.Filled. and select 2. 10 On the floor plan. 18 Click in the Line Weight/Projection field. 4 On the Design Bar. 19 Click OK. Modify the shape and weight of the elevation markers 20 Click Settings menu ➤ View Tags ➤ Elevation Tags. 14 In the Object Styles dialog. select the section line. click Edit/New. click Load into Project. 6 Click Settings menu ➤ View Tags ➤ Section Tags. The Custom-Section Head family is now loaded in the project. 7 In the Type Properties dialog. scroll to Section Line. Section Tail – Filled. 17 Under Category.The new section mark head that you want to apply to either endpoint of the section line displays. On the floor plan. select Custom-Section Head: Section Head – Open. and click OK. select the current project. and click OK. 5 In the Load into Projects dialog. Modifying View Tag Appearance | 173 . click Duplicate. for Section Head. 12 For Section Tag. clear any others. and click OK twice. Modify the line weight of the section line and mark 13 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles.

40 Press ESC. and on the Options Bar. click Load into Project. 33 In the Type Properties dialog. . click Edit/New. and click OK. 31 In the Load into Projects dialog. and click Open. select Custom – Callout Head: Callout Head. select Square. select 3. On the floor plan. 174 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . enter 12. notice the square elevation markers that display. for Callout Tag. select 12. The new callout head that you want to apply to the callout displays. For Corner Radius. 38 In the Type Properties dialog. for Elevation Tag. 27 Click OK twice. select Custom-Callout Head. open Metric\Families\Annotations. Modify the callout head 28 Click File menu ➤ Open. select the callout. select the current project. The custom callout head displays on the floor plan. For Line Weight. click Training Files. enter 6 mm. click 37 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. click Duplicate. select Custom – Callout Head w/ 6mm Corner Radius. 34 In the Name dialog. .rfa. For Dimensions ➤ Width. 24 Select an elevation marker in the drawing. 36 In the drawing.5mm Square. 30 On the Design Bar.23 In the Type Properties dialog. 39 Click OK twice. 32 Click Settings menu ➤ View Tags ➤ Callout Tags. and on the Options Bar. 29 In the left pane of the Open dialog. clear all others. 35 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Callout Head. Click OK. click 25 In the Element Properties dialog. enter Custom – Callout Head w/ 6mm Corner Radius. 26 In the Type Properties dialog. Click OK. click Edit/New.5 mm. under Graphics: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Shape.

select Dash. 42 In the Objects Styles dialog. 44 Click in the Line Weight/Projection field. 49 Click OK. view regions. and select 7. 50 Click File menu ➤ Save. 43 Under Category. and visual overrides. The new callout boundary displays on the floor plan. scroll down to Callout Boundary. expand Callout Boundary. 47 Select Callout Leader Line. masking regions. Setting Visibility and Graphics Options in Views In this lesson. You learn to create view templates. filters. click the Annotation Objects tab. 45 For Line Pattern. and select 4. 46 Under Category. Setting Visibility and Graphics Options in Views | 175 . you learn how to control the visibility and graphic characteristics of elements in views. 48 Click in the Line Weight/Projection field.Modify the callout boundary 41 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles.

click Zoom to Fit. under Elevations. In the left pane of the Open dialog. View templates provide an easy way to transfer visibility settings to multiple drawings. 2 On the View Control Bar. click (Show Crop Region). 4 Select and move the blue triangular grips to resize the crop region as shown. 176 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . To accomplish this. click (Hide Crop Region). you create presentation views that feature elevations of the building.rvt. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-VG. click Training Files. 6 On the View Toolbar.Creating a View Template In this exercise. Presentation view Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 5 On the View Control Bar. you create a view template containing specific presentation quality visibility settings. and double-click East. and apply it to multiple elevation views. Set a crop region for the view 1 In the Project Browser. 3 Select the outer crop region that displays around the view. and features blue triangular grips and break marks. The crop region displays as red.

10 Click the Annotation Categories tab. clear Entourage. 9 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog.Create and apply a view template to an elevation drawing 7 On the View Control bar. clear: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Callouts Elevations Grids Levels Sections 12 Click OK. 13 On the View Control bar. click Shadows Off ➤ Shadows On. levels. click Detail Level: Coarse ➤ Medium. Callouts. and section lines are now hidden in the view. grids. Creating a View Template | 177 . 8 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. elevation markers. under Visibility. 11 Under Visibility.

14 In the Project Browser. 22 Save the file as Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-VG_in_progress. 178 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project .rvt. 15 In the New View Template dialog. under Elevations. right-click North. and click OK. edit the crop region as before. and click OK. right-click East. double-click North. click OK. and click Create View Template From View. enter Black and White Presentation Elevation. click Apply. 18 In the Project Browser. select Black and White Presentation Elevation. 21 Click File menu ➤ Save As. 16 In the View Templates dialog. 17 In the Project Browser. 20 Using the same method. and click Apply View Template. The settings in the view template create a presentation-quality elevation view. under Elevations. 19 In the Select View Template dialog.

Click OK twice. for View Range.View Range and Plan Regions In this exercise. NOTE The Penthouse plan now shows the level below to provide additional context to the view. and click Properties. and the exterior area on the south side of the building. select Penthouse. Adjust the view range of the Penthouse plan 1 In the Project Browser. for Level. Under View Depth. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-VG_in_progress. select Level Below (Level 4). 2 In the Project Browser.rvt. under Floor Plans. double-click Penthouse. you modify the view range and create view plan regions to adjust the display of elements in the building Penthouse and Roof Plan. as this structure has not yet been documented in any of the views. 4 In the View Range dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Primary Range. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. You want to display the exterior roof terraces from Level 4 on the penthouse and roof plan. under Extents. click Edit. right-click. select Level Below (Level 4). for Bottom. View Range and Plan Regions | 179 . Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson.

select Level 4. 7 In the Element Properties dialog. under Floor Plans. 8 In the View Range dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Primary Range. Under View Depth. under Extents. select Level 4. right-click. 180 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . and click Properties. Click OK twice. double-click Roof Plan. for Level. for View Range. click Edit. select Roof Plan. 6 In the Project Browser. for Bottom.Adjust the view range of the Roof plan 5 In the Project Browser.

for Bottom. Click OK twice. Under View Depth. Move you cursor diagonally. click Lines. 13 On the Design Bar. under Extents. NOTE A Plan Region allows you to modify the view range of a specified area defined by the extents of the Plan Region. click Region Properties. click Edit. select Unlimited. for Level. View Range and Plan Regions | 181 . for View Range. 15 In the View Range dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Primary Range. In the left corner of the building. 14 In the Element Properties dialog. click Plan Region.Create a plan region to show exterior space on the south side of the building 9 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 10 On the Design Bar. and select the endpoint the gridline shown below. click 12 Sketch a plan region: ■ ■ (Rectangle). click Finish Sketch. select the left endpoint of the outer wall. 11 On the Options Bar. 16 On the Design Bar. select Unlimited.

in this case. 182 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project .17 On the Design Bar.rvt. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. you visually audit the drawing to make sure the fire-rated walls are placed correctly. the fire rating of the walls. and double-click Level 1. 2 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. expand Floor Plans. 18 Click File menu ➤ Save. the fire-rated walls on the floor plan display with a solid red fill. click Modify. 3 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. You use a filter to quickly apply visual changes to the walls based on defined parameters. 1 In the Project Browser. After you apply the filter. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-VG_in_progress. under Views (all). Using Filters to Control Visibility In this exercise. click the Filters tab.

select the red color. select Walls. 19 Remove the filter: ■ ■ Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. and click OK. for Rated Walls. click <No Override>. 16 Click OK. click Override under Patterns. 12 On the Filter tab. select Fire Rating. and click OK. On the Filters tab of the Visibility Graphics dialog. under Projection/Surface. You click the current color value to open the Color dialog. 17 Using the same method. click OK. The fire-rated walls now display without the solid red fill. 8 Under Filter Rules: ■ ■ ■ For Filter by. under Filters. click Add. Using Filters to Control Visibility | 183 . 9 Click OK. for Color. under Categories. and apply a color. 13 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. Enter Hr. and click OK. apply the red solid fill override to Cut Patterns as well. Select contains. click Remove. 7 In the Filters dialog.4 At the bottom of the Visibility/Graphics dialog. 11 Select Rated Walls. for Pattern. The Rated Walls filter can be reapplied to the drawing at any time. 5 In the Filters dialog. 10 On the Filter tab. select Solid Fill. 15 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. click (New). under Basic colors. and click OK. but the overrides associated with the filter must be reapplied as well. 6 In the Filter Name dialog. click Edit/New. 18 In the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog. enter Rated Walls. 14 In the Color dialog.

you use masking regions that you sketch over the areas that you want to hide.20 Click File menu ➤ Save. you obscure geometry in portions of a view. Masking Portions of a View In this exercise. To accomplish this. Masking regions sketched over the upper corners of a view Unit plan view with upper corners masked 184 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project .

right-click Level 1 ➤ Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. Use a masking region to hide additional model geometry that does not need to be shown 10 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click Show Crop Region ➤ Hide Crop Region. NOTE This specifies the line type for the border of the masking region. click Zoom ➤ Zoom to Fit. under Floor Plans. 7 On the View menu. as shown. click Zoom ➤ Zoom to Fit. click Show Crop Region. Masking Portions of a View | 185 . 4 On the View Control Bar.Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. and click OK. 1 In the Project Browser. 11 In the Type Selector. enter Unit 18 Plan – Level 1. 6 Modify the crop region to get close to the desired view at the bottom left. 8 Select the crop region. 3 In the Rename View dialog. and adjust the view again until it displays as shown. click Masking Region. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-VG_in_progress. right-click.rvt. 9 On the View Control Bar. and click Rename. select Invisible lines. 2 Select Copy of Level 1. 5 On the View menu.

14 On the Design Bar.12 On the Options Bar. 15 View the effects of the masking regions on the floor plan. click Finish Sketch. 186 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . 13 Sketch 2 masking regions as shown. 16 Click File menu ➤ Save. click (Rectangle).

Working with Visual Overrides | 187 . you create a presentation plan of one of the residential units on the Level 1 floor plan. and click OK. 8 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. for Pattern. under Visibility. 3 In the Rename View dialog. click in the Patterns field. and click Rename. for Color. 2 Select the Copy of Unit 18 Plan – Level 1. 7 Under Cut. 1 In the Project Browser. under Pattern Overrides. 10 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. NOTE Duplicate with Detailing is selected so that the masking regions are retained in the new view.Working with Visual Overrides In this exercise. 11 Click OK twice. Create poche for walls 5 Select the diagonal bottom wall. 6 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. and apply different visual overrides to create presentation effects. You create poche for the walls and you hide and modify the display of certain elements on the presentation plan.Level 1. click <No Override> to apply a color. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-VG_in_progress. and click Override. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate with Detailing. enter Presentation Unit 18 Plan – Level 1. 4 On the View Control Bar. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. select Walls. under Floor Plans. right-click. 9 On the left side of the Color dialog. and click OK. right-click Unit 18 Plan . click black. and click Override Graphics in View ➤ By Category. click the current scale. select Solid fill.rvt. right-click. and click 1: 50.

under Visibility. clear Grids. 188 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project .Set the visibility and graphics of other categories in the view 12 On the Design Bar. 15 Click the Annotation Categories tab. 14 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. and click OK. click Modify. 16 Under Visibility. Hide elements in the view by category 17 Select the lamp on the table on the floor plan as shown. 13 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. clear Floors.

Working with Visual Overrides | 189 . 19 Select 1 of the chairs around the long table on the floor plan as shown. and click Hide in View ➤ Category.18 Right-click.

By using the previous method to make the selection. the Visibility/Graphics dialog opens to the category of the object (Furniture) selected by default.20 Right-click. click Projection Lines. 24 In the Line Graphics dialog. right-click. 27 In the View-Specific Element Graphics dialog. and click Override Graphics in View ➤ By Category. 22 In the Line Graphics dialog. select Dash. 190 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . for Pattern. select the sofa. 25 Click OK twice. click a purple color. click <No Override> to apply a color. for Color. 23 In the Color dialog. click Override. and click OK. under Lines. and click Override Graphics in View ➤ By Element. 21 Under Projection/Surface. Modify visibility and graphics by element 26 On the floor plan.

right-click. click Modify. 30 On the Design Bar.28 For Color. click . Reveal hidden elements in a view 31 On the View Control Bar. Working with Visual Overrides | 191 . 32 Select one of the lamps. select a bright green color. and click Unhide in view ➤ Category. 29 In the Color dialog. and click OK twice. click By Category Override. The lighting fixtures and grid lines that you hid previously display in a dark red color.

33 On the View Control Bar. you learn how to create sheets within a Revit Architecture project. you create project drawing sheets that report the project information in the sheet titleblocks. Training File ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Creating Drawing Sheets In this exercise. click . and how to make changes to the building model from a view on a sheet. 34 Click File menu ➤ Save. Creating Drawing Sheets in a Project In this lesson. how to add views to the sheets. 192 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project .

TIP If the View tab is not displayed in the Design Bar. click Sheet.Creating Sheets. Creating Drawing Sheets | 193 . right-click. and click OK. click Training Files. and click View. Create a project sheet 1 On View tab of the Design Bar. The title block that you selected is a family that has already been loaded into the project. 2 In the Select a Titleblock dialog.rvt. select A0 metric. A title block and drawing borders are displayed on the drawing sheet.■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats. The text fields in the titleblock family (shown below) contain labels that associate the project information parameters with the appropriate text fields.

8 Zoom in to the lower-right corner of the title block. 7 On the Design Bar. 5 When the title block highlights. For Sheet Name. Click OK. under Identity Data: ■ ■ ■ (Properties).Unnamed. and select the title block. For Sheet Number. Site Plan displays in the title block as the sheet name and is appended to the sheet name in the Project Browser. Change the sheet name and number 4 On the Design Bar. click 6 In the Element Properties dialog. enter Site Plan. enter A101. expand Sheets (all). 194 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . The new sheet is displayed in the Project Browser with the name A102 . on the Options Bar.NOTE The vertical time and date stamp in the lower-right corner of the sheet view automatically updates every time the project file is saved. click Modify. 3 In the Project Browser. click Modify. The Sheet Number has been updated to display A101.

enter the following address: ■ ■ 123 Main Street Anytown. 2009. enter J. enter 2009-1. For Project Number. Smith. enter Freighthouse Flats. For Client Name. MA 12345 12 Click OK. enter 15 May. under Other. for Project Address. continue to add project information: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Project Issue Date. enter For Approval.Display additional project information in the sheet title block 9 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Information. 14 Click OK. click Edit. For Project Status. For Project Name. NOTE Text size is determined within the sheet family. Creating Drawing Sheets | 195 . 11 In the Edit Text dialog. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. The new project information displays in the titleblock. 13 In the Element Properties dialog.

Create additional sheets 19 Using the same method as you did in the previous steps. 17 In the Project Browser. 21 Save the file as Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Sheets_in_progress. you add views to the sheets that you created in the previous exercise. select A0 metric.Elevations A106 . 18 In the Sheet Title dialog. enter Floor Plan.Create a floor plan sheet 15 In the Project Browser.Stairs In the following exercise. 16 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. and click Rename. create the following new project sheets: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ A103 .Elevations A105 .Elevations A107 . and click Save. for Name. Adding Views to Sheets In this exercise.Sections A108 . you add views to these sheets. 196 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . right-click Sheets (all) ➤ New Sheet.rvt. and click OK.Layout Plan A104 . right-click. select the new sheet name. and click OK. 20 Click File menu ➤ Save As.

4 On the Design Bar. Drag the Level 1 floor plan onto a sheet to create a floor plan 1 In the Project Browser. and click to place the view. and drag it to the sheet. The red border around the view no longer displays. 2 In the Project Browser. The border of the view displays as red to indicate that you can reposition it on the sheet. 6 In the Project Browser. double-click A104 . 3 Move the cursor to position the lower-right corner of the view in the lower-right corner of the sheet. under Floor Plans.Floor Plan. Adding Views to Sheets | 197 . Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Sheets_in_progress.Elevations. and click to place it.Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. select Level 1. double-click A102 . under Sheets (all). drag East to the upper-right corner of the sheet. under Elevations (Building Elevation).rvt. Add elevation views to the A104-Elevation sheet 5 In the Project Browser. click Modify. under Sheets (all).

drag Roof Overhang Detail to the left of the Building Section view on the sheet. drag Building Section to the upper-right corner of the sheet. and click to place it. double-click A107 . align it with the East elevation. 12 On the Design Bar. 11 Under Detail Views (Detail). and click to place it.7 Drag the North elevation to the lower-right corner of the sheet. click Modify. 198 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . click Modify. Add the Building Section view to the A107-Sections sheet 9 In the Project Browser. and click to place it.Sections. 10 Under Sections (Building Sections). under Sheets (all). 8 On the Design Bar.

. Adding Views to Sheets | 199 . and on the Options Bar. and use the blue endpoint grips to resize it so that it spans the length of the view. NOTE If you find it difficult to select the left grip on the title bar. and click OK. click 14 In the Element Properties dialog. 15 Drag the view to reposition it next to the Building Section view. Notice the title bar also needs to be resized. and press TAB until it highlights. 16 Select title bar. select 1:5. for View Scale.Change the scale of the detail view 13 Select the Roof Overhang Detail on the sheet. move the cursor over it. zoom in to the grip.

under Floor Plans. View updated annotation on referenced views 20 In the Project Browser. 200 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project .Stairs. double-click A108 . 23 Click File menu ➤ Save. drag Enlarged Stair Plan to the upper-right corner of the sheet. 22 Zoom in to the section line heads and the east and north elevation markers. under Sheets (all). and notice they also reference the correct sheet numbers.Create a sheet with stair and stair detail views 17 In the Project Browser. click Modify. and click to place it. 21 Zoom to the stair callout. double-click Level 1. 18 Under Floor Plans. 19 On the Design Bar. Notice that the callout tag has been automatically updated to reference the correct sheet.

enter 16700 mm. 5 On the Design Bar. and press ENTER.rvt.Modifying the Building Model from a Sheet View In this exercise. 2 Select the building section view. under Sheets (all). Modifying the Building Model from a Sheet View | 201 . right-click. click Modify. zoom in to the name and elevation of the level. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Sheets_in_progress. 4 Double-click the Roof elevation height. Change the roof elevation 1 In the Project Browser. Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. In order to do this. you must first activate the view on the sheet. double-click A107 . you learn how to modify a building model directly from the drawing sheets that you created from its views.Sections. 3 At the right end of the Roof level line. and click Activate View. and then make changes and deactivate the view.

double-click North. under Elevations (Building Elevation). Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Sheets_in_progress. You modify the view to hide the view title. you create a perspective view of the building and place it on the sheet. After you create the sheet. 8 Click File menu ➤ Save. Creating and Modifying a Title Sheet In this exercise. and click Deactivate View.rvt. 7 In the Project Browser. 202 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson.6 Right-click. you create a title sheet for your drawing set. as it is not necessary to display it on the title sheet. Notice that the Roof Plan elevation has been updated.

click Camera. and click OK. select A0 metric. double-click Level 1. right-click. 7 Place the camera as shown. enter T. 3 In the Project Browser. Click OK.Create a new sheet 1 In the Project Browser. select the new sheet name. and click Properties. 6 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 4 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Sheet Number. right-click Sheets (all) ➤ New Sheet. enter Title Sheet. Create a view of the building to place on the title sheet 5 In the Project Browser. Creating and Modifying a Title Sheet | 203 . 2 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. under Floor Plans. The camera view displays. For Sheet Name.

For Far Clip Offset.8 On the Options Bar. 14 Under 3D Views. Under Extents. For Target Elevation. for Eye Elevation. Under Camera. 13 In the Project Browser. under Sheets (all). click 9 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ . drag 3D View 1 onto the sheet.Title Sheet. 10 Select the crop region and adjust the view to fit the building. click Shadows off ➤ Shadows on. 12 On the View Control Bar. 11 On the View Control Bar. and click to place it in the center of the sheet. Click OK. select Far Clip Active. click Show Crop Region ➤ Hide Crop Region. enter 100000 mm. enter 18000 mm. double-click T . enter 1500 mm. 204 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project .

Remove the title bar on the view 18 On the Design Bar. Under Model Crop Size. and click OK. click Edit/New. 23 In the Type Properties dialog.15 With the view selected. 17 Reposition the view on the title sheet. 19 Select the view on the sheet. 21 In the Type Properties dialog. click Modify. select No. 25 On the Design Bar. click Modify. 16 In the Crop Region Size dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Change. click 20 In the Element Properties dialog. 24 Click OK twice. and on the Options Bar. on the Options Bar. click Size. enter 635 mm. Click Apply. Creating and Modifying a Title Sheet | 205 . for Show title. select Scale (locked proportions). for Height. The title bar no longer displays on the sheet. 22 In the Name dialog. . enter Viewport/no title mark. and then click OK. click Duplicate. under Graphics.

206 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project .26 Click File menu ➤ Save. and close the exercise file.

you sequentially place and tag the rooms on the floor plan. Because of the open style floor plan.Tagging and Scheduling 5 In this tutorial. such as furniture Sequentially Placing and Tagging Rooms In this exercise. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Tagging Objects. Tagging Objects In this lesson.Level 1. such as room and window schedules. you learn how to tag rooms and other components of floor plans. The Room command with the Tag on placement option selected allows you to place and tag rooms with one command.rvt. You learn how to ■ ■ ■ ■ Sequentially tag rooms on a floor plan Tag doors and windows Modify tag placement and mark text Tag other objects. 207 . expand Floor Plans. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you need to create room separation lines to define the rooms to be tagged. click Training Files. and double-click Unit 18 Plan . Add room separations 1 In the Project Browser. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. in your Revit Architecture 2009 projects. You also learn to create different types of schedules. you learn how to use some of the annotation features included in Revit Architecture. such as doors and windows.

click Room Separation.2 Zoom in to the upper area of the floor plan. and click the opposite wall to create a horizontal room separation dividing the kitchen from the dining area (top area of the drawing). and click Room and Area. NOTE If the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar is not active. as shown: 208 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . move the cursor to the right. 3 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. 4 Click the endpoint of the short horizontal wall on the left. Adding room separation lines breaks up an open space to make it easier to add rooms. as shown: 5 Using the same method. right-click in the Design Bar. create a vertical separation to divide the kitchen from the entry area on the right.

create a horizontal separation above the stair to divide the dining area from the living area.6 Using the same method. click Load. 9 In the Tags dialog. Sequentially Placing and Tagging Rooms | 209 . 7 On the Design Bar. Load room tag annotation family 8 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Loaded Tags. click Modify.

and click to place the room and tag. 16 On the Design Bar. Tag rooms sequentially 12 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. click it. indicating that it can be edited. type U18-1. 13 On the Options Bar. 14 For Offset. and press ENTER. The room tag number displays in blue. click Modify.rfa. type 2400 mm. click Room. verify that Tag on placement is selected.10 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog. 210 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . and select the room tag. 17 Zoom in on the tag number. 15 Move the cursor to the room at the upper right of the plan view. The crosshair graphic represents the room area being tagged. click OK. click Training Files. 11 In the Tags dialog. and the rectangle contains the room tag. and open Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Room Tag.

■ 21 On the Design Bar. 20 Place another room and tag: ■ ■ ■ On the Design Bar. click Modify. Click to place the new room and tag. type Kitchen. and press ENTER. and Living): Sequentially Placing and Tagging Rooms | 211 . 23 Using the same method. Sequential letters are also supported. Dining. and edit the tags as shown (Toilet. type Entry. 19 On the Design Bar. click Modify. NOTE The second tag that you place displays the sequential number U18-2. Align the tags by moving the cursor until a dashed green line displays between the placed tag and the one that displays at the tip of the cursor. Move the cursor into the room to the left of the one previously tagged. click Room. place rooms and tags. and press ENTER.18 Click the room text label. 22 Click the room text label.

clear Room Separation. 25 In the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog. under Floor Plans. and moving clockwise. expand Lines. 212 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . and click OK. 28 Starting with the Balcony (area near the stair). click Modify.Level 2.Hide the room separations 24 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 29 On the Design Bar. on the Model Categories tab. The rooms are already placed. click to place a room tag in each of the 5 rooms. but they need to be tagged. 27 On the Design Bar. Tag rooms on upper level 26 In the Project Browser. click Room Tag. double-click Unit 18 Plan .

click Tag ➤ By Category. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Tagging Objects_in_progress. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Tagging Doors and Windows In this exercise. and double-click Unit 18 Plan .30 Click File menu ➤ Save As. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise.Level 1. 4 Select 5 doors in the upper area of the floor plan: ■ ■ ■ ■ Entry door Kitchen pantry door Pocket door in toilet Closet door in dining room Tagging Doors and Windows | 213 . expand Floor Plans. Tag Level 1 doors 1 If necessary. 3 On the Options Bar. clear Leader. 31 Save the file as Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Tagging Objects_in_progress. in the Project Browser. You learn how to add tags to the floor plan and how to simultaneously tag multiple untagged doors and windows.rvt.rvt. you learn how to place door and window tags.

Closet door in living room

5 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 6 Click the door tag for the entry door, type U18-1, and press ENTER. NOTE The tag symbol and text size are determined by the tag family.

7 Select the kitchen pantry door to the left, and on the Options Bar, click Properties).

(Element

8 In the Element Properties dialog, under Identify Data, for Mark, type U18-2, and click OK.

214 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling

9 Using one of the methods you just learned, rename the other 3 door tags to match the corresponding room tags.

10 Select the tag for the pocket door on the right, and drag it down to center it in the doorway.

11 Select the tag for the closet door and move it to the right of the door.

Tagging Doors and Windows | 215

Tag Level 2 doors 12 In the Project Browser, double-click Unit 18 Plan - Level 2. 13 On the Design Bar, click Tag All Not Tagged. 14 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog, verify that All objects in current view is selected. 15 Under Category, select Door Tags, and click OK. 16 Move the door tags to center them in the doorway. 17 Edit the numbers of the door tags as shown:

Place window tags 18 In the Project Browser, expand Floor Plans, and double-click Level 1.

19 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Loaded Tags. 20 In the Tags dialog, click Load. 21 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Window Tag.rfa. 22 In the Tags dialog, click OK. 23 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar, click Tag All Not Tagged. 24 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog, select Window Tags, and click OK.

216 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling

25 Zoom to the lower-right area of the drawing to view the window tags.

26 Under Floor Plans, double-click Level 2. 27 Zoom to the drawing extents. 28 Using the same method, tag all untagged windows. 29 Save the file.

Tagging Other Objects
In this exercise, you learn how to tag furniture objects, and modify the tag placement and display. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise, Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Tagging Objects_in_progress.rvt. Add furniture tags 1 In the Project Browser, expand Floor Plans, and double-click Unit 18 Plan - Level 1. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar, click Tag ➤ By Category. 3 On the Options Bar, select Leader. 4 Select a dining room chair. 5 At the confirmation prompt, click Yes to load a tag. 6 In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Furniture Tag.rfa. 7 Select each of the chairs and the table to place tags; select the edge to which the leader connects.

Tagging Other Objects | 217

8 Select the furniture in the living room.

9 Click Modify. Modify tag placement 10 Zoom to the dining table. Notice that the chair and table tags overlap.

11 Select the tag for the table, and drag it above the chair tag.

218 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling

12 Click the elbow control, and drag it up to form an angled leader.

13 Optionally, modify the position of the chair tags to move them closer to the chairs. 14 Click Modify. 15 Select the tag for the table (TBL-1), and on the Options Bar, clear Leader. 16 Drag the table tag to the center of the table, and on the Design Bar, click Modify.

Tag furniture on Level 2 17 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Unit 18 Plan - Level 2. 18 On the Design Bar, click Tag All Not Tagged, select M_Furniture Tag : Standard, and click OK. All furniture in the floor plan is tagged.

Tagging Other Objects | 219

Change tag style 19 Draw a selection box around the top area of the drawing to select the furniture.

20 On the Options Bar, click

(Filter Selection).

21 In the Filter dialog, click Check None, select Furniture Tags, and click OK. 22 In the Type Selector, select Furniture Tag: Boxed, and click Modify.

23 Save the file.

Defining Schedules and Color Diagrams
In this lesson, you learn to add schedules. You also learn to add schedule keys to a project by creating a room schedule and room color diagram. Schedule keys allow you to define common items that can be used by multiple objects within a schedule.

220 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling

Creating a Window Schedule
In this exercise, you create a window schedule for the building model shown below.

You begin by creating a window instance schedule; that is, a schedule that lists every window in the building.

Creating a Window Schedule | 221

You then select a window in the instance schedule and use the Show command to locate it in a view of the building model.

Next, you group and sort the windows in the instance schedule. Finally, you change the window instance schedule to a type schedule, in which windows are listed by window type.

Training File
■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams.rvt.

Create a window schedule 1 In the Project Browser, expand Floor Plans, and double-click Level 1. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar, click Schedule/Quantities. TIP If the View tab of the Design Bar is not active, right-click in the Design Bar, and click View. 3 In the New Schedule dialog, under Category, select Windows. 4 For Name, type Building Window Schedule, and click OK. Define the fields to display as columns in the window schedule 5 In the Schedule Properties dialog, click the Fields tab. 6 Under Available fields, select Comments and click Add. The Comments field is moved under Scheduled fields. 7 Using the same method, add the following fields to the schedule:
■ ■ ■ ■

Count Height Level Type Mark

222 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling

Width

8 Under Scheduled fields, order the fields as shown in the following illustration by selecting them and clicking Move Up or Move Down.

9 Click OK. A schedule is created that contains every window in the building model.

Select a window in the schedule and locate it in the building model 10 Select a cell in the window schedule with the C14 Type Mark, and on the Options Bar, click Show. If no open view shows the selected element, you are prompted to open one that does. 11 If the confirmation dialog displays, click OK to search through relevant views of the building model.

Creating a Window Schedule | 223

The window that corresponds to the information in the schedule row is displayed in a relevant view of the building model.

12 In the Show Element(s) in View dialog, click Close. NOTE By clicking Show, you can display other views of the building model that include the selected window. However, in large building models with many views, this can be a time-consuming process. 13 In the Project Browser, expand Schedules/Quantities, and double-click Building Window Schedule to redisplay the window instance schedule. Group and sort the window schedule by type mark 14 In the drawing area, right-click the schedule, and click View Properties. 15 In the Element Properties dialog, under Other, for Sorting/Grouping, click Edit. 16 On the Sorting/Grouping tab of the Schedule Properties dialog, for Sort by, select Type Mark 17 Click OK twice. The window schedule is displayed, sorted by type mark.

Change type mark from the schedule 18 In the window schedule, change the Type Mark in the first row from 19 to A, and press ENTER. 19 Click OK to confirm that you want to change the type mark for all windows of this type.

224 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling

The type mark is changed to A and the schedule is resorted. Change the schedule from an instance schedule to a type schedule 20 Right-click on the schedule, and click View Properties. 21 In the Element Properties dialog, under Other, for Sorting/Grouping, click Edit. 22 In the Schedule Properties dialog, clear Itemize every instance. 23 Click OK twice. The window type schedule is displayed.

24 Change the Type Mark for the other window types, so that the types are sequentially named from A to H, as shown:

25 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Level 2. 26 Zoom to the lower area of the floor plan to see that the window tags have changed.

27 Click File menu ➤ Save As, and save the exercise file as m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress.rvt.

Creating a Window Schedule | 225

Adding Project Parameters to a Window Schedule
In this lesson, you add schedule columns for parameters that are not standard for the scheduled object. In this case, you want to add columns to the window schedule to describe the detail where head, jamb, and sill conditions for a window can be found. These parameters cannot be shared with other projects and, unlike shared parameters, you cannot use them to tag objects.

Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise, m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress.rvt. Create project parameters 1 In the Project Browser, expand Schedules/Quantities, and double-click Building Window Schedule. 2 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Parameters. 3 In the Project Parameters dialog, click Add to create the new parameter. 4 In the Parameter Properties dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■

Under Categories, select Windows to associate the parameter with the Windows category. Under Parameter Data, for Name, type Head Detail. For Group parameter under, select Construction. Select Type.

5 Click OK. The new project parameter Head Detail is displayed in the Project Parameters dialog. 6 Using the same method, create 2 more window parameters: Jamb Detail and Sill Detail. 7 In the Project Parameter dialog, click OK. Add project parameters to the schedule 8 In the Project Browser, right-click Building Window Schedule, and click Properties. 9 In the Element Properties dialog, under Other, for Fields, click Edit. 10 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog, under Available fields, select the following fields, and click Add to add them to the schedule in order:
■ ■ ■

Head Detail Jamb Detail Sill Detail

11 Use the Move Up control to move the new parameters up in the list, so that they are listed before Comments.

226 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling

12 Click OK twice.

Group headers in the schedule 13 In the schedule, select Head Detail, Jamb Detail, and Sill Detail. TIP To select all 3 headers, click in the Head Detail header, and without releasing the left mouse button, move the cursor over the Jamb Detail and Sill Detail headers. 14 On the Options Bar, click Group. 15 In the grouping field above the detail headers in the schedule, type Window Details. 16 You can add values for the new project parameters directly in the schedule. For example, under Type Mark A, for Head Detail, type 1/A107; for Jamb Detail, type 2/A107; and for Sill Detail, type 3/A107.

17 Save the file.

Adding Project Parameters to a Window Schedule | 227

Creating a Unit-Based Door Schedule with a Filter
In this exercise, you create a unit-based door schedule and use a filter to limit the selection of doors to a single unit. You then hide the column used for the filter, and place the unit-based door schedule on a sheet with the unit plans. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise, m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress.rvt. View Level 1 of the building 1 In the Project Browser, expand Floor Plans, and double-click Unit 18 Plan - Level 1. Create a new door schedule for Unit 18 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar, click Schedule/Quantities. 3 In the New Schedule dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■

Under Category, select Doors. Under Name, type Unit 18 - Door Schedule. Verify that Schedule building components is selected. For Phase, verify that Phase 1 is selected.

4 Click OK. 5 In the Schedule Properties dialog, click the Fields tab. 6 Under Available fields, select the following fields, and click Add to add them to the schedule in order:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Count Family and Type Head Height Sill Height Width Mark

7 Click the Filter tab, and specify the following values for Filter by:
■ ■ ■

Select Mark in the first field. Select contains in the second field. Type U18 in the third field.

This filter checks each door in the project to see which unit it is associated with, and produces a schedule that includes only the doors in Unit 18. 8 Click the Sorting/Grouping tab, and specify the following options:
■ ■

For Sort by, select Family and Type. Clear Itemize every instance (to group the like door types into one row).

9 Click the Formatting tab. 10 Under Fields, select Mark. 11 Under Field formatting, select Hidden field, and click OK.

228 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling

The schedule includes the count and type for doors in Unit 18 only. The Mark field is used to filter the entries in the schedule, but is not included as a column in the schedule.

Place the schedule on a sheet 12 In the Project Browser, expand Sheets (all), and double-click A102 - Unit 18. 13 In the Project Browser, click Unit 18 - Door Schedule, and drag it to the sheet.

14 Click to place the schedule in the upper left corner of the sheet. 15 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 16 Zoom in to see the details of the door schedule.

Modify the width of a schedule column on the sheet 17 Select the door schedule on the sheet. 18 Select the control at the top of the schedule for the Family and Type column and drag it to the right to expand the column width. The wider column makes it easier to read the door descriptions.

Creating a Unit-Based Door Schedule with a Filter | 229

19 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 20 Save the file.

Creating a Room Schedule
In this exercise, you create a room schedule for the first floor plan. You also add programmed rooms to the schedule for the public spaces in the building. NOTE In some cases in this tutorial, partial schedules are shown for illustration purposes. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise, m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress.rvt. Create a room schedule 1 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Level 1. Notice that several rooms have been defined in the floor plan. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar, click Schedule/Quantities. TIP If the View tab of the Design Bar is not active, right-click in the Design Bar, and click View. 3 In the New Schedule dialog, under Category, select Rooms, and click OK. Select the fields to display as columns in the room schedule 4 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog, under Available fields, select Number, and click Add. The Number field is moved under Scheduled fields. 5 Using the same method, add the following fields to the schedule in order:
■ ■ ■

Name Level Area

6 Click the Appearance tab. 7 Under Text, to the right of Header text, select Bold. 8 Click OK. NOTE The Appearance settings only take effect when the schedule is placed on a drawing sheet. The bold header is not noticeable until you place the schedule on a drawing sheet.

230 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling

For 104. and press ENTER. click New. and the Level and Area values are displayed as Not Placed because the room is not placed in the floor plan.Add new rooms to the schedule 9 On the Options Bar. The room Number is U17-46. and press ENTER. select Corridor. type Building Entry. The rooms are displayed at the bottom of the list and numbered sequentially. type Corridor. 101-106. A new row is displayed at the bottom of the schedule. select Storage. add 5 more rooms. 11 Using the same method. for Name. next to Rows. type Storage. For 105. Creating a Room Schedule | 231 . For 102. 12 Edit the room names in the schedule: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ In the schedule. 10 Edit the number to be 101. and press ENTER. For 103. for room 101.

In the Lines field. under Visibility. under Floor Plans. 4 Click OK twice. and modify room names. click the bright green swatch. click Override. For Room Separation. place rooms from a program list. select 9. Specify style for room separation lines 1 In the Project Browser. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise. under Projection/Surface.rvt. In the Line Graphics dialog. type Stair. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress. Under Custom colors. Scheduling Rooms from a Program List In this exercise. For Weight.■ For 106. and click OK. You also change the bounding behavior of walls in the storage areas of the plan. and press ENTER. you add room separation lines. click the Color field. 2 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 3 Change the display of room separation lines: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics dialog. 232 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . double-click Level 1. click the Lines field. expand Lines. 13 Save the file.

click Room. 7 Click to add 2 room separation lines in the corridor at the right side of the drawing. 8 Draw a vertical separation line from the wall endpoint to the new corridor separation line. 9 On the Design Bar. click Room Separation.Add room separation lines 5 Zoom in to the center of the building. click Modify. First. 6 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. Scheduling Rooms from a Program List | 233 . Place rooms from a program list 10 On the Design Bar. draw the horizontal line.

for Room. 11 On the Options Bar. select 101 Building Entry. 12 Click to place the room in the newly defined entry area (lower right). type 2400 mm. 234 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling .Placed rooms are indicated with a crosshair graphic in the drawing. 14 For Offset. for Room. select 102 Storage. 13 On the Options Bar.

19 In the Project Browser. as shown: Scheduling Rooms from a Program List | 235 . 16 Using the same method. Notice the area values for the Storage rooms in the schedule. Place 104 in the space to the left of 103. double-click Level 1. double-click Room Schedule.15 Click to place the room in the area to the left of Building Entry. click Modify. under Floor Plans. These values will change after you change the room bounding behavior of walls in the storage areas. as shown: ■ ■ ■ ■ Place 103 in the space above room 101. Place 106 in the space with the stairs (to the left of room 105). select the 3 small walls (in or adjacent to the storage areas). Change the room bounding behavior of walls 18 In the Project Browser. 17 On the Design Bar. 20 While pressing CTRL. place the following rooms. and zoom in to the Corridor. under Schedules/Quantities. Place 105 in the lower space to the left of the kitchen.

Floor Finish. 22 In the Element Properties dialog. clear Room Bounding. 27 Select Schedule keys. (Element Properties). 31 For Key Name. and for all 3 finishes. The Room Style Schedule displays without data. 28 In the Schedule Properties dialog. for Rows. click Schedule/Quantities. 26 In the New Schedule dialog. and Wall Finish. Create key schedule 25 On the View tab of the Design Bar.21 On the Options Bar. type Units. 29 Click OK to create the new room style schedule. click Modify. 24 Open the Room Schedule. and click Add. 30 On the Options Bar. type As Selected. 236 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . click New. click 23 On the Design Bar. and click OK. while pressing CTRL. under Constraints. select Rooms. under Category. and click OK. Notice that the area for the storage rooms has increased as a result of the change in the room bounding behavior of the walls. under Available fields. select Base Finish.

for Fields. select Room Style. click Edit. 38 Under U17-8. under Schedules/Quantities. 45 In the Element Properties dialog. right-click Room Schedule. and click OK. click (Filter Selection). 40 Zoom to the drawing extents. 36 Click OK twice. Specify the Room Style for Level 1 rooms 39 In the Project Browser. 34 In the Element Properties dialog. add 2 more key names: Service and Public. 37 Open the Room Schedule. under Identity Data. under Other. 42 On the Options Bar.32 Using the same method. select Units. 44 On the Options Bar. click (Element Properties). 33 In the Project Browser. for Available fields. under Floor Plans. All rooms are selected in the floor plan. 43 In the Filter dialog. for Room Style. select Units. Scheduling Rooms from a Program List | 237 . and click OK. select Rooms. 41 Draw a selection box around floor plan. and click Add. double-click Level 1. 35 In the Schedule Properties dialog. click Check None. The Room Style column is added to the Room Schedule. and click Properties. for Room Style.

238 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . for Name. for Color. click OK. type Room Type. 103. Create a room color scheme 1 In the Project Browser. under Graphics. You also edit the colors used in the color scheme and modify the properties of the color scheme legend.rvt. (Duplicate). and double-click Level 1. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise. click the Color Scheme field. 6 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. 48 Save the file. at the warning prompt. 2 Click Settings menu ➤ Color Fill Schemes. and click OK. you create a room color scheme (based on the type of the rooms in the floor plan). click 5 For Title. under Floor Plans. For rooms 102 and 105. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress. and 106. 9 In the Project Browser. Creating a Room Color Diagram In this exercise. select Room Style. 7 Because you are creating a new color scheme. right-click Level 1. 47 Edit the Room Style for rooms 101 through 106: ■ ■ For rooms 101. select Service. and click Properties. expand Floor Plans. click OK. and apply it to the Level 1 view. type Room Type. 8 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. under Views (all). select Public. 104. 4 In the New color scheme dialog. All rooms on Level 1 now have the room style defined. Notice that the Room Style is Units for all rooms on Level 1. The Room Style specification will be used later to determine color fill in a room color diagram.46 Open the Room Schedule. 3 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog.

click Modify. and click OK. 14 Click OK twice. click Edit Color Scheme. under Visibility. When you move the cursor over the drawing area. Creating a Room Color Diagram | 239 . 21 In the second row of the table (Public). 19 On the Options Bar. click Edit.11 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. Add a color scheme legend 15 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Change the fill colors applied to the rooms 18 In the drawing area. select the color legend. 16 Click in the lower right of the drawing area to place the legend. click the value in the Color column. 12 In the Element Properties dialog. in the first row of the Scheme Definition table (none). click Color Scheme Legend. 20 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. under Schemes. 17 On the Design Bar. a legend displays at the tip of the cursor. for Visibility/Graphics Overrides. 13 In the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog. select Room Type. expand Lines. clear Visible. and clear Room Separation.

(Element Properties).22 In the Color dialog. for Size. change the colors for Service and Units to cyan and gray. click Edit/New. click Modify. 24 Click OK. under Graphics. 27 In the Type Properties dialog. and click OK. for Swatch Width. Specify properties for the legend colors and title 25 With the legend still selected. on the Options Bar. select blue. type 25 mm. 30 On the Design Bar. 29 Click OK twice. click 26 In the Element Properties dialog. 240 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . respectively. 23 Using the same method. 28 Under Title Text. type 5 mm. under Custom color.

click Color Scheme Legend. double-click Building Section. Creating a Room Color Diagram | 241 . Turn on the visibility of rooms in the building section view 32 In the Project Browser. right-click Building Section. 33 In the Element Properties dialog. 39 Using the grip at the bottom of the legend. 38 In the Choose Space Type and Color Scheme dialog. NOTE In order for color fills to be displayed in section. volume computations must be enabled from Settings menu ➤ Area and Volume Computations. for Color Scheme. select Room Type. 37 Click to place the legend on the drawing. and select Properties. for Visibility/Graphics Overrides.Create a section color diagram 31 In the Project Browser. under Sections. the legend displays at the tip of the cursor. select Rooms. position the legend horizontally across the bottom of the section view. 34 On the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. Calculation of room volumes can affect project performance. under Graphics. and click OK. under Visibility. As you move the cursor over the drawing area. 35 Click OK twice. Place the color scheme legend on the section 36 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. under Sections. click Edit.

41 On the Options Bar. for Room Style. click Check None. select Public. 46 Click . 42 In the Filter dialog. and the room to the right of the stair on level 1 (Corridor 104). 44 In the Element Properties dialog. 45 While pressing CTRL. and click OK. select all the rooms in the stairwell. select Units. 242 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . click Assign all rooms the Units room style 43 On the Options Bar. 47 In the Element Properties dialog. click . under Identity Data. under Identity Data. for Room Style. and click OK. and click OK. (Filter Selection). select Rooms.40 Draw a selection box around the entire drawing.

under Schedules/Quantities. under Key Name for the new row. Assign the Suites room style to all rooms on levels 3 and 4 53 Open the Building Section. double-click Room Style Schedule. 51 On the Options Bar. type Suites. Creating a Room Color Diagram | 243 . select all the rooms on levels 3 and 4. for Rows. under Identity Data.Assign the penthouse room the service room style 48 Select the penthouse. for Room Style. Add suites as a new room style in the Room Style Schedule 50 In the Project Browser. select Service. 52 In the Room Style Schedule. TIP You may need to use TAB to select the room in the upper right with the entertainment center. click New. 49 In the Element Properties dialog. excluding the stairwell spaces. and click OK. and click . 54 While pressing CTRL.

62 Repeat this process for all rooms that are bounded by the sloping roof: the remaining suites and the public stairs on the top floor. Change room heights 60 In the drawing area. The color fill will extend to the roof. under Volume Computations. under Identity Data. and click OK. 58 In the Area and Volume Computations dialog. but not beyond it. select Areas and Volumes. 59 Under Room Area Computation. and click OK. A new Suites key is added to the color scheme legend. verify that At wall finish is selected. 56 In the Element Properties dialog. 61 Drag the top Control grip above the bounding roof. Use volume calculations to control color fills 57 Click Settings menu ➤ Area and Volume Computations. select the room on the left side of the top floor. for Room Style. 244 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling .55 Click . select Suites. The color fill extends to the roof.

select Level 2. type 0. under Constraints. 64 In the Element Properties dialog. 68 Click . select Loft. and the living room. 72 On the Design Bar. 69 In the Element Properties dialog. 66 Click OK.0. under Constraints. 70 For Limit Offset. the dining room. 71 Click OK. click Modify.Assign the correct heights to the rooms on the first level 63 On the first level. and click 65 For Limit Offset. for Upper Limit. 67 On the first level. . select the stairwell room. Creating a Room Color Diagram | 245 . type -254 mm. select the public room next to the stairs (Corridor 104). for Upper Limit.

rvt. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress. You learn to change the roof family type and create a material takeoff schedule for the roofing materials. Creating a Material Takeoff In this exercise. Create a material takeoff 1 In the Project Browser. 246 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . under 3D Views. You then add formulas to the material takeoff to produce cost estimates. double-click {3D}. you have already determined the roof configuration for the building.73 Save the file. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise.

and click Add. select Roofs. under Category. select Material: Description. 9 Using the same method.2 Zoom in to the roof area of the building. 4 In the Type Selector. select the roof of the building and the smaller roof for the elevator penthouse. Select Grand totals.EPDM. select Family and Type. click Modify. Creating a Material Takeoff | 247 .Insulation on Plywood Deck . 8 On the Fields tab of the Material Takeoff Properties dialog. Clear Itemize every instance. add Material: Description and Material: Area to the Scheduled fields. and click OK. For Then by. 5 On the Design Bar. select Basic Roof : Wood Joist . 6 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Material Takeoff. click Family and Type. 3 While pressing CTRL. 7 In the New Material Takeoff dialog. 10 On the Sorting/Grouping tab: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Sort by. under Available fields.

select Material: Cost. click the Formatting tab. 24 In the Roof Material Takeoff. 17 Click Calculated Value. and click Add.80 248 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . Under Field formatting. 21 Click OK. TIP Double-click the column dividers to expand the columns to fit the text.11 On the Formatting tab: ■ ■ Under Fields. 19 For Type. 13 Expand the column widths to see all of the information. 12 Click OK. 16 In the Material Takeoff Properties dialog. for Name. 15 In the Element Properties dialog. click Edit. right-click Roof Material Takeoff.40 50. for Material: Cost. The /(1000mm^2) is required to remove the formatting of the fields so that the cost estimate value can be calculated. and click Properties. under Available fields. select Calculate totals. select Currency. 18 In the Calculated Value dialog. select Material: Area. under Other. Add cost information and a formula to calculate estimated cost 14 In the Project Browser. type the following values: Material: Description EPDM Plywood Rigid Insulation Material: Cost 16 13. select Calculate totals. type Material: Area*Material: Cost /(1000mm^2). click Estimated Cost. 20 For Formula. and under Fields. 22 In the Material Takeoff Properties dialog. type Estimated Cost. 23 For Field formatting. and click OK twice. The Roof Material Takeoff Schedule displays. for Fields.

ensuring consistency across families and projects. regardless of category. 30 Click OK twice. You draw a travel path line. Digit grouping. which inserts commas after every three digits. Scheduling Shared Parameters In this lesson. 28 For Unit symbol. and reporting the shared parameters. either within family components or within the project template. not just for currency. This lesson demonstrates the solution for this situation and covers the process of setting up shared parameters. for Currency. creating a generic tag to tag the family. 26 In the Project Units dialog. you learn how to use shared parameters to define additional parameters that are not included in predefined instance and type parameters. Add currency formatting to the schedule 25 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Units. The cost fields are formatted correctly. tag the line.Material: Description Wood Joist Material: Cost 5. 29 Select Use digit grouping. select $. and are defined and stored in an external file. for Rounding. you create a shared parameter file. 27 In the Format dialog. An example of the use of shared parameters is the need to add specific parameters to a family component for scheduling and tagging when those parameters are not present by default. and schedule the total distance of each path. adding the shared parameters to a family. verify that 2 decimal places is selected. Adding shared parameters to a family allows you to create a tag and schedule to track this specific information. These shared parameters can be added to any family. click the Format value. Creating a Shared Parameter File In this exercise. 31 Save the file. can be used for any number-based parameter. you create an exiting plan for the building. Their values may also be aggregated and reported within Revit Architecture multi-category schedules. Scheduling Shared Parameters | 249 .35 The Estimated cost is calculated. In this lesson.

type Path ID. and save the exercise file as m_Freighthouse_Flats-Shared Parameters_in_progress. for Name. click Create. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Shared Parameters. under Floor Plans.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. type Exiting. type OfficeStandardsParameters. 4 In the left pane of the Create Shared Parameter File dialog. for Name. and click OK. 250 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . 5 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog. under Groups. select Length. click New.txt. 2 Click File menu ➤ Shared Parameters. click New. type Travel Distance. NOTE Shared parameter files are typically stored at a network location for use in all projects. 3 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog. 9 Under Parameters. 8 In the Parameter Properties dialog.rvt. click New. click Training Files. double-click Exiting Plan-Level 1. for Type of Parameter.rvt. and click OK. 7 Under Parameters. click Training Files. 12 Click File menu ➤ Save As. for File name. 11 Click OK twice. 1 In the Project Browser. In the left pane of the Open dialog. for Name. 10 In the Parameter Properties dialog. and click Save. 6 In the New Parameter Group dialog.

7 In the Parameter Properties dialog. 3 On the Design Bar. and click OK. and click OK. and open Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Travel Line. and click OK. click Add. select Constraints. you add the shared parameters you created to a family file. 10 Using the same method. 8 Select Instance. 1 Click File menu ➤ Open. the Load into Projects dialog displays for you to select the project. type Length. click Add. Click Training Files.rfa. 12 In the Family Types dialog.rvt. and click OK. If you have multiple projects open.Adding Shared Parameters to a Family In this exercise. verify that Parameter group is Exiting and that Path ID is selected. in the Load into Projects dialog. add Travel Distance as a shared parameter. select Shared parameter. click Family Types. Adding Shared Parameters to a Family | 251 . under Parameter Type. 9 In the Family Types dialog. and click Select. You then create a generic tag to tag the family. under Dimensions. under Parameters. 2 In the Left pane of the Open dialog. 5 In the Parameter Properties dialog. under Parameter Data. for Travel Distance Formula. 11 Click OK. 13 Click Apply. following the equals symbol (=).rvt. select m_Freighthouse_Flats-Shared Parameters_in_progress. under Parameters. for Group parameter under. otherwise the family loads into the current project. 4 In the Family Types dialog. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Shared Parameters_in_progress. Create a tag using shared parameters 16 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Annotation Symbol. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise. 14 On the Design Bar. 6 In the Shared Parameters dialog. The Family Types dialog displays the parameters that are currently available for this family category. click Load into Projects. 15 If necessary. group it under Dimensions. and select Instance.

22 In the Parameter Properties dialog. 25 In the Edit Label dialog. click (Add Parameter). 19 On the Design Bar. 252 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . click Label. select Travel Distance. and open Metric\Templates\M_Generic Tag. under Category Parameters. click Training Files. click Select. 20 Click the intersection of the reference planes. and use the same method to select the Path ID parameter. click parameter(s) to label). 24 Click OK twice. and click OK.rft. (Add 26 On the Design Bar. 18 Zoom in to the intersection of the reference planes. select Travel Distance. click Label.17 In the left pane of the New Annotation Symbol dialog. 21 In the Edit Label dialog. 27 Click above the intersection of the reference planes. under Parameters. 23 In the Shared Parameters dialog.

click Load into Projects. 31 Click File ➤ Save As. and press DELETE. and move it down. Adding Shared Parameters to a Family | 253 . 30 Select the Note in the upper left area of the drawing window.rvt is selected. verify that m_Freighthouse_Flats-Shared Parameters_in_Progress. 35 Save the file. 33 On the Design Bar. 29 In the drawing window. select Path ID. 32 In the Save As dialog.28 On the Design Bar. for File Name. so that it is positioned just above Travel Distance. and click Save.rfa. click Modify. and click OK. type M_Travel Distance Tag. 34 On the Load into Projects dialog.

Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise. Create Level 1 exiting travel path 1 In the Project Browser. double-click Exiting Plan . 4 On the Options Bar. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Shared Parameters_in_progress. 3 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 254 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . click Component. You then tag the travel lines and give them a path ID. After the lines are tagged. under Floor Plans. select Chain.Tagging. 2 Zoom in to the corridor. you place the travel line family in the Level 1 and Level 2 exiting plans.rvt. you create a schedule that totals the travel distances in each exiting plan for each path ID. 5 Specify a start point for the path at the left end of the corridor as shown. above the exterior door as shown. 6 Move the cursor to the right. and Scheduling a Family with Shared Parameters In this exercise. and click in the center of the corridor.Placing.Level 1.

double click Exiting Plan . type 1-1. and click (Element Properties). click Modify. verify that Chain is selected. click Modify. 18 Click in the horizontal corridor below the door on the right side of the floor plan. click Component. 12 On the Design Bar.Level 2. and click outside of the building. for Path ID. 17 On the Options Bar. and click to specify the first segment of the path as shown. 14 In the Element Properties dialog. 11 Select each of the travel path lines. under Constraints. click Tag ➤ By Category. and click OK. Create Level 2 exiting travel path 15 In the Project Browser. 8 On the Design Bar.Tagging. through the door. 9 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. move the cursor near the right corner.7 Move the cursor down. Placing. and Scheduling a Family with Shared Parameters | 255 . 13 While pressing CTRL. 16 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 10 On the Options Bar. select the 2 dashed travel lines. clear Leader. under Floor Plans.

23 Move the cursor down. 21 On the Design Bar. and click. 22 Click at the starting point of the previous path. 20 On the Design Bar. move the cursor to the left. click Modify. click Component.19 Move the cursor up through the door. 256 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . and click in the stair. and click above the door to the stair.

26 Select each of the travel path lines. type 2-1. Create a schedule to total the paths on each plan 31 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Schedule/Quantities. under Constraints.Tagging. click Modify. 33 For Name. for Path ID. Placing. 32 In the New Schedule dialog. click Tag ➤ By Category. type Level 1 Exit Distance. 28 While pressing CTRL. and click OK. verify that <Multi-Category> is selected.24 On the Design Bar. 27 On the Design Bar. 30 Using the same method. and Scheduling a Family with Shared Parameters | 257 . . and click 29 In the Element Properties dialog. specify the Path ID for the right exit path to 2-2. select the 2 dashed travel lines for the left exit path. 25 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. under Category. and click OK. click Modify.

48 In the Schedule Properties dialog. and click Add. 36 For Filter by. 40 Click the Formatting tab. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Uni-Format. type 2-. 44 In the Project Browser. The Level 2 Exit Distance schedule displays. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. 49 Click OK twice. 39 Clear Itemize every instance. you create a wall schedule that includes columns for the Uniformat Assembly Codes and assembly descriptions of the scheduled walls. you schedule Uniformat Assembly Codes as they are applied to Revit Architecture components. select Path ID. 45 In the Rename View dialog. 258 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . select Travel Distance.rvt. right-click Level 1 Exit Distance. and under Field formatting. select Path ID and Travel Distance. 50 Save the file. 42 Click OK. while pressing CTRL. 38 For Sort by. and click Rename. for Filter. type Level 2 Exit Distance. 35 Click the Filter tab. under Schedules/Quantities. and click Properties. type 1-. select Path ID. click Edit. select Calculate totals. under Available fields. for Filter by. right-click Copy of Level 1 Exit Distance. in the second field.34 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. 37 Click the Sorting/Grouping tab. 41 Under Fields. in the third field. under Other. Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes In this lesson. The Level 1 Exit Distance schedule displays. in the first field. right-click Level 2 Exit Distance. click Training Files. 46 In the Project Browser. and in the third field. Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes and Descriptions In this exercise. and click OK. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 43 In the Project Browser. 47 In the Element Properties dialog. In the left pane of the Open dialog. select contains.

click Schedule/Quantities. right-click the Design Bar. select the following fields. and click Properties. 8 In the Choose Assembly Code dialog.Interiors ➤ C10 . under Categories.Partitions . expand Families ➤ Walls ➤ Basic Wall. and click . under Identity Data. for Assembly Code. 3 In the Schedule Properties dialog. and click Add to add them to the schedule in order: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Area Volume Width Length Assembly Code Assembly Description 5 Click OK to complete the schedule. and click View. select Walls. and click OK. 4 Under Available fields. click the Value field.Interior Construction ➤ C1010 . Assign an assembly code to a wall type in the project 6 In the Project Browser. TIP If the View tab of the Design Bar is not active. expand C .Drywall w/ Metal Stud.Create a wall schedule 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes and Descriptions | 259 .Partitions ➤ C1010100 . right-click Generic . 9 Click OK twice. and select C1010145 . 10 In the schedule.Fixed Partitions. 7 In the Type Properties dialog.152 mm. click the Fields tab. 2 In the New Schedule dialog. expand the Assembly Description column to see the description.

and click Next. 1 On the File menu.mdb). select a location for the database file. Exporting Project Information with ODBC In this lesson. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.mdb. you learn how to export project information into a Microsoft® Access 2000 database. 12 Open the database in Microsoft Access. 4 In the Create New Data Source dialog. 8 In the New Database dialog. 2 In the Select Data Source dialog. 11 Click OK 3 times. click OK. and click OK to create the database. click Create. click the File Data Source tab. the database display may be different than that shown. under Database. 9 Under Directories. click Export ➤ ODBC Database. and click Next. 6 Click Finish. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Uni-Format. select the Microsoft Access Driver (*. NOTE Depending on your version of Microsoft Access. click Training Files.rvt. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you learn how to export project information to an ODBC (Open DataBase Connectivity) compatible database.11 Close the exercise file. for Database Name. 10 When the confirmation dialog displays. 5 Type RevitDSN for the name of the file data source. type Revit_Project. The process that you use to export the database is similar for any other ODBC-compliant database. 7 In the ODBC Microsoft Access Setup dialog. 260 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . Exporting Schedule Information to Microsoft Access In this exercise. 3 Click New.

as long as the category is one of the categories that Revit Architecture exports. a table is also created for each key schedule in a project. instance tables include a TypeId column containing the ID of the instance’s type. This table contains one row for each Uniformat Assembly Code. For example.Revit Architecture creates 2 tables for the following categories of elements (see below): one that lists all of the element instances in a project and one that lists all of the element types in a project. In addition to the tables for instances and types in a category. The columns of the table are Assembly Code and Assembly Description. A unique element ID is used to identify exported elements. which is used for choosing one of the keys from the key schedule. 13 Close the exercise file. Additionally. tables that list instances only are created for levels and rooms because these categories do not have types. Elements IDs are also used to establish relationships between elements in different tables. The table of types includes an Assembly Code column that references the Assembly Codes table. Exporting Schedule Information to Microsoft Access | 261 . One final table is also exported: Assembly Codes. Each key schedule gives elements in its category a new parameter. in addition to the Id column. and some instance tables include a RoomId column containing the ID of the room that the instance is in. The exported columns are the same as the columns in the key schedule. so that each table of elements includes an Id column. These parameters are also exported and contain the ID of the key element.

262 .

or you can change the base elevation and add its value to the levels above it. as the base elevation of most projects is rarely at 0 mm. you learn how to change the base elevation of a project. you learn how to relocate the base elevation of a project. 263 . and how to annotate and dimension your Revit Architecture 2009 projects. You can change the base elevation without changing the elevation value of every other level in the project.Annotating and Dimensioning 6 In this tutorial. Changing the Base Elevation of a Project In this lesson. You accomplish this in Revit Architecture by defining levels as either project or shared levels.

Project levels report elevation relative to other levels in the project

264 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

Shared levels report elevation relative to the base height

Relocating a Project
In this exercise, you relocate the base elevation of a building from 0 m to 10000 m. After you define the building levels as shared and relocate the project, the height of the elevations above Level 1 report height relative to Level 1.

Relocating a Project | 265

Training File
■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open m_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim.rvt.

Define Level 1 as a shared level 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Elevations (Building Elevation), and double-click South. Level 1 displays an elevation value of 0 mm. The levels in the project are not shared, so changing the height Level 1 would change it only in relation to the other levels in the project.

266 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

2 Select the Level 1 line to display it as red. 3 On the Options Bar, click (Element Properties).

4 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New. In order for the levels to report height relative to the new base elevation after the project is relocated, you must set the Elevation Base parameter to Shared. If you did that now, the parameter for all the levels in the project would change. However, to better demonstrate how shared levels work, only the Elevation Base parameter of Level 1 is shared at this time, and you create a new shared level type for only Level 1. 5 In the Type Properties dialog:
■ ■ ■

Click Duplicate. In the Name dialog, type 8 mm Head - Shared Elevation, and click OK. Under Constraints, for Elevation Base, select Shared.

6 Click OK twice. Relocate the project 7 Click Tools menu ➤ Project Position/Orientation ➤ Relocate this Project. 8 Select the Level 1 line. By selecting the Level 1 line, you specify the point (0 mm) from which you want to relocate the project. 9 Move the cursor above the elevation line, type 10000 mm, and press ENTER. By typing 10000 mm in this step, you specify the new location of the project. 10 On the View menu, click Zoom ➤ Zoom All To Fit. The south elevation is displayed. The base elevation now reads 10000 mm. The elevation of the other levels remains the same.

Relocating a Project | 267

Define the remaining project levels as shared 11 Select the Loft level line. 12 In the Type Selector, select Level : 8 mm Head - Shared Elevation. 13 On the Design Bar, click Modify. The reported value of the Loft level changes to take the new base elevation value into consideration.

14 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, double-click North. The changes in elevation have propagated to this view, as well as other views of the building model.

268 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

15 Define the remaining levels as shared:
■ ■ ■

While pressing CTRL, select Levels 2-4, the Penthouse level, and the Roof Plan level. In the Type Selector, select Level : 8 mm Head - Shared Elevation. On the Design Bar, click Modify. All the building levels now report elevations relative to the base elevation.

Relocating a Project | 269

16 If you want to save your changes, click File menu ➤ Save As, and save the exercise file with a unique name. 17 Proceed to the next lesson, Dimensioning on page 270.

Dimensioning
In this lesson, you learn how to create permanent dimensions to control and document your building models. In Revit Architecture, there are 2 types of dimensions: temporary and permanent. Temporary dimensions display automatically when you create and insert components. Permanent dimensions must be explicitly created, except when you sketch profiles to complete families. In this case, permanent dimensions are created automatically, although you must turn on their visibility to view them.

Creating Dimensions
In this exercise, you learn how to use dimensioning tools and constraints in Revit Architecture to dimension and space planter boxes on the north side of the building. You place linear, multi-segmented, radial, and angular dimensions, and learn to work with dimensioning constraints to control placement of elements in the model.

270 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

Linear and multi-segmented dimensions

Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise, Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim.rvt Place an overall linear dimension 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click Level 1.

2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Dimension. The default dimensioning options display on the Options Bar. By default, dimensions are aligned, snap to wall centerlines, and are created by selecting individual reference points.

3 Move the cursor over the curtain wall on the top left side of the view, and when a blue dashed line displays along the left side of the curtain wall, select it.

Creating Dimensions | 271

4 Move the cursor over the curtain wall on the top right side of the view, and when a blue dashed line displays along the right side of the curtain wall, select it.

5 Move the cursor above the view, and click to place the dimension.

272 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

6 Click the lock that displays on the dimension string to lock the dimension. The lock displays as locked, indicating that you cannot change the distance between the curtain walls without first unlocking the dimension. Only aligned and angular permanent dimensions can be constrained in this way.

7 On the Design Bar, click Modify. Place a multi-segmented dimension 8 On the Design Bar, click Dimension. 9 Select the left side of the left curtain wall as you did in a previous step, and move the cursor over the left endpoint of the first planter to the right. 10 Press TAB until the left endpoint of the planter displays, and select it. 11 Using the same method, select the right endpoint of the planter.

Creating Dimensions | 273

12 On the Options Bar, for Prefer, select Wall Faces. 13 Move the cursor to the planter on the right, and select its left exterior face.

14 Move the cursor to the right, and continue to select the endpoints and faces of the planters. 15 After you select the reference points on the final planter, select the right side of the curtain wall. 16 Move the cursor up, above the plan view of the building, but below the first dimension that you placed, and click to place the multi-segmented dimension.

Make the dimension segments equal to space the planters at equal distances 17 With the multi-segmented dimension selected, click to make all the dimension segments equal and reposition the planters equal distances apart from one another.

18 On the Basics tab, click Modify.

274 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

Create a baseline dimension style 19 Select the dimension string, and on the Options Bar, click 20 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New. 21 In the Type Properties dialog, click Duplicate. 22 In the Name dialog, enter Linear - 2.5 mm Arial - Baseline, and click OK. 23 In the Type Properties dialog, under Graphics, for Dimension String Type, select Baseline. Create an ordinate dimension style 24 In the Type Properties dialog, click Duplicate. 25 In the Name dialog, enter Linear - 2.5 mm Arial - Ordinate, and click OK. 26 In the Type Properties dialog, for Dimension String Type, select Ordinate. 27 Click OK twice. View and apply the new dimension styles 28 Zoom in to the dimension string. The dimensions start from 0 mm and increase moving away from the origin. .

29 Select the dimension string, and in the Type Selector, select Linear - 2.5 mm Arial - Baseline. The dimensions are stacked and measure from the same baseline.

Creating Dimensions | 275

30 In the Type Selector, select Linear - 2.5 mm Arial to return to the original dimension style. Add text below a permanent dimension You can add supplemental text above, below, to the left, or to the right of a permanent dimension value. 31 Click the dimension value to which you want to add text, for example Text dialog displays. 33 Under Text Fields, for Below, enter Planter. 34 Click OK. . The Dimension

32 In the Dimension Text dialog, under Dimension Value, verify that Use Actual Value is selected.

35 On the Design Bar, click Modify. Place a radial dimension with a Typ. suffix 36 Zoom to the planter between grid lines 3 and 4.

276 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

37 On the Design Bar, click Dimension. 38 On the Options Bar:
■ ■

Click

(Radial).

For Prefer, select Wall faces.

39 Move the cursor over the left exterior curved face of the planter until it highlights, and select it. 40 Move the cursor outside the wall, and specify a point to place the dimension. 41 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Modify.

42 Select the radial dimension. 43 Select the blue square grip that displays under the dimension value and drag it slightly up and to the right.

44 With the dimension still selected, click the dimension text. 45 In the Dimension Text dialog, for Suffix, type Typ., and click OK. 46 On the Basics tab, click Modify.

Creating Dimensions | 277

Place an angular dimension 47 Zoom to the planter near grid line 5.

48 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Dimension. 49 On the Options Bar:
■ ■

Click

(Angular).

For Prefer, verify that Wall faces is selected.

50 Select the horizontal line. This line is the edge of a mass that represents the neighboring building.

278 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

51 Select the left exterior face of the planter.

52 Move the cursor to the left to resize the dimension arc, and click to place the dimension. 53 On the Basics tab, click Modify.

54 Proceed to the next exercise, Creating Automatic Wall Dimensions on page 279.

Creating Automatic Wall Dimensions
In this exercise, you learn to automatically dimension a linear wall and its openings (windows) on the Level 3 floor plan of the building. When you dimension the wall, you select only the wall, instead of the wall and each individual opening reference point. This automatic dimensioning option provides a convenient way to quickly dimension walls with multiple openings.

Creating Automatic Wall Dimensions | 279

Automatic wall dimension

Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise, Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim.rvt Open the Level 3 floor plan view 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click Level 3. You will dimension the short bottom horizontal wall that includes 3 windows.

Select automatic dimensioning options 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Dimension. 3 On the Options Bar:
■ ■ ■

For Prefer, select Wall centerlines. For Pick, select Entire Walls. Click Options.

4 In the Auto Dimension Options dialog:

Under Select references, select Openings, and select Widths.

280 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

Click OK. These options ensure that the wall dimension includes the openings, and that the opening widths are referenced in the overall dimension string.

Place the dimension 5 Select the bottom exterior wall.

6 Move the cursor down below the plan view, and click to place the automatic dimension string.

7 On the Basics tab, click Modify.

8 Proceed to the next exercise, Controlling Witness Lines on page 281.

Controlling Witness Lines
In this exercise, you learn to override dimension witness line settings as you place dimensions, and learn how to change the location of witness lines after you place dimensions. When you place dimensions, you specify their origin on the Options Bar. However, in some cases, you may need to override their settings on an instance basis. For example, for a multi-segmented dimension, you may want to locate the two outermost witness lines on the exterior face of each wall, where the witness lines referring to interior walls would be located on the centerline of each wall. Training File

Controlling Witness Lines | 281

Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise, Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim.rvt Override default dimension witness lines 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click Level 1. 2 Zoom to the planter on which you placed a radial dimension.

3 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Dimension. 4 On the Options Bar:
■ ■

For Prefer, verify Wall centerlines is selected. For Pick, select Individual References.

5 Move the cursor over the left side of the planter.

6 Press TAB to cycle through the selection options until the left face of the planter highlights, and select it.

282 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

7 Using the same method, select the right edge of the planter, move the cursor down, and click to place the dimension.

8 Move the cursor over the bottom of the planter on which you placed the angular dimension. 9 Press TAB until the bottom left endpoint is highlighted, and select it.

10 Using the same method, select the bottom right endpoint. 11 Move the cursor down, and specify a point to place the dimension.

Controlling Witness Lines | 283

Dimension the partition walls to centerlines 12 On the Basics tab, click Dimension. 13 On the Options Bar, for Prefer, select Wall centerlines. 14 Move the cursor over the left partition wall in the top left corner of the plan, and when the wall centerline highlights, select it.

284 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

15 Moving the cursor to the right, select the centerline of each of the 6 remaining partition walls, and click to place the dimension. 16 On the Design Bar, click Modify. Adjust the witness line location on the end dimensions to align them to the faces of wall 17 Select the dimension that you just placed, and zoom in on the right end of the dimension. 18 While pressing SHIFT, select the green grip that displays in the middle of the tick mark, and drag the dimension down the wall.

Controlling Witness Lines | 285

19 Release SHIFT, select the top blue grip and drag it up to create a witness line gap.

20 Click the blue middle grip, drag it to the right, and press TAB until the dimension aligns with the outer face of the partition wall.

21 Zoom to the partition wall on the left side of the plan, and using the same methods, create a witness line gap and align the dimension to the outer left face of the wall. 22 On the Basics tab, click Modify. 23 Proceed to the next exercise, Creating an Office Standard Dimension Type from Existing Dimensions on page 286.

Creating an Office Standard Dimension Type from Existing Dimensions
In this exercise, you learn how to duplicate the dimension family type of dimension on the floor plan and then modify its parameters to create an office standard dimension style. After you create the new family type, you change the dimension tick mark, text font, and text size parameters to create dimensions that better conform to your office standards.

286 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

Angular and linear dimensions with office standard text and arrows

Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise, Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim.rvt Duplicate an existing dimension type 1 On the Level 1 floor plan, zoom to the planter between grid lines 3 and 4, and select the lower dimension.

2 Click

(Element Properties).

3 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New. 4 In the Type Properties dialog, click Duplicate. 5 In the Name dialog, type Office Standard, and click OK. Modify the parameters of the new Office Standard type 6 In the Type Properties dialog:
■ ■

Under Graphics, for Tick Mark, select Arrow 30 Degree. Under Text, for Text Size, type 3.2 mm.

Creating an Office Standard Dimension Type from Existing Dimensions | 287

For Text Font, select CityBlueprint. NOTE Fonts that are available in this list are the Windows fonts installed on your system. If CityBlueprint does not display in the list, select another font.

Click OK twice.

7 On the Basics tab, click Modify. The dimension that you selected previously now displays the new Office Standard family type.

8 Move the cursor to the planter on the right, and select the bottom dimension.

9 In the Type Selector, select Linear Dimension Style: Office Standard. 10 On the Basics tab, click Modify.

288 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

11 Using the same method, select the angular dimension on the planter, create a new angular dimension type, and modify it to use the office standard parameters.

12 Proceed to the next lesson, Creating Text Annotation on page 289.

Creating Text Annotation
In this lesson, you add text notes on the Level 1 floor plan of the building. You create a new office standard text note type by duplicating the family type of a note on the floor plan. You learn how to change the text font and size of text notes, and how to add leaders to the text notes.

Creating Text Annotation | 289

Adding Text Notes to the Floor Plan
In this exercise, you add text notes to the Level 1 floor plan. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise, Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim.rvt Add a text note 1 On the Level 1 floor plan, zoom to the planter near grid line 5.

2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Text. 3 On the Options Bar, for Leader, click (None).

4 Move the cursor above grid line 4, but below the upper dimension string, and click and drag to create a text box.

290 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

5 In the text box, type EXISTING BUILDING.

Create a new text note family type by duplicating the existing type 6 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 7 Select the text box, and click .

8 In the Element Properties dialog box, click Edit/New. 9 In the Type Properties dialog, click Duplicate. 10 In the Name dialog box, type 6 mm Arial Notes, and click OK. 11 Under Text, for Text Size, type 6 mm, and click OK. 12 In the Element Properties dialog, under Graphics, select Arc Leaders, and click OK.

Adding Text Notes to the Floor Plan | 291

You may have to move the text box to avoid overlapping other elements on the floor plan. If so, select and drag the top left blue symbol to relocate the text box.

Create a text box with leaders 13 On the Design Bar, click Text. 14 Create another text box to the right of grid line 4, and type Planting Bed. 15 On the Design Bar, click Modify.

16 Select the Planting Bed text box.

292 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

17 On the Options Bar:

Click (Add Right Arc Leader). A downward pointing leader displays on the right side of the Planting Bed text box. Click (Add Left Arc Leader). Another leader displays on the left side of the Planting Bed text box.

Reposition the leaders 18 Select the blue grip at the end of the right leader, and drag it down to point to the bottom of the planter. 19 Select the blue grip at the end of the left leader, and drag it down to point to the bottom of the planter. 20 On the Design Bar, click Modify.

21 Select the Planting Bed text box to select both the text and leaders, and click 22 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New. 23 In the Type Properties dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■

.

Click Rename. In the Rename dialog, for New, type Standard Notes, and click OK. Under Text, for Text Font, select CityBlueprint. Under Graphics, for Leader Arrowhead, select Arrow 30 Degree. Click OK twice.

24 On the Design Bar, click Modify.

Adding Text Notes to the Floor Plan | 293

Add another note using the Standard Note type 25 On the Design Bar, click Text. 26 In the Type Selector, select Text: Standard Notes. 27 On the Options Bar, for Leader, click (Arc).

28 Click the inside bottom face of the rounded planter near grid line 3.

29 Move the cursor up and to the right, over the Planting Bed text. 30 When blue dashed lines that indicate it is aligned with the Planting Bed text, click to place the text box.

294 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

31 Click in the text box, and type 457 mm Conc. Wall, and click Modify.

32 If you want to save your changes, click File menu ➤ Save As, and save the exercise file with a unique name. 33 Close the exercise file without saving your changes.

Adding Text Notes to the Floor Plan | 295

296

The "drafted" detail that you create is not parametrically linked to the building model. you must define the view in which you want to create a detail. You can detail directly in a view of the building information model. you learn how to create details in Revit Architecture 2009. You define that view by creating a callout view within a section view. Creating a Detail from a Building Model In this lesson. you use a separate drafting view in which to create the detail.Detailing 7 In this tutorial. In order to detail from the building model. plywood. using detail components to represent materials like lumber. like a standard door header condition. you trace over the building model geometry. 297 . you detail the roof overhang of a project building. In the callout view. and metal studs. and then complete the detail by adding break lines and text notes. These components display at the required scale. add detail components. For a detail that you do not want to associate with the model.

that you add to the view are visible only in this view. as well as detail lines. 7 In the drawing area. which means that all detail components. click Training Files. region objects. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. navigate to Metric\Families\m_Corrugated Metal.rvt. After you add components. for Graphics ➤ Display Model. 5 In the alert dialog. You load detail components. click in the space below the roof overhang to place the component.rfa. 2 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. 6 In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Detail Component. Load and place a detail component 4 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.Detailing the View In this exercise. click Training Files. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. you add notes and dimensions to the detail view. and click OK. The detail components that you add to the view are two-dimensional family objects. you detail the view of the roof edge. Exact location is not important. select As underlay. The roof overhang detail displays. and use the model as an underlay for the detail. Display a detail view 1 In the upper left corner of the building model. and click Open. click Yes to load a Detail Items family. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 298 | Chapter 7 Detailing . double-click the detail callout head. and insulation objects. They are also view specific. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing.

click Modify. and click OK.5mm. Place a repeating detail 9 On the Design Bar. click Duplicate. 17 In the drawing area. select Corrugated Metal. click Edit/New. enter Corrugated Metal Siding. You load and place the component so that it is in the project to use in a repeating detail. 14 In the Type Properties dialog. 16 Click OK twice. 18 Move the cursor up to generate the graphics for the repeating detail. NOTE The detail component endpoint may not coincide with the geometry extents. 19 On the Design Bar. Specify a point high enough so the siding reaches the underside of the roof overhang.8 Delete the component. 12 In the Type Properties dialog. for Pattern ➤ Detail. Detailing the View | 299 . enter 406. click (Element Properties). 15 For Spacing. 13 In the Name dialog. 11 In the Element Properties dialog. click the bottom of the exterior wall to select the start point. click Repeating Detail. 10 On the Options Bar.

Select the endpoint of the geometry of the corrugated metal component as the move start point.rfa. click Detail Component. 300 | Chapter 7 Detailing . click (Move). and on the Edit toolbar. 24 In the Type Selector. 22 On the Options Bar. click Load. navigate to Metric\Families\Detail Components\Div 06-Wood and Plastic\06100-Rough Carpentry\06160-Sheathing\M_Plywood-Section. 23 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog. ■ ■ Click Modify. TIP You may need to use the Move command to adjust the position of the plywood. Select the bottom edge of the roof joist as the move end point. click Training Files. 25 Place the plywood component to the right of the metal component as shown in the following illustration. and click Open. Add lumber detail components 21 On the Design Bar.20 Move the component end point: ■ ■ Select the corrugated metal component. verify that M_Plywood-Section 19mm is selected.

and click Open. click Detail Component. you load them as a group from a single file. select M_Nominal Cut Lumber-Section : 50 x 200mm Nominal. 33 In the Type Selector. 29 On the Design Bar. and place it in the detail view as shown. Load components as a group 26 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load File as Group. click Training Files. 31 To properly orient the component. select M_Nominal Cut Lumber-Section : 50 x 150mm Nominal. Detailing the View | 301 . press SPACEBAR 3 times.rvt. 27 In the left pane of the Load File as Group dialog.Because you still have several components to load. 30 In the Type Selector. navigate to Metric\Families\Detail Components\m_Roof Edge Components. 28 In the Duplicate Types dialog. click OK. 32 Click the top right corner of the plywood to select the insertion point.

36 Place the wallboard component as shown. The wallboard segment is now on the underside of the roof joist. 35 On the Options Bar. 38 Select the horizontal segment. select Chain. 37 Click Modify. NOTE You can also press SPACEBAR as you place the component to flip the justification. click the Flip instance arrows. 302 | Chapter 7 Detailing . and click Modify.Add wallboard detail component 34 In the Type Selector. select M_Gypsum Wallboard-Section : 16mm.

Detailing the View | 303 . 42 Click Modify. ■ Click Modify. click (Move). Select the right midpoint of the 50 x 200mm component as the move end point. click Detail Component. 43 Move the upper segment: ■ ■ ■ Select the upper segment of insulation. select to near side. click Insulation. Add lumber components 44 On the Design Bar.Add insulation 39 On the Design Bar. as shown. For Offset. 40 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ For Width. enter 140mm. and on the Edit toolbar. Select the left midpoint of the 50 x 200mm component as the move start point. 41 Place 2 segments of insulation.

they are view specific. 46 Click to place the component at the lower left corner of the roof overhang as shown. Like detail components. Add detail lines 1 On the Design Bar. select M_Rigid Insulation-Section : 63mm. select M_Plywood-Section : 19mm. click Detail Lines. select Thin Lines. 2 In the Type Selector. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. as shown. select M_Nominal Cut Lumber-Section : 50 x 300mm Nominal. 52 Proceed to the next exercise. 48 Place the component directly above the 50 x 200mm component. Add rigid insulation 49 In the Type Selector. 47 In the Type Selector. and lock the component. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. you add lines to your detail.rvt. 304 | Chapter 7 Detailing . meaning they display only in this view. 50 Add the insulation above the plywood you just placed. 3 Sketch a detail line from the lower right corner of the 50 x 300mm component to the lower left corner of the 50 x 200mm component. Adding Detail Lines In this exercise. 51 Click Modify.45 In the Type Selector. Adding Detail Lines on page 304.

4 Click Modify. enter 10mm. 8 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). Trim and extend the lines as necessary to get the desired result. select Thin Lines. click Detail Lines. Add offset lines 6 On the Design Bar. 9 Select the lines at the top of the 50 x 300mm component and the roof joist. select Medium Lines. enter 10mm. For Offset. For Offset. as shown. 7 In the Type Selector. 10 On the Design Bar. drag the endpoint up to the top of the 50 x 200mm component. and press ENTER. 13 Add detail lines around the 50 x 300mm component. click Detail Lines. 11 In the Type Selector. 5 Select the vertical plywood component. 12 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). and press ENTER. as shown. Adding Detail Lines | 305 .

click (Draw). select Chain. 306 | Chapter 7 Detailing . and clear Chain. and draw the detail lines as shown. 16 On the Options Bar. as shown. 17 Draw a horizontal line as shown. 15 Draw a small diagonal line at the bottom left corner of the 50 x 300mm component.Draw detail lines 14 On the Options Bar.

23 In the Element Properties dialog. draw the detail lines as shown.18 In the Type Selector. 20 Move the top horizontal line down so that it overlays the Penthouse level line. the model elements such as walls and floors no longer display in this view. When you turn the display model off. enter 10mm. Click (Pick Lines). select Do not display. 28 Select the interior edge of the vertical segment of gypsum wallboard. select Thin Lines. right-click Roof Overhang Detail. and click Hide in view ➤ Elements. select the Penthouse level line. 19 Zoom in to the area where the roof joist and the corrugated metal component abut. click Add a vapor barrier 25 On the Design Bar. select Vapor Barrier. and click Properties. Adding Detail Lines | 307 . Modify display properties 21 In the drawing area. for Graphics ➤ Display Model. 27 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ➤ Hide Crop Region. 26 In the Type Selector. right-click. and then select the interior edge of the horizontal segment. 22 In the Project Browser. click Detail Lines. For Offset. 24 On the View Control Bar. What remains are the detail components and lines that you added. and click OK. under Views ➤ Detail Views (Detail). and press ENTER.

select the break line and use the shape handle grips to modify it. click Detail Component. press SPACEBAR as necessary. Adding Text Notes on page 308. 32 Click Modify. you add text notes to complete the detail. 30 In the Type Selector. 34 Proceed to the next exercise. Training File 308 | Chapter 7 Detailing . 31 Add break lines at the bottom and the right of the detail. TIP To rotate the break line as you place it. 33 If a break line does not completely mask the portion of the detail that it is intended to mask.29 On the Design Bar. Adding Text Notes In this exercise. select M_Break Line.

m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. 2 On the Options Bar. Add text notes to the detail 1 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 5 Click the left outer edge of the 50 x 300mm component. and click to place the dimension. 3 Add the leaders and notes as shown: Click in the detail to specify the location of the arrow. Click again to specify the location of the text box. Adding Text Notes | 309 .Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. click Dimension. Click in the drawing area to end the text insertion command. click the left edge of the corrugated metal component. 6 Click Modify. Enter the text. click Text.rvt. Add a dimension to the detail 4 On the Design Bar. click ■ ■ ■ ■ (Arc) to create an arced leader.

on the Options Bar. enter Roof Overhang Detail . (Filter Selection). 8 In the Dimension Text dialog. right-click. 3 In the Rename View dialog.rvt. right-click. Remove text notes 4 In the drawing area. clear Detail Items and Dimensions.7 Select the dimension line.Keynotes. Create a duplicate drawing 1 In the Project Browser. click 6 In the Filter dialog. and click the dimension text. 2 Select Copy of Roof Overhang Detail. and click OK. 10 Proceed to the next exercise. and click OK. and press DELETE. right-click. and click Rename. under Views (all) ➤ Detail Views (Detail). for Suffix. and save the exercise file. 310 | Chapter 7 Detailing . and click OK. 9 Click File menu ➤ Save. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. you modify the previously drawn detail so that you can annotate it with keynotes rather than text notes. enter Typ. Convert detail lines to components 5 Use a window to select the entire roof detail.. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. click Select All Instances. Creating Detail Components on page 310. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate with Detailing. Creating Detail Components In this exercise. select a text note. click Roof Overhang Detail. under Text Fields. The selected lines need to be replaced with detail components in order for them to accept a keynote.

13 Click the intersection of the reference planes to place the linework. 11 In the left pane of the New Family dialog. 9 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. select all the coping linework. 8 Zoom in to the metal coping. and click Open. click Training Files. 15 Use a window to select all linework.7 Click Modify.rft. select Medium Lines. and selecting the chain. in the Type Selector. while pressing CTRL. 17 Click File menu ➤ Save As. navigate to Metric\Templates\Metric Detail Component. 14 Click Modify. 10 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family. pressing TAB. You can also select all the linework by highlighting a segment. 16 Click Modify. 12 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste from Clipboard. Creating Detail Components | 311 .

24 On the Options Bar. click on the upper end point of the drip edge to place the component. 23 Using a window. 25 In the Filter dialog. and add keynote data to components that do not have data associated with them. for File name.18 In the Save As dialog. click Load. The original linework remains selected. clear Detail Items. 20 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 29 In the left pane of the Open dialog. Add components to the detail 19 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. Adding Keynotes In this exercise. Training File 312 | Chapter 7 Detailing . and click OK. click Detail Component. 27 On the Design Bar. select the coping. Adding Keynotes on page 312. 31 Using the same method used previously. 22 Click Modify.Keynotes view is not the open view. you place keynotes on objects. 30 In the drawing area. navigate to your preferred location. While pressing SHIFT. click Detail Component.rfa. double-click it in the Project Browser. delete the underlying linework. NOTE If the Roof Overhang Detail . 32 Proceed to the next exercise. click Training Files. click Load into Projects. click . click the bottom left endpoint of the metal coping. The component family is now part of the roof overhang detail. 21 To place the component. navigate to Metric\Families\Detail Components\m_Metal Fascia w_Drip Edge. 28 On the Options Bar. deselect any extraneous lines that are also selected. and the component can be placed in the detail. The underlying linework is deleted and the detail component remains in the drawing. and click Open. enter Roof Edge. and click Save. 26 Press DELETE.

19mm Plywood. For the metal coping.D11. click Edit/New. 5 Tag additional components: ■ ■ For the plywood decking. select the metal fascia with drip edge.Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. navigate to Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Keynote Tag. click Yes to load a Keynote Tag family to the project. Add keynotes to components 1 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 63mm Rigid Insulation.B5. click Keynote ➤ Element. navigate to 07000 ➤ 07200 ➤ 07210 ➤ 07210. and click 8 In the Element Properties dialog. click Training Files. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. select the rigid insulation as the object to tag. 6 Click Modify. In the Keynotes dialog. (Element Properties).rvt. and click Open. Click the rigid insulation on the roof to place the tag. Roof Edge4. 4 Add the tag: ■ ■ ■ ■ In the drawing area. Assign keynote parameter to a component 7 In the drawing area.C1. and click OK. Click to place the leader arm.rfa. Adding Keynotes | 313 . use keynote 06160. 2 In the alert dialog. 3 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog. use keynote 07645.

use keynote 09250.D11. a repeating detail cannot be keynoted. 10 In the Keynotes dialog. navigate to 07645. 314 | Chapter 7 Detailing .A8. For the 19mm Plywood Siding. 11 Click OK 3 times. click in the Value column. click Keynote ➤ Element. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ 14 On the Design Bar. Creating Line-based Detail Components on page 314. For the 2 instances of the 16mm Gypsum Wallboard. Because you defined the keynote parameter as part of the component properties. For the 50 x 300. 13 Tag components: ■ Tag the metal fascia with drip edge. For the 50 x 150. Creating Line-based Detail Components In this exercise.G1. 16 Place an instance of the component directly on top of the bottom segment of the corrugated metal repeating component.F1. click Detail Component. 12 On the Design Bar. 22mm Corrugated Steel . You do this in order to keynote the component. 19 Proceed to the next exercise. using keynote 07460.I1.20 Ga. select Corrugated Metal. 15 In the Type Selector.F1. 18 Save the file. use keynote 06160. you convert detail lines to detail components so that you can add keynotes to them. use keynote 06110.D1.9 In the Type Properties dialog. use keynote 06110. For the 50 x 200. the keynote is automatically read when you place the tag. 17 Keynote the component. and click . use keynote 06110. FasciaProfile_1. for Identity Data ➤ Keynote.

7 Click File menu ➤ Save As. 13 In the Type Selector. navigate to Metric\Families\Detail Components. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. 6 Lock the line. 17 In the Element Properties dialog. select the horizontal line under the roof overhang as shown. 4 In the Type Selector. click Load. and m_Light Line Detail Component. and select the right end point. 24 While pressing CTRL. click Training Files. 12 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. select Medium Line Detail Component. and click Open. 11 Press DELETE. 16 Select the component. 20 Click OK 3 times. 15 Click Modify. select m_Hidden Line Detail Component. 9 On the Design Bar. 19 In the Name dialog. Load line-based detail components 21 On the Design Bar. click Detail Component. 3 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. select Medium Lines. and click (Element Properties). click Detail Component. 18 In the Type Properties dialog. 2 In the left pane of the New Family dialog. Convert detail lines to components 10 In the drawing area. enter Prefinished Metal Soffit Panel. 22 On the Options Bar. 8 In the Save As dialog. navigate to Metric\Templates\Metric Detail Component line based. click Training Files.rvt. click Edit/New. click Lines. Creating Line-based Detail Components | 315 .Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. select the left end point of the reference line. m_Invisible Line Detail Component. The deleted line needs to be replaced with a detail component in order for it to accept a keynote. 14 Add the component in the location of the previously deleted horizontal line. click Load into Projects. for File name. enter m_Medium Line Detail Component. navigate to your preferred location. click Duplicate. and click Open. and click Save. Create a detail component 1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family. 23 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog. 5 In the drawing area. and click Modify.rft.

click Detail Component. 39 Add the Light Line Detail Component to the underside of the overhang. 49 With the component selected. 33 In the Type Properties dialog. and click OK. 40 Click Modify. click Duplicate. 36 In the Keynotes dialog. 42 Using the same method used previously. enter EPDM Membrane. and click . 32 In the Element Properties dialog. 37 Click OK 3 times. invisible. 45 Click the upper end of the repeating detail. 30 Click Modify. 29 In the drawing area. for Identity Data ➤ Keynote. 27 On the Design Bar. against the 19mm plywood. click the end points of the long detail line above the roof.A1. and click the lower end at the break line. 46 Click Modify. name the component 50 x 200 Framing. navigate to 07000 ➤ 07500 ➤ 07530 ➤ 07530. select m_Light Line Detail Component. and hidden) used in the view. You add the components to the project and keynote them. and click . 38 On the Design Bar. click Edit/New.G1. 31 Select the component. 48 Using the same method used previously. 47 Select the component. you create line-based detail components for other line weights (light. 50 Move the air barrier to the right. click (Move). and click .25 Next. 35 In the Type Properties dialog. 43 Zoom to the repeating component. click in the Value column. Add light line components 26 Zoom to the roof overhang. and assign it keynote 06110. name the component Air Barrier. click Detail Component. 44 On the Design Bar. on the Edit toolbar.A5. 34 In the Name dialog. Single-Ply Membrane Roofing. 28 In the Type Selector. and assign it keynote 07260. and click . click Detail Component. 41 Select the component just added. 316 | Chapter 7 Detailing .

53 On the Options Bar. select Chain. click Detail Component. 55 Click Modify. 52 In the Type Selector. and click . 57 Select the vertical hidden line component. leaving the detail component lines. select m_Hidden Line Detail Component. 54 Create the component by drawing over the vertical and horizontal dashed detail lines that represent the vapor barrier. Creating Line-based Detail Components | 317 . 56 Delete both dashed detail lines.Add a vapor barrier component 51 On the Design Bar.

61 In the drawing area. 63 In the drawing area. 66 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. and Vapor Barrier.A4.rfa. 64 Save the file as m_Invisible Line Detail Component. 68 In the drawing area. select Invisible Lines. 67 In the Type Selector. Create an invisible line component 62 Click Window menu ➤ m_Medium Line Detail Component. 318 | Chapter 7 Detailing .58 Using the method used previously. select the component. name the component Vapor Barrier. draw a line in the center of the large vertical segment of insulation.rfa. Add keynotes 59 Zoom to the drawing extents. click Detail Component. Air Barrier. select m_Invisible Line Detail Component. click Keynote ➤ Element. click Load into Projects. in the Type Selector. add keynotes for the EPDM Membrane. 50 x 200 Framing. 60 On the Design Bar. 65 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. and assign it keynote 07260.

txt. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. and press TAB. add a keynote for the component.69 Select the component. 2 Add keynote information for the metal soffit: ■ ■ ■ ■ Position the cursor at the end of the line that begins with 07460. and assign it keynote 07210. and double-click m_Example_RevitKeynotes.A1. Update keynote settings 4 In Revit Architecture. and press ENTER.A4. click File menu ➤ Save. click Browse.. Enter 07463. The database file opens in a text editor. and close the text editor. you add keynote information for a detail component to the database text file. 70 Using the method used previously. Enter 07460. 5 In the Keynoting Settings dialog. Modifying a Keynote Database In this exercise. navigate to Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\RAC 2008\Training\Metric.A9. Add information to the text file 1 In Windows Explorer. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. under Keynote Table. You are then able to assign the keynote to the component in the drawing. name the component Batt Insul. Modifying a Keynote Database | 319 . 73 Proceed to the next exercise. 3 In the text editor. 72 Save the file. Enter Pre-Finished Metal Soffit. and click . 71 In the drawing area. and press TAB. Modifying a Keynote Database on page 319.rvt. click Settings menu ➤ Keynoting.

A1. 12 Apply various keynote styles: ■ ■ In the drawing area. In the Type Selector.6 In the Browse for Keynote File dialog. 9 In the drawing area. 10 In the Keynotes dialog. select all the keynotes. 11 Click Modify. 13 Click Modify. These details do not update with changes to the building model. under Path Type. You can create details in drafting views when you do not need to create callout views from the building model. 14 Save the file. and click Open. Drafted details are created in drafting views and are not directly based on building model geometry. navigate to m_Example_RevitKeynotes. click Keynote ➤ Element. Each keynote displays as a simple number. Select Keynote Tag : Keynote Text. The descriptive text for each keynote displays. select M_Keynote Tag : Keynote Number. After you create a drafting view. and click to place the note. you learn how to create a drafted detail. select the metal soffit (horizontal line under the overhang). You can create drafted details using the drafting tools in Revit Architecture or by importing details from an existing detail library. Work with keynotes 8 On the Design Bar.txt. ■ ■ Change the keynote style back to the boxed number type. 7 In the Keynoting Settings dialog. Creating a Drafted Detail In this lesson. 320 | Chapter 7 Detailing . click to place the leader. as there is no parametric linkage to any building model components. you can reference it within the model and place it on a sheet. and click OK. select Absolute. and click OK. navigate to 07463.

select Black and White. For Colors. The detail that you import is in DWG format. Click Open. select 1 : 5.Importing a Detail into a Drafting View In this exercise. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. 5 Enter zf to zoom to the detail. click Training Files. you create a callout in the section view of the building model to reference the metal coping detail that you previously imported. 8 Proceed to the next exercise. 4 In the Import/Link CAD Formats dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ In the left pane.rvt. Navigate to Metric\m_Roof Edge Detail. and click OK. Import a complete detail in DWG format 3 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ CAD Formats. enter EPDM Metal Coping. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. Creating a Reference Callout on page 321. Creating a Reference Callout In this exercise.dwg. Create a new drafting view 1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Drafting View.rvt. expand Views (all) ➤ Drafting Views (Detail). The detail is imported as an import symbol. you place an existing detail in a new drafting view to create a drafted detail. for Scale. 7 In the Rename View dialog. verify that Auto . and click Rename. right-click Drafting 1. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 2 In the New Drafting View dialog. For Positioning.Center to Center is selected. 6 In the Project Browser. and click OK. Importing a Detail into a Drafting View | 321 . Training File Use the training file you used in a previous exercise.

2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. click Edit/New. 8 In the Element Properties dialog. 3 On the Options Bar.Create the callout view 1 In the Project Browser. 10 In the Rename dialog. and use the callout grips to move the callout head. delete the existing value. 5 Click Modify. right-click EPDM Metal Coping. 12 Click OK twice. click Callout. Modify detail view properties 7 In the Project Browser. The callout head no longer displays a reference label. for New. 322 | Chapter 7 Detailing . select Reference other view. and select Drafting View: EPDM Metal Coping. and click Properties. for Graphics ➤ Reference Label. and click OK. 4 Add the callout bubble by dragging a rectangular bubble around the metal coping. 6 Select the callout. click Rename. double-click Roof Overhang Detail to open it in the drawing area. 11 In the Type Properties dialog.No Reference. under Views (all) ➤ Detail Views (Detail). 9 In the Type Properties dialog. enter Detail .

17 Click Window menu ➤ Detail View: Roof Overhang Detail. so you use Revit Architecture tools to draft the detail. you create a door head condition in the new drafting view. 15 Under Drafting Views (Detail . The metal coping detail that you imported previously displays. The callout is updated with the sheet information. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 323 ./Sect. 16 Click on the sheet above the Roof Overhang Detail to place the drafting view. Add the drafting view to a sheet 14 In the Project Browser.No Reference). 18 Save the file. click Modify.Display the reference view 13 On the Design Bar. double-click A105 . There is no existing DWG file for this door detail. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View on page 323 Creating a Detail in a Drafting View In this exercise.Elev. under Views (all) ➤ Sheets (all)./Det. Modeling elements at this level of detail may be time consuming and can reduce the overall performance of the product. and double-click the callout. drag EPDM Metal Coping onto the sheet. 19 Proceed to the next exercise.

click Region Properties. for Name.rvt. click Edit/New. and click OK. 8 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 2 In the New Drafting View dialog. verify that the scale is 1 : 5. select M_Nominal Cut Lumber-Section : 50 x 150mm Nominal. enter Gyp. click Duplicate. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. 3 On the View Control Bar. and click OK. 10 In the Type Properties dialog. 6 Click in the drawing area to place 2 instances as shown. Add a detail component 4 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Create a drafting view 1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Drafting View. Press SPACEBAR to rotate the component as you place it. 9 In the Element Properties dialog. Create a filled region 7 On the Design Bar. click Detail Component. 14 Click OK 3 times. select Gypsum-Plaster. 5 In the Type Selector. for Name. click Filled Region. for Graphics ➤ Fill Pattern. You sketch filled regions to represent gypsum wall board. 12 In the Type Properties dialog. . 324 | Chapter 7 Detailing .Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. Board. click 13 In the Fill Patterns dialog. 11 In the Name dialog. enter Header @ Sliding Door.

Select the lower left corner of the 50 x 150 lumber as the start point. (Mirror). 16 Select the left edge of the region. click (Draw). select the left and bottom edges of the region. click Finish Sketch. 19 In the Type Selector. 17 Click Modify. click . and enter 20.5mm.15 Draw the region: ■ ■ ■ On the Options Bar. 18 While pressing CTRL. Draw a rectangle as shown. 20 On the Design Bar. click 22 On the Options Bar. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 325 . select Wide Lines. select the width dimension. and on the Edit toolbar. Mirror the region 21 Select the filled region.

. 27 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. and click above the top of the region as the end point. for Name. click Region Properties. and click OK. 326 | Chapter 7 Detailing . 25 Click Modify. Move the cursor up. Add wood filled regions 26 On the Design Bar. 24 Select the mirrored region. for Graphics ➤ Fill Pattern. 29 In the Type Properties dialog. 30 In the Name dialog. 31 In the Type Properties dialog.23 Draw the mirror line: ■ ■ Select the midpoint of the upper 50 x 150 as the start point. and drag the bottom up to just below the top of the upper 50 x 150. select Wood . enter Wood . 33 Click OK 3 times. 28 In the Element Properties dialog. click Duplicate. click 32 In the Fill Patterns dialog. click Edit/New.Finish.Finish. click Filled Region.

verify that the width is 19mm and the height is 63. 36 Align the wood region to the 50 x 150: ■ ■ On the Tools toolbar. verify that the thickness is 19mm. Select the lower left corner of the left gypsum board region as the start point. click (Align). click (Rectangle). 35 Select all the linework for the wood region. click . sketch the new region as shown. click Finish Sketch. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 327 . select Medium Lines. Draw a rectangle as shown.34 Draw the region: ■ ■ ■ On the Options Bar. 37 On the Design Bar. and select the right edge of the wood region. 40 On the Options Bar. Select the right edge of the lower 50 x 150. in the Type Selector. 39 In the Type Selector. 41 Beginning at the lower right of the wood region. 38 On the Design Bar. click Filled Region. select Medium Lines.5mm.

50 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). Add a reference plane 43 On the Design Bar. You use the reference plane as an alignment reference for the gypsum board region above it. 44 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). and click the bottom of the gypsum board region. enter 10mm. click Finish Sketch. 45 Select the top of the vertical wood region to place the reference plane above it. For Offset. enter 6mm. and press ENTER. (Align). For Offset. click 48 Click Modify. click Ref Plane. 47 Click the reference plane. Add a door panel 49 On the Design Bar. 46 On the Tools toolbar.42 On the Design Bar. 51 Select the left edge of the horizontal wood region. 328 | Chapter 7 Detailing . click Filled Region. and press ENTER.

enter 0. Select Chain. 54 On the Tools toolbar. Move the cursor right 25mm. 56 On the Design Bar. Move the cursor left 25mm. and select the bottom horizontal line. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 329 . For Offset. and press ENTER. Move the cursor down 305mm. 53 Draw the door panel outline: ■ ■ ■ ■ Click the top endpoint of the offset line.52 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ Click (Draw). and click to select the point. and click to select the point. 55 Select the small vertical line of the door panel sketch. click Finish Sketch. and click to select the point. click (Trim/Extend).

enter 76. 330 | Chapter 7 Detailing . 60 Select the left. select Medium Lines. and press ENTER. Add mounting/sliding hardware 64 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. select the height dimension. 66 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog. 67 Add the bolt to the right side of the lower wood region as shown. For Offset. click Load. 62 Select the left detail line. navigate to Metric\Families\Detail Components\Div 05-Metals\05090-Metal Fastenings\M_A307 Bolts-Side. 65 On the Options Bar. 58 In the Type Selector. TIP Press the SPACEBAR as necessary to rotate the bolt to the correct orientation. 59 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). click Detail Component. 69 Select the bolt.Add detail lines for mounting/sliding hardware 57 On the Design Bar. 61 Click Modify. drag the left shape handle until the nut is against the detail line. and right edges of the door panel region. top. 63 Repeat for the right detail line. enter 3mm. click Training Files. and press ENTER. and click Open.rfa.2mm. click Detail Lines. 68 Click Modify.

72 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog. Add detail lines 75 On the Design Bar. click Detail Component. drag the right shape handle until the bolt end is just past the midpoint of the 50 x 150. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 331 . 76 In the Type Selector. 71 On the Options Bar. use the images as a guide. select Wide Lines. 77 Draw a line at the base of the bolt head as shown. click Training Files. click Load.70 On the Design Bar. NOTE Exact sizes and positioning are not critical when creating the remainder of the detail. and click Open. click Detail Lines. navigate to Metric\Families\Detail Components\Div 05-Metals\05090-Metal Fastenings\M_Expansion Bolts-Side. 74 Select the expansion bolt.rfa. 73 Add the component to the left side of the lower 50 x 150.

82 Select the rectangle. 332 | Chapter 7 Detailing . 79 In the Type Selector. click 83 Select the wide detail line as the axis of reflection. and on the Edit toolbar. 85 On the Options Bar. (Mirror). click . select Thin Lines. 80 On the Options Bar. 81 Draw the rectangle to the left of the wide line as shown. 86 Draw a small rectangle between the mirrored rectangles as shown. 84 On the Design Bar. click Detail Lines. click . click Detail Lines.78 On the Design Bar. 87 Click Modify.

drag the top end above the mirrored rectangles as shown. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 333 . and on the Edit toolbar. select Medium Lines. Do not extend the line to the vertical detail line. 89 On the Design Bar. 90 In the Type Selector. as shown.88 Select the detail line to the left of the lower wood region. 92 Select the line. click (Mirror). 91 Draw a small line from the midpoint of the left mirrored rectangle to the left. click Detail Lines. 93 Select the wide detail line as the axis of reflection.

TIP Rotate and move the break lines as necessary to adjust the masking elements. click Detail Lines. enter 3mm. select the length dimension.94 Select the mirrored line on the right. and press ENTER. click . Add two break lines 100 Zoom to the drawing extents. 102 In the Type Selector. 334 | Chapter 7 Detailing . select M_Break Line. draw a line up to the height of the other detail line. 101 On the Design Bar. 96 Beginning at the end of the 3mm line. 103 Add two break lines as shown. 98 Click the end of the detail line on the left. 97 On the Options Bar. click Detail Component. and click to place the arc as shown. 95 On the Design Bar. 99 Click Modify.

106 Click to place the dimension.5mm Arial. 109 Add a multi-segment dimension line as shown. 107 On the Design Bar. drag the text for the smaller dimension. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 335 . click Dimension. select the left edge of the horizontal wood region. select Linear Dimension Style : Linear 2. 108 In the Type Selector. and select the right edge of the adjoining vertical region.Add dimensions 104 On the Design Bar. and click Modify. click Dimension. 105 In the drawing area. and click Modify. 110 Select the dimension line. using the Drag Text grip.

119 Select the topmost of the 3 wall dimensions. click Dimension. select Replace With Text. under Dimension Value. and then click the dimension text. 118 Select Modify to end the command. 112 In the Dimension Text dialog. 336 | Chapter 7 Detailing .5mmArial. 113 Under Text Fields. 114 Click OK. 120 In the Dimension Text dialog. 116 In the Type Selector select Linear Dimension Style: Detail Linear . and enter 175 mm @ Type A.2. for Below. under Dimension Value. Add dimension strings based on the wall type 115 On the Design Bar. enter See Schedule. select Replace With Text. Add dimension overrides to represent different wall types. and enter Varies. 117 Click to place additional dimensions on the wall as shown. and click the dimension text.Add dimension overrides to represent different wall types 111 Select the wall dimension.

and click to place the text. 123 Click OK. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 337 . 125 In the Options Bar. 129 Drag the end of the new leader to the other gypsum board region. 130 Add leaders and text notes to the detail as shown. and on the Options Bar. click (Add Right Arc Leader). and click Modify. Board. Add text notes to complete the detail 124 On the Design Bar. click to create an arced leader. 128 Select the note. 127 Enter Gyp. click Text. select the gypsum board region on the left. Enter 225 mm @ Type C. 122 Repeat this process for the next 2 dimensions: ■ ■ Enter 200 mm @ Type B. 126 In the drawing area.121 Click OK.

click Modify to end the command.131 On the Design Bar. 132 Save the file. 338 | Chapter 7 Detailing .

you add typical construction notes to sheets and then create a note block to expose the note text.Finishing the Sheets 8 In this tutorial. including: ■ ■ ■ Creating a note block that contains typical construction notes Creating a drawing list that is automatically populated based on filter selections Creating the 2 most common types of legends produced for construction: annotation legends and building component legends Tracking and documenting revisions in the project Importing resources (images and text) from other applications into project sheets ■ ■ Using Note Blocks In this lesson. expand Elevations (Building Elevation). Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Load a generic annotation family 1 In the Project Browser. click Training Files. you perform tasks to provide finishing touches on your project documentation. The note block can be used to schedule parameters assigned to a generic annotation family. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_FlatsFinishing-Sheets. 339 .rvt. Creating a Note Block In this exercise. you create a typical note block to annotate repairs and renovations to the exterior of the building. and double-click East. In the left pane of the Open dialog.

Hexagon.2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. type 1. click Modify.rfa. 6 Click in the drawing area to the right of the building to place a hexagon tag. 3 Click Yes to load a generic annotation family into the project. click Training Files. click Symbol. 340 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . 4 In the left pane of the Open dialog. for Number of Leaders. 5 On the Options Bar. and open Metric\Families\Annotations\Sheet Keynote . and drag the endpoint of the leader to position it on the right front door. 8 Select the keynote. 7 On the Design Bar.

and click OK. for Text. type Seal existing doors and insulate. on the Options Bar. 12 On the Edit toolbar.9 Drag the midpoint of the leader to position it as shown: Create annotation marks for items requiring notes 10 With the tag selected. 13 Select the tag. and click above the tag to place the copy. click (Copy). Creating a Note Block | 341 . 11 In the Element Properties dialog. click (Element Properties). under Identity Data.

click Copy. and click. 15 For Text. 18 Using the same method. Contact Historic Preservation District official for specific requirements. 17 Click OK. (Mirror). 19 With the tag selected. position the cursor over the hexagon tag until a vertical bar displays. on the Options Bar. and on the Options Bar. make another copy of the tag and place it on the left side of the building. clear 20 To create a vertical mirror image of the tag so the leader points toward the building. type Repair existing door surround. 16 For Tag. click (Element Properties). on the Edit toolbar. type B.14 With the copy selected. 342 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets .

and moving counter-clockwise. using the table as a reference. Contact Historic Preservation District official for specific requirements. Clean opening and repair as required for new window installation. Tuckpoint as required. click Modify. Clean and repair stone parapet cap as required. Repair existing door surround. Repair as required. C D E F G Creating a Note Block | 343 .21 On the Design Bar. continue tagging the building as shown in the following illustration: Tag A B Text Seal existing doors and insulate. Remove all existing windows. Clean existing concrete loading dock. Clean and repair existing stone trim as required. 22 Optionally. Clean exterior brick wall.

select Tag. Clean cut and repair wall as required. select Center.Elevations. for Header text. and drag the right column control to expand the column to display the note text. 25 Specify values in the Note Block Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Fields tab. type Description. expand Sheets (all). for Heading.Tag H Text Saw cut existing brick wall. verify that Arial is selected. 29 In the Project Browser. Create. under Available fields. 344 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . and click Add. and for Alignment. and place a note block on a sheet 23 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Note Block. select Exterior Construction Notes. and click OK. for the value. On the Sorting/Grouping tab. 27 In the column header (text). 30 Click to place the block in the upper left corner of the sheet. type Mark. On the Formatting tab. and drag it to the sheet. type Exterior Construction Notes. select Tag. On the Appearance tab. for Sort by. 28 In the Project Browser. 26 Click OK. and double-click A103 . for Note block name. 24 In the New Note Block dialog. and click Add. The Exterior Construction Notes block displays. Select Text. type 6 mm. format. and select Bold. expand Schedules/Quantities.

Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson.31 On the Design Bar. Using Drawing Lists In this lesson. Metric\m_Freighthouse_FlatsFinishing-Sheets_in_progress. 33 Save the file as Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. you quickly create a drawing list that is automatically generated from the drawings available in the project. click Modify.rvt. you create an automatically populated drawing list for placement on the title sheet of the project. Using Drawing Lists | 345 . under Sheets (all). Creating a Drawing List In this exercise. 1 In the Project Browser. 32 Zoom in to see the note block.Title Sheet.rvt. double-click T .

under Available fields. and expand the right column to accommodate the text. type T. select Sheet Index. On the Sorting/Grouping tab. in the first field. change Drawing List to Sheet Index. The drawing list displays. ■ 4 Click OK. 5 In the list title field.2 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Drawing List. expand Schedules/Quantities. select Sheet Number. 3 Specify values in the Drawing List Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ On the Fields tab. for Sort by. under Sheets (all). Select Sheet Name. 8 Click to place it on the sheet in the lower right corner.Title Sheet. 346 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . and in the third field. and click Add. in the second field. 7 In the Project Browser. and click Add. and drag it to the sheet. for Filter by. double-click T . On the Filter tab. select does not equal. 6 In the Project Browser. select Sheet Number. select Sheet Number.

On construction documents. you use a text type you create by duplicating an existing text type and modifying the type properties. and so on). Annotation legends are made up of components (such as section markers and door tags) that are paired with text that identifies them. Using Legends Legends provide a way to display a list of the various building components and annotations used in a project.9 On the Design Bar. door frame schedule. and thus is not added to the number of instances of that component listed on a schedule or note block. The two most common types of legends produced for construction documents are annotation legends and building component legends. Training File Using Legends | 347 . On construction documents. 11 Save the file. Building component legends list and identify components such as walls. click Modify. and door frames. annotation legends are often referred to as symbol legends. 10 Zoom in to the drawing list. For the text. building component legends are often called schedules (wall type schedule. NOTE A component that is placed in a legend does not count as an additional instance of the component in the Revit Architecture building model. Creating a Symbol Legend In this exercise. Finally. you create a legend view and add symbols and text to it. you add the completed symbol legend to multiple sheets for easy reference. windows. doors.

you create a text type with the necessary size. click Duplicate.Circle M_Door Tag M_Window Tag Sheet Keynote . click .Hexagon : Tag Create a text type 5 On the Design Bar.rvt. Add symbols to the legend 3 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. for Name. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Custom-Section Head: Section Head . 4 Add the following symbols to the legend view. click Edit/New. 9 For Text Font. for Name. and click OK. 348 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . 2 In the New Legend View dialog. type Typical Symbol Legend. You do this by duplicating the standard text type and modifying the type properties. and click OK twice. click Text. selecting each from the Type Selector and placing it in the legend as shown.Open Level Head . 7 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. type 3mm. select Arial. Metric\m_Freighthouse_FlatsFinishing-Sheets_in_progress. click Symbol. Because the text size for the symbol legend is not available in the Type Selector. 6 On the Options Bar. 10 For Text Size. type Legend Text. 8 In the Type Properties dialog. Create a legend view 1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Legend.

drag it to the lower right corner of the sheet. expand Sheets (all).Add text to the legend 11 In the Type Selector. verify that Text : Legend Text is selected. and click to place it. 13 Type Detail Callout for the text note. expand Legends. 14 Working from the top down. verify that is selected. and double-click A101 . 12 Click to the right of the first symbol to specify the text start point. click Typical Symbol Legend. and for Leader.Site Plan/Floor Plan. type the following text for the remaining symbols in the legend: ■ ■ ■ ■ Level Indicator Door Tag Window Tag Sheet Keynote Place the symbol legend on a sheet 15 In the Project Browser. 16 In the Project Browser. Creating a Symbol Legend | 349 .

and click to place it. 23 Save the file. 18 On the Design Bar. 19 In the Project Browser. click Modify. select Viewport : No Titlemark. double-click A102 .17 In the Type Selector. 20 Drag Typical Symbol Legend to the lower right corner of the sheet. under Sheets. 350 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . The symbol legend is added to the project sheet. A legend view is unlike any other view and can be placed onto multiple sheets for reference where required. 22 On the Design Bar. click Modify.Unit 18. select Viewport : No Titlemark. 21 In the Type Selector.

select Walls: Basic Wall: 4th Floor Balcony Divider. Creating a Component Legend | 351 .Creating a Component Legend In this exercise. Create a legend view 1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Legend. select 1 : 50. 6 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ For Family. for Name. 5 On the View Control Bar. For View. 7 Click near the top left of the drawing area to specify the insertion point for the wall. and click OK. click Legend Component. 3 For Scale. 2 In the New Legend View dialog. Add components to the legend 4 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 8 Click directly below the first wall to place a second wall. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. For Host length. you create a building component legend for the wall types in the building model.rvt. You use the text type that you created in a previous exercise to create annotations that identify the material used in each wall component. select Section. and press ENTER. select Medium for Detail Level. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. type 900 mm. You then add the completed legend to a project sheet. type 4th Floor Wall Types.

13 On the Options Bar. Add titles to the legend components 11 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. select Walls : Basic wall : 4th Floor Exterior. click to add text without a leader. verify that Text : Legend Text is selected. for example to force a line break between ''Wall Type 1'' and ''Patio Divider. NOTE Press ENTER to force the text to start on the next line. 352 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . 10 Select the second wall.9 On the Design Bar. 14 Click below the upper wall component to specify the start point for the text. and type Wall Type 1 Patio Divider. click Text. for Leader. for Family. 12 In the Type Selector. and on the Options Bar. click Modify.'' 15 Click below the lower wall and type Wall Type 2 Exterior Wall.

and drag it to the new sheet. click to add text with a single-segment leader. 18 Click to the right of the wall to end the leader and specify the text start point. and click New Sheet. 22 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. pressing ENTER between component descriptions. The text note with leader is added to the legend. 24 Click to place the floor plan on the right side of the sheet. 17 Click the right side of the Wall Type 1 component to specify the leader start point. 20 Use the following illustration as a guide for entering the text annotations on the lower wall component. and click Modify on the Design Bar: 33mm Decking 50x100 Stud 33mm Decking. click OK to accept the default titleblock. 19 Type the following text. Creating a Component Legend | 353 . 23 In the Project Browser.Add text to the legend 16 On the Options Bar. right-click Sheets (all). under Floor Plans. Place the legend on a sheet 21 In the Project Browser. select Level 4.

25 In the Project Browser. The open drawings are both visible. 28 Click Window menu ➤ Close Hidden Windows. double-click 4th Floor Wall Types. allowing you to select a component type in one drawing and then apply the type in the second drawing. and click to place it in the upper left corner of the sheet. drag it onto the sheet. Tile views in the drawing window 27 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. 29 In the Project Browser. under Legends. click Modify to end the command. select 4th Floor Wall Types. 354 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . double-click Level 4. 26 On the Design Bar. The floor plan and legend are added to the new sheet. 30 Click Window menu ➤ Tile.

35 On the View Control Bar. 32 In the 4th Floor Wall Types Legend view. 33 In the floor plan view. 34 Select the patio divider wall. click (Match Type). select Detail Level: Medium. Notice that the eyedropper changes to filled. zoom to the lower right area of the floor plan including the patio divider wall. select the Wall Type 2 component. The wall type in the floor plan matches wall type 2 from the Wall Type Legend.Match a component type 31 On the Tools toolbar. Creating a Component Legend | 355 . Changing the detail level displays the hatching for each material of the wall component. indicating that it captured the wall type properties.

if you do not want to save the change to the wall type. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. double-click Level 4. and you can add data such as release date and description to each revision.rvt. You can create a sequence of revisions. and can then display the revisions in schedules that appear in the titleblock of each project sheet. contractor inquiries. or changes in building material availability. click 37 Save the file. You can use revision tags to notate the revision clouds. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. you open a revision table in which you can add rows that represent a sequence of revisions. In this exercise. Using Revision Tracking Revit Architecture provides tools that enable you to track revisions to your project. under Floor Plans. and you can draw revision clouds around elements in your project that have changed. Setting Up a Revision Table There are likely to be changes to your construction documents after you have issued the original set of documents for bid or after you have received a signed contract. These changes can be due to owner requests. 356 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . Using the table.36 Optionally. you can specify the numbering method for revisions in a project. unanticipated changes in construction conditions. Specify a revision numbering method 1 In the Project Browser.

When you use this option.2 Click Settings menu ➤ Revisions. In general. 6 Verify that Issued is cleared. If Visible is not selected. all tags and schedules display the numeral 1. the revisions are numbered according to the sequence of revisions in the Revisions dialog. verify that Cloud and Tag is selected. if the active revision is number 1. When Issued is selected. This is the date the revisions are sent out for review. Setting Up a Revision Table | 357 . 5 For Description. Add a revision to the project 4 For Date. any revision cloud you draw to indicate this particular revision is not visible in the view in which you create it. the revisions are numbered according to the sequence in which they are added to a sheet. yet as concise as possible. If you select Per Sheet. the revision is locked and issued to the field. In most instances. type Relocate 4th floor partition dividing walls. revision descriptions should be comprehensive. type a date. verify that Per Project is selected. For example. 7 Under Show. 3 On the right side of the Sheet Issues/Revisions dialog. you would turn off visibility only after a revision was issued. for Numbering.

358 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . 5 Select the divider. move the cursor up. which are inherited from the revision table you created for the project. Revision clouds have read-only properties. Modify a wall 1 In the Project Browser. You can sketch revision clouds in all views except 3D views. under Floor Plans. click (Move).rvt. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress.8 Click OK. click Modify. including revision number and revision date. 6 On the Design Bar. 3 Select the divider. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. Sketching Revision Clouds In this exercise. and then indicate the changes graphically with a revision cloud. but each cloud is visible only in the view in which it is sketched. 9 Save the file. 2 Zoom in to the left area of the drawing to see the 4th Floor Balcony Divider. and click to reposition the divider closer to the upper wall. you make changes to the project floor plan. You can draw multiple revision clouds for each revision. 4 On the Edit toolbar. double-click Level 4.

Revit Architecture is now in sketch mode. click Revision Cloud. and click OK. In the Snaps dialog. 9 Click to end that segment and begin a new segment. and move the cursor clockwise to create a segment of the revision cloud. click Settings menu ➤ Snaps. 11 On the Design Bar. NOTE To turn off snaps when drawing a revision cloud. 8 In the drawing area. click near the partition you moved. 10 Continue adding segments until the cloud encompasses the area that you changed. Sketching Revision Clouds | 359 . click Finish Sketch. select Snaps Off. The revision cloud is displayed around the modified partition.Add a revision cloud 7 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.

The tag number that is displayed in the drawing is based on the numbering method you specified when you set up the revision table in a previous exercise. and then apply the tag to the revision cloud in the current drawing. for Line Weight. 16 Click OK. select 6. 14 In the Object Styles dialog. 13 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. 15 Under the Revision Clouds category. 17 Save the file.Modify revision cloud style 12 Select the revision cloud. click the Annotation Objects tab. Tagging Revision Clouds In this exercise. Training File 360 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . you load a revision tag into the project.

the tag is displayed inside the cloud. Working with Revisions In this exercise. Because a real-world project can undergo several revisions before it is completed.Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. and open Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Revision Tag. Because you chose to number by project. select Leader.rfa. 5 In the Tags dialog. The number is based on the numbering method you specified when you set up the revision table. Training File Working with Revisions | 361 . 8 In the Tags dialog. under Floor Plans. which creates a record of the revision and locks it from further changes. Load a revision tag 1 In the Project Browser. 3 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. If the cursor is just inside the cloud. double-click Level 4. 4 On the Options Bar. you need to add one. You then issue a revision. click Training Files. 11 Click to place the tag. Because there are no tags loaded for revision clouds. click Tag ➤ By Category. 6 Click Load. position the cursor just outside the revision cloud to the left.rvt. 2 Zoom in to the area with the revision cloud. and because the revision is the first in the project. the cloud is tagged as number 1. notice that M_Revision Tag is the loaded tag for Revision Clouds. The tag displays the revision number of the cloud. 10 In the drawing area. click OK. click Tags. 12 Save the file. you view a sheet on which you place a revised view. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. 7 In the left pane of the dialog. scroll down to Revision Clouds. you create additional revisions in the revision table. Tag a revision cloud 9 On the Options Bar.

You do this by issuing the revision. 8 Add another revision row. and enter a date for the revision. You cannot add revision clouds to the revision in the drawing area. you prevent further changes to the revision. double-click A107 . Issue a revision 3 Click Settings menu ➤ Revisions. 6 In the Sheet Issues/Revisions dialog. and click OK. with the description Relocate Door. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. The information you added to the revision table in a previous exercise is displayed in the revision schedule. 9 Click OK. NOTE After you issue a revision. You can continue to add revisions. select Issued.Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise.Unnamed. 4 For the Sequence 1 revision. Create additional revisions 5 Click Settings menu ➤ Revisions. 7 For Description. under Sheets. nor can you edit the sketch of the existing clouds. View the revision schedule on a sheet 1 In the Project Browser. After you make the necessary changes to the project and add the revised views to a sheet.rvt. you can no longer modify it. A new row is added below the existing rows in the revision table. Your project may have several revisions before it is completed. 2 Zoom to the revision schedule in the sheet titleblock. type Modify Paving Area. and enter a date. 362 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . click Add.

Information for all tagged revisions displays in the schedule. select the revision cloud. 15 On the Options Bar.Unnamed. Apply revisions to revision clouds 14 In the drawing area. under Sheets (all).Modify Paving Area.Relocate Door to the revision cloud. 12 In the drawing area. select Tag ➤ By Category. 3 . double-click A107 . 17 Using the same method learned previously. Working with Revisions | 363 . 10 In the Project Browser. click to add a revision clouds. apply Seq. click outside each of the two revision clouds you just drew. 20 On the Project Browser. in the drawing area. 21 Zoom in to the revision schedule in the titleblock. select Seq. 13 Click Finish Sketch. and then specify the revision table sequence to alphabetic. 11 On the Drafting tab. for Revision. Tag the revision clouds 18 On the Drafting tab. double-click Level 4. under Floor Plans. 2 .Change revision scheme from numeric to alphabetic You place the new revisions on a sheet. 19 To add tags. select Revision Cloud. 16 Add another revision cloud as shown.

■ ■ 24 In the Sequence Options dialog. You want to change the numbering value from numeric to alphabetic for all sequences. beginning with "D". You do this so that the revision can be changed. You can modify the sequence of characters used for the alphabetic numbering scheme. 25 Click OK twice. Edit the titleblock family The revision schedule is part of the titleblock family. 364 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . 23 In the Sheet Issues/Revisions dialog: ■ For Sequence 1.Change the sequencing of revision to use alpha characters 22 Click Settings menu ➤ Revisions. you edit the titleblock family. select the titleblock. clear Issued. delete the first 3 characters. 26 In the drawing area. In order to make formatting changes (appearance. and rotation) to the revision schedule. The revision schedule now uses alphabetic characters. height. select Alphabetic. Click Options. for Numbering. For each revision. for Sequence.

right-click Revision Schedule. click Edit. 37 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. and delete the schedule lines because the table will be dynamically built. Relocate revision schedule You relocate the revision schedule to the bottom of the revision area. Select Outline. 35 Select the existing schedule lines. and press DELETE. 28 In the alert dialog. for Appearance. click Load into Projects. click Yes. 31 In the Revision Properties dialog. 36 Drag the header to the bottom of the revision schedule area. 38 In the Reload Family dialog. ■ ■ 32 Click OK twice. click Edit Family. Modify the revision schedule properties 29 In the Project Browser. and select Wide Lines for the outline type. for Build Schedule. Working with Revisions | 365 . 34 On the Design Bar.27 On the Options Bar. click Yes. and then zoom in to the revision schedule. expand Views (all) ➤ Schedules. on the Appearance tab: ■ ■ Under Graphics. and drag it above the schedule area. 30 In the Element Properties dialog. click Modify. under Other. select Bottom-up. and click Properties. Clear Blank row before data. all sheets that use this titleblock in the project will be affected. 33 Select the schedule header. Grid lines will now be dynamically added as the revision schedule is built. Select Grid lines. Reload the titleblock family into the project Because you changed the titleblock family.

. and on the Options Bar. When the height property is variable. select the revision schedule. With a user-defined height. and the most current revisions display in the available rows. for Height. the schedule continues to add rows as revisions are created. 45 On the Appearance tab. under Other. 41 Drag the header to the right side of the titleblock. open the titleblock family for editing. 366 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . 43 In the Element Properties dialog. for Formatting. select User defined. click Edit. for Heading. for Rotation on Sheet. enter Rev. right-click Revision Schedule. Rotate revision schedule to display it vertically 39 Using the same method learned previously. Modify the properties of the revision schedule 42 In the Project Browser. 48 Click the circular grip and drag it so that the schedule fills the revision area. and click Properties. the schedule is restricted to a specific size. 44 On the Formatting tab of the Revision Properties dialog.The revision schedule is now shown in a bottom-up format. select 90° Counterclockwise. 40 Select the revision schedule header. Use grip editing to resize the revision schedule 47 In the drawing area. 46 Click OK twice.

text. The modified revision schedule displays on the project sheet. 51 Save the file. and spreadsheets) from other applications into a project. click Load into Projects. you learn to import information (such as images. Importing from Other Applications | 367 . 50 In the Reload Family dialog. click Yes.Load revised schedule into the project 49 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. Importing from Other Applications In this lesson.

m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. click to add text without a leader. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Importing Text Documents In this exercise. double-click T . under Sheets. 3 On the Options Bar. 2 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ Image. 6 Click File menu ➤ Save. 4 Click and drag to place a text box on the right side of the sheet.Importing Image Files In this exercise.rvt. you import text from another application using a cut and paste function to populate a text object on a sheet. you import a logo image in JPG format into a project. 368 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . 4 Click in the upper right area of the sheet to place the logo. click Text. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson.Title Sheet.JPG. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 1 In the Project Browser. and open Common\Freighthouse Logo.rvt. under Sheets.Title Sheet. and place it on a sheet. Create a text element on the title sheet 1 In the Project Browser. 5 On the Design Bar. click Training Files. double-click T . for Leader. 3 In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Modify. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress.

9 On the Design Bar. click Modify. 11 Save the file. Training File Importing Spreadsheets | 369 . you have existing information in a spreadsheet format and would like to use it in the project. 6 Select the text. The only way to do this is to convert the spreadsheet file to a raster format (JPG or BMP) and import it as an image.Copy the text 5 Open the Training Files\Common\Bidding Statement. Importing Spreadsheets In this exercise.doc text file in another window. 7 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy. with the new text box still selected. 10 Zoom in to view the pasted text. NOTE Some formatting may be required after the text is placed in Revit Architecture. click Edit menu ➤ Paste from Clipboard. The text is pasted into the new text box on the sheet. Paste the text on the sheet 8 In the Revit Architecture window.

rvt.mdi. click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ Image. 2 Open the Microsoft Excel worksheet. click Desktop. double-click A102 . 11 Zoom in to see the Fixture Schedule. and click Save.xls.JPG. type Fixture Schedule. 10 On the Design Bar. 1 In the Project Browser. you could use a screen capture utility to save the worksheet in BMP or JPG format. 8 In the left pane of the Import Image dialog. This exercise demonstrates a common method. 5 Click OK. This step has been completed for you. Now that you have the worksheet in a raster format. for Name. 7 In the Revit Architecture window. NOTE You need to print/export the spreadsheet to a raster format. 6 In the left pane of the Save the file as dialog. 370 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . select the document writer. Training Files\Common\Lighting Fixtures. and saved as Fixture Schedule. click Modify. This process may vary from system to system.JPG. 4 Under Printer. 9 Click to place the image on the sheet. for File name. under Sheets. and open Common\Fixture Schedule.Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 3 In Microsoft Excel. click File menu ➤ Print.Unit 18. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. click Training Files. 12 Save the file.

called dependent views. The large floor plan. you work with a large project for a bird sanctuary. To effectively document this project. for the sanctuary will not fit onto a plotted sheet as one plan. or footprint. you break up the plan into sections. 371 .Using Dependent Views 9 In this tutorial. as well as a large lab building. The drawings include the aviary and observation area of the site.

372 | Chapter 9 Using Dependent Views .Dependent view of lab building Dependent view of aviary and observation platforms Dependent views can be placed on sheets for documentation purposes.

you ■ ■ Create split dependent views of a large floor plan and elevation Annotate the primary view to indicate where the view is split and to provide links to the dependent views Apply the specifications of the dependent views to other views in the project Add dependent views to sheets for documentation ■ ■ Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views In this exercise. click Training Files. and open Metric\m_Dependent_Views.Using Dependent Views in Documentation In this lesson.rvt Using Dependent Views in Documentation | 373 . you ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Create split dependent views of a large floor plan view Add a matchline to the primary view to indicate where the view is split Place dependent views on sheets Add view references to the primary view to link to dependent views Apply dependent view specifications to other views Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog.

and on the Zoom flyout of the View toolbar. under Level 2. 6 In the drawing area. 374 | Chapter 9 Using Dependent Views . right-click Dependent on Level 2. The following image shows a plan view with the model and annotation crop regions visible. 4 In the Rename View dialog. 5 Click in the drawing area. under Floor Plans. double-click Level 2. The dependent view opens. and click Rename. right-click Level 2. for Name. 7 Select the inside (model crop) control on the right and drag it toward the center of the view to crop out the lab building. select the crop region. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent. click Zoom To Fit. and the model crop is the interior crop region. 3 In the Project Browser. 2 In the Project Browser.Aviary. The annotation crop is the exterior crop region.Create dependent views 1 In the Project Browser. enter Level 2 . and click OK.

Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views | 375 . 9 On the View Control Bar. confining the view to the upper-left area of the drawing (the aviary).8 Click the inside control on the bottom and drag it up. click (Hide Crop Region).

15 Select the crop region. right-click Level 2. right-click Dependent on Level 2. 16 Use the inside controls to crop the view to the lower-right building (the labs). for Name. click Zoom To Fit. 376 | Chapter 9 Using Dependent Views . 11 In the Project Browser. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent.Labs. 17 Select the outside control on the left and drag it to the left to reveal the notes. enter Level 2 . and on the Zoom flyout. 13 In the Rename View dialog. and click OK.10 Click in the drawing area. and click Rename. 14 Click in the drawing area. 12 In the Project Browser. and on the Zoom flyout. click Zoom To Fit.

(Align with the second column of lab cubicles. 19 On the View Control Bar. 18 On the Design Bar. 22 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click Modify. Matchlines are annotation lines that you add to a view to indicate where a view is split for dependent views. Add matchline to indicate split view 21 In the Project Browser. click Matchline. click Zoom To Fit.) Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views | 377 .The outside controls adjust the annotation crop region. click (Hide Crop Region). and on the Zoom flyout. 23 Draw the matchline by specifying the following points: ■ Click above and to the right of the intersection of the lab building and the aviary. under Floor Plans. double-click Level 2. 20 Click in the drawing area.

■ ■ ■ ■ Move the cursor down and click just above the lab building. Click above the left corner of the lab building. Move the cursor left about 4800 mm. 24 On the Design Bar. Click just below the lower intersection of the lab building and the aviary. 378 | Chapter 9 Using Dependent Views . and click. click Finish Sketch.

28 For Line Pattern. click Level 2 . and drag it onto the sheet. for Name. and click Rename. Create sheets and place dependent views 29 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Sheet. for Line Weight. select 9. 26 In the Object Styles dialog. select Double Dash. under Floor Plans. 27 Under Matchline. Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views | 379 . click OK to accept the default titleblock.Aviary.25 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. 32 In the Sheet Title dialog. and click OK. 31 In the Project Browser. 30 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. expand Sheets. right-click A101 . 34 Click to place the view in the center of the sheet. enter Level 2 Aviary. and click OK.Unnamed. click the Annotation Objects tab. 33 In the Project Browser.

36 Use the same method to create another sheet. You add view references near the matchline to annotate and link to the dependent views.35 On the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. double-click Level 2. and place the Level 2 . Add reference annotations to sheets 37 In the Project Browser.Labs dependent view on the sheet. 38 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. verify that Floor Plan: Level 2 . 380 | Chapter 9 Using Dependent Views . 39 On the Options Bar. click View Reference. rename the sheet Level 2 Labs. click Modify. 40 Click to the left of the top of the matchline. for Target view.Aviary is selected.

click Zoom To Fit. 43 Use the same method to add View References above (A101) and below (A102) the lower-left end of the matchline. select Floor Plan: Level 2 . for Target view. 45 On the Zoom flyout.The Sheet number of the dependent view displays to the left of the matchline. 44 On the Design Bar. NOTE Double-clicking a view reference opens the dependent view that it references. 41 On the Options Bar.Labs. click Modify. Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views | 381 . 42 Click to the right of the top of the matchline.

double-click Level 2 . 49 If. select the room tag for Cubicle 3 (upper-right room tag) in the annotation area. 48 Select the crop region. and click Hide in view ➤ Elements. click (Show Crop Region). click the far right control. after modifying the annotation crop region. right-click. 47 On the View Control Bar. NOTE View references display in all views except for the view that it is referencing. and drag it slightly to the right to expand the annotation region so you can see the view reference. 382 | Chapter 9 Using Dependent Views . Notice that the view reference for the aviary does not display in the aviary dependent view. the tags for Cubicles 3 and 14 display.46 In the Project Browser.Aviary. under Floor Plans.

50 Use the same method to hide Cubicle 14 (directly below Cubicle 3). leaving 4 rooms visible in the view. 54 In the Project Browser. click Apply dependent view settings to other plans (Hide Crop Region). under Floor Plans. Notice that the matchline and crop regions from Level 2 are applied to Level 1. New dependent views display in the Project Browser under the primary view. and click OK. 56 Double-click Dependent on Level 1. After you have set up dependent view configuration for one view. and click Apply Dependent Views. and double-click Dependent (2) on Level 1. expand Level 1. 52 In the Project Browser. you can apply the view and crop region specifications to parallel views of the same scale. but are not placed on sheets. 53 In the Select Views dialog. right-click Level 2. select all views in the list. click Zoom To Fit. Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views | 383 . 51 On the View Control Bar. 55 On the Zoom flyout.

rvt Create dependent views 1 In the Project Browser. click Zoom To Fit. In the left pane of the Open dialog. right-click South Elevation. 2 In the Project Browser. click Training Files. you ■ ■ ■ ■ Create dependent split views of an elevation view Annotate the primary view to indicate where the view is split Place dependent views on a sheet Add view references to the primary view to link to dependent views Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. The matchline is already placed in the view. Using Dependent Views for Elevation Views In this exercise.57 On the Zoom flyout. and double-click South Elevation. expand Elevations (Building Elevation). and open Metric\m_Dependent_Views. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent. 384 | Chapter 9 Using Dependent Views .

for Name. 6 Select the inside crop region control on the right.Left. 3 In the Project Browser.Right. select the Crop Region. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent. and click OK.The dependent view opens. and click Rename. and click Rename. 10 In the Rename View dialog. cropping the view to the lab building. 9 In the Project Browser. 12 Select the inside crop region control on the left. expand South Elevation. and click OK. and drag it toward the center of the view. click (Hide Crop Region). enter South Elevation . 5 In the drawing area. 11 Select the crop region. enter South Elevation . right-click South Elevation. Using Dependent Views for Elevation Views | 385 . right-click Dependent on South Elevation. 4 In the Rename View dialog. 8 In the Project Browser. right-click Dependent on South Elevation. cropping the view to the aviary. for Name. 7 On the View Control Bar. and drag it toward the center of the drawing.

13 On the View Control Bar, click

(Hide Crop Region).

Create a sheet and place both dependent views on the sheet 14 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Sheet. 15 In the Select a Titleblock dialog, click OK to accept the default titleblock. 16 In the Project Browser, under Sheets, right-click A103 Unnamed, and click Rename. 17 In the Sheet Title dialog, for Name, enter South Elevation, and click OK. 18 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, click South Elevation - Left, and drag it onto the sheet. 19 Click to place the elevation view at the top of the sheet.

20 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, click South Elevation - Right, and drag it onto the sheet. 21 Click to place the elevation view at the bottom of the sheet.

386 | Chapter 9 Using Dependent Views

22 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 23 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, double-click South Elevation. 24 On the Views tab of the Design Bar, click View Reference. 25 On the Options Bar, for Target view, verify that Elevation: South Elevation - Left is selected. 26 Click to the left of the top of the matchline at the center of the elevation. 27 Click to the left of the bottom of the matchline.

28 On the Options Bar, for Target view, select Elevation: South Elevation - Right. 29 Click to the right of the top and the bottom of the matchline.

Using Dependent Views for Elevation Views | 387

30 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 31 In the Project Browser, under Sheets (all), double-click A103 - South Elevation. NOTE If the view references are not visible, you can modify the annotation region for the dependent view from the sheet. Right-click the view, and click Activate View. Select the crop region, and use the annotation crop controls to modify it.

388 | Chapter 9 Using Dependent Views

Viewing and Rendering

389

390

Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs

10

In this tutorial, you learn to use the rendering features in Revit Architecture 2009 to create rendered interior and exterior views of a building information model. You also learn how to create and record animated walkthroughs of a model.

Rendering an Exterior View
In this lesson, you learn how to create an exterior perspective view of a pool house building model and create rendered images for daytime and nighttime lighting.
Daytime rendering of the pool house

391

Nighttime rendering of the pool house

You learn to create and apply materials to the building model, add trees to the building site, and create the perspective view that you want to render. After you create the perspective view, you specify options that define the model environment, and then render a final exterior view.

Applying Materials and Textures to the Building Model
In this exercise, you learn how to view and modify the material that is applied to a building component in a building model. You also learn how to create a new material and apply it to a building component. You work with a building model that already has materials applied to it.

In this exercise, you:
■ ■ ■

change the render appearance of the wood material applied to the exterior screen wall of the pool house. change the material of the pad of the pool house from the default material to concrete. define a new black anodized aluminum material and apply it to the curtain wall mullions of the pool house wall.

When you complete these changes, you render a region of the building that includes the exterior wall, the pad, and the curtain wall to view and verify the material and texture changes.

392 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs

Training File
■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Common\c_Pool_House.rvt.

View the finish material of the screen wall 1 Verify that the 3D view of the pool house is displayed.

2 Zoom in to the wall of the house near the pool.

Applying Materials and Textures to the Building Model | 393

3 In the drawing area, select the wooden screen wall, and on the Options Bar, click Properties).

(Element

You check the construction of the screen walls to determine the material assigned to the wall, so you can change the render appearance for the material.

4 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New. 5 Under Construction, for Structure, click Edit. 6 In the Edit Assembly dialog, verify that the material for Structure [1] is Wood - Teak, Solid. 7 Click OK 3 times. Change the render appearance of the wood material 8 Click Settings menu ➤ Materials. The Wood - Teak, Solid material is currently a light stained teak. The design calls for the use of a dark stained, satin-finished teak. 9 In the Materials dialog, for Materials, select Wood - Teak, Solid. 10 On the Render Appearance tab, click Replace.

394 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs

11 In the Render Appearance Library dialog, click Wood Teak Stained Dark Medium Gloss, and click OK. You do not want the medium gloss finish, but it is the closest material to what you want. You make modifications to the settings for this material to more closely match the desired finish. 12 On the Render Appearance tab of the Materials dialog, for Finish, select Satin Varnish. 13 Click Update Preview, and click OK. The Update Preview option provides a real time rendering of the changes to the material. It can be used for visual feedback to see if the setting produces the desired results. Change the material of the pad from the default material to concrete 14 In the drawing area, select the pad, and on the Options Bar, click (Element Properties).

The material assignment for the pad is currently set to By Category, which is using a default material. You change the material assignment to use a concrete with a straight broom finish.

15 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New. 16 Under Construction, for Structure, click Edit. 17 In the Edit Assembly dialog, for the Structure [1] Material value, click <By Category>, and click . 18 In the Materials dialog, select Concrete - Cast-in-Place Concrete. 19 On the Render Appearance tab, for Finish, select Broom Straight, and click Update Preview. 20 Click the Graphics tab, and review the material patterns. 21 Click OK 4 times. 22 On the Design Bar, click Modify.

Applying Materials and Textures to the Building Model | 395

Define a new material and apply it to the mullions 23 Zoom in to view the curtain wall mullions.

24 Click Settings menu ➤ Materials. You create a black anodized aluminum material, and apply it to the mullions of the pool house wall. 25 In the Materials dialog, select Metal - Aluminum. You use an existing material as a template to create the black anodized aluminum material. 26 At the bottom left corner of the Materials dialog, click (Duplicate).

27 In the Duplicate Revit Material dialog, for Name, enter Metal - Aluminum, Anodized - Black, and click OK. 28 On the Graphics tab of the Materials dialog, select Use Render Appearance for Shading. By selecting this option, the color used for this material in shaded views is an average color defined by the render appearance. 29 On the Render Appearance tab, click Replace. 30 In the Render Appearance Library, click Aluminum Anodized Black, and click OK. 31 On the Graphics tab of the Materials dialog, review the material appearance (color and pattern), and click OK.

396 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs

32 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. The mullions and frame for the wall are defined as By Category. You change the material used by the curtain wall mullion category. 33 In the Object Styles dialog, for Curtain Wall Mullions, select the Material value, and click 34 In the Materials dialog, select Metal - Aluminum, Anodized - Black. 35 Click OK twice. .

36 Zoom to fit the drawing in the view.

Render a region of the model to view the material changes 37 On the View Control Bar, click 39 Select the rendering crop boundary. (Show Rendering Dialog).

38 At the top of the Rendering dialog, select Region.

Applying Materials and Textures to the Building Model | 397

40 Adjust the extents of the region by dragging the borders in tight around the areas where the materials changed (pool house screen, mullions, and pad). NOTE The smaller the region, the faster the image renders. It is a good practice to define a precise render region until you are ready to create the final rendered image.

41 Zoom in to the region in order to see the results of the rendering test more clearly.

398 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs

42 Specify options in the Rendering dialog:

Under Quality, for Setting, select Medium. Several quality settings are available. The higher the quality, the longer the rendering process will take. Refer to the Revit Architecture Online Help for best practices for optimizing quality and output settings. Under Lighting, for Scheme, select Exterior: Sun only. For Sun, select Sunlight from top left.

■ ■

43 Click Render. The Rendering Progress dialog displays, providing information on the status and duration of the rendering process.

44 To display the building model, after the rendering process completes, on the Rendering dialog, under Display, click Show the model. 45 Close the Rendering dialog. 46 Click File menu ➤ Save, and save the project as c_Pool_House_in_progress.rvt. 47 Proceed to the next exercise, Adding Trees to the Site on page 399.

Adding Trees to the Site
In this exercise, you place trees and shrubs on the building site in order to provide a more realistic context for rendering the project.

Adding Trees to the Site | 399

In a later exercise, when you render an exterior view of the model, the RPC model is used in the rendering. NOTE For simplicity, imperial components and units are used in this lesson. Specific types and sizes of trees are referenced in the steps, but any type and size can be used. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise, c_Pool_House_in_progress.rvt. Add shrubs and trees to the site 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click Site.

2 Zoom in so you can easily view the area surrounding the pool house and walkway.

400 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs

3 On the Site tab of the Design Bar, click Site Component. TIP If the Site tab is not displayed, right-click in the Design Bar, and click Site. 4 In the Type Selector, select RPC Shrub : Yew 2'-4''. NOTE If planting families are not loaded into a project, they can be loaded from the Content Library. See Loading Families in the Revit Architecture 2009 Online Help. 5 Place 4 shrubs to the right of the patio, near the walkway, as shown. (Exact placement is not important.)

6 In the Type Selector, select RPC Tree - Deciduous : Red Maple - 30', and place 2 trees in the project, similar to the locations shown.

Adding Trees to the Site | 401

7 In the Type Selector, select RPC Tree - Deciduous : Scarlet Oak - 42', and place a tree to the left of the pool house between the 2 maple trees.

Create a tree type and add it to the site 8 In the Type Selector, select RPC Tree - Deciduous : Honey Locust - 25', and on the Options Bar, click (Element Properties).

9 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New. You change the size of the existing Honey Locust tree family. 10 In the Type Properties dialog, click Rename. 11 In the Rename dialog, for New, enter Honey Locust - 18', and click OK. 12 In the Type Properties dialog, for Height, enter 18'. 13 Click OK twice. 14 Click in the drawing area to the right of the pool house to place the tree.

402 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs

Creating a Perspective View In this exercise. you define the exterior perspective view of the building model that you want to render. Creating a Perspective View | 403 .15 On the Design Bar. 16 Click File menu ➤ Save. Creating a Perspective View on page 403. click Modify. 17 Proceed to the next exercise.

404 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . on the View tab of the Design Bar. ■ Exact placement is not important because you modify the view as required.Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. The perspective view displays. 2 Add the camera to the view by specifying points for the camera position and the camera target point: ■ Specify the first point along the curve of the walkway facing the pool house to position the camera. Specify the second point in the upper left corner of the pool house to define the target point of the camera. click Camera.rvt. Place a camera in the site view 1 With the Site view open. c_Pool_House_in_progress.

the back wall of the yard may be cut off. If the camera is not shown in the view. and select the crop boundary. right-click 3D View 1. 4 Adjust the crop boundary to display the entire building and some of the pool in the foreground. The camera can also be moved along the walkway to get the desired perspective view. as necessary. With the camera shown. the triangle that represents the field of vision can be adjusted.3 Zoom out. and click Show Camera. double-click Site. Depending on camera placement. as shown. Adjust the field of vision and back clipping plane 5 In the Project Browser. in the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. Adjust the back clipping plane so that it is beyond the wall in the yard. and adjust the field of vision. Creating a Perspective View | 405 .

Day to open the view. right-click 3D View 1. 10 Save the file. double-click Exterior . under 3D Views. 7 In the Rename View dialog. 9 Zoom to fit the perspective view in the window. and make any final adjustments to the crop boundary to improve image composition. 8 In the Project Browser. 406 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . enter Exterior . 11 Proceed to the next exercise. and click OK.Day. Creating the Exterior Rendering on page 407. and click Rename.6 In the Project Browser.

Creating the Exterior Rendering | 407 . you specify the time and location settings for the rendering. double-click Exterior .Day. Display the perspective view 1 In the Project Browser.Creating the Exterior Rendering In this exercise. and render a daytime view of the exterior. and create lighting groups for a nighttime view of the exterior. c_Pool_House_in_progress.rvt. modify render settings. You then duplicate the view. under 3D Views. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise.

Specify rendering settings for a daytime view 2 On the View Control Bar. enter Spring Equinox . select Edit/New. for New. 6 Click OK twice. the sky will be a procedural sky based on cloud settings and time of day. under Lighting. and click Render. for Setting. 5 In the Rename dialog. 8 Under Quality. 408 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . under Background. see Re-orienting the Project on page 447. select Sky: Cloudy. and click Rename. 3pm. export the resulting image in PNG or TIFF format. You create a location and time for the rendering. 3 In the Rendering dialog. The PNG and TIFF formats place the chosen background on an alpha channel for easier manipulation during photoediting. 7 In the Rendering dialog.Santa Monica. select Medium. for Sun. select Spring Equinox. click (Show Rendering Dialog). For information on how the rendering/sun relates to the location settings. In this case. NOTE If a background image is required. 4 On the Still tab of the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. You adjust cloud settings as required.

click Export. 12 In the Save Image dialog: ■ ■ ■ In the left pane. you can switch between the rendered view and the model view as long as the Revit Architecture session is open. select Portable Network Graphics (*. Export the rendered image to an external file 11 In the Rendering dialog.png). click Desktop. The image file is saved to the Desktop for later reference. After the image is rendered. Creating the Exterior Rendering | 409 . click Show the model. 13 Close the Rendering dialog. click Show the rendering. 10 In the Rendering dialog. For Files of type. Click Save.9 In the Rendering dialog.

click Dialog).120V through 14 :Sconce Light .Specify rendering settings for a nighttime view 14 In the Project Browser. click OK. 24 In the New Light Group dialog. 20 In the Artificial Lights dialog. 27 In the Rendering dialog. under Group Options.Exterior . Create lighting groups 18 In the Artificial Lights . To select a sequential list. you duplicate the view and change the settings. and click Artificial Lights. and click OK.Night. click Render. 19 In the New Light Group dialog. 21 In the Light Groups dialog. press and hold SHIFT. dialog.Night. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. Lighting groups allow greater control over lighting schemes used in renderings. under Ungrouped Lights. highlight 9 :Sconce Light . add 30 :Sconce Light . 25 Using the same method. You change the rendering settings to create a nighttime rendering of the same view. select Exterior: Artificial only. for Name. and select the last light. under Ungrouped Lights. 16 With the Exterior . click New. (Show Rendering 17 In the Rendering dialog. under Lighting.Flat Round : 60W . and click OK. add 16 :Light Fixture through 29 :Light Fixture to the Pool House Lights group. 26 In the Artificial Lights dialog. on the View Control Bar. right-click Exterior .Day. under 3D Views.120V. select the first light. To create a similar view using different rendering settings. 410 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs .120V to the Pool Lights group.Flat Round : 60W . click New. enter Pool House Lights. 22 Using the same method.Flat Round : 60W .120V through 35 :Sconce Light .Flat Round : 60W . under Group Options. for Name.Day view to Exterior . and click OK.Night view open. 15 Rename the Copy of Exterior . and click Move to Group. enter Pool Lights. verify that Pool Lights is selected. for Scheme. 23 In the Artificial Lights dialog.

and click OK. Settings can be changed at any time within the Revit Architecture session. for Exposure Value. 32 Save the file. 31 Close the Rendering dialog. you change the brightness of the exposure. but the other settings can be modified as well to control the final rendering. 33 Proceed to the next lesson. click Show the model. the exposure can be modified to improve the output. enter 4. Rendering an Interior View In this lesson. In this example. you create a nighttime and a daytime rendering of the interior view of the building model that you worked with in the previous lesson. under Image. 29 In the Exposure Control dialog.Adjust the exposure 28 In the Rendering dialog. 30 In the Rendering dialog. Rendering an Interior View on page 411. click Adjust Exposure. After the image is rendered. and then switch between the views by clicking Show the rendering. Rendering an Interior View | 411 .

and finally. Adding RPC People In this exercise.Draft nighttime rendering of the interior High quality daytime rendering of the interior To create the rendered view. define the perspective view and rendering settings. 412 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . RPC people are represented by a 2D symbol in plan view and resemble real people only when rendered in a 3D view. c_Pool_House_in_progress. render the views. you add ArchVision® realpeople (RPC content) to the interior of the pool house. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise.rvt. you add an RPC person to the interior view that you render in a later exercise.

double-click Level 1. 6 Select the figure. click 7 Rotate the figure: The pointed portion of the symbol represents the front of the figure. under Floor Plans. 2 Zoom in to the pool house. and place the component inside the pool house. and on the Edit toolbar. Click to set the rotate start point at the line of sight. select RPC Female : YinYin. Exact placement is not important. 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. click Modify. ■ (Rotate). Adding RPC People | 413 . 4 In the Type Selector. click Component.Add an RPC figure to the view 1 In the Project Browser. but place the figure close to the front of the vanity so that her reflection displays in the mirror after the scene is rendered. the person’s line of sight. 5 On the Design Bar.

and click so that the figure is angled toward the vanity. Enable reflective properties for RPC content 8 With the RPC figure selected. under Parameters. on the Options Bar. select Cast Reflections. By default. click Edit/New. for Render Appearance Properties. under Identity Data.■ Rotate clockwise about 20 degrees. 11 In the Render Appearance Properties dialog. click Edit. In order to see the figure’s reflection. If reflections of RPC content are important to the rendering. 14 Save the file. click Modify. 9 In the Element Properties dialog. click (Element Properties). the reflective properties must be turned on for the family type. you can enable this option. 10 In the Type Properties dialog. 414 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . 13 On the Design Bar. the reflection of RPC content is turned off in order to enhance rendering performance. 12 Click OK 3 times.

Exact placement is not important because you will adjust the crop boundary of the view in later steps.15 Proceed to the next exercise. You place a camera into the view to create an interior perspective. Add a camera 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. c_Pool_House_in_progress. click Camera. and using a section box to limit the geometry included in the rendering process. 2 Add the camera to the view by specifying points for the camera position and target point: ■ ■ Click inside the lower right corner of the pool house to place the camera. Creating the Interior Perspective View | 415 .rvt. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. you create the interior perspective view that you will render in the final exercise in this lesson. You define the interior perspective by placing a camera. Click outside of the pool house to the left to place the target point. Creating the Interior Perspective View In this exercise. Creating the Interior Perspective View on page 415.

right-click 3D View 1. You can use a section box to limit the geometry included in a rendering. under 3D Views. 5 In the Element Properties dialog. select Section Box. 4 In the Project Browser.The perspective view displays. 416 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . under Extents. and click Properties. Add a section box to limit the extents of the rendered view 3 Zoom to fit the view in the window. and click OK. 6 Zoom out so that you can see the selection box.

you display an elevation/section view and a plan view. 9 In the Project Browser. double-click South. in addition to the 3D view.7 Click Window menu ➤ Close Hidden Windows. In order to accurately adjust the section box. 11 In the 3D view. 8 In the Project Browser. double-click Level 1. Creating the Interior Perspective View | 417 . under Elevations (Building Elevations). 10 Click Window menu ➤ Tile. select the section box. under Floor Plans.

14 In the 3D view. 418 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . 13 In the South Elevation view. size the box as shown. size the box as shown. select the section box. right-click. and click Hide in view ➤ Category.12 In the floor plan view.

To create a daytime view. Training File Creating the Interior Rendering | 419 . and curtain walls. Daylight portals improve the quality of light that shines through windows. and adjust the crop boundary to match the illustration. 16 Zoom to fit the view in the window. you define daylight portals for the glazed panels of the curtain wall. Creating the Interior Rendering In this exercise. doors that contain windows or glass. Creating the Interior Rendering on page 419. you define artificial lighting and render a nighttime view of the interior. and render the interior view. 17 Save the file.15 Maximize the 3D view. 18 Proceed to the next exercise.

The Interior: Artificial only option defines a baseline for the exposure and other settings for an interior rendering without daylight. click Render. 7 Under Quality. enter Interior . you turn them off for this scene. 3 On the View Control Bar. and render the view to check lighting levels and material selections. and click OK. 5 Click Artificial Lights. After these settings are established. You can specify a lower quality. for Scheme. select Draft. the view can be rendered at a higher quality level. Define lighting for a nighttime view 1 In the Project Browser. under Lighting. clear Pool Lights.Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. for Setting. Because the exterior pool lights will not have an effect on this rendering. select Interior: Artificial only. 2 In the Rename View dialog. right-click 3D View 1.rvt. 6 In the Artificial Lights dialog. and click Rename. These settings can be adjusted after the rendering is complete using the Adjust Exposure option. under 3D Views. Using light controls and lighting groups can help to define multiple lighting conditions for views. c_Pool_House_in_progress. 8 In the Rendering dialog. click (Show Rendering Dialog).Night. and click OK. 4 In the Rendering dialog. 420 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs .

11 Rename the copied view to Interior . You create a view for the interior during the day. click Copy To Custom.Night.Santa Monica. You have to copy a preset scheme to your custom settings in order to make changes. For sunlit interiors. Create an interior day view 10 In the Project Browser. select Curtain Walls. You can duplicate the view for each lighting condition/time of day you want to render. This process must be repeated if you want to use custom settings in other views. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. 3pm. click 14 For Setting. and click OK. you must create a custom setting. NOTE The custom setting is only applied to this view. 17 In the Rendering dialog. select Interior: Sun only. The daylight portals help to further refine this daylight into a more realistic rendered effect. 15 In the Render Quality Settings dialog. for Daylight Portal Options. see the Revit Architecture Online Help. right-click Interior .9 Close the Rendering dialog. IMPORTANT Enabling daylight portals can drastically increase rendering times. Specify rendering settings 12 On the View Control Bar. Creating the Interior Rendering | 421 . in order to turn on daylight portals. and click Render. select Region. but the space will receive standard daylighting.Day. The preset schemes are read-only. the daylight portals can be turned on. 13 In the Rendering dialog. for Sun. 16 Scroll to the bottom of the dialog. For more information on daylight portals. select Spring Equinox . In this case. for Scheme. (Show Rendering Dialog). select Edit. By default they are turned off.

(Element 422 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . and close the Rendering dialog. under Image. For Saturation. click Show the model. enter 1. click Properties). View the properties of the column and note that the assigned material is Wood. Notice that the speckling on the wooden column in the foreground is reflecting too much light.18 In the Rendering dialog. Modify the column material 21 In the drawing area. Click OK. enter 10. you adjust the material of the column to improve the effect. 19 In the Exposure Control dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Exposure Value. and on the Options Bar. select the column on the right. click Adjust Exposure. In the next steps. 20 In the Rendering dialog.

24 In the Materials dialog. For Amount. 23 With the column still selected. select Wood. 26 Click Update Preview. The rendered output can be set to a printed ratio and the printed size of the output as well as the DPI for the image can be controlled.6. 25 Specify options on the Render Appearance tab: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Finish. click (Show Rendering Dialog). the render time increases significantly. you can define the output and quality settings for final output. After you use the test renderings to verify that you made the correct lighting and material selection. Create a print quality rendering 27 On the View Control Bar. and on the Options Bar. enter 5''. For Bump. select Unfinished. and click OK. As size and DPI are increased. move the slider to the right until the value is approximately 5.22 In the Element Properties dialog. enter 90. click OK. For Rotate. click Settings menu ➤ Materials. You change the varnish setting. select Scale (locked proportions). Click OK. 31 In the Crop Region Size dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Change. for Resolution. and rotate the material so that the grain of the wood runs vertically along the column. click the dimensions for Size. 28 In the Rendering dialog. 32 In the Rendering dialog. select Based on wood grain. Creating the Interior Rendering | 423 . add a bump map to create texture. under Output Settings. clear Region. for Setting. and click Render. For Width. 30 In the drawing area. select High. select the crop boundary. select Printer. 29 In the Rendering dialog.

You can edit the walkthrough path by selecting and moving the key frames. independent of the Revit Architecture software. The file can now be exported or saved to the Revit project. The walkthrough path is a spline. you learn how to create and record animated walkthroughs of your building models in Revit Architecture 2009. When you export your walkthrough to an AVI. In a plan view. Additional frames that comprise the walkthrough are created between the key frames. A walkthrough is created in a 3D perspective view by default. Usually. Creating and Editing a Walkthrough The first step in creating a walkthrough is to define the walkthrough path. 33 Close the exercise file with or without saving. you can record it by exporting it to an AVI file that you can play with any available video player. but you can also define it in a 3D. which is the path that a camera will follow through the building model. By completing the two rendering lessons included in this tutorial. but you can also create it in a 3D orthographic view. Creating and Recording Walkthroughs In this lesson.The rendered image displays. you can select one of the following display options for the building model in your walkthrough: ■ ■ ■ Wireframe Hidden Line (wireframe view with hidden lines) Shading 424 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . elevation. and you create it by specifying points that create the spline. Each point becomes a key frame in the walkthrough. or section view. you can also specify the height of the camera along the walkthrough path. you define the walkthrough path in a plan view. Recording a Walkthrough After you create a walkthrough. you rendered an exterior and an interior view. You learned to create perspective views suitable for rendering and to modify rendering options in order to optimize the final output.

expand Views (all). In the left pane of the Open dialog. 4 Move the cursor under the text label in the Breakfast room. verify that Perspective is selected. You create a walkthrough that begins in the breakfast room of the townhouse. click Settings ➤ Project Units. and ends in the far corner of the living room.rvt. and change unit formats as desired. TIP If the tab that you need does not display in the Design Bar. and click the tab in the context menu. and click to specify the start point (the first key frame) of the walkthrough. on the Options Bar. 5 Specify 4 additional points to define key frame positions on the walkthrough path as shown. Create a walkthrough of the first floor of the building model 1 In the Project Browser. NOTE Some imperial values are used by default in this exercise. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. click Training Files. Creating a Walkthrough | 425 . proceeds through the dining room. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and double-click 1st Floor.■ ■ Shading with Edges Rendering Creating a Walkthrough In this exercise. expand Floor Plans. If you prefer to use metric values. you learn how to create and edit a walkthrough of the first floor of a townhouse. click Walkthrough. and open Common\c_Townhouse. 3 To create the walkthrough in a 3D perspective view. right-click in the Design Bar.

6 After you specify the final point of the walkthrough path in the Living room. The last frame of the walkthrough is displayed. click Finish. 426 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . and double-click Walkthrough 1. surrounded by a crop boundary with grips as shown. expand Views (all) ➤ Walkthroughs. Edit and play the walkthrough 7 In the Project Browser. on the Options Bar. Your frame may look a bit different from the frame in the illustration because the walkthrough path is not precisely the same.

click Edit Walkthrough. and select the crop boundary. for Width. enter 1. select the crop boundary. and press ENTER to set the walkthrough to play from the beginning (the key frame). 12 On the View menu. 11 Under Change. Two options are displayed on the Options Bar: Edit Walkthrough and Size. enter 60 to reduce the total number of frames in the walkthrough from 300 to 60.8 Verify that the crop boundary of the walkthrough frame is selected and is displayed as red with blue grips. and click OK. 16 On the Options Bar. enter 16''. Creating a Walkthrough | 427 . 14 Click . If it is not. 17 Click . click the dimensions for Size. and for Height. 13 On the Options Bar. and click OK. 15 In the Walkthrough Frames dialog. enter 9''. click Zoom ➤ Zoom Out (2x). 9 To change the size of the walkthrough frame crop region. 10 In the Crop Region Size dialog. The walkthrough controls are displayed on the Options Bar. The frame that is displayed is frame 300 of a total of 300 frames. on the Options Bar. for Frame. verify that Field of view is selected.

c_Townhouse. under Extents. you learn how to edit the walkthrough path and change the camera position in the walkthrough that you created in the previous exercise. proceed to the next exercise. The walkthrough path is displayed in the floor plan of the first floor.rvt. click Edit Walkthrough. Edit the walkthrough path 4 On the Options Bar. click (Element Properties). 428 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . 18 When the walkthrough stops playing. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. The current display is wireframe with hidden lines. 3 In the Element Properties dialog.The walkthrough plays. Changing the Walkthrough Path and Camera Position In this exercise. clear Far Clip Active. Changing the Walkthrough Path and Camera Position on page 428. 2 On the Options Bar. The camera is displayed at the first key frame position on the walkthrough path in the breakfast room. Change the properties of the camera 1 In the Project Browser. and click OK. under Floor Plans. NOTE To stop playing the walkthrough at any time. Clearing this option disables the far clipping plane of the camera. press ESC. double-click 1st Floor.

Changing the Walkthrough Path and Camera Position | 429 . for Controls. and drag it to the location shown. select Path. Blue grips are displayed at each key frame. 6 On the Options Bar. 7 Click the third key frame position. You can move any camera target or key frame position.5 Select the target point of the camera (the magenta grip). and adjust it to view the kitchen as shown. Your walkthrough path may vary from the one in the illustration. so do not be concerned if the camera displays at a slightly different location.

on the Options Bar. 6 Double-click the AVI file to play the walkthrough from the location that you specified previously. It produces files that are larger than compressed files. or rendering. click Edit Walkthrough. select <Shading>. you can select to display the walkthrough in wireframe. 5 In the Video Compression dialog. hidden line. 430 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . select any codec (compression/decompression) that is available on your system. 7 Try creating other walkthroughs. Recording the Walkthrough on page 430. and click OK. then you are moving from the breakfast area to the living room window in 10 seconds. click File menu ➤ Save As. specifying the number of frames.Play the walkthrough to view the changes that you made 8 In the Project Browser. shading. Reducing the size of the output images and managing the frame rate lets you create realistic and smooth movement. The walkthrough is recorded. and click Save. for Frames/sec. you record the walkthrough that you created in the previous exercise by exporting it to an AVI file. If you had 150 frames and a frame rate of 15 seconds. NOTE The available Compressor options are specific to your current computer system. specify a path and a file name for the AVI. for Compressor. reducing the size of the image. enter 15. and with a frame rate of from 15-30 frames per second. without opening Revit Architecture 2009. and save the exercise file with a unique name. but that do not suffer loss due to compression quality. and then click 10 Proceed to the next exercise. c_Townhouse. Recording the Walkthrough In this exercise.rvt. under Output Length. double-click Walkthrough 1. 4 In the Export Walkthrough dialog. 1 Click File menu ➤ Export ➤ Walkthrough. 9 To play the walkthrough. . the Full Frames (Uncompressed) option is available to all users. 2 In the Length/Format dialog. for Model Graphics Style. If you are unsure of what option to use. 3 Under Format. When you export the walkthrough. shading with edges. and click OK. perhaps to 6'' wide x 4'' height. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 9 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. under Walkthroughs. 8 If you want to save this exercise.

you learn to create three 3D views of a building information model for use with solar studies. ■ ■ ■ A courtyard perspective view illustrates how shadows impact the site and buildings. you learn how a solar study of different perspective views of a building can support passive solar design by showing where shadows fall during the warmest time of the day and at different times throughout the year. Creating Views for Solar Studies In this lesson. Exterior solar studies can show the impact of shadows on a site by the terrain and the surrounding buildings. You specify settings for summer and winter solstice solar studies and export one solar study as a video and the other as a series of images. you create interior and exterior views of a building information model to be used in solar studies that you define. More specifically. 431 . A cut section view enables you to see the effect of shadows and light on the interior of a building. A plan view provides information on how sunlight and shadows play on the floor of a building.Creating Solar Studies 11 The ability to create solar studies for a specific project and site can be very valuable for creating sustainable designs. In this tutorial. Interior solar studies can illustrate how effectively natural light penetrates inside a building during specific times of the day and year.

as shown.Creating a Solar Study . expand Views (all). The view you create may differ slightly from the illustrations in the exercises because of minor variations in camera placement. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and double-click 01 Entry. A 3D view is created.Courtyard View In this exercise.rvt. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 3 Click in the lower right corner of the drawing area outside of the courtyard to place the camera and click in the upper left corner above the courtyard to place the camera target point. expand Floor Plans. click Training Files. as 432 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . and use the Orbit tool to adjust the view. and open Common\c_Solar_Study. 4 On the View toolbar. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 1 In the Project Browser. you customize a 3D external view of the building to enhance Solar Study analysis. (SteeringWheels). click shown. click Camera.

under Floor Plans. and drag the blue circular controls to see more of the perspective view. 7 In the Project Browser. Creating a Solar Study Section Cutaway View | 433 . Creating a Solar Study Section Cutaway View In this exercise. and save the exercise file with a unique name. Training File Continue to use the c_Solar_Study.rvt training file you saved in the previous exercise. enter Solar Study . 6 Click the view boundary to select it. and click Rename. and click OK. expand 3D Views. 9 On the File menu. and then click to the left outside of the house to sketch the horizontal section line shown in the following illustration. click Save As. you create a section cutaway view. click Modify. right-click 3D View 1. click Section. if necessary. double-click 01 Entry. Create section 1 In the Project Browser. 2 Enter ZR to zoom in on the house. 4 Click to the right of reference plane 9 between A and B and. as shown.Courtyard View. 10 Proceed to the next exercise. 3 On the Design Bar. 8 In the Rename View dialog.5 On the Design Bar. Creating a Solar Study Section Cutaway View on page 433.

double-click the section head. 6 To view the section. click . and click Orient to View ➤ Section: Section for Solar Study Cutaway. enter Section for Solar Study Cutaway. expand Sections. right-click Section 1. 11 On the SteeringWheel.5 On the Design Bar. click Modify. 13 On the Design Bar. 434 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . and click Rename. 8 In the Rename View dialog. (SteeringWheels). 12 Use the Orbit tool to adjust the view down and to the right. 7 In the Project Browser. and click OK. click 10 On the View toolbar. as shown. click Modify. click the pull-down arrow to display the Wheel menu. Create 3D section view 9 On the View toolbar.

including the house.rvt training file you saved in the previous exercise. such as floor plans and ceiling plans. double-click Callout of 01 Entry. click Save. NOTE A plan view of a shadow study should be created in a 3D view with top orientation. 4 In the Project Browser. you create a plan cutaway view. Training File Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. Creating a Solar Study Plan Cutaway View | 435 . Create callout 1 In the Project Browser. In some cases. click . On the Annotation Categories tab. Creating a Solar Study Plan Cutaway View on page 435. do not display many elements in 3D. under 3D Views. enter Solar Study Callout for Plan Cutaway. and click Rename. and click Rename. as shown. clear Section Boxes. click Callout. right-click Callout of 01 Entry. 15 In the Rename View dialog. under Floor Plans. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. Creating a Solar Study Plan Cutaway View In this exercise. changing to Medium or Fine provides a better view for a shadow study. 18 On the File menu. then Fine. double-click 01 Entry. 16 On the View Control Bar. 17 To hide the section box. under Floor Plans. 19 Proceed to the next exercise. Typical plan views. 6 In the Rename View dialog. and click OK. and click OK. and click OK.14 In the Project Browser. enter Solar Study Section Cutaway. some structural elements are shown as a single line rather than solid and do not cast a shadow. right-click {3D}. 5 In the Project Browser. NOTE With the detail level set to Coarse. Create 3D Plan View 7 On the View toolbar. so no shadows will be cast from these elements. then select Medium. click Detail Level ➤ Coarse. 3 Click in the upper left corner and lower right corner to sketch a selection around the site.

16 On the View Control Bar. 9 On the SteeringWheel.8 On the View toolbar. 12 Select the section box in the drawing area. 14 Select the blue up arrow control in the center of the model and drag up to expose the second floor of the building. as shown. 10 Use the Orbit tool to adjust the view to the right and back to view the front side. click the pull-down arrow to display the Wheel menu. click (SteeringWheels). so you can see into the building from the top. 11 On the Design Bar. click Modify. and click Orient to View ➤ Floor Plan: Solar Study Callout for Plan Cutaway. 15 Select the Roof. 13 Select the blue down arrow control at the bottom of the model and drag down to expose the full first level of the model. as shown. click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Category. 436 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies .

Saving Solar Study Settings and Previewing Animations | 437 . enter Solar Study Plan Cutaway.17 On the View Control Bar. Saving Solar Study Settings and Previewing Animations In this lesson. click Detail Level ➤ Fine. and preview the effects of each study as an animation. The animations of solar activity at a particular place and time allow you to study the impact of natural light and shadows on the buildings and site. 19 In the Rename View dialog. under 3D Views. double-click each of the sun study 3D views that you created in this lesson: ■ ■ ■ Solar Study . right-click {3D}. Display study views 22 In the Project Browser. you create a solar study for winter and summer solstice. 18 In the Project Browser. 21 On the File menu. and click OK. and click Rename. click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Reset Temporary Hide/Isolate.Courtyard View Solar Study Plan Cutaway Solar Study Section Cutaway These views will be used in additional lessons in this tutorial. under 3D Views. 20 On the View Control Bar. click Save.

Changing the place in this dialog changes the setting defined for the project. you specify the location. 8 Confirm that One Day Solar Study . The Sun and Shadows Settings dialog displays. expand Views (all). . For this study. and time. Click the Single-Day tab. click . For the Single-Day solar study. 2 On the View Control Bar. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. 438 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . 5 Click the Single-Day tab. date range. For the Multi-Day solar study. 3 Select Cast Shadows. expand 3D Views. you create a single-day solar study for the summer solstice. Training File Continue to use the customized c_solar_study. or multi-day solar study. and click Duplicate. 4 For Sun Position. You can create a still. 10 Under Place. CA. click click OK. you specify the location. date. leave the slider at 50. 9 In the Name dialog. Create summer solstice study 1 In the Project Browser. and time range. enter Summer Solstice.Creating Solar Studies . select Los Angeles. single-day.Boston.Summer and Winter Solstice In this exercise. and click OK.rvt training file you used in the previous lesson. USA is selected. as well as a time interval for the frames of the solar animation. 6 Click the Multi-Day tab. as well as a time interval for the frames of the solar animation. USA. and 11 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. for City. 7 Create a Single-Day study from an existing study. and double-click Solar Study Courtyard View. You can change the intensity of the shadows by dragging the slider in the Shadow field. click . MA. Los Angeles.

Create winter solstice study 15 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. Under Frame. 19 On the File menu. 7 On the Options Bar. You can select the level to be used for shadow display. on the Single-Day tab. 13 Select Ground Plane at Level. Previewing Solar Study Animation In this exercise. click .12 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog: ■ ■ For Date. you want to see how the shadows fall on the terrain and not for a specific level. 2008. click OK. under Frame. click OK. Clear Ground Plane at Level. you preview the solar studies you created in the previous exercise. and click OK. enter 20 and press ENTER. Notice that 01 Entry is selected as the level. select June 22. click the control buttons to preview the animation: ■ To display the previous key frame. 4 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. and click OK. verify that the value is set to 15 minutes. For Time Range. Training File Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. select December 22. 2 On the View Control Bar. Previewing Solar Study Animation on page 439. for Sun Position. 5 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. Previewing Solar Study Animation | 439 . click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. 17 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. confirm that Summer Solstice. click Shadows ➤ Preview Solar Study. Los Angeles is selected. and click Duplicate.rvt training file you saved in the previous exercise. 3 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. enter Winter Solstice. 8 On the Options Bar. 16 In the Name dialog. 18 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. 14 In this case. Los Angeles. you can specify to go to a specific frame in the solar study animation: ■ ■ Under Frame. 2008. 6 On the View Control Bar.Courtyard View is currently displayed. click Save. Los Angeles. enter 10 and press ENTER. you can specify the start and stop times for the solar study. and click OK. for Date. Preview winter solstice animation 1 Confirm that the 3D View Solar Study . NOTE If you clear Sunrise to sunset. click . 20 Proceed to the next exercise. verify that Sunrise to sunset is selected. select Winter Solstice. ■ For Time Interval.

Los Angeles.rvt training file you saved in the previous lesson. . you annotate a floor plan to identify different activities for the building and export a solar study for a cutaway view as an AVI video file. Click in the drawing area and enter Living Area. You also export the winter solstice solar study as a series of PNG format images. PNG format images can be easily displayed on a web site or sent via e-mail. click Text. click . click To play the animation from start to finish. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics.■ To display the next key frame. click OK. The solar study animation plays. AVI files are standalone video files that can be easily distributed and viewed by colleagues or clients. 2 Enter ZR and zoom in on the house. 3 Label areas in the house: ■ ■ On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 440 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . on the Single-Day tab. Exporting the Study as AVI In this exercise. click Shadows ➤ Preview Solar Study. click ■ ■ NOTE You can stop viewing the animation at any time by clicking Cancel in the Status Bar. 14 On the Options Bar. Preview summer solstice animation 9 On the View Control Bar. showing the progression at 15-minute intervals for the location and date specified. click . . click . Each PNG is a still image of a sequential frame in the animation. . Exporting Solar Studies In this lesson. 10 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. Annotate view for solar study 1 In the Project Browser. 12 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. double-click 01 Entry. and click OK. Training File Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. 13 On the View Control Bar. 11 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. you export the summer solstice solar study as an AVI file. click To display the next sequential frame. for Sun Position. under Floor Plans. ■ To display the previous sequential frame. approximately as shown. select Summer Solstice.

7 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. and double-click Solar Study Section Cutaway. NOTE The building is a shell and you are considering alternative layouts for the interior space. verify that Cast Shadows is selected. On the Options Bar. Click in the drawing area and sketch a rectangle around the living area. Sketching the living and dining room areas in the house and using a solar study to determine where direct light is in the floor plan helps to determine the best layout. Click in the drawing area and sketch around the Dining area. click . expand 3D Views. Exporting the Study as AVI | 441 . as shown. Click and enter Dining. 8 For Sun Position. 6 On the View Control Bar.■ ■ Click outside of the text box to end the command. as shown. 5 In the Project Browser. 4 Sketch rooms: ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Design Bar. click Lines. click . approximately as shown. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics.

verify that the value is set to 15.9 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. as shown. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. NOTE ZR for Zoom To Region to make it easier to select the control. Export as AVI 16 Click File menu ➤ Export ➤ Animated Solar Study. 11 To display the section box. select Frame Range. 17 Specify the export options: ■ In the Length/Format dialog. Limiting the range from 5 to 50 omits these frames. on the Single-Day tab. and click OK. 13 Click the right blue control and drag the right edge of the section box to reveal the roof overhang. 12 In the drawing area. 10 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. select Summer Solstice. under Output Length. clear Section Boxes. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 15 To hide the section box. and enter ZF to zoom to fit the building to the drawing area. Los Angeles. ■ For Frames per second. and click OK. select the section box. On the Annotation Categories tab. 442 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . select Section Boxes. if necessary. 14 Click outside of the section box. and enter 5 to 50. On the Annotation Categories tab. NOTE The first and last few frames (sunrise and sunset) show large triangular shadows from the terrain. and click OK. click OK.

of the animation separately. verify that Hidden Line is selected. verify that the value is set to 15.rvt training file you saved in the previous exercise. select AVI Files. In the Export Animated Solar Study dialog. 21 Proceed to the next exercise. 7 Specify the export options: ■ ■ ■ In the Length/Format dialog. For File Name. click the Desktop icon on the left to save the file to the computer Desktop. select Winter Solstice. on the Single-Day tab. 2 On the View Control Bar. you only enter one dimension and the other one is calculated automatically. Under Format. For Files of Type. 20 Click File menu ➤ Save. Export as PNG 1 Confirm that the 3D View Solar Study Section Cutaway is displayed.■ ■ Under Format. and click in the second field (height) to see the value dynamically changed. click . you open each image. Exporting a Study as PNG on page 443. click OK. you export the Winter Solstice Solar Study to create a solar animation that is output as individual ping (PNG format) graphics. 3 For Sun Position. 4 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. NOTE Uncompressed AVI files can be zipped to reduce the file size. Click OK. under Output Length. For Frames per second. Los Angeles. for Model Graphics Style. Exporting a Study as PNG In this lesson. and click OK. for Compressor. 19 In the Video Compression dialog. enter 450 in the first field (width). verify that Full Frames (Uncompressed) is selected. The equivalent zoom percentage is also set if you specify frame dimensions. and click OK. Exporting a Study as PNG | 443 . select Frame Range. For Dimensions. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. The AVI can then typically be played from within the zip file. or frame. 6 Click File menu ➤ Export ➤ Animated Solar Study. ■ ■ ■ ■ 18 Click Save. To maintain the proportions of the frame. Training File Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. and enter 5 to 10. 5 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. enter Summer Solar Study Section Cutaway . for Model Graphics Style. verify that Hidden Line is selected.Los Angeles. The animation plays as the AVI file is saved to the Desktop. To view the animation.

Create plan interior view 1 In the Project Browser. the Frame Range was set to just 5 files to avoid cluttering the Desktop. Training File Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. double-click Solar Study Plan Cutaway. as shown: 9 On the File menu. click the Desktop icon. enter 450 in the first field (width). ■ ■ ■ ■ NOTE When you export to PNG. under 3D Views. In the Export Animated Solar Study dialog. or GIF. BMP.Los Angeles. depending on the Frame Range. it is recommended that you first create a folder to export to because the export process creates several files. Creating an Internal Plan Study In this exercise. In this example. The animation plays as the files are saved to the Desktop.rvt training file you saved in the previous lesson. Click OK. such as JPEG. For Files of Type. select PNG. you create a 3D view of a plan and create a solar study to animate the effects of natural light on the inside of the building. 8 Click Save. Creating an Internal Plan Solar Study In this lesson. 444 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies .■ For Dimensions. and click in the second field (height) to see the value dynamically changed. or any single-frame format. click Save. you create an internal solar study for a plan to determine where shadows fall inside the building during the warmest part of the day. For File name. enter Winter Solar Study Section Cutaway . TIFF. The resulting PNG images are date and time stamped.

as shown. Creating an Internal Plan Study | 445 . 3 Select the blue left arrow control and drag it to the left to expose the roof overhang and posts.2 Select the section box in the drawing area. NOTE Enter ZF for Zoom To Fit if necessary to see the entire building on the screen.

8 On the View Control Bar. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. and on the View Control Bar. and click OK. for Sun Position. and click OK. 13 Specify values for the multi-day study: ■ ■ ■ . On the Annotation Categories tab. and click Duplicate. click the Multi-Day tab. Create multi-day solar study 6 To hide the section box. Notice that the dining area receives full sun during the warmest part of the day. for File name enter 2pm .Week Interval. 5 Select the roof. USA. Clear Ground Plane at Level so that the shadows fall on the terrain. For Time Interval.Los Angeles . specify 2:00 pm. click OK. select One week. 446 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . Hiding the roof allows you to see how shadows fall on the interior floor of the building. Click Detail Level ➤ Fine. 12 In the Name dialog. clear Section Boxes. and click OK. click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Category.4 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Top. 11 Select Multi Day Solar Study . click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. 9 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. For Time.Boston. MA. 14 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. 7 Adjust settings on the View Control Bar: ■ ■ Click Shadows ➤ Shadows On. click 10 On the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog.

click OK. you re-orient a building information model by creating an exact mirror of the project along an axis.West or North .15 Export the animation: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Export ➤ Animated Solar Study. and annotations in non-drafting views. Re-orienting the Project In this lesson. The animation plays as the AVI file is saved to the desktop. such as East . for File Name.rvt training file you saved in the previous exercise. You also re-orient the project to True North and compare how shadows display when the project is oriented to Project North and when it is changed to True North. select Full Frames (Uncompressed). and click Save. Re-orienting the Project | 447 . for Compressor. model views. under Floor Plans. Training File Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. Mirror the project 1 In the Project Browser. 2 Zoom to fit the drawing in the view. In the Export Animated Solar Study dialog. click Shadows ➤ Solar Study Off. 18 Click File menu ➤ Save. 17 On the View Control Bar. double-click 01 Entry. ■ 16 In the Video Compression dialog. Click the Desktop icon. you mirror all model elements. Mirroring the Project In this exercise. enter 2pm Los Angeles Plan Cutaway. and click OK.South. In the Length/Format dialog. When you mirror a project. you use the Mirror Project feature to create a mirror of the project along an axis.

and click OK. click OK. Then. click (Undo) to restore the project to its original configuration. you change the orientation to True North to see how the change in orientation can impact solar study accuracy. Orienting to True North Drafting convention is that Project North is the top of the view.3 Click Tools menu ➤ Project Position/Orientation ➤ Mirror Project.West axis. Training File Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. right-click. select East . In this exercise. under 3D Views.West. 448 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . you create still solar studies and observe that the shadows extend straight up when the project is set to the default orientation of Project North. 4 In the Mirror Project dialog. select the roof. View still solar studies 1 In the Project Browser. double-click Solar Study Plan Cutaway.rvt training file you saved in the previous exercise. and click Hide in view ➤ Elements. see Revit Architecture 2009 Online Help. For additional information. NOTE Some elements may have to be checked manually for proper placement after the mirror process. 6 On the Standard toolbar. The project is mirrored along the East . 2 In the drawing area. 5 In the warning dialog.

4 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. so you may need to make your own adjustment for specific studies. 8 For Sun Position. and select Winter Solstice. 9 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. select Summer Solstice. click . Notice that the shadows display in an upward direction in the cutaway view. 5 For Sun Position. click Apply. click . 12 Under Date and Time. and click OK. and click OK. and click OK. select Cast Shadows. 11 For Sun Position. specify 11:00 AM for time. change the time back to 12:00 PM. on the Still tab. 10 Under Date and Time. click the Still tab. For example. NOTE Solar Studies do not have a Daylight Savings setting.3 On the View Control Bar. Orienting to True North | 449 . you would set the time to 1:00 PM rather than 12:00 PM. 7 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. 6 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. to see the sun at its highest point on June 22. click . click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics.

Notice that the drawing did not change when you changed the orientation from True North to Project North. 18 In the Project Browser. the view settings must be set for True North. click . double-click 01 Entry. click the Still tab. click at the intersection of the arrows that have been draw in the project representing True North and Project North. 14 On the View Control Bar. Rotate project to True North True North and Project North can have different values for rotation. click OK. This process establishes the view setting to True North. 450 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . click OK. make sure to click in the view and zoom slightly in and out. and click OK. Plan views are defined to use Project North or True North for the representation. and click OK. NOTE When rotating True North it is often helpful to draw lines representing the relationship between Project North and True North. IMPORTANT After you toggle the views. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. under Floor Plans. 20 In the Element Properties dialog. select True North. 16 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. for Orientation.13 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. right click 01 Entry. 19 In the Project Browser. 17 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. In order to rotate True North so it is not coincident with Project North. and select Winter Solstice. 22 Re-orient the project: ■ To relocate the rotation center point. and click Properties. the Project North and True North are coincident and pointing toward the top of the computer monitor (in most cases). 21 Click Tools menu ➤ Project Position/Orientation ➤ Rotate True North. When a project is started. 15 For Sun Position.

■ To establish the new direction of True North.■ To establish the True North direction. click above the end of the magenta line representing True North. Orienting to True North | 451 . as shown. click toward the top of the screen. The floor plan rotates in the view.

31 Click View menu ➤ Refresh.23 In the Project Browser. select True North Orientation. 34 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. select Summer Solstice. click the Still tab. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. for Orientation. and click Properties. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. 27 In the Rename View dialog. under 3D Views. right-click. for Orientation. 24 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. right-click 01 Entry. Notice that the shadows lengthen now that the project is oriented to True North. Notice that the view now displays the plan in the correct orientation for True North. 32 On the View Control Bar. and click Rename. right-click. double-click Solar Study Plan Cutaway. 29 In the Element Properties dialog. click . and click Element Properties. select True North. select Project North. and click OK. View the solar study with the Project North orientation 30 In the Project Browser. right-click 01 Entry. 25 In the Project Browser. and click Apply. enter True North Orientation. 452 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . 26 Right-click Copy of 01 Entry. 33 For Sun Position. and click OK. 28 In the Project Browser.

For Files of Type. NOTE Retain the 45° value for the Angle from project to True North to maintain accuracy in shadow display for this project. and click OK. Orienting to True North | 453 . for Compressor. click the Single-Day tab. For File Name. and click OK. verify that AVI Files is selected. for Dimensions.35 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. under Format. The animation plays as the AVI file is saved to the desktop. and click in the second dimension field to see the value calculated automatically. enter 600 in the first field. Los Angeles. In the Export Animated Solar Study dialog. Export animated solar study 37 Export the animation: ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Export ➤ Animated Solar Study. 36 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. In the Length/Format dialog. verify that Full Frames (Uncompressed) is selected. click the Desktop icon. Click Save. 39 Click File menu ➤ Save. click OK. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ 38 In the Video Compression dialog. enter True North Summer Solstice Plan Cutaway. click Summer Solstice. Click OK.

Rendered views do not have this limitation. for Scheme. for Date and Time. double-click Solar Study Plan Cutaway. JPEG format images can be easily displayed on a web site or sent via e-mail. 454 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . and click Duplicate. under 3D Views. you also save the image to the project and export it as a JPEG file for future use. for Setting. and 2:00 PM. On the Still tab of the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. The scene is rendered in full color at medium quality. under Quality. you render an interior view to observe how sunlight and shadows play in a specific room. select Edit/New. select Winter Solstice. For Sun. This would include some exterior views and most interior views. Rendering an Interior View Shadow calculations are not reliable for camera views in which a shadow would fall onto the camera’s location in the view. enter Winter Solstice 2pm Los Angeles. Under Lighting. ■ ■ 5 In the Rendering dialog. and click OK. and click OK. 1 In the Project Browser. Since a rendered image is temporary. double-click each of the following views to review the available views for rendering: ■ ■ ■ to house from SW to west facade of house living area This view most accurately shows the interior of the living room. capturing it. In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. you confirm that the winter solstice has sunlight in the living room by creating one rendering. and exporting it as a JPEG image. click Render. Rendered views will also show shade from plants and seasonal foliage. Training File Continue to use the c_Solar_Study.rvt training file you saved in the previous exercise. under 3D Views. select 12/22. click 4 Specify rendering options: ■ ■ ■ ■ In the Rendering dialog. 2 In the Project Browser.Rendering Interior Shadow Views In this lesson. under Settings. Refer to Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs on page 391 for additional information on rendering. 3 On the View Control Bar. select Interior: Sun only. In the Name dialog. In this exercise. (Show Rendering Dialog). select Medium.

and click OK. The rendered image is saved under the Renderings folder in the Project Browser. click Export. so use the Save to Project option to save the view in the project. Rendering an Interior View | 455 . 9 Click File menu ➤ Save. 8 Export the image as a JPEG: ■ ■ ■ In the Rendering dialog. For Files of type. In the left pane of the Save Image dialog. enter living area_winter solstice. verify that JPEG Files is selected.6 In the Rendering dialog. click Desktop. 7 In the Save To Project dialog. NOTE Rendered views are temporary. and click Save. click Save to Project.

456 .

and details. Other tools in the software. When organizing presentation graphics. use the tutorials for the rendering features of Revit Architecture. type. you explore the stylistic approach. For the realistic approach. you learn various methods of communicating your design intent by creating presentation views. Whether the audience is the general contractor. an outside reviewer. You can use the analytique to graphically compare the organization and forms of a particular building or space by superimposing and overlapping measured drawings at multiple scales. advanced model graphics. and other quantifiable elements in construction documents. you organize an analytique by creating and modifying several views. a consultant. In this tutorial. 457 . They include rendering. length. Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs on page 391.Presentation Views 12 In this tutorial. linework. In this series of exercises. sections. or the client. you learn several graphic techniques using various tools to create an analytique. help to explain the subjective complexity of the work. Revit Architecture provides several options for expressing the architecture. Many tools in Revit Architecture 2009 describe number. you can choose between realism and stylistics. Co-house. The analytique is a classic Beaux Arts method of representing a work of architecture for analysis by graphically showing the relationship among plans. Using the pre-built building model. tailoring the presentation is just as important as the accuracy of the content. transcending the building process to recognize the architecture of the project. and section boxes. elevations. however.

Adding a Floor Plan View to the Analytique In this lesson. you create a copy of the plan. change the visibility settings to remove unwanted documentation. and place the plan on a dark background for contrast. you create a presentation floor plan. 458 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . To fit the floor plan into the analytique.

In the left pane of the Open dialog. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. expand Views (all) ➤ Floor Plans. Copy the floor plan 1 In the Project Browser. Cnst. and click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics again. right-click Copy of 2nd Flr. you create a copy of a floor plan in preparation for the analytique. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. Modify visibility/graphics 4 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. and click OK.Preparing a Floor Plan for the Analytique In this exercise. click in the drawing area. exit the menu. 3 In the Rename View dialog. enter Presentation Second Floor Plan. A copy of the floor plan is created and opened. TIP If the Visibility/Graphics option is not active. Preparing a Floor Plan for the Analytique | 459 . Cnst.rvt. and click Rename. and open Metric\m_Cohouse. under Floor Plans. 2 In the Project Browser. right-click 2nd Flr. click Training Files.

and other annotations in this view. 7 Under Visibility. and clear Show annotation categories in this view. and click Save. click the Annotation Categories tab.rvt. this represents the view getting smaller. 11 In the Save As directory. 12 Proceed with the next exercise. navigate to the folder of your choice. expand the Stairs category. 10 Click File menu ➤ Save As. name the project m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. Using Advanced Model Graphics In this exercise. Notice the immediate change in the line weights. elevations. This turns off the visibility of all tags. click the Scale control and select 1:100. and clear DOWN Text. Modify the view scale 9 On the View Control Bar at the bottom of the drawing area. 460 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . 6 Click the Model Categories tab. Using Advanced Model Graphics on page 460. Down Arrow. dimensions. sections. and Up Arrow. you use advanced model graphics to cast shadows and add a sense of texture to the new floor plan view.5 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. No annotations display in the view. 8 Click OK. UP Text. NOTE Stair text is considered part of a stair component rather than an annotation.

Time and Place. ■ For Contrast. 8 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. 13 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. 3 On the View Control Bar. select Sun and Shadow Settings. 7 For Place. click the Place tab. The shadow contrast dictates the darkness of the shadow display. 10 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. NOTE For this step. Changes made in the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog apply only to the active view. click . 6 Under Settings. 9 For City. 11 Select Ground Plane at Level. At that place. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. for Date and Time. If you select a different city. modify. ■ 5 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. 1:00 PM. 2 On the View Control Bar. Within a project. The higher the number. and delete multiple locations to analyze a single prototype. however. most of the images in the remainder of this tutorial may differ from those on your screen. and click OK. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. select Cast Shadows. NOTE Shadows can display in all view styles except Wireframe. you can create. Modify advanced model graphics settings 1 If the Floor Plan: Presentation Second Floor Plan is not the active view. you can specify one place where the project resides in the world. specify 35. and select 1st Flr. For Sun Position. click OK. 4 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. click (Shadows Off). specify 10/27. specify the following: ■ Under Shadow.rvt. select Boston. double-click it in the Project Browser. 12 Click OK. Using Advanced Model Graphics | 461 .Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. click . Cnst. The sun and shadow settings can also be used when rendering a 3D view. MA. the darker the shadows. select By Date. and click Advanced Model Graphics. on the Still tab. This is the level the shadow will be cast upon. you can select any city.

Adding the Floor Plan to a Sheet In this exercise. This gives the plan depth and creates a sensation of space beyond what you can normally express in a plan view. clear Ground Plane at Level. Adding the Floor Plan to a Sheet on page 462. 462 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . 15 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. click 16 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. . and click OK. under Settings. for Sun Position. This plan view is now ready to be added to a sheet. Turn off the ground plane shadows 14 On the View Control Bar.Notice the series of shadows based on the specified sun angles. and click Advanced Model Graphics. 18 Click File menu ➤ Save. click (Shadows On). This turns off the shadows cast on the ground. click OK. 19 Proceed with the next exercise. you add the floor plan to a sheet and modify the view to enhance the contrast. 17 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog.

right-click the Design Bar. select Floor Plan: Presentation Second Floor Plan. and click OK. select Arch Portrait. The blank D-sized sheet is portrait oriented.Create a new sheet 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 5 Move the cursor to the center of the sheet as shown. 2 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. and click View. click Modify. 4 In the Views dialog. click Sheet. 7 Zoom in around the viewport. TIP If the View tab is not available. click Add View. and click Add View to Sheet. The viewport displays at the cursor. 6 On the Design Bar. 3 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and click to place it. Adding the Floor Plan to a Sheet | 463 . and notice the view title.

9 On the Options Bar. To accomplish this. The viewport no longer displays a view title. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. click OK. 464 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . 11 In the Type Properties dialog. Create a new viewport type 8 Select the viewport in the center of the sheet. click .Because the view title needs to be removed for the analytique. enter Presentation. you will create a dark filled region for the floor plan view. click Duplicate. 13 In the Type Properties dialog. Create a solid fill background for contrast 15 Right-click the viewport. and click Activate View. click Edit/New. 14 In the Element Properties dialog. for Show Title. you need to create a new viewport type that does not display the view title. and click OK. For this analytique. select No. and click OK. under Graphics. 12 In the Name dialog. you need to create a base of contrast for the centered plan.

click . TIP Use care when sketching this chain. 18 On the Options Bar. 16 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. select the entire chain (use Tab) and change the line type back to Invisible lines by selecting it from the Type Selector. you must define the inner perimeter by drawing a chain of lines around the perimeter of the building model. and the boundary of the region. When you finish drawing the chain. You may want to zoom in while sketching some details. and select Chain. select Invisible lines. 20 On the Options Bar. fill properties. create the interior chain of lines using Medium or Wide lines. and you should take advantage of endpoint snapping when available.This activates the Presentation Second Floor Plan within the context of the sheet. click Edit/New. use the Trim tool to clean up gaps or overlapping intersections. If necessary. 21 Starting at the upper-left corner of the building model. click Filled Region. click . click Region Properties. Adding the Floor Plan to a Sheet | 465 . 22 On the Design Bar. Now that you have defined the outer perimeter of the filled region. draw a chain of lines around the exterior face of the building model as shown. 23 In the Element Properties dialog. The lines shown below are enhanced for training purposes. The space between the perimeter of the building model and each line should be equidistant. You enter sketch mode where you define the line type. TIP If you have difficulty sketching with invisible lines. 17 In the Type Selector. 19 Draw a rectangle around the view as shown.

32 Right-click the edge of the sheet. 466 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . for Sheet Name.24 In the Type Properties dialog. 30 On the Design Bar. Adding an Elevation View to the Analytique on page 466. Adding an Elevation View to the Analytique In this lesson. 35 Proceed with the next lesson. under Name. enter Presentation. and click Deactivate View. click Finish Sketch. Name the sheet 31 Right-click anywhere on the sheet. and click OK. Notice how the filled region enhances the view contrast. scroll down. 33 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. verify that the Background is Opaque and the Color is Black. enter Solid Black. select Solid fill. 26 In the Type Properties dialog. 28 In the Type Properties dialog. click . you create an elevation and add it to the presentation sheet that you created in the first exercise. under Identity Data. for Fill Pattern. under Graphics. 27 In the Fill Patterns dialog. click Duplicate. click OK. and click OK. 34 Click File menu ➤ Save. and click OK. 29 In the Element Properties dialog. and click View Properties. 25 In the Name dialog.

A copy of the south elevation view becomes the active view.rvt. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. Copy and rename the elevation view 1 In the Project Browser. Preparing the Elevation Analytique | 467 . expand Views (all) ➤ Elevations. right-click South. you copy an elevation view and use advanced model graphics to cast shadows on the view.Preparing the Elevation Analytique In this exercise. Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views.

exit the menu. 9 Click OK. This turns off the visibility of all wall surface patterns in this view. 13 For Contrast. right-click Copy of South. specify 2:30 PM. 5 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. 12 Under Shadow. select Cast Shadows. TIP If the Visibility/Graphics option is not active. under Visibility. 8 Click the Annotation Categories tab. Time and Place. enter Presentation South Elevation. expand the Doors category. and click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics again. and click OK. click OK. 7 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. under Settings. In the Projection/Surface Patterns column for Walls. clear Visible. 16 In the Name dialog. specify 35. By changing the angle of the sun. you can create more interesting shadows on the elevation view. under Elevations. under Visibility. and click Rename. click in the drawing area. and click OK. Apply advanced model graphics 10 On the View Control Bar. 14 For Sun Position. 11 On the View Control Bar. on the Model Categories tab. under Pattern Overrides. select By Date. and clear Show annotation categories in this view. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. and click Advanced Model Graphics. 17 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. 6 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. 3 In the Rename View dialog. 18 For Time.2 In the Project Browser. click Duplicate. and click OK. click Override. Modify visibility/graphic overrides 4 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. click . This turns off the visibility of all annotations in this view. click (Shadows Off). 19 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. and clear Elevation Swing. 15 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. 468 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . click in the Walls row. scroll up. Changes made in the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog apply only to the active view. and click OK. enter Sun and Shadow Settings Elevation.

Adding the Presentation Elevation View to the Presentation Sheet on page 469. 4 Center the viewport above the presentation plan view as shown.20 Click File menu ➤ Save. Add a view to the sheet 1 In the Project Browser.rvt. 3 In the Views dialog. you add the Presentation South Elevation view to the Presentation sheet. under Views (all) ➤ Sheets (all). Adding the Presentation Elevation View to the Presentation Sheet In this exercise. Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. TIP Use the snap feature to snap the viewport to the center reference plane. Adding the Presentation Elevation View to the Presentation Sheet | 469 . select Elevation: Presentation South Elevation. 21 Proceed with the next exercise. click Add View. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar.Presentation. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. double-click A105 . and click Add View to Sheet.

The viewport displays a view title. select Viewport : Presentation. 470 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . The view title no longer displays. 5 In the Type Selector.

7 On the Design Bar. Adding Section Views to the Analytique In this lesson. you create section and callout views and place them in the analytique.6 Drag the Presentation South Elevation viewport downward until it shares an edge with the presentation floor plan. You also create a view template for presentation views and apply it to other views. 8 Click File menu ➤ Save. Adding Section Views to the Analytique on page 471. click Modify. You add silhouette edges and filled regions to the views. Adding Section Views to the Analytique | 471 . 9 Proceed with the next lesson.

The section should cut through the center of the building model and extend past the front of the building (lower wall). m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. you create and modify the section view that you later add to the analytique. Add a section in a plan view 1 In the Project Browser. double-click 1st Flr. select 1: 100. 4 Add the section shown below. 472 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views .Preparing a Section View for the Analytique In this exercise. Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. 3 On the Options Bar. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. click Section. and use the flip arrows if necessary. Cnst. Adjust the controls to modify the extents. TIP You can also change the scale of the section view after you create it.rvt. for Scale.

this view needs to be rotated 180°. Preparing a Section View for the Analytique | 473 . To accomplish this. you will create a callout around the building model in the section view. select 1 : 100. expand Sections (Callout 1).Section 2 is added to the building model. for Scale. 7 On the Options Bar. 6 On the View tab of the Design Bar. as shown. and double-click Section 2. To fit correctly in the analytique. click Callout. 8 Draw a callout around the building model in the section view. Create a callout of the section view 5 In the Project Browser. Use the controls to adjust the precise location of the boundary and to move the callout head so you can see it easily.

18 Turn off the visibility of the following model categories: ■ ■ Casework Ceilings 474 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . under Sections (Callout 1). expand the Doors category. and click OK. and click Rename. enter Presentation Section 2. This turns off the visibility of all wall surface patterns in this view. click Override. Modify visibility/graphic overrides 13 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics.Rename the callout 9 On the Design Bar. scroll up. and clear Elevation Swing. In the Projection/Surface Patterns column for Walls. click Modify. under Pattern Overrides. 10 In the Project Browser. 11 In the Rename View dialog. clear Visible. 14 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. 16 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. click in the Walls row. 12 In the Project Browser. right-click Callout of Section 2. 17 Under Visibility. 15 Under Visibility. under Sections (Callout 1). double-click Presentation Section 2. click the Model Categories tab. and click OK.

This turns off the visibility of all annotations in this view. The outer boundary (indicated with dashed lines) shows the crop region for annotation elements.■ ■ ■ Furniture Lighting Fixtures Specialty Equipment 19 Click the Annotation Categories tab. Adding Shadows and Silhouettes to a Section View on page 476. 22 On the View Control Bar. 20 Click OK. click The crop regions no longer display. 23 Click File menu ➤ Save. Hide the crop region 21 Select the crop region. Preparing a Section View for the Analytique | 475 . When you select the crop region. and clear Show annotation categories in this view. 24 Proceed with the next exercise. Revit Architecture displays 2 boundaries. (Hide Crop Region). The inner boundary shows the crop region for model elements.

and click Advanced Model Graphics. you use advanced model graphics to cast shadows on the section view. and click OK. For Contrast. The shadows do not offer much contrast. 6 In the Name dialog. in the Project Browser.Adding Shadows and Silhouettes to a Section View In this exercise. ■ For Sun Position. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. enter Sun and Shadow Settings Section. 5 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. click ■ ■ ■ (Shadows Off). double-click Presentation Section 2. 3 On the View Control Bar. click . In addition. specify the following: Under Shadow. Click Apply. 476 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . specify 35. you create new sun and shadow settings to add contrast to the presentation view. Add shadows to the section view 1 If Presentation Section 2 is not the active view. 4 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. 2 On the View Control Bar. Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. In the steps that follow. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. select Cast Shadows. TIP You may need to move the dialog to see the view. click Duplicate. under Sections (Callout 1). you apply silhouette edges to contrast the edges of the view.rvt.

For Azimuth. 8 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. was added to this training file for training purposes. for Silhouette style. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Settings. 12 Proceed with the next exercise. Click OK. The shadows now provide more contrast and a sense of depth. You can modify this line style by clicking Settings menu ➤ Line Styles. select Directly. NOTE The line style. Notice the application of heavy line weights to the edges of the building model. 10 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. Silhouette Edges. TIP The current view of your model may vary from the illustrations in the tutorial based on the placement of the section line in the previous exercise. Select Relative to View. click OK. 11 Click File menu ➤ Save. TIP You can also use the Linework tool to emphasize individual surface edges. specify 70°. For Altitude. Adding the Presentation Section to the Analytique on page 478.7 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. select Silhouette Edges. specify 135°. Apply silhouette edges 9 On the View Control Bar. Adding Shadows and Silhouettes to a Section View | 477 . and click OK. and click Advanced Model Graphics. click (Shadows On).

4 Move the cursor under the centered plan view as shown. select Section: Presentation Section 2.Presentation. under Sheets (all). Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. and click to place the selected view. you add the Presentation Section 2 view to the analytique and rotate the view 180°. click Add View. 478 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . and click Add View to Sheet. Add the view to the presentation sheet 1 In the Project Browser.Adding the Presentation Section to the Analytique In this exercise. 3 In the Views dialog.rvt. double-click A105 .

8 Select the callout that you added previously. 10 Specify the start radius to the right of the callout. To rotate an object. In the steps that follow. 9 On the Edit toolbar. under Sections (Callout 1). double-click Section 2. The section needs to be rotated 180°. Using a clock as a reference. click Modify. click (Rotate). and press Enter. specify 3 o’clock as the rotation start point. you click to specify the start radius. Adding the Presentation Section to the Analytique | 479 . 6 On the Design Bar. The view title no longer displays. Rotate the callout 7 In the Project Browser. and enter the degrees of rotation or click to specify the end radius. 11 Move the cursor a slight distance counter-clockwise. enter 180 to specify the degrees of rotation. move the cursor in the direction of the rotation. you accomplish this by rotating the callout in the section view.5 In the Type Selector. select Viewport : Presentation.

under Sheets (all).The callout rotates 180°.Presentation. Its boundaries need to be adjusted to fit around the edges of the building model. 480 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . double-click A105 . Reposition the viewport 13 In the Project Browser. 12 Drag the callout boundaries until they extend just past the perimeter of the edges of the building model as shown. The Presentation Section 2 view has rotated 180° and needs to be repositioned.

Working with a Presentation View Template on page 481. and drag it up and to the left as shown. After applying the view template to a new section view. 15 On the Design Bar. 16 Click File menu ➤ Save. Working with a Presentation View Template | 481 . Working with a Presentation View Template In this exercise. 17 Proceed with the next exercise. you add the modified view to the presentation sheet.14 Select the Presentation Section 2 viewport. you create a view template for presentation views to reduce repetitive work when creating subsequent views. click Modify.

and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. click OK. Create a presentation view template 1 In the Project Browser. you can simply apply the presentation view template. and click OK. under Sections (Callout 1). 2 Click View menu ➤ Create View Template from View. double-click Presentation Section 2.rvt. 7 In the Rename View dialog. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. Create a new presentation view 5 In the Project Browser. and click Rename. 482 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views .Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. under Sections (Type 1). 3 In the New View Template dialog. and click OK. Rather than repeat numerous steps to prepare this view for the analytique. 4 In the View Templates dialog. enter Presentation Section 1. under Sections (Type 1). 6 In the Project Browser. enter Presentation. right-click Copy of Section 1. Apply the presentation view template 8 Click View menu ➤ Apply View Template. right-click Section 1.

13 Place it to the left of the plan view. 17 In the Element Properties dialog. Working with a Presentation View Template | 483 . Add the view to the presentation sheet 10 In the Project Browser. 18 Right-click the viewport. 14 In the Type Selector. The furniture. 11 On the View tab of the Design Bar. select Viewport : Presentation.Presentation. annotations. and click Activate View. under Names. select Section: Presentation Section 1. click Add View. and elevation swings no longer display. under Sheets (all). and click Deactivate View. 12 In the Views dialog. select Presentation. and click OK. for Rotation on Sheet.9 In the Apply View Template dialog. 15 Right-click the viewport. and click Add View to Sheet. double-click A105 . under Graphics. select 90° Counterclockwise. lighting fixtures. you can use a view property to accomplish the same thing. 19 Move the view so the walls line up similar to the image shown. and click OK. 16 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. Rather than use a callout to rotate this view after it is added to a sheet.

traditional analytiques contain a detail. Working in a Callout Analytique Typically. you create a wall section and add it to the right side of the analytique. In this exercise.20 Click File menu ➤ Save. such as a tracery window or a column capital. 484 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . Working in a Callout Analytique on page 484. 21 Proceed with the next exercise.

m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views.rvt. double-click Section 1. After you add the callout. select the callout. under Sections (Callout 1). Working in a Callout Analytique | 485 . 4 In the Project Browser. right-click Callout of Section 1. 3 Draw a callout around the front balcony as shown. Create a callout 1 In the Project Browser. click Modify. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and click Rename.Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. and modify its boundaries and the location of the callout head. as shown. under Sections (Type 1). click Callout.

and click OK. as shown. enter Presentation Callout.5 In the Rename View dialog. 7 Select the crop region. 6 In the Project Browser. clear Crop Region Visible. This gap is used later in the exercise to place a fill region. and click OK. and adjust the bottom to create a small gap. double-click Presentation Callout. 9 In the Element Properties dialog. 486 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . and click View Properties. clear Annotation Crop. 8 Right-click. under Sections (Callout 1). under Extents.

do the following: ■ ■ ■ For View Scale.Add the callout to the presentation sheet 10 In the Project Browser. Working in a Callout Analytique | 487 . and click Add View to Sheet. specify 22. 17 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. click Add View. 18 In the Element Properties dialog.Presentation. Click OK. 14 In the Type Selector. Modify the presentation callout on the sheet 16 Right-click the Presentation Callout viewport. select Section: Presentation Callout. click Modify. select Viewport : Presentation. and click Activate View. double-click A105 . 12 In the Views dialog. 11 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 13 Place it on the right side of the presentation sheet. select Custom. For Scale Value 1. under Sheets (all). 15 On the Design Bar.

under Sections (Callout 1). the easiest method is to apply filled regions to the presentation callout. activate the viewport. you add a heavy base to the floors and a poche to the base. and click Deactivate View. click Filled Region. hide the crop region and deactivate the viewport. click Edit/New. turn on the crop region from the view properties dialog.19 Right-click the callout presentation view. In the steps that follow. When finished. and move it to the position shown below. NOTE If the presentation callout view does not fit properly on the sheet. double-click Presentation Callout. click Region Properties. Although you can use several methods to create these areas of contrast. 20 Select the callout presentation viewport. 24 In the Element Properties dialog. and make adjustments as necessary. 488 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . Apply filled regions to the presentation callout 21 In the Project Browser. 22 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. The composition set for the analytique is now complete. 23 On the Design Bar.

Add a poche region 29 Right-click the Presentation Callout viewport. 28 In the Project Browser. 30 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.Presentation. click . The intent of the analytique is not so much a measured construction document as a stylized representation of the architectural forms. select Solid fill. on the Design Bar. 27 Using the drawing tools on the Options Bar. You can sketch one filled region at a time or all of them at once. for Fill Pattern. and click Activate View. You do not have to replicate the image exactly. Working in a Callout Analytique | 489 . double-click A105 . and click OK 3 times. under Sheets (all). 26 In the Fill Patterns dialog. click Filled Region.25 In the Type Properties dialog. click Finish Sketch. When you are finished. sketch the filled regions on the floors and roof shown below.

click . 33 On the View Control Bar. click (Show Crop Region). 32 On the Design Bar. click Finish Sketch.31 On the Options Bar. The entire poche region does not display because the crop region does not encompass the new filled region. and drag the left and bottom boundaries until the entire poche region displays. and sketch the rectangle shown below. 34 Select the crop region. 490 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views .

Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes on page 491.35 On the View Control Bar. 36 Right-click the Presentation Callout viewport. You then add perspective views to the presentation and annotate the sheet. 38 Proceed with the next lesson. you create isometric 3D views and use section boxes to create cutaways with shadows. click (Hide Crop Region). 37 Click File menu ➤ Save. and click Deactivate View. Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes | 491 . Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes In this lesson.

Create a southwest isometric view 1 In the Project Browser. double-click Isometric. 2 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Southwest. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line.Creating Cutaway Isometric Views In this exercise. and click 1 : 200. you create 3 similar isometric views with different cutaways. and apply shadows to the views. and click Advanced Model Graphics. 5 On the View Control Bar. 492 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . You then add each view to the presentation sheet. under 3D Views. Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. Apply advanced model graphics 4 On the View Control Bar. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views.rvt. click the Scale control. click (Shadows Off). 3 On the View Control Bar.

specify 45°. double-click Isometric 2. 12 In the Rename View dialog. right-click Isometric 1. under 3D Views. under 3D Views. and click OK. For Contrast. under 3D Views. A section box displays around the building model. and click OK. 7 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. Cnst. 15 In the Rename View dialog. Click OK. 17 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. Select Ground Plane at Level. click . For Azimuth. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. specify 135°. Select Relative to View. 9 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Shadow. select Directly. for Silhouette style.6 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. 14 In the Project Browser. and click Rename. 13 In the Project Browser. enter Isometric 2. right-click Copy of Isometric 1. under 3D Views. under Extents. Select 1st Flr. Rename and duplicate isometric views 11 In the Project Browser. 18 In the Element Properties dialog. For Altitude. select Cast Shadows. and click OK. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Settings. click Duplicate. enter Sun and Shadow Settings Isometric. Creating Cutaway Isometric Views | 493 . Add a section box to Isometric 2 16 In the Project Browser. For Sun Position. and click Rename. right-click Isometric. and click OK. specify 35. 10 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. enter Isometric 1. 8 In the Name dialog. select Silhouette Edges. in the list. select Section Box. and click OK.

494 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . click Modify on the Design Bar. When you are finished. 20 Select the grip for the top plane of the section box.19 Select the section box. as shown. These grips allow you to modify the boundaries of the section box. You can use this to rotate the section box. and drag the plane downward until it cuts halfway through the third floor. TIP Notice the rotation symbol. Grips display on each face of the section box.

and click OK. On the Annotation Categories tab. enter Isometric 3. double-click Isometric 2. Next. On the Annotation Categories tab. 24 In the Project Browser. When you are finished.Presentation. 31 In the Project Browser. 29 To hide the section box. or turn off the visibility of railings and stairs using the Visibility/Graphics dialog. you stack the 3 isometric views in a vertical column on the presentation sheet to show the continual erosion of the structure. and drag the plane downward until it cuts halfway through the first floor as shown. right-click Isometric 2. clear Section Boxes. under 3D Views. under 3D Views. 25 To hide the section box. under 3D Views. select Viewport : Presentation. Add isometric views to the presentation sheet 30 In the Project Browser. In the Type Selector. clear Section Boxes. 27 Select the section box. 22 In the Project Browser. 28 Select the grip for the top plane of the section box. click Modify on the Design Bar. double-click A105 . 21 In the Project Browser. and click OK. NOTE Depending on the precise location of the top plane of the section box. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. The section box no longer displays. double-click Isometric 3. Modify the section box of Isometric 3 26 In the Project Browser. under Sheets (all). 23 In the Rename View dialog. the stairs and railings may display. right-click Copy of Isometric 2. and click OK. drag Isometric 3 under the left section view as shown. make a copy of the view. Creating Cutaway Isometric Views | 495 .Before turning off the visibility of the section box. and click Rename. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. you can adjust the plane location. under 3D Views. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. If desired. under 3D Views.

drag Isometric 2 under Isometric 3 as shown. under 3D Views. under 3D Views. In the Type Selector. select Viewport : Presentation. You resolve this problem in the steps that follow. select Viewport : Presentation. drag Isometric 1 under Isometric 2 as shown.32 In the Project Browser. In the Type Selector. The filled region partially covers the view. 33 In the Project Browser. 496 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views .

click Edit. Creating Cutaway Isometric Views | 497 . and click Activate View. 40 Click OK twice. redraw the portion of the filled region so it follows the boundary of Isometric 1. The image below shows the redrawn lines. click Edit/New. You may need to use the Split tool and the Trim tool to modify lines during this process. select Transparent. select Concrete. On the Options Bar.Modify filled region boundaries 34 Right-click the Presentation Callout viewport. 37 In the Element Properties dialog. click Region Properties. 41 On the Design Bar. 36 On the Design Bar. 35 Select the poche filled region. 38 In the Type Properties dialog. 39 For Background. for Fill Patterns. 42 Using the drawing tools. This will make it easier to draw lines. click Lines. You change the fill pattern back to solid fill when you are done.

47 On the Design Bar. click Edit/New.43 On the Design Bar. select Solid fill. 498 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . 44 In the Element Properties dialog. and click Deactivate View. click Finish Sketch. click Region Properties. 50 Proceed with the next exercise. 45 In the Type Properties dialog. Creating Cutaway Perspective Views on page 499. 46 Click OK twice. for Fill Pattern. 48 Right-click the Presentation Callout viewport. 49 Click File menu ➤ Save.

you create the final view for the analytique. under Floor Plans. Create a perspective view 1 In the Project Browser. then you specify the eye direction and range. click Camera. 3 Place the camera in the southwest corner of the view as shown. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. you add it to the presentation sheet. and specify the range and direction just outside the upper right corner of the building model. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. Adding a camera is a 2-click process: first you specify the eye location.Creating Cutaway Perspective Views In this exercise. double-click 1st Flr. Creating Cutaway Perspective Views | 499 . The view opens immediately. Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. Cnst. After adding shadows and silhouette edges to the view.rvt. a cutaway perspective view.

For Sun Position. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. 9 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. 500 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . for Silhouette style. click ■ ■ ■ (Shadows Off). select Sun and Shadow Settings Isometric. For Contrast. and click OK.4 Adjust the crop region so the entire building model fits in it. specify the following: Under Shadow. and click OK. for Name. 7 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. select Silhouette Edges. specify 35. 6 On the View Control Bar. and click Advanced Model Graphics. 8 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. Add shadows and silhouette edges 5 On the View Control Bar. click . select Cast Shadows.

Add a section box 10 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. and click OK. 12 Select the section box. Grips display on each plane of the section box. A section box now cuts through the building model. You may need to adjust the location of the crop region as well. under Extents. 11 In the Element Properties dialog. select Section Box. 13 Use the section grips to modify the location of each plane until your view resembles the following image. Creating Cutaway Perspective Views | 501 .

for Width. In the Type Selector. 19 To hide the section box. you must specify the actual size of the image. drag 3D View 1 onto the presentation sheet. 18 On the View Control Bar.Presentation. click Size. 16 In the Crop Region Size dialog. and place it in the upper-left corner as shown. On the Annotation Categories tab. clear Section Boxes. 21 In the Project Browser.14 Select the crop region. Add the view to the presentation sheet 20 In the Project Browser. 502 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . under Change. under Sheets (all). and click OK. click (Hide Crop Region). click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. under 3D Views. select Viewport : Presentation. 15 On the Options Bar. and click OK. enter 165 mm. Because scale does not apply to perspective views. select Scale (locked proportions). 17 Under Model Crop Size. double-click A105 .

5 In the Type Properties dialog. 4 In the Element Properties dialog. 9 In the Type Properties dialog. double-click it in the Project Browser. Annotating the Analytique In this exercise. and click OK. 6 In the Name dialog. click Duplicate. 3 On the Options Bar. click Edit/New. and click OK. under Text. 10 In the Name dialog. you complete the analytique by adding text to the presentation sheet. specify a text size of 40 mm. click Duplicate. 11 In the Type Properties dialog. click Text.Presentation sheet is not the active view. select a font. and click OK. specify a text size of 6 mm. click OK. select the same font as the title.rvt. and click OK. Annotating the Analytique on page 503. 8 In the Element Properties dialog. 7 In the Type Properties dialog. click Edit/New. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 14 Add a title to the analytique as shown. 23 Proceed with the next exercise. Add a title and description 13 In the Type Selector. Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise.22 Click File menu ➤ Save. Annotating the Analytique | 503 . 12 In the Element Properties dialog. select Text : Title. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. click . Create new text types 1 If the Sheets: A105 . enter Title. under Text. enter Description.

15 Click in the drawing window to complete the title text. 504 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . 16 In the Type Selector. click Modify. 19 Click File menu ➤ Save. 17 Add a description of your choosing and add it to the analytique as shown. select Text : Description. This completes the Presentation Views tutorial. 18 On the Design Bar.

Importing and Exporting 505 .

506 .

Importing SketchUp Files 13 The ability to import SketchUp® files directly into Revit Architecture allows you to quickly integrate sketch concepts into the Revit environment and reuse the SketchUp model without having to manually rework it. Once the model has been imported. you can easily add detail with Revit components. such as walls. you import a SketchUp file into a Revit Architecture project as an in-place mass family. 507 . In this tutorial. you create a small building from the front mass form. After you import the SketchUp model. You use the mass faces of the mass form to create Revit elements. curtain walls. that compose the building. and roofs.

6 In the Save As dialog. buildings. 9 In the informational dialog. The in-place mass family is saved only in context of the project. select SketchUp Files. TIP If the Massing tab does not display in the Design Bar. enter SketchUp Model. or select from a list. 12 In the Import/Link dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Click the Training Files icon. Click the Sketchup file. right-click in the Design Bar. Create a Revit project 1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. click Training Files.Importing a SketchUp Model as a Mass In this exercise. 5 Click File menu ➤ Save As. click OK. This option allows you to select what to import: all elements. Import a SketchUp model 7 On the Design Bar. 3 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. For Colors. visible elements. 2 In the New Project dialog. click Create Mass. Double-click the Common folder.skp. click OK. 10 In the Name dialog. 8 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. click Browse. and import a SketchUp model into the project as an in-place mass family. select Preserve. select Auto-Detect. and click OK. click the Massing tab. under Template file.rte. For Files of type. and click Save. For Layers. enter Import SketchUp. you create a Revit Architecture project. For Import units. and click Massing on the context menu that displays. select All. ■ 508 | Chapter 13 Importing SketchUp Files . and not in the library. 11 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ CAD Formats. 4 In the New Project dialog. for File name. and open Metric\Templates\DefaultMetric.

The mesh geometry (faces) will be used in another exercise to create Revit elements.Center. In a new project. such as walls. Click Open. NOTE A warning message displays because the mass contains only mesh geometry. and roofs. curtain walls.You can have Revit automatically detect and convert incoming units to project units (Auto-Detect) or you can specify the units for the SketchUp drawing if you know that information. 14 On the View toolbar. depending on the complexity of the project. click the Close button. For Place at level. 16 On the Design Bar. select Level 1. Level 1 is the only choice. Importing a SketchUp Model as a Mass | 509 . click . select Manual . An existing project may have options for many levels to choose from. ■ ■ For Positioning. 17 In the warning dialog. 15 Enter ZR to zoom in on the lower right building. click Finish Mass. ■ The model displays in the view on the Level 1 floor plan. 13 Click to place the lower right building inside of the elevation markers.

Create roofs from mass faces 1 Zoom in to the front mass form. 510 | Chapter 13 Importing SketchUp Files . select the face so that it highlights in red. 5 Move your cursor over the top face of the left mass. and on the View Control Bar. and when the cursor displays a plus sign. You turn their visibility off to view only the building. 3 In the Type Selector. and roofs. for Level. curtain walls. 4 On the Options Bar. you modify the roofs and add doors to complete the design. you use the faces of the front mass form to create Revit Architecture elements. verify Level 2 is selected. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges.400mm displays. click Roof by Face. that compose the building. The mass faces are not converted to Revit elements: they remain in the project. Creating a Building from Mass Faces on page 510. verify Basic Roof: Generic .18 Proceed to the next exercise. Creating a Building from Mass Faces In this exercise. After you create the building from the mass faces. such as walls. 2 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar.

A roof is created from the mass face.The cursor displays a plus or a minus sign. on the View toolbar.) to turn off mass visibility in the view. 8 Select the top 3 faces of the mass on the right. on the Options Bar. Click again 7 With the Roof by Face command still active. 9 On the Options Bar. 6 On the Options Bar. verify that Select Multiple is selected. click Create Roof. indicating that you are adding or subtracting faces to and from the selection. To see the new roof. click to display masses. This option enables you to select more than 1 face when you create a roof. click SteeringWheels to display the Full Navigation Wheel. (It is difficult to see the roof in the current view. click Create Roof. Creating a Building from Mass Faces | 511 . 10 Adjust the view: ■ On the View toolbar.

12 On the Design Bar.■ Click the Orbit section of the Full Navigation Wheel and drag your cursor to rotate your viewpoint as shown so you can see the front of the mass form. click Create Roof. click Roof by Face. 13 Select the top 4 faces of the mass. 11 Close the Full Navigation Wheel. 512 | Chapter 13 Importing SketchUp Files . 14 On the Options Bar.

23 On the Options Bar. 21 On the Design Bar. 16 On the View toolbar. for Loc Line.200mm displays. select Core Face: Exterior.15 On the Design Bar. to turn off the mass visibility in the view. This option lets you create the walls on the inside of the mass. and display only the 17 Click again to redisplay the masses. click Wall by Face. Creating a Building from Mass Faces | 513 . 19 Click the Orbit section of the Full Navigation Wheel and drag your cursor to rotate your viewpoint as shown so you can see the front of the mass form. 20 Close the Full Navigation Wheel. 22 In the Type Selector. verify Basic Wall: Generic . click roofs that you created. Create walls from mass faces 18 On the View toolbar. click SteeringWheels to display the Full Navigation Wheel. click Modify to end the command.

click Curtain System by Face. click to view only the walls and roofs. 26 Click to redisplay the masses. 29 Select the left face of the left mass. 28 In the Type Selector. 25 On the View toolbar.24 Select the 4 mass faces that have been highlighted in red below. 514 | Chapter 13 Importing SketchUp Files . Create curtain systems from mass faces 27 On the Design Bar. verify Curtain System: 1500 x 3000mm displays.

create the 2 curtain systems shown below. Create walls from mass faces 34 Close the Full Navigation Wheel. Creating a Building from Mass Faces | 515 . click SteeringWheels to display the Full Navigation Wheel. 33 Click the Orbit section of the Full Navigation Wheel and drag your cursor to rotate your viewpoint as shown so you can see the back of the mass forms. 32 On the View toolbar. click Create System.30 On the Options Bar. 31 Using the same technique.

click Curtain System. and on the Options Bar. click Create System. TIP If you have difficulty selecting a wall that shares an edge with another wall. 40 Select the 4 mass faces shown below. 516 | Chapter 13 Importing SketchUp Files . Create a roof from a mass face 37 On the Design Bar. and on the Options Bar. select the other wall. click Create Roof.35 On the Design Bar. press TAB until the desired wall highlights. 38 Select the mass face shown below. 36 Select the 5 walls highlighted below. click Wall by Face. Create additional curtain systems from mass faces 39 On the Design Bar. and select it. click Roof by Face.

specify a point to place the camera. under Floor Plans. 42 On the View toolbar. 45 Zoom out beyond the drawing extents. Below the right corner of the view. and select the mass face shown below. Creating a Building from Mass Faces | 517 . click Camera. 46 Place the camera and its target: ■ ■ On the View tab of the Design Bar. click to view the building that you have created. 43 Click to redisplay the masses. double-click Level 1. click Wall by Face. Create a 3D perspective view of the building with a camera 44 In the Project Browser.Create the final wall 41 On the Design Bar.

Click the frame to display its grips. roofs. 47 Resize the view by moving the frame grips until you can see the building.■ In the far left corner of the building that you created. The view frame is highlighted in red and its grips display. specify a point for the camera target. 48 On the View toolbar. and curtain systems that make up You may need to resize the view again. and click in the drawing area to hide the grips. 518 | Chapter 13 Importing SketchUp Files . click your building in the view. to view only the walls. as shown. The perspective view created by the camera displays.

click 51 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ . for Justification. 52 Repeat the preceding steps to change the justifications of the 2 other curtain systems in the view. for Justification.Change the justification of the curtain systems 49 On the Design Bar. 50 On the Options Bar. Creating a Building from Mass Faces | 519 . Click OK. select Center. click . select Center. Modify the roofs 53 On the Views toolbar. click Modify. and select the left curtain system in the view. Under Grid 2 Pattern. Under Grid 1 Pattern.

56 In the Project Browser.54 Select each roof to display its grips. click SteeringWheels to display the Full Navigation Wheel. 55 Right-click. double-click {3D}. Click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. 520 | Chapter 13 Importing SketchUp Files . click Door. double-click 3D View 1. Add doors to the building 58 In the Project Browser. and move the roof edges as shown below. verify M_Single-Flush: 0915 x 2134mm displays. 63 In the Type Selector. 60 Click the Orbit section of the Full Navigation Wheel and drag your cursor to rotate your viewpoint as shown so you can see the front of the building. 59 On the View toolbar. 57 On the View Control Bar: ■ ■ Click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. under 3D Views. 61 Close the Full Navigation Wheel. and click Cancel to end the command. 62 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. under 3D Views.

64 Add doors to the building as shown below. 65 Save and close the drawing. Creating a Building from Mass Faces | 521 .

522 .

Using Advanced Features 523 .

524 .

to resize the system. For example. This type of curtain system is also referred to as a curtain wall. you further develop the building information model by creating a flat curtain system at the entrance of the model. you need to change the length of the wall. In the left pane of the Open dialog. A typical curtain system comprises a wall. and mullions. Flat Curtain System In this lesson. you select the grid.rvt. They are typically not load-bearing and are not cut for doors or windows. Creating an Entrance In this exercise. you create a curtain system using the wall command.Curtain Systems 14 Curtain systems are not walls. and you can change these elements individually. This affects the entire curtain system. Like walls. Like windows. they can usually include mullions and have glazed panels. and open Metric\m_Curtain_Walls. 525 . they can define space and separate the exterior from the interior. grid lines. you need to select a panel. To change grids. click Training Files. or you can use a specific curtain system command. Unlike windows. You can add curtain systems with the wall command. panel. To switch panel types. and they are not windows. curtain systems are usually assembled on site as a single unit. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.

click Wall. This floor edge will be the entrance to the building. 2 Zoom in to Grid F where it meets the arc in the floor. select Curtain Wall : Curtain Wall 1. 4 In the Type Selector. 6 Move the cursor down along the edge of the floor. and finish at the outside face of the exterior wall as shown. and double-click Ground Floor. expand Views (all) ➤ Floor Plans. 526 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems .1 In the Project Browser. Creating a curtain system using the wall command 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 5 Start the curtain system where shown.

7 Zoom in to the join between the curtain system and the exterior wall. and double-click Southeast Isometric. 8 In the Project Browser. Creating an Entrance | 527 . expand Views (all) ➤ 3D Views. 10 Zoom in to the curtain system you just added. 9 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Northeast.

11 Select the curtain system. you are going to subdivide the panel into several smaller panels. 528 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . You want the curtain system to attach to the roof. and room bounding. For Top Offset. enter 1200. top and base attachments. Click OK. 12 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Constraints ➤ Top Constraint. and click (Properties). The curtain system is now at the same height as the other existing curtain systems. Note that a curtain system created from the wall command has similar properties to other walls: base constraint. 13 The curtain system is a single glazed panel. using curtain grids. top constraint. select Up to level: TOP OF ROOF.

21 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. and click Rename. click Curtain Grid. under Floor Plans. 16 Place the elevation symbol in front of the curtain wall and click Modify on the Design Bar. Creating an Entrance | 529 . double-click the elevation symbol arrow to open the new elevation view.a. click Elevation. and click to place a horizontal curtain grid 1200 mm above the ground floor level line. right-click Elevation 1 . 24 Place another grid so that it snaps to the SECOND FLOOR level line.Adding curtain grids 14 In the Project Browser. 20 In the drawing area. and click OK. 19 Enter Entrance Elevation. 18 In the Project Browser. and resize the crop boundary as shown. 22 Move the cursor along the edge of the wall. 15 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 25 On the Design Bar. 23 Place another grid 1500 mm above the first grid. double-click GROUND FLOOR. click Modify. 17 Click the elevation arrow to display the crop boundary.

and click OK. SIXTH FLOOR. select the 3 grid lines you just placed. 30 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 33 On the Design Bar. The selected grid lines are now at each of these levels. 29 In the Select Levels dialog. Click to place another grid line. This divides the curtain wall vertically into 2 panels. one larger than the other. click Modify. or press CTRL + C on the keyboard. TIP To be sure that the curtain grid is at the midpoint of the panel. and SEVENTH FLOOR. FIFTH FLOOR. select SECOND FLOOR. 530 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . 27 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard.26 While pressing CTRL. watch the tooltips and the Status Bar. click Curtain Grid. 31 Place the cursor on grid 2 so that it highlights. FOURTH FLOOR. THIRD FLOOR. Click to create a vertical grid. while pressing CTRL. 32 Move the cursor along the GROUND FLOOR level (left of the vertical grid line) until it snaps to the midpoint of the larger vertical panel. 28 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste Aligned ➤ Select Levels by Name.

Next. 37 Click in any white space to exit the editor. Creating an Entrance | 531 . click Add or Remove Segments. Instead of using the Door command. you set up a doorway on a curtain panel. and then select the segment above it. The two segments are removed. Adding the doorway 34 Zoom in to the ground floor level in the Entrance Elevation view. and then you replace that panel with a curtain system door panel. 36 Select the lowest segment of the left grid line. You enter an editor that lets you select segments of the grid line to remove them. The segment line style changes to dashed. you add a doorway to the curtain system. 35 Select the left vertical grid line. and on the Options Bar.

select One Segment. 41 Place 4 vertical grid lines as shown. remove the horizontal segment that intersects the vertical segment removed in the previous step. click Curtain Grid. 532 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . 40 On the Options Bar. 42 Place dimensions as shown. 39 On the Design Bar.38 Using the same method. and lock them.

You now have two 1800 mm wide panels between smaller rectangular panels. click once to the right of the long grid and then click once to the left of it. 47 Click the horizontal grid line between the smaller panels. Do not click between the 1800 mm panels. Use the following image as a guide. 48 When the grids are placed (line style have changed to solid). click in any white space to exit the editor. Creating an Entrance | 533 . click OK to leave the curtain grids constrained. 43 Delete the dimensions. 45 Select the horizontal grid line that is 1200 mm above the ground floor. The line style changes from dashed to solid to indicate a grid segment has been added.TIP You may need to adjust your zoom settings to view the dimensions. TIP The middle grid lines are centered between the long vertical grid above them. To get the horizontal grid to display between the vertical grids. 44 When the warning about locked dimensions being deleted displays. You are going to add more segments to an existing curtain grid. 46 Click Add or Remove Segments on the Options Bar.

double-click GROUND FLOOR to see the plan view door swings of the curtain wall doors.Next. Changing panels 58 Zoom in to the FIFTH FLOOR level. You will have to press TAB to highlight it. click Modify. you change panels in front of ceilings from glazed to solid. Watch the Status Bar to be sure you are highlighting the panel. They are part of the curtain panel category. you replace the 2 larger 1800 mm panels with curtain system doors. Now.rfa. and click Wireframe. you replace some of the transparent panels with solid ones. and open Metric\Families\Doors\M_Curtain Wall-Store Front-Dbl. 50 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 57 On the View Control Bar. under Floor Plans. This changes the graphics style of the Next. click M_Curtain Wall-Store Front-Dbl: Store Front Double Door. 53 Use the same method to replace the other panel with a double door. on the new curtain system you added. 56 In the Project Browser. double-click Entrance Elevation. 49 Click File menu ➤ Load From Library ➤ Load Family. click view. 55 In the Project Browser. The panel changes to a double door. 59 Select one of the panels below the FIFTH FLOOR level line. . These panels schedule as doors. 534 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . 51 Select the left 1800 mm panel. click Training Files. not as curtain panels. 52 On the Type Selector. 54 On the Design Bar. under Elevations.

click . and Material specifies the shading and patterning. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. click Edit/New to open the Type Properties of the panel. 64 Replace the two adjacent glazed panels with solid panels. Creating an Entrance | 535 . 66 Change the graphics style back to Wireframe. click System Panel : Solid. The glazed panel is changed to a solid panel. 61 With the panel still selected. 62 In the Element Properties dialog. 65 On the View Control Bar.60 On the Type Selector. Thickness specifies the depth of the panel. The glazed panels display in blue. 67 Change the remaining glazed panels in front of ceilings to solid panels. 63 Click OK twice. The Offset property specifies the distance from the centerline of the curtain wall. and the solid panels display in white.

2 On the Options Bar. click Mullion. 1 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 5 Place a mullion on the horizontal grid that is 1200 mm above the ground floor. select Entire Grid Line. This completes the exercise for creating an entrance. select Grid Line Segment. you place mullions on curtain panel grids. 3 Place a mullion on the grid segment at the ground floor immediately to the right of the right set of doors. Adding Mullions to the Curtain System In this exercise. 536 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . Name the file m_Curtain_Walls-in_progress. Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise.68 On the File menu.rvt. click Save As. 4 On the Options Bar.

Removing mullions 8 Zoom in to the set of doors. You are going to change some mullion joins. however.6 On the Options Bar. 10 Delete the mullions below them. The two mullions below the doors are not necessary. Adding Mullions to the Curtain System | 537 . so you remove them next. Changing mullion joins 11 On the View Control Bar. there are a few that you do not want. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. 9 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. because their width reduces the size of the doors. select All Empty Segments. Mullions can change their joins to other mullions. clickModify. 12 Select the vertical mullion above and between the set of double doors. 7 Place the cursor on any empty grid segment on the curtain system and click. Now all empty grid segments have mullions on them.

16 In the Project Browser. The top of the vertical mullion now meets the bottom of the horizontal mullion above. 17 Save the file. double-click Southeast Isometric.Two mullion join controls display. Finally. 538 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . TIP After selecting the vertical mullion. The bottom of the mullion meets the top of the horizontal mullion. 14 Click the top mullion control. 15 On the Design Bar. click Modify. and click Join Conditions ➤ Break at Join to break the mullion at both joins. 13 Click the lower mullion join control. You also learned how to modify grids and change panels. You learned how to create a basic curtain wall system and how to subdivide it with grids. you learned how to add mullions and change their joins. This completes the exercise for adding mullions. you can also right-click. This also completes the lesson on creating a flat curtain system.

Click OK. click Wall. The curtain wall is sketched as an arc. for Top Constraint. double-click GROUND FLOOR. Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. specify Up to level: FIFTH FLOOR. 4 In the Type Selector. 1 In the Project Browser.Curved Curtain System In this lesson. select Curtain Wall : Curtain Wall 1. you create a curved curtain system near the entrance of the model that was just completed. 2 Zoom in to the circular space above the entrance that was just completed. enter 1200. You also create a custom curtain panel for the system. you add a curtain system using the wall command. For Top Offset. Curved Curtain System | 539 . 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 5 Click ■ ■ ■ . 9 Place the second point at the lower right side. click 8 Start the wall by clicking at the left edge of the circle at the centerline of the intersecting wall. 7 On the Options Bar. Finally. Adding a Curved Curtain System In this exercise. (Arc passing through three points). 6 In the Element Properties dialog: Under Constraints. you add both predefined and custom mullions to the system. under Floor Plans.

14 In the Project Browser. click Curtain Grid. Divide the halves into quarters. Next. double-click East. eighths. You are going to use one of these snaps points.10 Finish the wall by clicking at the top of the arc. 12 Snap the cursor to the midpoint of the curved arc and click. under Elevations. and then sixteenths. 11 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. you place grids on the system. 13 Continue to place more grids by using the snap points on the arc. The curtain wall displays as one flat panel between the first and second points placed. 540 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . Watch the Status Bar to ensure you are at the midpoint. The curtain grid command snaps only to the curved arc.

click Modify. Do not add a grid on the GROUND FLOOR level. to filter out all 19 Save the file. Using walls as panels 17 Using a selection box. Adding a Custom Curtain Panel | 541 . and snap the cursor to each level line and click to add horizontal curtain grids. Adding a Custom Curtain Panel In this exercise. select the bottom layer of panels. select Basic Wall: Generic . 16 On the Design Bar. 18 In the Type Selector.15 Zoom in to the cylinder.300mm. Next. Remember to click other elements from the selection except Curtain Panels. This completes the first exercise for creating a curved system. you create a custom curtain panel and place it into the curved curtain system. you change some panels in the system. Next you create a custom panel and add it to the system.

5 On the Design Bar. and on the Options Bar. 8 On the Design Bar. and click OK. for Identity Data ➤ Subcategory. 1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family. 2 In the left pane of the New dialog. and click 13 Sketch 2 lines that crisscross the extrusion. double-click Exterior. 4 On the Design Bar. 7 Start the sketch at the upper left reference line intersection and finish at the lower right reference line intersection. and open Metric\Templates\Metric Curtain Wall Panel. 9 Select the extrusion. click Finish Sketch. 11 On the Design Bar. 12 On the Options Bar. click . click Model Lines. clear Chain. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. and click . 6 On the Options Bar. click Lines. . select Glass. for Depth. under Elevations. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion.Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise.rft. enter 100. click Training Files. 3 In the Project Browser. 542 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems .

rfa family. 19 In the Project Browser. All fourth floor panels are selected.rfa. right-click. 22 Select the curved arc curtain wall.Pattern. click 25 On the View toolbar. 24 On the View toolbar. 15 Click File menu ➤ Save As. 23 Right-click. and click Select Panels ➤ Along Horizontal Grid. double-click FOURTH FLOOR. 26 Spin the model so that you can see the curved curtain system. 17 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load Family.Pattern. and click Change Walls Orientation. 16 Click File menu ➤ Close. (SteeringWheels). All the panels change to the custom panel you created. click (Default 3D View). and save the family as Curtain Panel . 20 Press TAB until a panel in the arc is highlighted. 18 Load the Curtain Panel . under Floor Plans. select Curtain Panel .Pattern. click Modify. and return to the project file.14 On the Design Bar. 21 In the Type Selector. Adding a Custom Curtain Panel | 543 .

The structure of the curved curtain system now matches that of the main part of the building. Adding Mullions to the Curved Curtain Panel In this exercise. All the panels change to the solid panel. 30 Save the file.Solid. right-click. 29 In the Type Selector. select System Panel . 544 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . double-click FIFTH FLOOR. you add both custom and predefined mullions to the curved curtain panel. The finished arc wall should look like the following image. under Floor Plans. 27 In the Project Browser. and click Select Panels ➤ Along Horizontal Grid. This completes the exercise for adding a custom curtain panel. All fifth floor panels are selected. 28 Highlight a panel in the arc.

9 On the Options Bar: ■ Click (Polygon).Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. Creating a custom mullion in the Family Editor 4 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family. you use the Family Editor to create a custom mullion. Select Radius.rft. under Elevations. For vertical mullions. except at the GROUND FLOOR level. click ■ ■ For Sides. for Profile Usage. 3 Select each horizontal grid line on the curved curtain panel. and enter 50 mm for the radius. click Lines. 1 In the Project Browser. 8 On the Design Bar. select Mullion. 10 Place the cursor at the intersection of the reference planes and click to enter the octagon starting point. If Polygon does not display on the Options Bar. Notice that both the starting and ending points are in the same location. Click again to specify the ending point. click Mullion. double-click East. and open Metric\Templates\Metric Profile. enter 8. and click OK. 6 Click Settings menu ➤ Family Category and Parameters. Adding Mullions to the Curved Curtain Panel | 545 . . and select it. 2 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 5 In the left pane of the New dialog. 7 In the Family Category and Parameters dialog. click Training Files.

click Mullion. click Modify.rfa. it can be added as a mullion type. clear Coarse and Medium. click Detail Component. This controls the detail level at which the mullion profile displays. click (SteeringWheels). and return to the project file.11 On the Design Bar. 23 Save the family as Cylinder Mullion. 26 Load the Cylinder Mullion. 14 In the Family element visibility settings dialog. 30 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. and click OK. 24 Click File menu ➤ Close. and open Metric\Families\Detail Components\m_Cylinder Mullion . After the new profile is loaded. 28 On the View toolbar. 27 In the Project Browser. 546 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . and click OK. 15 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load Family. 31 Click . 22 Click File menu ➤ Save As. clear Fine. 19 On the Design Bar. 18 Place the detail component so that it snaps to the mullion profile as shown. 12 Select the lines in the octagon. 16 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 21 In the Family element visibility settings dialog. click Visibility. 13 On the Options Bar. double-click Southeast Isometric. click Training Files. click Modify. 17 On the Design Bar. 29 Spin the model so that you can see the curved curtain system.detail. 20 Select the detail component. 25 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load Family. and click Visibility. The detail component becomes the true representation in plan view.rfa family.rfa. under 3D Views.

33 Click Edit/New. 36 Under Construction. 41 In the Project Browser. 35 Enter Cylinder Mullion for Name. select Circular Mullion for Family. so you remove the unwanted ones. You have placed more mullions than you want. and click OK. 39 Click on any grid line in the entry cylinder. 43 Press DELETE. click Duplicate. and click Select Mullions ➤ On Gridline. 37 Click OK twice. select All Empty Segments. double-click GROUND FLOOR. 40 On the Design Bar. Adding Mullions to the Curved Curtain Panel | 547 . 44 Save the file.32 In the Element Properties dialog. click Modify. 38 On the Options Bar. 42 Highlight a mullion in the arc. select Cylinder Mullion : Cylinder Mullion. 34 In the Type Properties dialog. right-click. under Floor Plans. for Profile.

4 On the Design Bar. click Pick Walls. 6 Select the inside faces of the base walls. place the cursor on the inside face of one of the walls. 548 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . and you can click to select them all. you learned to create a curved curtain system. and then apply those custom elements to the system. select Defines slope. a storefront system. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. 1 In the Project Browser. Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. and press TAB. under Floor Plans. and a ruled curtain system. you create additional types of curtain systems: a sloped glazing system. Additional Curtain Systems In this lesson. 2 Zoom in to the skylight at the center of the building between Grids 2 and 3 and D and E. double-click TOP OF ROOF.This completes the exercise for adding mullions. 5 On the Options Bar. as well as the lesson on creating a curved curtain system. TIP To chain select all the walls. make custom curtain panels and mullions. 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. Sloped Glazings Sloped glazings are useful when you are creating skylights and other glazed roofing systems. In this lesson. All the inside faces highlight.

8 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Family. click Mullion. enter 600. 18 Save the file. Click OK. double-click Southeast Isometric. 13 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. under 3D Views. 12 Zoom in to the skylight. 11 On the View Control Bar. 10 In the Project Browser. 16 On the Design Bar. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. select System Family: Sloped Glazing. 15 Select the grid lines that define the edges of each panel in the sloped glazing. 14 On the Options Bar. 9 On the Design Bar. click Modify. Sloped Glazings | 549 . click Roof Properties.7 On the Design Bar. For Constraints ➤ Base Offset From Level. This completes the exercise for creating a sloped glazing system. 17 On the View Control Bar. click Finish Roof. select Entire Grid Line. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line.

550 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . You can place the curtain wall right inside this wall. click Wall. 4 In the Type Selector. 6 Start the wall 1200 mm from one end of the wall on the wall centerline. double-click GROUND FLOOR. select Curtain Wall : Storefront.Storefront System In this exercise. You are going to place a storefront system in this wall. and enter 2400. 2 Zoom in to the wall at the right of the model. select Unconnected for Height. 1 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 5 On the Options Bar. you embed curtain walls into other walls to create a storefront system.

To see how the grid layout is defined. and press ENTER. you can look at the properties of the storefront wall. The type parameters under the Vertical Grid Pattern and Horizontal Grid Pattern headings create the predefined layout. This indicates that the curtain grids are placed at even intervals along the length of the curtain wall at a distance up to 1524 mm. 14 After you have looked at the Vertical Grid Pattern and Horizontal Grid Pattern parameters. under 3D Views. 8 Click the temporary dimension. 10 In the Project Browser. and click . For this wall.7 Sketch a curtain wall along the wall centerline to the approximate length shown. even if the wall height changes. and the Spacing (Vertical Grid Pattern) is set to 1524 mm. enter 10200 mm. and the Spacing (Horizontal Grid Pattern) is set to 2400 mm. The storefront wall already has a curtain grid layout. 9 On the Design Bar. click Edit/New. 12 Select the storefront wall. This specifies an exact length for the wall. click Modify. The curtain wall cuts the original wall. 11 Zoom in to the new storefront wall. the Layout (Vertical Grid Pattern) is set to Maximum Spacing. The Layout (Horizontal Grid Pattern) is set to Fixed Distance. Storefront System | 551 . click OK to close the Type Properties dialog and return to the Element Properties dialog that displays the instance parameters. which is specified in the type. double-click Southeast Isometric. 13 In the Element Properties dialog. This means that the panel heights will be exactly 2400 mm.

19 Select a curtain grid. you find Number. select All Empty Segments. the Number is the number of vertical curtain grids you want on the curtain instance. 15 To see how these parameters can affect the wall. for Vertical Grid Pattern ➤ Angle. You see these same parameters for Horizontal Grid Pattern. 1 In the Project Browser. This completes the exercise on creating a storefront. click Mullion. Under the Vertical Grid Pattern heading. 20 Save the file. For more information about these curtain wall parameters. enter 15. Justification. Curtain System by Lines In this exercise. 17 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. Angle. Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 18 On the Options Bar. 2 Orient the view to the storefront wall you added in the last exercise. and Offset. under 3D Views. The Horizontal Grid Pattern counterparts are the same but for the perpendicular direction. 552 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . center. 16 Click OK. By setting the Angle value. see the Revit Architecture help. This type of curtain system is known as a ruled curtain system. double-click Southeast Isometric. you create a curtain wall based on 2 lines that have been sketched at different elevations on the model. The Offset is the distance the spacing starts from the justification point.The Instance Parameters list includes additional parameters that define the curtain grid layout. The Justification specifies the vertical spacing at the beginning. In this exercise. Under Vertical Grid Pattern. you are rotating the grid lines to an angle on the face of the panel. or end. enter 45 and for Horizontal Grid Pattern ➤ Angle. you learned how to embed a curtain wall and set up a grid layout.

6 Click the highlighted line. 4 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. Curtain System by Lines | 553 .3 On the View Control Bar. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. and highlight the model line. Watch the Status Bar and Tooltips to be sure you are highlighting the model line. click Curtain System ➤ Curtain System by Lines. 7 Place the cursor at the top edge of the TOP OF ROOF level. Press TAB to select the line if it does not immediately highlight. making sure Lines : Model Lines : Line is highlighted. 5 Place the cursor at the top edge of the SECOND FLOOR slab.

A ruled curtain system does not have all the properties of a curtain wall. NOTE The next few steps are intended as a guide to finish the system. 554 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . click Curtain Grid. and click . you subdivide the ruled curtain system using curtain grids. you can vary the steps to style the system the way you want. click Modify. 9 On the Design Bar.8 Select the highlighted line. Next. A panel between the 2 lines is created. 10 Select the panel. 11 Click OK. 12 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. Notice there are very few properties for the ruled curtain system. but now that you have created a ruled curtain system.

16 In the Type Selector. quarters. Curtain System by Lines | 555 . and then eighths. and the lesson on creating additional curtain systems. 18 Save the file. you replace some of the glazed panels in front of the ceilings with solid panels.13 Using the midpoint curtain grid snaps. select System Panel : Solid. Finally. 15 Highlight a top level glazed panel. In this lesson you learned to create a sloped glazing system. embed a curtain system inside another wall. and click Select Panels ➤ Along Grid 2. This completes the exercise for creating a ruled curtain system. and define a ruled curtain system. 14 Place vertical grids that snap to the midpoints on the panel and divide the panel into halves. place horizontal grids that divide the panel into halves. and then eighths. This is similar to placing the grids on the curved curtain system. 17 Change the THIRD FLOOR level panels to solid. quarters. right-click.

556 .

a work plane named Breezeway exists for the purpose of this exercise. and open Metric\m_Roofs. In addition. Creating Roofs Creating an Extruded Roof You create the roof by sketching the top roof profile and extruding it over the length of the breezeway. including hip.Roofs 15 In this lesson. gable. You do not need to create the work plane. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. shed. mansard. 557 . In the left pane of the Open dialog. and low sloped roofs. and soffits to the roofs that you create. you create roofs from footprints and by extrusion. you learn how to add fascia. In this exercise. In this tutorial. click Training Files. you need to select a work plane to use as a sketching guide. gutters. you learn how to create different types of roofs in Revit Architecture 2009. In this lesson. you create an extruded roof over a breezeway between a house and a garage.rvt. Before you can sketch the roof profile. you learn to create several different types of roofs.

8 Sketch the first reference plane 450 mm to the left of the left exterior breezeway wall face. TIP Instead of trying to place the reference plane in its exact location initially. 6 In the Roof Reference Level and Offset dialog. expand Floor Plans. This helps ensure that the plane is measured from the face of the wall rather than from the wall centerline. 4 Click OK. verify Level 3 is selected for Level. Before you can sketch the profile of the roof. centerline. you need to define four reference planes to help determine key points on the profile sketch. select Name. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and so on). To change where the temporary dimension is measured from (face. and double-click Level 1.1 In the Project Browser. 7 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. and then select Reference Plane : Breezeway. and then click Open View to select a section view parallel to the work plane in which to sketch the roof. you can place it in the general location and then zoom in and use temporary dimensions. and click OK. click the blue square on the witness line. click Roof ➤ Roof by Extrusion. click Ref Plane. expand Views (all). The section view is automatically cropped around the area where you want to sketch the roof. 558 | Chapter 15 Roofs . verify that Section: Section1 is selected. 3 In the Work Plane dialog. 5 In the Go To View dialog.

Creating an Extruded Roof | 559 . 11 Sketch a horizontal reference plane 450 mm below Level 2.9 Sketch a similar reference plane 450 mm to the right of the right exterior breezeway wall face. 10 Sketch a vertical reference plane centered between the two vertical walls.

16 On the View toolbar. select Chain. click (Default 3D View) to display the model. Use automatic snaps to link the chain to the reference plane intersections. click Finish Sketch to complete the roof. 12 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar.Next. 14 Sketch two sloped lines to create the roof profile. 13 On the Options Bar. The roof is automatically extruded from the Breezeway work plane in one direction. click Lines. Begin the sketch at the intersection of the left vertical reference plane and the horizontal plane. 560 | Chapter 15 Roofs . sketch the roof profile. 15 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar.

18 Select the edge of the roof. press CTRL. 21 In the Project Browser. click (Join/Unjoin Roof). Next. The breezeway walls still penetrate the roof. and double-click Section 1. Creating an Extruded Roof | 561 . 19 On the Tools toolbar. 17 On the Tools toolbar. Use the Join Roof command again to join the opposite end of the breezeway roof to the exterior wall of the house that joins the breezeway. and then select the exterior face of the wall. 23 Select one of the breezeway walls. and then select the exterior wall face of the garage to join the roof to the garage wall. click (Join/Unjoin Roof). The roof should resemble the following illustration. expand Sections (Type 1). click Modify. 20 Select the breezeway roof edge. expand Views (all). press TAB. and select the second wall. so you next attach the breezeway walls to the breezeway roof. 22 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. use the Join Roofs command to adjust the length of the roof and join the roof edges to the exterior walls.Notice that the breezeway roof penetrates the house walls inappropriately.

you create a gable roof over a garage from a footprint. click Attach for Top/Base. 562 | Chapter 15 Roofs . and then verify that Attach Wall: Top is selected. click model. 25 Select the roof to join the wall tops to the roof. (Default 3D View) to view the completed breezeway roof in the 27 Proceed to the next exercise. Creating a Gable Roof from a Footprint on page 562. 26 On the View toolbar. Creating a Gable Roof from a Footprint In this exercise.24 On the Options Bar.

rvt. and enter 600 for Overhang. 6 Select the left vertical wall of the garage to define the first roof slope line. Next. 5 On the Options Bar. Verify that a dashed blue line displays to the left of the wall from the edge of the roof as you select the wall. You use roof slope lines to define the roof gable ends. 4 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. m_Roofs. 2 Select Garage Roof to move the roof to the correct level. Creating a Gable Roof from a Footprint | 563 . 3 In the Project Browser. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. expand Floor Plans. you set the roof slope as a property of the footprint slope lines. 1 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. sketch the roof footprint.You begin by sketching the perimeter of the roof in plan view to create the roof footprint. click Pick Walls. expand Views (all). verify that Defines slope is selected. and click Yes. To complete the gable roof with the correct pitch. and double-click Garage Roof.

select both slope definition lines. and on the Options Bar. click Yes to attach the highlighted exterior garage walls to the roof. Creating a Roof with a Vertical Penetration from a Footprint on page 565. 8 On the Options Bar. By default. and click OK. (Default 3D View) to view the gable roof and attached walls in 16 Proceed to the next exercise. the roof slope has a 750 mm rise over a 1000 mm run. click Modify. click the model. 13 On the Design Bar.7 Select the parallel wall on the right to define the second roof slope line. clear Defines slope. enter 500 mm for Rise/1000 to change the roof slope. The Element Properties dialog is displayed. Verify that a dashed blue line displays to the right of the wall from the edge of the roof as you select the wall. 15 On the View toolbar. Next. under Dimensions. 11 Press CTRL. click (Properties). click Finish Roof. 10 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 9 Select the two horizontal walls to create a closed loop and complete the roof footprint. 14 When you see the informational dialog. 564 | Chapter 15 Roofs . 12 In the Element Properties dialog. edit the properties of the two vertical slope definition lines to change the roof pitch.

expand Views (all). the opening that you sketched becomes a void in the roof. and enter 600 for Overhang.rvt. expand Floor Plans. 3 On the Options Bar. you sketch a closed rectangular opening around the chimney. 1 In the Project Browser. After you define the roof slope lines and complete the footprint. and then verify that a dashed blue line displays to the exterior side of the walls. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. When you complete the roof. m_Roofs. The roof requires an opening to accommodate a chimney. clear Defines slope. you add a main gable roof to a house from a footprint. You begin by sketching the perimeter of the roof in plan view to create the roof footprint. click Pick Walls. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. Creating a Roof with a Vertical Penetration from a Footprint | 565 . press TAB. 4 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. NOTE You add the slope defining lines in a later step. 5 Place the cursor over one of the exterior walls. and double-click Level 3.Creating a Roof with a Vertical Penetration from a Footprint In this exercise.

click Yes to attach the walls to the roof. 14 Select one of the shorter line segments shown in the following illustration.6 Click to select all the walls. click Finish Roof. click Lines. Next. 12 Select the uppermost horizontal line. add new slope lines to the roof. click Modify. sketch a rectangle from the upper left corner of the exterior chimney face to the lower right corner of the exterior chimney face. select Defines Slope. 10 On the View menu. 9 Using automatic snaps. Next. 13 On the Options Bar. 17 When you see the informational dialog. select Defines Slope. 7 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. sketch the chimney opening. 566 | Chapter 15 Roofs . 16 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. click Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit to view the entire floor plan. 15 On the Options bar. 11 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 8 On the Options Bar. click (Rectangle).

select Defines slope. you create a hip roof over the rear of a house from a footprint. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint.18 On the View toolbar. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. click Pick Walls. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint | 567 . and double-click Level 2. 4 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. m_Roofs.rvt. 1 In the Project Browser. expand Views (all). click (Default 3D View) to view the new roof in the model. and enter 600 for Overhang. expand Floor Plans. 3 On the Options Bar. 19 Proceed to the next exercise. Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint In this exercise. Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint on page 567.

Make sure you select the segment on the side that you want to keep. close the roof sketch. select the left vertical slope definition line.5 Select the exterior edges of the three walls that create the rear addition to the house. 8 Select the exterior edge of the uppermost horizontal wall of the main building. The sketched lines cannot overlap or intersect each other. 11 To trim the first line segment. Next. using the following illustration for guidance. clear Defines Slope. Next. click Lines. and then specify a point near the midpoint of the line that you sketched along the wall of the main building. and click (Pick Lines). 7 On the Options Bar. 6 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. trim the extra line segments that result from the intersection of the sketch lines. 568 | Chapter 15 Roofs . 10 On the Options Bar. Roof sketches must create a closed loop before you can create the roof. Verify that a dashed blue line displays on the exterior side of the wall from the edge of the roof as you select the walls. 9 On the Tools toolbar. You must trim these lines to create a valid sketch. verify that the Trim/Extend to Corner option is selected. click (Trim/Extend).

13 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. and use the Orbit tool to view the back of the house.) Notice that the walls do not join to the roof. 14 Under Constraints. 19 Select one of the walls under the hip roof. 16 On the View toolbar. 15 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar.12 Repeat the trim procedure on the adjacent corner to create a closed loop without intersections. click Roof Properties. Use the Attach Top/Base command to join the walls to the roof. 18 On the Design Bar. The Element Properties dialog is displayed. and click OK. (Press ESC to close the SteeringWheels. and then verify that Attach Wall: Top is selected. raise the roof 600 mm above the current level. enter 600 for Base Offset From Level. Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint | 569 . 20 Select the roof to join the wall top to the roof. click (SteeringWheels). click (Default 3D View) to display the model. click Attach for Top/Base on the Options Bar. 17 On the View toolbar. click Modify. click Finish Roof. Next.

and use the Orbit tool to view the remaining walls that support the hip roof. Notice that the new hip roof does not properly join to the back of the house. click (Join/Unjoin Roof). 24 Select the edge of the hip roof. The properly joined roof should resemble the following illustration. 25 Proceed to the next exercise. and then select the edge of the main roof to join the roofs. Press and hold CTRL to select and join the two remaining walls at the same time. Creating a Shed Roof from a Footprint on page 571. 23 On the Tools toolbar. use the Join Roof command to fix the roof. 570 | Chapter 15 Roofs .21 Click (SteeringWheels). join the two remaining walls to the roof. 22 Using the same method that you used previously. Next.

click Pick Walls. trim the extra line segments that result from the intersection of the sketch lines. expand Views (all). 6 On the Options Bar. Make sure you select the segment on the side that you want to keep. expand Floor Plans. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. clear Defines Slope. verify that the Trim/Extend to Corner option is selected. 7 Select the exterior face of the main wall to close the sketch. 1 In the Project Browser. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and then select a point near the midpoint of the upper horizontal line you sketched earlier. Next. 4 On the Options Bar. Verify that a blue dashed line displays around the exterior side of the walls before clicking to select the walls. 8 On the Tools toolbar. select the left vertical roof line. press TAB. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. enter 0 for Overhang. 3 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. Creating a Shed Roof from a Footprint | 571 . you create a shed roof over the entrance to a house from a footprint. 5 Place the cursor over one of the exterior walls that defines the entry way. 10 To trim the first line segment. and then click to select all three of the entry way walls. 9 On the Options Bar.rvt.Creating a Shed Roof from a Footprint In this exercise. You must trim these lines to create a valid sketch. m_Roofs. and double-click Level 2. and enter 300 for Overhang. click (Trim/Extend).

select Defines slope. click 20 On the View toolbar.rvt. Next. 1 In the Project Browser. Adding Slope Arrows to a Shed Roof on page 572. Notice the rise value is displayed next to the slope marker. you add a slope-defining line. Adding Slope Arrows to a Shed Roof In this exercise. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. m_Roofs. 18 Click Yes to attach the walls to the roof. you add slope arrows to the shed roof. 21 Proceed to the next exercise. and press ENTER. click (Default 3D View) to display the model. and click OK. expand Views (all). 17 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. click Finish Roof to complete the roof. and double-click 3D. 15 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar.11 Repeat the trim procedure on the adjacent corner to create a closed loop without intersections. (SteeringWheels). 12 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 19 On the View toolbar. click Roof Properties. 572 | Chapter 15 Roofs . and use the Orbit tool to rotate the model. 14 Enter 500 mm for the rise value to change the roof slope. and select the lower horizontal line at the front of the roof. expand 3D Views. 13 On the Options Bar. click Modify. enter -600 for Base Offset From Level. 16 Under Constraints.

click (Pick Lines). 10 Split the slope defining line where the reference planes intersect as shown in the following illustration. click Split Walls and Lines. Verify that the reference planes are located inside the shed roof sketch. 7 On the Options Bar. 3 On the Options Bar. verify ■ (Draw) is selected. To help locate the position of each split. and enter 600 for Offset. 4 In the Project Browser. 13 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 6 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 15 Sketch a slope arrow from the reference plane to the midpoint of the lower horizontal roof line: Select the intersection of the left vertical reference plane and the roof line to specify the location of the slope arrow tail. 5 On the View menu. change the longest slope line segment (the middle segment) so that it no longer defines slope. click Slope Arrow. click Ref Plane. clear Defines Slope. 12 On the Options Bar. you need to add two reference planes. Next. click Zoom ➤ Zoom in Region. expand Views (all). 14 On the Options Bar. you need to split the slope defining line into three segments. click Edit to activate the roof footprint sketch. and select the middle segment of the slope defining line. Adding Slope Arrows to a Shed Roof | 573 . and double-click Level 2. 11 On the Design Bar. expand Floor Plans.2 Select the shed roof over the entrance of the house. Next. click Modify. 9 On the Tools menu. add two new slope arrows. Before you can add slope arrows. 8 Select the two vertical sketch lines. and zoom in around the shed roof footprint.

22 Click (Default 3D View) on the View toolbar to display the model. The head should snap to the midpoint of the line as in the previous steps. expand Views (all). NOTE If the front wall is separated from the roof. 1 In the Project Browser. enter 500 for Rise/1000. 2 Select the gable roof over the garage. 16 Repeat steps 13 . Aligning Roof Eaves on page 574. select Slope for Specify. When you sketch a hip roof.15 to add the second slope arrow. 20 Under Dimensions. Begin the tail at the right reference plane. and move the cursor to place the arrow. use the Attach Top/Base command to join the wall to the roof. expand Floor Plans. 3 On the Options Bar. m_Roofs. 21 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. click Finish Roof to complete the roof. When eave heights differ. 574 | Chapter 15 Roofs . click Modify.rvt. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. you convert the gable roof over the garage to a hip roof and use the Align Eaves tool to adjust the eave heights. 18 Press CTRL. the adjacent eave heights must align. Aligning Roof Eaves In this exercise.■ Move the cursor along the roof line until the midpoint displays. 17 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. select both slope arrows. and then click OK. and double-click Garage Roof. click Edit. 23 Proceed to the next exercise. (Properties). and click 19 Under Constraints. you can use the Align Eaves tool to align them. and then select it to specify the location of the slope arrow head.

5 On the Options Bar. 7 In the Element Properties dialog. 9 Select the left vertical eave to use to align the eaves. and save the exercise file with a unique name. Creating a Mansard Roof on page 576. Aligning Roof Eaves | 575 . 10 On the Options Bar. enter 800 mm for Rise/1000. you must select one eave to use to align both eaves. on the File menu. Notice how the overhang adjusts to match the eave height of the first eave.4 Select the two gable end lines (the lines without slope definition). When aligning eaves. 12 On the Design Bar. 6 With the two gable end lines selected. Next. select Defines Slope. 16 Proceed to the next exercise. click Save As. click 8 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. This dimension is the height of the eave measured from the sketch plane. under Dimensions. (Properties). click Finish Roof. 11 Select both the horizontal eave lines. click Align Eaves. select Adjust Overhang to align the eaves by adjusting the overhang to match the eave height of the first eave. select a method to align the eaves. click (Default 3D View) to display the model. The eave lines display with a dimension. 13 On the View toolbar. and click OK. 14 If you want to save your changes. 15 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. on the Options Bar.

rvt. click Modify. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. expand Elevations. click 5 Click OK to cut the top of the roof off at level 3. 576 | Chapter 15 Roofs . on the Options Bar. 3 Select the roof and. you create a mansard roof by cutting off a hip roof at a specific level and adding another roof on top of it. under Constraints. 1 In the Project Browser. (Properties). select Level 3 for Cutoff Level. and open Metric\m_Mansard_Roof. 4 In the Element Properties dialog. and double-click North. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.Creating a Mansard Roof In this exercise. click Training Files. In the left pane of the Open dialog. expand Views (all). Notice the model has four defined levels: In the next steps. you constrain the current roof so it does not rise above Level 3.

click (Default 3D View) to display the model. 11 Select the four edges of the roof cutoff. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. and double-click Level 3. click Lines. enter 750 mm for Rise/1000. 15 In the Element Properties dialog. 13 Select one of the roof cutoff lines. click Modify. 8 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and select the remaining three lines. expand Views (all). create a new roof that starts at level 3 and completes the mansard roof. and then select Defines slope. 9 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. click . and click OK.6 On the View toolbar. expand Floor Plans. Next. 10 On the Options Bar. 16 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 14 On the Options Bar. click Finish Roof. 12 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. press TAB. Creating a Mansard Roof | 577 . 7 In the Project Browser. under Dimensions. click (Pick Lines).

and save the exercise file with a unique name. you add a roof to a building shell. (Default 3D View) to display the model with the complete 18 If you want to save your changes. You also modify the structure of the roof slab to more accurately represent the tapered insulation condition used to create the roof drainage system. and open Common\c_Low_Slope_Roof.rvt. After you add the roof. on the File menu. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Save As. click mansard roof. click Training Files. Creating a Low Slope Roof on page 578. Creating a Low Slope Roof In this exercise.17 On the View toolbar. 20 Proceed to the next exercise. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 19 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. 578 | Chapter 15 Roofs . NOTE This exercise uses a common training file and Imperial units. you modify the slab to represent roof drains in the low slope roof.

Create a flat roof by footprint 1 In the Project Browser. click Pick Walls. and that Overhang is 0' 0''. 3 On the Design Bar. double-click Roof. under Floor Plans. 2 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 4 On the Options Bar. Creating a Low Slope Roof | 579 . 6 Select the interior face of a wall segment on each side of the building and 1 on either side of the arc wall at the entry. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. verify that Defines slope is not selected. select the interior face of the curved wall on the right. 5 In the drawing area.

Instead you select walls on each side of the building and then use the Trim tool to create a closed loop sketch. 11 On the Design Bar. click Finish Roof.Insulation on Metal Deck . 10 In the Element Properties dialog.EPDM. click Roof Properties. 7 On the Tools toolbar. 580 | Chapter 15 Roofs . select Steel Truss . you cannot use TAB to select the chain of walls.Because the walls are not continuous. and click OK. for Type. as shown: 9 On the Design Bar. 8 Select the walls to create a closed loop. click (Trim/Extend).

but it is a flat object with no slope or indication of roof drainage. click (Draw Split Lines). You use this tool to split the roof slab into 6 regions so that you can modify the slope independently. 16 On the Options Bar. under Floor Plans. Creating a Low Slope Roof | 581 . The roof has been created. double-click the section head to open the section view. you alter the shape of the slab to represent a roof drainage layout. 13 Zoom in to the upper left area of the roof. double-click Roof. 15 Use the TAB key to highlight the roof. and click to select it. Add split lines to segment the roof 14 In the Project Browser. In the next steps.Open a section view 12 In the drawing area.

and select a point on the opposite roof line.17 Select the midpoint of the top horizontal roof line. 18 Move the cursor down. and select the midpoint of the bottom horizontal roof line You create a split line vertically down the center. add a second horizontal split line beginning at the top endpoint of the arc. 582 | Chapter 15 Roofs . move the cursor horizontally to the left. 19 Select the lower endpoint of the arc line. 20 Using the same method.

Layout tools in Revit Architecture such as reference planes and dimensions can be used to more accurately place editing points on a roof slab.The roof is now divided into 6 sections. You could also select multiple points and change them all at once from the Options Bar. exact placement of the points is not important. (Add points). on the Options Bar. you begin to shape the slab by adding points for the roof drains and modifying the elevations of the points and edges. click (Modify Sub-Elements). You modify the points individually. Add elevation points 21 With the roof still selected. 23 On the Options Bar. In this exercise. click 22 Click to add a point close to the center of each section. Next. Creating a Low Slope Roof | 583 .

and press ENTER. for the dimension.24 Select the point in the upper left region of the roof. click (Modify Sub-Elements). 584 | Chapter 15 Roofs . Edit the roof edges 26 On the Options Bar. 25 Using the same method. enter -2''. specify a -2'' dimension for the remaining 5 points. The dimensional value is relative to the roof plane. The lines on the roof now represent the ridges of the deformed slab shape.

Modify the construction of the slab type 30 In the drawing area. 29 On the Design Bar. double-click the section head to view the additional affects of the shape editing. 31 Select the roof slab. as shown: 28 On the Options Bar. click Modify. including the interior edges of the roof regions. for Elevation. and select all of the roof edges. Creating a Low Slope Roof | 585 . click (Properties). and on the Options Bar. and press ENTER. Clicking Modify or pressing ESC exits the editing mode and the shape edits are applied to the slab.27 Press and hold CTRL. enter 4''.

In some cases this type of slope is desired. 36 View the results in the section view. and Soffits on page 586. The insulation now tapers from the edges to the drain in the center. 32 In the Element Properties dialog. 34 In the Edit Assembly dialog. After you create a roof. Gutters. and soffits in Revit Architecture. 35 Click OK 3 times. Creating Fascia. leaving the other layers to maintain the original plane of placement for the roof. and soffits.The slab has not responded exactly as intended. 586 | Chapter 15 Roofs . gutters. The entire slab is sloped. Creating Fascia. Gutters. 33 In the Type Properties dialog. you learn how to create roof fascia. click Edit. but in this case you want the insulation layer to create the slope. under Construction. click Edit/New. select Variable. gutters. for Structure. 39 Proceed to the next lesson. you can easily create its fascia. You edit the construction of the slab type to achieve this result. click Save As. for the Thermal/Air Layer. and save the exercise file with a unique name. By making the insulation layer variable. on the File menu. and Soffits In this lesson. the slope will be accommodated in the insulation layer. 38 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. 37 If you want to save your changes.

6 In the Element Properties dialog. 9 In the Type Properties dialog. select M_Fascia-Built-Up. 10 Move the cursor to the top edge of the roof. 5 On the Options Bar. click Edit/New to access the type properties of the fascia. click (Properties). 1 Click File menu ➤ Load From Library ➤ Load Family. click Training Files. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 4 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar.rvt. Creating Roof Fascia | 587 . enter Built-up Fascia. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and click OK. under Construction. and open Common\c_Condominium. select M_Fascia-Built-Up: 38 x 184mm x 38 x 286 for Profile. and open Metric\Families\Profiles\Roofs. and click Open. click Training Files. 7 In the Type Properties dialog. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog.Creating Roof Fascia In this exercise. you learn to use the Host Sweep command to create fascia on the roof of a condominium. click Duplicate. 3 Press CTRL.rfa and M_Gutter-Cove. 8 In the Name dialog. and click OK twice.rfa. click Host Sweep ➤ Roof Fascia.

14 Proceed to the next exercise. 588 | Chapter 15 Roofs . click Modify to exit the Fascia command. Creating Gutters on page 588. 12 Select all of the roof top edges to place the fascia around the building. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. click Host Sweep ➤ Roof Gutter.rvt. 13 On the Design Bar. 1 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. c_Condominium. Creating Gutters In this exercise. 2 On the Options Bar. click (Properties). you use the Host Sweep command to place a gutter at the bottom edge of the roof on a condominium building model.11 Select the top edge of the roof to place the fascia.

7 Under Materials and Finishes. Creating Gutters | 589 . 5 Enter Cove Shape Gutter for Name. Creating Soffits on page 590. and click OK. 9 Move the cursor to the bottom edge of the roof. and then click 8 In the Materials dialog. click Edit/New. select Metal-Aluminum for Name. 4 In the Type Properties dialog.3 In the Properties dialog. 6 In the Type Properties dialog. under Construction. . 12 Proceed to the next exercise. 10 Click to place the gutter. click Duplicate. click in the Value field for Material. and click OK three times. 11 Continue to add gutters to the other roof edges of the building model. select M_Gutter-Cove: 125 x 125mm for Profile.

You add the soffit underneath the roof of the condominium building model that you used in the previous exercise. 590 | Chapter 15 Roofs . click Roof ➤ Roof Soffit. c_Condominium. and double-click Roof. click Pick Roofs.Creating Soffits In this exercise. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. expand Views.rvt. you learn how to place a roof soffit. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 3 On the Design Bar. 1 In the Project Browser. expand Floor Plans.

6 In the Project Browser. click Finish Sketch. and double-click 3D. Notice that the geometry of the roof and the soffit overlap. 7 On the Tools menu. expand 3D Views. 5 On the Design Bar. expand Views (all). and then select the soffit to join them. 8 Select the roof. Creating Soffits | 591 . click Join Geometry.4 Select the roof.

592 | Chapter 15 Roofs . and save the exercise file with a unique name.9 If you want to save your changes. click Save As. 10 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. on the File menu.

Two schemes are provided by default: Gross Building and Rentable. under Length. 3 Under Area. You add and modify the area boundaries and add areas. click Format and specify the following: ■ ■ ■ For Units. click Project Units. select Square meters. You can edit the rentable scheme and create additional schemes. 2 In the Project Units dialog. you create area schedules and color fill plans based on the area schemes and plans. select mm. and open Common\c_Area. click Format and specify the following: ■ For Units. NOTE Images in this exercise reflect Imperial values. For Unit Suffix. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Each area scheme can have multiple area plans. You add and modify the area boundaries and add areas. Click OK. you learn how to use area analysis tools to define and label spatial relationships. you use the two predefined area schemes to create respective area plans to define gross area and a rentable area. you create a color fill plan and area schedule based on the area schemes and plans. you use the two predefined area schemes to create respective area plans to define gross area and a rentable area. In the left pane of the Open dialog. The first step in area analysis is the definition of area schemes. Using Area Analysis Tools In this lesson. select Millimeters. 593 . In the final exercise. You then create area plans for each scheme as needed. Creating Area Schemes and Plans In this exercise. click Training Files. Finally.Area Analysis 16 In this tutorial.rvt. Set units of measurement to metric 1 On the Settings menu. If you are using metric units. your values will be different.

or 0.■ ■ ■ For Rounding. select 2 decimal places. 6 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. These schemes define spatial relationships. the system-computed height defaults to the level. 9 Click Cancel. View predefined area schemes 5 In the Project Browser. NOTE If the room area includes a room separation line. 4 In the Project Units dialog. ■ At specified height: You specify the height above the level that area is calculated. expand Floor Plans. You can specify the height where the room area is calculated. You can specify the boundary location to be used for room area calculations. expand Views (all). Although you can create new schemes that are based on the Rentable scheme. click Settings. as well as selecting whether to have room volumes calculated automatically. select m2. For Unit Suffix. 7 In the Room and Area Settings dialog. There are two schemes currently defined: Gross Building and Rentable. right-click in the Design Bar. Rentable: Area measurements based on the standard method for measuring floor area in office buildings. Click OK. click OK. 8 In the Room and Area Setting dialog. it is not necessary in this exercise. TIP If the Room and Area tab is not visible. and verify that Level 1 is the active view. 594 | Chapter 16 Area Analysis . and click Room and Area. click the Area Schemes tab. ■ At system computed height: Generally defaults to or 1000 mm above the level. ■ ■ Gross Building: Total constructed area of a building. click the Room Calculations tab.

Click OK. under Views (all). and notice that the Level 1 area plan is the active view. Verify that Do not duplicate existing views is selected. you must manually add these boundary lines. ■ ■ Verify that the scale is 1/8'' = 1'-0''. Creating Area Schemes and Plans | 595 . area boundary lines are automatically placed on the exterior walls of the building model. If you select No. Expand Area Plans (Gross Building).Create a gross building area plan 10 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. The area reference lines are for design purposes only and do not print. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Select Gross Building for Type. 14 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. 15 Click in the middle of the room on the lower left corner of the building model to place the tag. NOTE The Area command is used to create and tag new areas. 12 When the informational dialog displays. click Area Plan. 13 In the Project Browser. NOTE If you clear Do not duplicate existing views. To modify the area. forming a closed loop. An area is represented by two crossed reference lines. When you select Yes in this dialog. Select Level 1 for Area Plan views. click Area. you must select one of the reference lines. you can create a copy of the area plan with subsequent changes to the original area plan duplicated in the copied plan. rather than the area tag. click Yes to create the boundary lines automatically. The Area Tag command is used to tag existing areas. notice there is a new view type called Area Plans (Gross Building). 11 In the New Area Plan dialog.

Although the rule for these lines is to follow the inside face of the wall. the area boundary lines do not update automatically. you can select the option "Apply Area Rules" so that the area boundary lines adjust to the area type. common areas.NOTE An area tag measures area based on the area plan boundary lines. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Rentable for Type. you create a new area plan for rentable space. NOTE The area lines follow some of the windows hosted by the exterior wall. and store area. 22 Select all the interior walls by clicking them one at a time. Next. Create a rentable area scheme and plan 16 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. Expand Area Plans (Rentable). When you add area boundary lines. if the window glass is greater than 50% of the wall height. Select Level 1 for Area Plan views. Add area boundary lines 20 On the Design Bar. You add and use area boundary lines to define the office areas. Notice that the area boundary lines are on the inner face of the exterior walls. 19 Zoom out until you can see the entire building model. When you pick the walls. click Area Boundary. Verify that Do not duplicate existing views is selected. Notice that there is a new view type called Area Plans (Rentable). 18 Click Yes to automatically define the area boundary lines. 596 | Chapter 16 Area Analysis . 17 In the New Area Plan dialog. click Area Plan. 21 On the Options Bar. you can either draw them or pick them. the area boundary lines are placed on the face of the glass. A room tag measures the area enclosed within the room-defining walls at the boundary location specified in Room and Area Settings. verify that Pick Lines and Apply Area Rules are selected. and notice that the Level 1 area plan is the active view. Click OK. If you do not select this option.

25 On the Design Bar. Creating Area Schemes and Plans | 597 . and click to select the area. place the cursor over the Area Tag and press Tab until Area displays in the status bar. click Modify. click inside the middle of the room to place the tag.23 On the Design Bar. 24 In the upper left corner of the building model. 27 On the Options Bar. 26 Select the area you added to the room in the upper left corner of the building model. do the following: Enter Tenant 1 for Name. NOTE If you have difficulty selecting the area. 28 In the Element Properties dialog. click Area. click ■ ■ . Select Office area for Area Type.

32 On the Options Bar. 31 On the Design Bar. 34 Using the techniques learned in previous steps. add an area in the common space to the right of the double doors hosted by the west exterior wall.■ Click OK. Select Building Common Area for Area Type. 30 Add the area to the room on the lower left corner of the building model. click Area. 33 In the Element Properties dialog. do the following: ■ ■ Enter Circulation for Name. 598 | Chapter 16 Area Analysis . 29 On the Design Bar. In the Element Properties dialog. click Modify and select the area. do the following: Enter Tenant 2 for Name. Select Office area for Area Type. Click OK. click ■ ■ ■ .

and select Major Vertical Penetration for Area Type. 35 Add an area to the building model core. Name the areas Tenant 3 and Tenant 4. enter Core for Name. Tenant 3 should be in the upper right. and Tenant 4 in the lower right.■ Click OK. 36 Add the last two areas to the two spaces on the right side of the building model. Creating Area Schemes and Plans | 599 . and select Store Area for Area Type.

You added and modified the area boundaries and applied area tags to define spaces.Notice that within the two store areas. and click Save. the area boundary lines have adjusted to the new area type. you used the two predefined area schemes to create respective area plans to define gross area and a rentable area. 600 | Chapter 16 Area Analysis . and click to place the legend. click Save. NOTE This project is required in its current state if you intend to continue with the next exercise. you create a color fill area plan and an area schedule. you create a color fill area plan and an area schedule. Creating Area Schedules and Color Fill Area Plans In this exercise. click Color Scheme Legend. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. Create a color scheme legend 1 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. In this exercise. name the project Area-in progress. 38 Navigate to your preferred directory. In the next exercise. 37 On the File menu. 2 Move the cursor under the left corner of the building model.rvt.

click OK to make the required visibility setting changes. click the Fields tab.3 When the dialog displays. select Area Type and click Add. Creating Area Schedules and Color Fill Area Plans | 601 . select Areas (Rentable). Create an area schedule 4 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and click OK. 6 In the Schedules Properties dialog. 8 Add the fields Area and Name. click Schedule/Quantities. under Category. 7 Under Available fields. 5 In the New Schedule dialog.

The fields you selected in the Schedule Properties dialog are displayed as column headings within the schedule.9 Click OK. 602 | Chapter 16 Area Analysis .

You then modify the building model in both the massing view and the shell view to see how changes propagate throughout the project. At any time. you create a new building model using the various massing tools to add and cut mass. or both. You assign the default wall. volume. you create the basic geometric shape of the building model using various massing tools. floor. In this tutorial. You create a mass floor schedule and assign mass usage to analyze floor area. and floors. You can create and modify the geometric shapes that aggregate to form the building model shell. and roofs. you then need to update the building face. After you create the basic geometric shape of the building model. floors. you convert to the basic shell elements of the building model. you can specify the view to display massing elements. After creating mass floors.Massing 17 You can use massing tools during the initial design process to convey a potential design concept without the level of detail usually found in a project. Using Massing Tools In this lesson. Massing elements and building elements are not linked automatically. If you modify a massing face. curtain systems. building elements. you can create a schedule to assign usages and to analyze the design. you can pick massing faces and make building model elements such as walls. roofs. You use mass floors to divide the mass at each level of the building model. 603 . and roof types so that when you convert the massing elements to shell elements in the final exercise. After you make building elements. the building model uses those element types to define the walls. and perimeter information.

Adding Massing Elements to a Building Model In this exercise. and cutting geometry. The Design Bar title changes to Mass. right-click anywhere over the Design Bar. and click Massing. under Floor Plans. under Views (all). Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and open Metric\m_Massing_Start. sweeps. click Training Files. 3 Click OK in the Show Mass mode informational dialog. 4 Click OK in the Name dialog to accept the default name Mass 1. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Create Mass. 5 On the Design Bar. TIP If the Massing tab is not available on the Design Bar. 2 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. double-click Level 1. you create the basic geometric shape of a building model by adding solid and void extrusions. Add a mass element 1 In the Project Browser. 604 | Chapter 17 Massing . click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion.rvt.

click 7 Sketch the shape as shown using the exact values. enter 1550 mm. and on the Options Bar. Adding Massing Elements to a Building Model | 605 . for Offset. under Materials and Finishes. 9 In the Element Properties dialog. 10 In the Materials dialog. and click OK. select Mass (Opaque). double-click Level 1. 19 Place the cursor in the drawing area on an edge of the existing form so that the edge is highlighted. and on the Options Bar. click Lines. 17 On the Sketch Design Bar. enter 25000. 15 On the View Control Bar. 13 On the View toolbar. 16 On the Design Bar.6 On the Sketch Design Bar. click (Default 3D View). under Constraints. under Views (all). TIP You may want to dimension and constrain the lines to maintain the exact dimensions. and click . under Floor Plans. click the value for Material. click Extrusion Properties. 11 In the Element Properties dialog. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe. for Name. click 18 On the Options Bar. This means the sketch line is placed 1550 mm from the position you pick with the cursor. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. Create next extrusion form 14 In the Project Browser. click Lines. for Extrusion End. and click OK. 20 Click the edges of the form to create sketch lines as shown. Watch the Status Bar in the lower-left corner of the screen to be sure you are highlighting the Form : Extrusion : Shape Handle. (Line). 12 On the Design Bar. (Pick Lines). 8 On the Design Bar. click Finish Sketch.

25 On the Design Bar. double-click {3D} to see the results. press TAB to highlight the entire face. select Pick a plane. under Views (all). for Extrusion End. 21 On the Design Bar. highlight the larger form. double-click West. under Materials and Finishes. 29 In the Work Plane dialog. for Extrusion Start. 26 In the Project Browser. The second form is on top of the first form. click Finish Sketch. select Mass (Transparent). 23 In the Materials dialog. click Extrusion Properties. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Blend. enter 27500. 24 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. under Elevations (Building Elevation). under Constraints. and click OK. click the value for Material. 28 On the Design Bar. and click OK. enter 25000. under Views (all). TIP If necessary. 30 In the drawing area. for Name.Be sure to click to the inside of the extrusion. 606 | Chapter 17 Massing . and click . Continue creation of next massing form 27 In the Project Browser. 22 In the Element Properties dialog.

click Sketch the blend base 33 Select the top of the larger extrusion as shown. and click to select the line start point. 36 Sketch a line 6000 mm up as shown. Adding Massing Elements to a Building Model | 607 .31 Click to select the face. (Pick Lines). you draw a sketch line that acts as a construction line to create an arc. The triangle indicates that the cursor is at the midpoint. click (Arc passing through three points). click (Draw). click Lines. 37 On the Options Bar. 35 Place the cursor at the midpoint of the sketch line as shown. Next. and on the Options Bar. 34 On the Options Bar. and clear Chain. 32 On the Sketch Design Bar.

43 Move the cursor straight up and click at the top horizontal line of the smaller extrusion as shown. and delete the vertical construction line. 38 Sketch the arc as shown with the top of the arc snapping to the top of the construction line. 39 On the Design Bar. 46 On the Design Bar.TIP If you do not see this option. under Views (all). 45 In the Project Browser. click Modify. Sketch the blend top 44 On the Design Bar. click Lines and. under Elevations (Building Elevation). and click Arc passing through three points from the menu. double-click East. click (Move). click Edit Top. 41 On the Edit toolbar. click 47 Sketch the horizontal line as shown. (Line). click the arrow next to the drawing options. 42 Click the cursor at the midpoint of the horizontal sketch line as shown. 608 | Chapter 17 Massing . on the Options Bar. 40 Select the arc and the horizontal line.

click Blend Properties. and click OK. (Arc passing through three points). for Material. click 49 Create an arc as shown. click (Default 3D View). In this exercise. 50 On the Design Bar. 53 On the View toolbar. click Finish Sketch. you use the massing tools to cut geometry from the shapes you have created.48 On the Options Bar. you created two extrusions and a blend that form the basic geometric shape of the building model. 51 In the Element Properties dialog. Adding Massing Elements to a Building Model | 609 . In the next exercise. 52 On the Design Bar. verify that Mass (Opaque) is selected. Using Massing Tools to Cut Geometry from the Building Model on page 610. 54 Proceed to the next exercise. and that -92000 is specified for Second End.

m_Massing_Start. 10 On the Options Bar. and place the first reference plane 15000 mm to the right. 610 | Chapter 17 Massing . Add reference planes 3 On the Mass tab of the Design bar. These reference planes act primarily as sketching aids. you use a void extrusion to cut geometry from one of the massing shapes you added in the previous exercise.Using Massing Tools to Cut Geometry from the Building Model In this exercise. Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. under Floor Plans. click Ref Plane. Sketch extrusion voids 8 On the Design Bar. 1 In the Project Browser. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise and the resulting building model. place 3 more reference planes 15000 mm apart from left to right. 9 On the Design Bar. click Void Form ➤ Void Extrusion. under Views (all).rvt. 6 Place another reference plane 15000 mm to the right of the first reference plane. 5 Place the cursor near the left edge of the massing element so that the edge is highlighted. click (Line). click (Pick Lines) and enter 15000 for Offset. 7 Using the same technique. double-click Level 1. as shown. and select Chain. 2 In the drawing area. select the mass. When sketching the void extrusions in the steps that follow. click Lines. you specify the intersection of the reference planes and the top and bottom edges of the massing element. 4 On the Options bar.

When sketching each extrusion. Using Swept Blends | 611 . on the View Control Bar. enter 0. 12 Sketch 2 additional void extrusions as shown. for Extrusion End. 13 On the Design Bar. enter 12000 and for Extrusion Start. click Extrusion Properties. you cut voids through an extrusion you added in the first exercise. you add a swept blend shape to the massing study created in the previous exercises. and sketch the first void extrusion as shown.NOTE If the file is currently in shaded mode. click (Default 3D View). 17 On the View toolbar. In this exercise. 14 Under Constraints. Using Swept Blends In this exercise. 16 On the Design Bar. The curved form you create connects 2 pieces of the sloped face side of the massing. 15 Click OK. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. snap the corners to the intersections. 11 Enter SI for intersection snap. click Finish Sketch.

■ Select the lower left endpoint of the left mass.rvt. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Swept Blend. 2 On the Mass tab of the Design Bar. ■ For the radius. under Floor Plans. m_Massing_Start. 3 On the Design Bar. Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. click Sketch 2D Path. 4 On the Options Bar. select a point below the mass elements. and click Lines.NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercises and the resulting building model. Select the midpoint of the lower face of the middle mass. click 5 Sketch the arc: ■ (Arc passing through three points). 612 | Chapter 17 Massing . Sketch a 2D path 1 In the Project Browser. double-click Level 1.

Sketch profile 1 7 On the View toolbar. and click Edit. click Finish Path. click (Default 3D View). 9 On the Options Bar. click (Rectangle). 8 On the Design Bar. click Lines. Using Swept Blends | 613 . verify that <By Sketch> is selected. click Profile 1. 6 On the Design Bar. and sketch a 6000mm x 6000mm rectangle on the face of the mass. 11 On the Options Bar.Use a radius for the arc (about 180 degrees) that will make the beginning and end planes of the sweep parallel to the face of the existing mass. The only way to align these elements is visually. 10 On the Design Bar. From a 3D view you can sketch the profiles for the 2 ends of the swept blend. as shown. 12 Select the right endpoint of the arc as the lower right endpoint of the rectangle.

click Finish Profile. Sketch profile 2 16 On the Design Bar. 17 Using the same method. click Profile 2. Align the top of the rectangle with the top edge of the cut extrusion.13 On the Tools toolbar. click (Align). 14 Align the left edge of the rectangle to the mass edge. 15 On the Design Bar. (The size of the rectangle is not important because you align it to the mass edges. and sketch a rectangle on the face of the mass. as shown: ■ ■ 614 | Chapter 17 Massing . and press ESC.) Align the right sketch line of the rectangle with the right edge of the mass. sketch a second rectangle: ■ Click to position the lower left corner of the rectangle at the left endpoint of the arc.

Change the material properties of the mass 19 On the Design Bar. 21 In the Materials dialog. and click . click <By Category>. 20 In the Element Properties dialog.18 On the Design Bar. click Finish Swept Blend. click Finish Profile. 23 On the Design Bar. Using Swept Blends | 615 . 22 Click OK twice. click Swept Blend Properties. select Mass (Transparent). under Materials and Finishes.

26 Save the file as m_Massing_Complete. Finally. You then load that mass family file and others into a project. 25 Click File menu ➤ Save As. click Finish Mass. you open a predefined mass family file and create new types from it. you create new family types from a mass family file.24 On the Design Bar. In this exercise. 616 | Chapter 17 Massing . you added a swept blend shape to the massing study. You place several instances of the mass families into the project. Creating New Mass Family Types In this exercise. you use the Join Geometry command to join several instances of the mass elements. Using Mass Family Files in a Project In this lesson.rvt.

enter 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 11000 mm. and click Apply. enter 11000 mm. enter 18000 mm. for Depth. for Height. In this exercise. for Depth. enter 18000 mm. for Depth. and click Apply. enter 46000mm. and open Metric\Families\Massing\Box. 3 In the Name dialog. enter 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm. and click OK. 6 For Width. 4 In the Family Types dialog. and click OK. enter 9000 mm. you opened a mass family file and created 3 new types of this family file. 10 Click File menu ➤ Save As. enter 12000 mm.rfa. and for Name. enter 6000 mm. 8 For Width. and for Name. 5 Click New. and click Apply. 11 Save the file as Box-Training. enter 68000 mm x 9000 mm x 18000 mm. 9 Click OK. enter 68000 mm. for Height. under Other. click Family Types. Create 3 family types 1 On the Design Bar. and click OK.rfa. click Training Files. Creating New Mass Family Types | 617 . for Height. enter 15000mm. 2 In the Family Types dialog. for Width. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 7 Click New.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click New.

rfa family files. 3 On the View Control Bar. 6 Open the Box-Training. In the left pane of the Open dialog. double-click Site. You also load other existing mass families and place them. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click Training Files. Arc Dome. and open the Metric\Families\Massing folder. click TIP Zoom out to see the entire massing model. on the View toolbar. under Views (all). 7 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. 4 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load Family. 2 In the Project Browser. click Training Files. and open Metric\m_Massing_In-place.rvt. as shown. select Box-Training: 68000 mm x 9000 mm x 18000 mm. under Floor Plans. 8 In the Type Selector.rfa. 5 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 1 If not already selected. 618 | Chapter 17 Massing .Loading and Placing New Mass Families In this exercise. and Triangle. click Place Mass. Semi Barrel Vault.rfa. (Show Mass) to show the massing model. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe. 9 Place the box mass family on the in-place mass family.rfa. TIP You may want to use the Move tool to accurately place the mass families. you load and place the new family types that you created in the previous exercise.

22 Place the cursor in the drawing area. and click to place the mass.10 On the Design Bar. click Modify. 24 On the Design Bar. 13 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. and click OK twice. enter 90 for Angle. and use the Move command on the Edit toolbar to place the triangle as shown. click Place Mass. 17 Press CTRL. select Box-Training: 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm. 16 On the Design Bar. 11 Select the box. for the Material parameter. and click (Element Properties). specify Mass (Transparent). 14 In the Type Selector. 18 In the Element Properties dialog. select the 3 boxes. 21 On the Options Bar. and on the Options Bar. click Modify. for the Material parameter. 19 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. 23 On the Options Bar. click Place Mass. as shown. Loading and Placing New Mass Families | 619 . specify Mass (Opaque). 25 In the drawing area. 12 In the Element Properties dialog. select Rotate after placement. click (Element Properties). click Modify. 15 Place 3 of these box families on the larger box family. select the triangle. 20 In the Type Selector. select Triangle: 15000 x 45000 x 10500. and click OK twice.

33 On the View toolbar. 29 In the Type Selector. and click (Element Properties). select Box-Training: 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 11000 mm. click Place Mass. for the Material parameter. 31 Select the box and click (Element Properties). for the Material parameter. specify Mass (Transparent). click (Default 3D View). 32 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK twice. 27 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK twice. specify Mass (Opaque). 34 Use the ViewCube to orient the view to the Northeast. 30 Place the box mass family as shown. 28 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar.26 Select the triangle. 620 | Chapter 17 Massing .

In this exercise.Notice that the triangle and the box masses that you just placed overlap. you join these mass elements. (Join Geometry). the first mass element selected cuts volume from any subsequently selected mass element.rvt file. you loaded and placed the new family types that you created in the previous exercise. NOTE When you join geometry. In the next exercise. click 2 On the Tools toolbar. click (Default 3D View). You also loaded other existing mass families and added them to the building model. you join and modify the mass elements that you placed in the previous exercise. Joining Mass Elements | 621 . Training File ■ Continue using the m_Massing_In-place. Join geometry 1 On the View toolbar. Joining Mass Elements In this exercise.

Modify existing massing elements 5 In the Project Browser. 622 | Chapter 17 Massing . on the Edit toolbar. 6 Select the right edge of the Box-Training: 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 11000 mm and drag it to the left edge of the middle Box-Training: 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm as shown. click (Mirror). under Floor Plans. 4 Select the triangle. double-click Site. Mirror the modified mass element 7 With the smaller box still selected.3 Select the middle Box-Training: 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm mass element as shown. under Views (all).

8 On the Options Bar. 16 Repeat for the other instance of the modified mass element and the triangle. 10 Click to select the mirror axis start point. and then select the triangle. as shown. 12 Click to mirror the existing massing element. 9 Position the cursor over the upper edge of the middle box. click 14 On the Tools toolbar. Join geometry 13 On the View toolbar. click (Draw). (Join Geometry). for Axis. 15 Select one instance of the modified Box-Training: 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 11000 mm first. 11 Move the cursor down to create a vertical axis of reflection. 17 Press ESC to see the result. Joining Mass Elements | 623 . click (Default 3D View). TIP Pressing SHIFT while dragging the cursor locks the axis orthogonally. enter SM. and snap to the midpoint of the edge.

click Modify.In this exercise. you place the mass elements from the previous exercise into Design Options. you joined mass elements together. (If Design Options is already selected. and select the triangle mass element. You then switch between different design options to get different versions of the design. 1 On the Design Bar. 2 On the Window menu.) 3 On the Design Options toolbar. You add mass elements to design options to experiment with different versions of the design. 624 | Chapter 17 Massing . You then make one of the design options the primary one for the model. Training File ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_In-place. Mass Elements in Design Options In this exercise. click Toolbar ➤ Design Options. do not clear the check mark. you continue using the same file from the previous lesson. The first selected mass element cut geometry from the subsequently selected mass element.rvt. Using Mass Elements with Design Options In this lesson. click (Add to Design Option Set). You also modified and mirrored a mass element before joining its geometry with that of another element.

17 In the Type Selector. click Modify. 9 Place the cursor in the drawing area and click to place the mass. under Floor Plans. Place semi barrel vaults 6 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. Mass Elements in Design Options | 625 . 8 On the Options Bar. for the Material parameter. 13 On the Design Bar. for Angle. select Sloped (primary). 18 Place 3 arc domes as shown. 11 Place a semi barrel vault where shown. click Place Mass. select Semi Barrel Vault: 10000 x 15000 x 7500. 10 On the Options Bar. click Place Mass. 12 Place another semi barrel vault as shown. double-click Site. specify Mass (Transparent). and click OK. and click (Element Properties). 7 In the Type Selector. 15 In the Element Properties dialog. TIP You may want to use the Move tool to place the mass precisely. 14 In the drawing area.4 In the Add to Design Option Set dialog. Place arc dome mass elements 16 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. 5 In the Project Browser. select Rotate after placement. under Views (all). clear Curved. select Arc Dome: 6000R x 2750H. enter 90. select the 2 semi barrel vaults. and click OK twice.

Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe. 22 In the Project Browser. While pressing CTRL. 20 In the drawing area. 626 | Chapter 17 Massing . 27 In the Add to Design Option Set dialog. and click (Element Properties). Create a Design Option set 25 Select the 3 arc domes and the 2 semi barrel vaults. under Views (all). and click OK. for the Material parameter. under Views (all). 24 Move the 3 arc domes to the position shown. It will indicate when you locate an arc dome or semi barrel vault. under 3D Views. move the cursor over shapes in the drawing. 21 In the Element Properties dialog. clear Sloped. click Modify. 26 On the Design Options toolbar. and click OK twice. 28 In the Project Browser. double-click North. and watch the status bar. select Curved. 23 On the View Control Bar. select the three arc domes. under Elevations. specify Mass (Transparent). 19 On the Design Bar. TIP To find the correct shapes. click (Add to Design Option Set). double-click {3D}.TIP Use the snap control lines to assist in placing the domes. click to select each of the arc domes and semi barrel values.

30 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. Creating Building Components from Mass Elements | 627 . 33 In the Design Options dialog. click the Design Options tab. click Make Primary. and click Close. select Curved from the Design Option menu. you placed mass elements into Design Options.rvt. under Option. click (Design Options). you use building component creation tools to make building components from mass faces. 35 On the File menu. click Save As and save the file as m_Massing_Design_Options. and click OK. select Curved and. Creating Building Components from Mass Elements In this lesson. 34 Close the warning that displays. In this exercise.29 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. you can make it the primary option. 31 Click the value for Design Option. You can now see the shapes that are part of the curved design option. Because it is likely that your client prefers the design option with curved shapes. 32 On the Design Options toolbar. You then switched between different design options to get different versions of the design.

click (Show Mass) to show the massing model.rvt. 6 On the Options Bar. 5 In the Type Selector. and for Loc Line. select Wall Centerline. 7 Place the cursor in the drawing area and select the face of the in-place mass family as shown. you pick massing faces to create walls. 2 On the View toolbar. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 628 | Chapter 17 Massing . 3 Use the ViewCube to orient the view to the Southeast. click Wall by Face.Brick on CMU. 1 In the Project Browser. and open Metric\m_Massing_Building_Components. under Views (all). double-click {3D}. TIP Zoom out to see the entire massing model. Create walls 4 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click Training Files. click (Pick Faces).Creating Walls by Picking Faces In this exercise. select Basic Wall: Exterior .

double-click Level 5. 11 In the Project Browser. 14 In the Project Browser. click Wall by Face. select Curtain Wall : Storefront. 15 On the Design Bar. 10 Select all the faces shown in red. click Wall by Face. alerting you that the highlighted walls overlap. Creating Walls by Picking Faces | 629 . 16 In the Type Selector. ignore the warning and continue selecting wall faces. double-click Level 3. 12 On the Design Bar. 9 On the Design Bar. 17 Select the 3 faces shown in red. under Floor Plans.The southeast wall of the mass model is now Brick on CMU. under Floor Plans. NOTE If a Warning dialog is displayed. click Wall by Face. 13 Select the face indicated by the arrow as shown. under Floor Plans. double-click Level 1. 8 In the Project Browser. under Views (all). under Views (all). under Views (all).

You can then edit the profile to clean up the overlapping geometry.18 Select all the faces shown in red. under Views (all). click Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe. If desired. 19 In the Project Browser. 22 Select all the faces shown in red. 23 Open the 3D view to see the results. click Wall by Face. 20 On the View Control Bar. under Floor Plans. and click Edit Profile on the Options Bar. 630 | Chapter 17 Massing . You can ignore the warnings about walls overlapping. you can select the overlapping curtain wall. 21 On the Design Bar. double-click Level 9.

The following information is available for mass floors: mass floor area. 8 On the Design Bar. you picked several massing faces and created both basic walls and curtain walls. and click OK. click Modify. 6 On the Options Bar.rvt. 4 Click OK. click Mass Floors. clear Curtain Panels. select all levels. When you select levels. 1 In the Project Browser. 7 In the Mass Floors dialog. Creating Floors by Picking Masses In this exercise. volume. 3 On the Model Categories tab. Creating Floors by Picking Masses | 631 . Revit Architecture generates a mass floor for each selected level that intersects the mass. Curtain Systems.In this exercise. Training File ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_Building_Components. Creating floors 5 Select the in-place mass family Mass 1. and exterior surface area. and Walls. under Views (all). double-click {3D}. perimeter. you pick mass elements and select levels to create floors. 2 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics.

select Levels 1-4. 12 In the Mass Floors dialog. and click OK. 11 On the Options Bar. 632 | Chapter 17 Massing . and select the three15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm box mass elements and the mirrored 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 11000 mm box masses as shown. click Mass Floors. 10 Press CTRL.9 Use the ViewCube to orient the view to the Northeast. click Modify. 13 On the Design Bar.

select Level 1. click Mass Floors. and select the 2 semi vault barrel mass elements and the 68000 mm x 9000 mm x 18000 mm box mass element as shown. clear Exclude Design Options (to allow you to select the semi vault barrel elements in the next step). The box mass is the long box element in the middle of the model.14 On the Options Bar. 15 Press CTRL. 17 In the Mass Floors dialog. Creating Floors by Picking Masses | 633 . 16 On the Options Bar. and click OK. NOTE The semi vault barrel elements are the 2 sloped components in the front of the view.

Creating a Mass Study Analysis In this exercise. you generate mass floor schedules for the hotel and retail massing in the model. select Mass Floor. press and hold SHIFT. The Floor Area. Floor Perimeter. 4 Using the same method.In this exercise. schedules can be created using the mass floors. and Level fields should display under Scheduled fields (in order). under Category. Training File ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_Building_Components. select Floor Area. under Available fields. 3 In the Schedule Properties dialog. Floor Volume. and click Add. and click OK. Create a mass floor schedule 1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Schedule/Quantities. add the following additional fields: ■ ■ Usage Mass: Family and Type You use the Mass: Family and Type field to help sort the schedule so it is easier to assign usage to the different masses.rvt. and select Level. Now that the floor areas have been added to the mass objects. 634 | Chapter 17 Massing . 2 In the New Schedule dialog. you created floors by selecting mass elements and levels for the floors.

6 Verify that Itemize every instance is selected. for Usage. 7 Adjust the schedule columns so the entire field is displayed. select Mass: Family and Type. enter Retail. for Sort by. you can select it from the drop-down list for subsequent entries.5 On the Sorting/Grouping tab. Mass Family Box-Training: 1500 mm x 1800 mm x 1200 mm Usage Retail Creating a Mass Study Analysis | 635 . NOTE Double-click the column divider in the schedule header to automatically expand the column to fit the text. Assign usage values to the mass components 8 In the first entry in the schedule. 9 Enter or select the appropriate usage value for all items in the schedule. and click OK. The Mass Floor Schedule displays. according to the following guidelines: NOTE After you enter a usage value in the schedule.

13 With Usage selected.Mass Family Box-Training: 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 1100 mm Box-Training: 68000 mm x 9000 mm x 18000 mm Mass 1: Mass 1 Semi Barrel Vault: 10000 x 15000 x 7500 Usage Atrium Atrium Hotel Atrium Modify the schedule to calculate hotel floor area 10 In the Project Browser. click Move Up until Usage is listed first. and click Properties. and click Remove. under Scheduled fields (in order). right-click Mass Floor Schedule. 12 In the Schedule Properties dialog. 636 | Chapter 17 Massing . and click Move Up until Level is listed second. select Mass: Family and Type. click Edit. After you assign usage. under Other. 14 Select Level. expand Schedules/Quantities. You can also arrange the schedule so it is more useful for analyzing the massing. 11 In the Element Properties dialog. the column Mass: Family and Type can be deleted. for Fields.

16 On the Formatting tab. and click OK. elevation. for Filter by. 18 On the Filter tab. TIP The values from these floor area schedules can be tagged in section. right-click Copy of Hotel Floor Area Schedule. click Edit. You create separate schedules to calculate retail and hotel space independently. click Edit. select Usage. select Usage. for Filter. 17 In the Element Properties dialog. 22 In the Project Browser. 24 In the Project Browser. and in the field below. right-click Retail Floor Area Schedule. 19 Click OK twice. select Floor Area. for Sort by. enter Retail (instead of Hotel). for Field formatting. Creating a Mass Study Analysis | 637 . select Level. 25 In the Element Properties dialog. 26 In the Schedule Properties dialog. 23 In the Rename View dialog. and click OK. Create a retail floor area schedule 21 In the Project Browser. 20 Click in the title of the schedule. for Then by. select Calculate totals. right-click Hotel Floor Area Schedule. under Fields. under Other. 27 Click OK twice. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. and click Properties. and click Rename. enter Hotel. under Other. in the field under Filter by. for Filter. and plan views. enter Retail Floor Area Schedule. and enter Hotel Floor Area Schedule. and select Grand totals.15 On the Sorting/Grouping tab.

Training File ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_Building_Components. click Roof by Face.rvt.In this exercise. by level. 3 Select the top face of the left 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm box mass element as shown. floor perimeter. and floor volume information of hotel and retail massing in the model. 638 | Chapter 17 Massing . you created mass floor schedules. under Views (all). you pick massing faces to create roofs. Create roofs 2 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. the floor area. Creating Roofs by Picking Faces In this exercise. The mass floor schedules list. double-click {3D}. 1 In the Project Browser.

4 In the Type Selector.400mm. 6 Create the same roof on the remaining 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm box mass elements. NOTE Each time you select a face on an instance of the 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm box mass element family. 7 Use the ViewCube to orient the view to the Southwest. 5 On the Options Bar. and also on the top faces of the 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 11000 mm box mass elements. Your model should now look as shown. Creating Roofs by Picking Faces | 639 . click Create Roof. click Create Roof. select Basic Roof : Generic . This creates the roof and lets you pick another face to create a new roof.

10 With the Roof by Face command still selected. 640 | Chapter 17 Massing . click Create Roof. 15 Click the Model Categories tab. 13 Using the same method. In this exercise.8 Using the method you just learned. create the same roof on the swept blend (curved) mass. 9 Use the ViewCube to orient the view back to the Northeast. select Sloped Glazing. select Curtain Panels. 14 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. create a sloped glazing roof on the other semi barrel vault mass element. 12 On the Options Bar. Creating Curtain Systems In this exercise. 11 Select the left semi barrel vault mass element. and click OK. Curtain Systems. you created roofs by picking faces of massing families. and Walls. you create curtain systems by picking non-planar massing faces. in the Type Selector.

Creating Curtain Systems | 641 . 3 In the Type Selector. under Views (all). select Curtain System: 1500 x 1500mm. 1 In the Project Browser. double-click {3D}.rvt. and select both halves of the left arc dome mass element as shown. 5 Press CTRL. click Create System. 4 On the Options Bar. verify that Select Multiple is selected. click Curtain System by Face. 6 On the Options Bar.Training File ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_Building_Components. 2 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar.

7 Using the same method. 8 With the Curtain System by Face command still selected. select the blended form on the in-place mass. 642 | Chapter 17 Massing . create a curtain system for each of the other 2 domes.

create a curtain system for the walls of the swept blend (curved mass). 11 Using the same method. Creating Curtain Systems | 643 . click Create System. 10 Use the ViewCube to orient the view to the Southwest.9 On the Options Bar.

you created curtain systems on non-planar faces.12 Click Modify to exit the command. Training File ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_Building_Components. In this exercise. and modify building elements to resize with the new mass family.rvt. 644 | Chapter 17 Massing . you change the size of an existing mass family. Editing Elements Created from Massings In this exercise.

under Views (all). 2 On the View menu. Floors. you resize one of the 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm box mass elements. 8 Drag a selection box over the box family and the dome family. and Walls. 4 Select the box mass family as shown. and then click OK. 6 On the Design Bar. 5 In the Element Properties dialog. Curtain Systems. Roofs. 3 On the Model Categories tab. under Floor Plans. clear Exclude Design Options. Editing Elements Created from Massings | 645 . and click (Element Properties). click Visibility/Graphics. click Modify. clear Curtain Panels. 9 Use the Move tool to position the box and dome families as shown. for Width. enter 30000.1 In the Project Browser. double-click Site. Next. 7 On the Options Bar. and click OK.

under Views (all). under Floor Plans.10 Open the 3D view to see the result. 646 | Chapter 17 Massing . 13 Zoom in to the upper right-hand portion of the model and select the 3 walls shown. 11 In the Project Browser. The curtain system is no longer aligned with the dome family. you remake several of the building elements to fit to the new size of the massing family. 12 On the View Control Bar. double-click Level 1. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe. In the next steps.

press TAB several times until the Status Bar indicates you are highlighting the Walls : Curtain Wall : Storefront. 17 Select the roof as shown. Also. remember that there are two curtain walls of this type that are overlapping here. you want to select the smaller one. click Remake. 14 On the Options Bar. click OK. 15 In the Exclude Hosts dialog. click (Default 3D View).TIP To select the curtain wall. Editing Elements Created from Massings | 647 . 16 On the View toolbar.

18 On the Options Bar. and click Remake. click Remake. 648 | Chapter 17 Massing . 19 Select the arc dome curtain system.

1 Open the 3D view. Notice that the values have changed in the schedule to reflect the changes in the mass elements.20 In the Project Browser. Turn off massing 2 On the View toolbar. Training File ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_Building_Components. double-click Retail Floor Area Schedule.rvt. you changed the size of an existing mass family. under Schedules/Quantities. In this exercise. Controlling Mass/Shell Visibility | 649 . you switch the visibility of the view between the massing elements and the model (shell) elements. You then modified building elements to resize with the new mass family. Controlling Mass/Shell Visibility In this exercise. click (Show Mass) to turn off massing.

right-click {3D}. 5 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 7 Clear one of the check boxes. Now you create a 3D view that shows only the massing. 8 Click None to clear the selection. 9 Select Mass. 650 | Chapter 17 Massing . under 3D Views.The 3D view now shows only the building shell. 4 Rename the view 3D . click All to select all categories. and click OK. 3 In the Project Browser. 6 On the Model Categories tab.Massing only. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate.

If desired.In this exercise. This concludes the massing tutorial. to the building shell. you can continue adding additional Revit Architecture modeling components. you switched the visibility of the 3D view to show either the building shell or the mass model. You might create the model shown. Controlling Mass/Shell Visibility | 651 . such as columns and an extruded roof.

652 .

You can also nest groups within other groups. and is contained in every instance of the host group that you place in the building model. or with those working on a different project. and typical office layouts. all instances in the building model are updated. and all new instances that you place contain the modifications. Because existing groups can be duplicated and then customized for another purpose. In this tutorial. and then you nest the kitchen in a 2 bedroom condominium unit group. After you create a model group. you place 2 new instances of the kitchen group in the floor plan.Grouping 18 Using the grouping functionality in Revit® Architecture 2009. you create a model group for a typical kitchen. you can create reusable entities that represent layouts common to many building projects. By grouping objects. Modifications to the nested group are automatically included in the host group. You create the group by selecting drawing objects and grouping them as a single entity. In this exercise. In another exercise. the host group is also updated automatically. you not only simplify their placement. Examples of the types of units for which groups are intended include condominium units. when you make changes to a single instance of a model group. creating a library of groups for your office can reduce the amount of work needed to create. For example. Creating. and modify repetitive units. Creating and Placing a Group In this exercise. you add the new model group to a previously created group. You mirror one instance of the group. 653 . you can place instances of the group in the building model using various methods. and Nesting Groups In this lesson. The new group is considered nested within the host group. Saving a group to a library gives you the ability to share the group with other team members working on the same project. Modifying. place. It also gives all those with access to the library the ability to load any group from the library into their project drawing. Training File ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. you also simplify the modification process. you create a model group for a typical kitchen for a condominium unit. You can also update all instances of a group in the building model by editing a single instance of the group and saving the changes. hotel rooms. you learn how to use model groups to collect related elements to simplify placement of repetitive units. When you make changes to a nested group. and rotate the other instance to modify the layout position. This functionality ensures consistency within and across projects.

expand Views (all). enter ZR. 654 | Chapter 18 Grouping . NOTE You may need to scroll the left pane to see the Training Files folder.■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. expand Floor Plans. Create a group for the typical kitchen layout 1 In the Project Browser. and double-click First Floor. and open Metric\m_Groups-Condominium.rvt. 2 Click in the drawing area. click Training Files. and zoom to the kitchen in the upper-left area of the floor plan.

and click OK. enter Typical Kitchen. click (Group). The objects are now grouped and can be placed in the drawing as a single entity. 4 On the Edit toolbar. Creating and Placing a Group | 655 . 5 In the Create Model Group dialog.3 Draw a selection box (lower-right corner to upper-left corner) around the kitchen.

and drag it to the upper-right corner of the kitchen. 656 | Chapter 18 Grouping . 7 On the Design Bar. select the center control for the group origin. 8 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit. click Modify.Change the origin point for the group 6 In the drawing area.

expand Model. and click Create Instance. 12 On the Design Bar. 10 Zoom to the center of the floor plan.Place instances of the group 9 In the Project Browser. click Modify. Creating and Placing a Group | 657 . right-click Typical Kitchen. 13 Select the first instance of the Typical Kitchen group that you just placed. and click the upper-left corner of the lower unit to place the kitchen group. under Groups. 11 Click in the upper-right corner of the stairwell to place a second instance.

select the group and use the arrow keys on your keyboard to make any minor adjustments. 16 Select the adjacent wall near the sink as the axis of reflection. 15 On the Options Bar. 658 | Chapter 18 Grouping .14 On the Edit toolbar. clear Copy. The kitchen is now positioned correctly in the floor plan. NOTE If the kitchen is not placed exactly as shown in the following image. click (Mirror).

click (Rotate). 19 Click above the right area of the kitchen to rotate the placement. 18 Click in the drawing area to the left of the kitchen.17 Select the kitchen in the stairwell. and on the Edit toolbar. Creating and Placing a Group | 659 .

and one rotated. click Modify. one mirrored. 21 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit.NOTE If the kitchen is not placed exactly as shown in the following images. as shown. You should now have three instances of the Typical Kitchen group in your model: one with the original orientation. 660 | Chapter 18 Grouping . select the group and use the arrow keys on your keyboard to make any minor adjustments. 20 On the Design Bar.

all instances of the same group in the drawing are updated. name the file m_Groups-Condominium_in_progress.rvt.rvt. Modifying a Group In this exercise. and click Save. When you finish editing. Modifying a Group | 661 . and click to select it. you make changes to an instance of a group. press TAB to highlight the wall. m_Groups-Condominium_in_progress.Save the training file 22 On the File menu. Modify visibility of elements in a group 1 Zoom in to the kitchen on the right above the stair. 23 Navigate to your preferred directory. click Save As. Training File Continue using the training file saved at the end of the previous exercise. 2 Move the cursor over the wall to the left of the kitchen.

(Restore excluded group 5 Click (Group Member. 4 Move the cursor over the door. NOTE To display an excluded element. and click to select the wall. 7 Click (Group Member.). Click icon to exclude in this group instance. press TAB. 662 | Chapter 18 Grouping . 8 On the Design Bar. Click icon to exclude in this group instance. and click member to group instance. press TAB.).). select the element. Click icon to exclude in this group instance.).3 Click (Group Member. and click to select the door. This element remains in the group but is not visible in the project view for this group instance. 6 Move the cursor over the horizontal wall. click Modify.

16 Click in the new wall on the left and on the right to place 2 sets of folding doors for a closet.127mm. Modifying a Group | 663 . 15 On the Options Bar. select Bifold-4 Panel : 1220 x 2134mm.Add elements for a unique condition 9 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. move the cursor to the left. and click to draw a horizontal wall that extends to the left vertical wall. clear Tag on Placement. 14 In the Type Selector. select Basic Wall : Generic . 11 Click at the endpoint of the short vertical wall in the kitchen entrance. click Wall. click Modify. click Door. 10 In the Type Selector. 12 On the Design Bar. 13 On the Design Bar.

Modify geometry of a group and have changes display in all group instances 19 Zoom in to the kitchen in the left area of the floor plan. click Edit Group. In edit group mode. and click near the top corner of the wall to create an opening. All other elements in the model are grayed out. select the vertical wall to the left of the long counter top. select Opening ➤ Wall Opening. the background color of the drawing area is pale yellow. 23 In the drawing area. 18 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit. 21 On the Options Bar. move the cursor up. 20 Select the Typical Kitchen group. and the group editor toolbar initially displays in the upper left corner. 24 Click near the bottom corner of the wall. 664 | Chapter 18 Grouping .17 On the Design Bar. The elements in this instance of the group remain displayed in their object style. click Modify. 22 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar.

Nesting Groups | 665 . All instances of the Typical Kitchen are updated to reflect the change. 26 Select the opening. The kitchen group is then nested within the 2 bedroom unit group. and click OK. click Modify. Nesting Groups In this exercise. (Element Properties). When you nest the kitchen in the 2 bedroom unit. 29 On the group editor toolbar. you add the Typical Kitchen group. which acts as the host. created in an earlier lesson. 27 In the Element Properties dialog. and the wall and folding doors for the closet. 30 Click File menu ➤ Save. under Constraints. for Unconnected Height. all instances of the host group are updated to contain the nested group. and on the Options Bar. enter 1000. click 28 For Base Offset.25 On the Design Bar. to the 2 Bedroom Unit group. enter 2134. click Finish.

Training File Continue using the training file saved at the end of the previous exercise. 4 On the group editor toolbar. under Floor Plans. 3 On the Options Bar. select the Typical Kitchen group. m_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. 2 Select the 2 Bedroom Unit group in the top area of the floor plan. 666 | Chapter 18 Grouping .rvt. Add elements to an existing group 1 If necessary. click Edit Group. click (Add to Group). 5 In the drawing area. double-click First Floor. in the Project Browser.

9 Select the 2 bedroom group. click Finish. Notice that the Typical Kitchen and pantry are nested within the 2 bedroom group. 8 In the Project Browser. and each of the bifold doors. double-click Second Floor. 7 On the group editor toolbar. under Floor Plans.6 Press TAB. select the wall between the folding doors. Nesting Groups | 667 .

Draw a filled region 1 In the Project Browser. Creating a Detail Group In this exercise. such as door and window tags. Training File Continue using the training file saved at the end of the previous exercise. You work with the attached detail group in a different way than you had previously worked with host and nested groups because attached detail groups require more manual manipulation. you sketch and annotate a rectangular filled region that represents an area of tiled flooring in front of the elevators in the building model. You can add the detail group to other views of the building model. Working with Detail Groups In this lesson. and create an attached detail group containing the tags. such as text. You then save the region and the text note as a detail group. Attached detail groups are created when you group view-specific elements that are associated with a specific model group. you add door tags to a group. Detail groups are created when you group view-specific elements. You create a detail group in the First Floor plan and add the group to the Second Floor plan of the building model. under Floor Plans. and filled regions.rvt. double-click First Floor. m_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. 668 | Chapter 18 Grouping .10 Click File menu ➤ Save. In the next exercise. 2 Zoom in to the stair area in the center of the floor plan. you work with groups in order to use them in the most efficient manner within and across projects.

click Finish Sketch. 4 On the Options Bar. 6 Move the cursor down and to the left. Creating a Detail Group | 669 . click to draw a rectangular region. A rectangular region with a diagonal cross hatch pattern is added in front of the elevator doors. click Filled Region. and select a point below the left elevator. 5 Click the upper-right endpoint below the elevators as the start point of the rectangle.3 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 7 On the Design Bar.

and select the text note and the filled region. Create a detail group 13 Press and hold CTRL. as shown. The text note with arc leader is added to the building model. 10 Click in the filled region to specify the leader start point. select the instance of the Elevator lobby tile group. click Modify. 12 Enter Tile. click Text. 15 In the Create Detail Group dialog. and on the Design Bar. click to add an arc leader. and click OK. 16 In the drawing area. 17 Move the origin of the group to the corner of the elevator shaft. click (Group).Add a text note 8 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. enter Elevator Lobby Tile. 11 Click below the filled region to end the leader and specify the text start point. 14 On the Edit toolbar. 670 | Chapter 18 Grouping . 9 On the Options Bar.

24 Click File menu ➤ Save. and then use the door tags to create an attached detail group. 21 In the drawing area. click Modify 23 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit. you add door tags to the 2 Bedroom Unit group. double-click Second Floor. right-click Elevator Lobby Tile. Add a group instance to a different view 19 In the Project Browser.18 On the Design Bar. click Modify. click to place the detail group in front of the elevators. under Floor Plans. 20 In the Project Browser. Because the detail group contains variables. and click Create Instance. Using Attached Detail Groups In this exercise. 22 On the Design Bar. expand Detail. under Groups. it cannot be added to a group in the same Using Attached Detail Groups | 671 .

clear Leader. Create an attached detail group 6 In the drawing area. click Tag ➤ By Category. m_Groups-Condominium_in_progress.rvt. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.manner that a drawing component can be added. you must manually attach it to each instance of the 2 Bedroom Unit group. 3 On the Options Bar. 4 Place door tags (10 total) in the original instance of the 2 Bedroom Unit. Training File Continue using the training file saved at the end of the previous exercise. click Modify. 5 On the Design Bar. Place door tags 1 In the Project Browser. as shown. draw a selection box (lower-right corner to upper-left corner) around the right area of the floor plan including the door tags. NOTE Your door tag numbers may be different. double-click First Floor. 672 | Chapter 18 Grouping . under Floor Plans.

9 On the Edit toolbar. Place a detail group in another group instance 12 In the Project Browser. click (Group). Using Attached Detail Groups | 673 . 11 In the Project Browser. double-click Second Floor. expand Groups\Model\2 Bedroom Unit. 10 In the Create Model Group and Attached Detail Group dialog. and click OK. and view that Floor Plan: 2 Bedroom Door Tags is attached.7 On the Options Bar. enter 2 Bedroom Door Tags. for Attached Detail Group Name. and click OK. select Door Tags. 8 In the Filter dialog. click (Filter Selection). under Floor Plans. click Check None.

you save a typical condominium layout to a library where it can be accessed by other team members for use in other projects. Saving and Loading Groups In this lesson. NOTE Component instance numbering is sequential. therefore. click Modify. Training File 674 | Chapter 18 Grouping . You also convert the group instance to a linked file to replace the group with an alternative unit layout. you save a group to a library so that you can use the group in a new project. Door Tags are placed on the Second Floor instance of the 2 Bedroom Unit group. This enables you to create a library of groups that can be shared with other team members and used on multiple projects. When you load the group from the library into a new project. Using groups from a library ensures consistency and increases productivity for projects that reuse similar typical layouts for repetitive units. Saving and Loading Groups In this exercise. select Floor Plan: 2 Bedroom Door Tags. 14 On the Options Bar. click Place Detail. and click OK. you can then work with it in the context of the new project.13 Select the model group 2 Bedroom Unit. 16 On the Design Bar. the doors are numbered based upon the order in which you placed each group. 17 Click File menu ➤ Save. 15 In the Attached Detail Group Placement dialog.

3 For File name. browse to the Desktop. In this case. 7 In the Load File as Group dialog. 5 In the New Project dialog. click Desktop. Save a group to a library 1 In the Project Browser. click OK. and click Open. under Groups\Model. and click Save. 2 In the left pane of the Save Group dialog. 10 Right-click 2 Bedroom Unit. and click Save Group. and expand Model. 8 In the Duplicate Types dialog. Place an instance of the loaded group 9 In the Project Browser. for Create new. verify that Project is selected. Saving and Loading Groups | 675 . right-click 2 Bedroom Unit. select 2 Bedroom Unit. verify that Same as group name is selected. A warning dialog displays. 11 Click in the drawing area to place the group instance. explaining that duplicate types were found and the types from the new project will be used. 6 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load File as Group. click Modify. 12 On the Design Bar.rvt.Continue using the training file saved at the end of the previous exercise. Load the group in a new project 4 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. and click OK. or a Revit family file (RFA) if you are working in the Family Editor.rvt. the file is saved as a Revit project file (RVT). m_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. 13 Zoom in to the 2 Bedroom Unit group. accept the default template file. expand Groups. You can save a group as a Revit project file (RVT) if you are working in a project. and click Create Instance.

When a group is converted to a link. 22 In the Duplicate Types dialog. 23 In the confirmation dialog. click Modify. 24 In the message dialog. either the selected group can be used to make a new linked file. click OK. click Link. and click OK. 15 In the Convert Group to Link dialog. 17 On the Design Bar. click Use Existing. Convert the linked model to a group 19 In the drawing area. This message indicates that all instances of the linked model will be deleted from the project. but the linked model file will still be loaded in the project. and on the Options Bar. and the link is removed. The 2 Bedroom Unit-Alternate. click Training Files. 25 The linked file is converted to a new model group stored in the project.Convert group instance to a linked file 14 Select the group.rvt file is added as a link to the project. click Bind. You can remove the linked file from the project by clicking Remove Link. 18 In the Project Browser. 21 In the Bind Link Options dialog. 20 On the Options Bar. click Remove Link. or the group instance can be replaced with an existing linked file. 26 Close the file with or without saving it. and open Common\c_2 Bedroom Unit-Alternate. 16 In the left pane of the Open dialog. expand Revit Links. verify that Attached Details is selected only. 676 | Chapter 18 Grouping . select the linked Revit model.rvt. or you can remove it at a later time from the Manage Links dialog. click Yes to replace the existing Typical Kitchen group with the alternate Typical Kitchen group.

you add a building pad to the site. You add property lines manually. islands. After grading the topography to create a slightly elevated and flat surface. convert the data to a table. You start by importing the site contour data and converting it to 3D contour data. and walkways. you use the site tools in Revit Architecture 2009 to add and modify site components within a project. In the final exercises. 677 .Site 19 In this tutorial. you add parking and planting components and create a parking space schedule. You add subregions to the area to define parking areas. Using Site Tools In this lesson. you use site tools to add and modify site components within a project. and then modify the data.

2 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. and click Site. expand Views (all). click Point. Creating a Toposurface In this exercise. Using the first method. you import contour data from a DWG file and use it to create the project toposurface. 3 On the Design Bar.The exercises are sequential and must be done in order.rvt. 678 | Chapter 19 Site . enter an absolute elevation of 3000 mm. click Toposurface. In the second part of this exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open Metric\m_First_Project. right-click in the Design Bar. click Training Files. The scale of this view is 1 : 100. This project file was created using the default metric template. you create a toposurface using two different methods. Create a toposurface by adding elevation points 1 In the Project Browser. expand Floor Plans. TIP If the Site tab is not displayed. you create a toposurface by manually placing elevation points in the site plan. and double-click Site. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 4 On the Options Bar.

A toposurface must have at least three elevation points.5 Click in the drawing area to specify a point. 7 Add additional points to create a contour circle similar to the following illustration. Creating a Toposurface | 679 . Use the following illustration as a reference. The circle should be approximately 55000 mm wide. Triangulation boundaries display only after you add the third elevation point. 6 Add two additional points to create a triangle.

click Site Settings. 680 | Chapter 19 Site . Try to add each circle concentrically inside the previously created circle. click Finish Surface. enter an absolute elevation of 6000mm. and 18000mm absolute elevations. 13 In the Site Settings dialog. Use the following illustration as a reference. and click OK. 12000mm. 10 Repeat the previous step for 9000mm.8 On the Options Bar. TIP Do not be concerned with the exact quantity or placement of the points. under Increment. 9 Add a concentric circle of 6000mm elevation points inside the 3000mm contour. enter 1500mm. 12 On the Settings menu. under Additional Contours. 15000mm. 11 On the Design Bar.

click the elevation value. and press ENTER. under Views (all). expand Elevations (Building Elevation). Before importing the contour data.This setting reduces the quantity of contour lines in the view. and double-click South. click (Default 3D View). 19 On the Design Bar. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. 18 In the Project Browser. 15 On the View Control Bar. click Modify. (SteeringWheels). modify the level names and elevations. click to delete it. 16 On the View toolbar. Creating a Toposurface | 681 . click to view it at various angles. on the Standard toolbar. enter 1000mm. and use the Orbit tool to spin the toposurface Use imported contour data to create a toposurface 17 Select the toposurface and. 14 On the View toolbar. 20 Zoom in around the Level 2 head.

27 In the Select Layers/Levels to Import/Link dialog. Verify that Current view only is not selected. For Layers. under Floor Plans. and click OK. 24 In the Project Browser. it is considered an import symbol. 682 | Chapter 19 Site . and press ENTER. click Training Files. click Modify. 30 On the Edit menu. 22 When you are asked if you want to rename corresponding views. 25 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ CAD Formats. rename the level Basement. click Yes. and press ENTER. clear layer 0 and layer C_bench_mark. Click Open. click Pin Position. under Views (all). select Preserve. select Specify. This ensures the import symbol is not accidently moved. 29 Select the imported topography. Until it is exploded. rename the level Base Site Elevation. You are immediately prompted to select the layers you want to import. double-click Site. Select the c_Import_Site file located in the Common folder. Click Yes when prompted to rename corresponding views. 26 In the Import/Link dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ In the left pane.21 Click the Level 2 text. and zoom out until you can see the entire topography within the view. For Colors. 28 On the Design Bar. 23 Click the Level 1 text.

31 On the Design Bar. select it. Creating a Toposurface | 683 . 32 On the View menu. 33 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. 35 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. 34 Under Visibility. click the Annotation Categories tab. and then click OK. When you select the import symbol. click Visibility/Graphics. you are prompted to select the layer that will generate the elevation points. clear Elevations. and click OK. 37 Place the cursor over the imported symbol and. click Toposurface. when the edges highlight. click Use Imported ➤ Import Instance. 38 In the Add Points from Selected Layers dialog. click Modify. Notice the elevation symbols are displayed. 36 On the Design Bar. clear C_INDX.

The import symbol is converted to elevation points and contours. you add property lines using two methods. Notice that the change in this toposurface elevation is minor. this project file is required in its current state. 44 Navigate to your preferred folder. Using the second method. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. and use the Orbit tool to spin the toposurface to view it at various angles. Adding Property Lines In this exercise. Adding Property Lines on page 684. 43 Click File menu ➤ Save As. 39 On the Design Bar. and click Save. 684 | Chapter 19 Site . click Finish Surface. click (Default 3D View). 40 On the View toolbar. Using the first method. name the project Site-in progress. you create property lines by entering survey data into a table of distances and bearings.rvt. 45 Proceed to the next exercise. you sketch the property lines and then convert the sketch into survey data. 42 On the View toolbar. 41 Enter ZF to zoom to the extents of the image. click (SteeringWheels).

Site-in progress. Select and delete the right vertical line. select Create property lines by sketching. click Lines. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 2 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. On the Design Bar. click Property Line. 3 In the Property Line Creation dialog. Click Modify. do so before continuing.rvt. Adding Property Lines | 685 . 4 On the Design Bar. and click OK. Sketch property lines 1 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. double-click Site. you can quickly create the shape by doing the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Sketch the rectangle first. Although you can use your preferred sketching method. click Lines.This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise and the project file in its current state. If you have not completed the previous exercise. sketch the shape shown in the following illustration. 5 Using the sketching tools available on the Options Bar.

The property lines are displayed with a dash-dot line type on the topography. select Create property lines by table of distances and bearings. NOTE The weight of the sketch lines has been increased in the illustration for training purposes. click Property Line. to delete them. Create property lines using a table of distances and bearings 11 Select the property lines and. NOTE The values displayed in the Property Lines dialog depend on the exact dimensions and location of your sketch. A warning dialog is displayed. select the lines. when they highlight.■ Using the 3-point Arc tool. and click OK. click Finish Sketch. select Edit Table. 7 Move the cursor over the property lines and. 686 | Chapter 19 Site . 8 On the Options Bar. click OK. 13 In the Property Line Creation dialog. 6 On the Design Bar. add an arc line on the right. 9 In the warning dialog. click 12 On the Design Bar. on the Standard toolbar. 10 In the Property Lines dialog. informing you that converting a property line sketch to a table cannot be undone. click OK.

19 In the Tags dialog. 15 Starting in Row #1. The property lines are displayed at the tip of the cursor. Tag property lines 18 On the Settings menu. If the gap is not closed. the distance that displayed under From last to first point now displays Closed. enter the following deed data for rows 1 through 4: ■ ■ ■ ■ 100000 S 0°0'0" E 80000 N 90°0'0" W 100000 N 0°0'0" E 80000 N 90°0'0" E Notice that after you complete the last line. Adding Property Lines | 687 . review your data entry and make necessary corrections. This means there is no gap in the property lines. scroll down the list of categories until you find Property Lines and notice there are no tags loaded for Property Line Segments. click Insert three times until there are four rows of deed data.14 In the Property Lines dialog. click to place the property lines. click Annotations ➤ Loaded Tags. 16 Click OK. 17 Move the cursor over the topographic surface and using the following illustration as a reference.

click Tag ➤ By Category.20 Click Load. notice a tag is now loaded for property line segments. and click Drafting. the original DWG file remains visible in the view. you modify site settings and contour line visibility. When the tag displays at the tip of the cursor. and click OK. right-click in the Design Bar. you created two sets of property lines. 32 Proceed to the next exercise. click Training Files. you loaded and tagged the property line segments. 688 | Chapter 19 Site . 29 Tag the three remaining property lines.dwg and click OK. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. Modifying Contour Visibility and Site Settings on page 689. 30 On the View Control Bar. In the final step. click Visibility/Graphics. and open Metric\Families\Annotations\Civil\M_Property Line Tag. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. The tags display more prominently in this view. clear the checkbox for c_Import_Site. click the Imported Categories tab.rfa. the visibility of the imported symbol needs to be turned off. 22 In the Tags dialog. Even though you converted the symbol to elevations points and contours. click to place it. 26 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. NOTE If the Drafting tab of the Design Bar is not visible. 31 Click File menu ➤ Save. clear Leader. You created the second set of property lines directly from deed data and located it on the topography. 28 Zoom in and place the cursor over the center of the north property line. 21 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 24 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. this project file is required in its current state. 23 On the View menu. The first set you sketched and then converted into deed data. 27 On the Options Bar. Before adding property line segment tags. In this exercise. 25 Under Visibility. In the next exercise.

scroll down the list of categories and expand Topography. Under Line Color. enter 1000. specify the following values: ■ ■ ■ Under Start. Modifying Contour Visibility and Site Settings | 689 . click Site Settings. 9 In the Site Settings dialog. Under Range Type. select Working Contour. the new object style subcategory is displayed under Topography. Create an object style subcategory for specific elevation 1 On the View Control Bar. 2 On the Settings menu.Modifying Contour Visibility and Site Settings In this exercise. 7 Click OK. 10 Under Additional Contours. for Subcategory. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. select Dash dot. select Single Value. click Object Styles. In the Object Styles dialog. 4 Under Modify Subcategories. Under Line Pattern.rvt. and click OK. under Contour Line Display. Modify site settings 8 On the Settings menu.0mm. select a shade of Brown. Site-in progress. enter the name Working Contour. click New. 3 On the Model Objects tab of the Object Styles dialog. specify the following settings for the Working Contour subcategory: ■ ■ ■ Verify that the Line Weights are 1. select Topography. You also modify the site settings so that the new subcategory is displayed at the specific elevation. you create a new object style subcategory to mark a specific elevation. 5 In the New Subcategory dialog. 6 In the Object Styles dialog. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe. specify an interval of 1000mm passing through elevation 0. Under Subcategory.

you create topographic subregions to define roads. and islands.11 Click OK. parking areas. Working Contour. you created a new object style subcategory for topography. In this exercise. 13 Proceed to the next exercise. displays on the topography only at the elevation you specified. Click Yes when prompted to save changes. parking areas. The next exercise requires a new training file. 690 | Chapter 19 Site . and islands. it merely defines an area of the surface where you can apply a different set of properties. In the next exercise. You then modified the site setting to distinguish a specific contour interval using this subcategory. Creating Topographic Subregions on page 690. you create subregions in order to define roads. such as material. Creating Topographic Subregions In this exercise. 12 Click File menu ➤ Close. The object style subcategory. Creating a subregion does not result in separate surfaces.

use the trim tool to create just one closed loop. and use the fillet arc sketching tool to add the curved corner. sketch the shape highlighted in the illustration below. Although the exact dimensions are not important. the vertical rectangle is approximately 19500 mm wide. The horizontal rectangle is approximately 7500 mm wide. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 3 Using the sketching tools on the Options Bar. click Training Files. and open Metric\m_Site. Creating Topographic Subregions | 691 . click Lines. TIP You can either sketch the shape freehand or draw two perpendicular rectangles. 2 On the Design Bar. Sketch initial parking area 1 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. click Subregion.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. try to replicate the location and proportion.rvt.

click Properties. 8 On the Design Bar. Notice that the left edge of the subregion overhangs the site topography. 6 In the Materials dialog. 7 In the Element Properties dialog. under Identity Data. and click to open the Materials dialog. under Materials and Finishes.Tarmacadam for Name. and click OK. 692 | Chapter 19 Site . click Finish Sketch. Specify subregion properties for parking area 4 On the Design Bar.NOTE In the Metric training file. When you finish the sketch in a later step. select Site . enter Parking for Name. click the value for Material. 5 In the Element Properties dialog. the subregion will end at the edge of the defined topography. and click OK. you may see fewer contour lines than in the images shown in this exercise.

under Floor Plans. expand Schedules/Quantities. Creating Topographic Subregions | 693 . click Edit Boundary.9 On the View Control Bar. 12 On the View Control Bar. and double-click Topography Schedule. Open the topography schedule 10 In the Project Browser. The two additional parking areas in the top portion of the sketch must be at least 5500 mm deep to accommodate parking spaces. 15 Add new lines and modify the existing lines to create a boundary similar to the one shown in the following illustration. Notice that the new subregion uses the material Site . double-click Site. This topography schedule uses a filter to omit unnamed topographic regions. NOTE Your values may differ depending on your sketch. 13 Select the subregion you created in the previous steps. they display within this schedule. Modify the subregion 11 In the Project Browser. As you create new subregions. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. the toposurface and its contour data remain one element. Although you can select each toposurface region separately and apply different properties to each. You can create a toposurface schedule to report information regarding each toposurface region. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges.Tarmacadam. 14 On the Options Bar.

click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line.TIP Add the two upper parking areas as rectangles. 21 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. double-click Topography Schedule. 18 In the Project Browser. 17 On the View Control Bar. under Schedules/Quantities. 20 On the View Control Bar. Add additional subregions 19 In the Project Browser. click Subregion. under Floor Plans. you apply different materials such as grass and concrete. and use the split and trim tools to clean up the sketch. Delete overlapping lines. 16 On the Design Bar. Mirror the arc line to create an exact duplicate. additional subregions are required to create a more attractive parking area. Notice that the project area has increased. 694 | Chapter 19 Site . 22 On the Design Bar. In this training project. Within each subregion. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. click Finish Sketch. click Lines. double-click Site.

27 In the Element Properties dialog.Grass for Name. Precise dimensions are not important at this time. double-click Topography Schedule. under Materials and Finishes. under Identity Data. use the sketching tools available on the Options Bar to sketch the parking island shown in the following illustration.Grass for Name. and click OK. 28 On the Design Bar. and click OK. click Properties. under Schedules/Quantities. click Finish Sketch. select Site . click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. 29 On the View Control Bar.23 In the upper-right parking area. 26 In the Materials dialog. 30 In the Project Browser. Notice that the schedule has been updated with the new information. 25 In the Element Properties dialog. click the value for Material. and click to open the Materials dialog. 24 On the Design Bar. enter Island . Creating Topographic Subregions | 695 .

Name each region Island Grass. 34 On the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. 32 In the Project Browser. under Schedules/Quantities. add the three additional subregions shown in the following illustration. You must sketch each region separately. 696 | Chapter 19 Site . click Lines. 35 On the Design Bar. Name the subregion Walkway.walkway. click Subregion. Notice that the schedule has been updated. double-click Site. Using the techniques learned in previous steps. and apply the material Concrete Cast-in-Situ . double-click Topography Schedule. Add the concrete walkway 33 In the Project Browser. double-click Site. under Floor Plans. 36 Use the sketching tools available on the Options Bar to sketch the new concrete walkway shown in the following illustration.Grass.31 In the Project Browser. and apply the material Site .

double-click Topography Schedule. If you want to modify the elevation points of a particular subregion. Creating Topographic Subregions | 697 . click Finish Sketch. you must either edit the entire toposurface or split the toposurface. under Schedules/Quantities. NOTE Although several toposurface subregions now exist within this project. 37 On the Design Bar. 38 In the Project Browser. there is still only one toposurface.WARNING Subregions cannot intersect. so you need to offset coincident lines between the subregions by 100 mm. Notice that the schedule has been updated.

Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. When you use the grading tool.rvt. and click Save. you grade the toposurface to create a slightly elevated and flat parking area. Site tutorial-in progress. 2 Select the toposurface. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. Grading the Toposurface on page 698. Grading the Toposurface In this exercise. 40 Navigate to your preferred folder. double-click Site. this project file is required in its current state. under Floor Plans.rvt. the existing topography is demolished and a new toposurface is created where you can edit the elevation points. 698 | Chapter 19 Site . Modify toposurface phase assignment 1 In the Project Browser. 41 Proceed to the next exercise. name the project Site tutorial-in progress.39 Click File menu ➤ Save As.

6 On the Design Bar. Grading the Toposurface | 699 . A warning dialog is displayed. 8 Select the topographic surface. click Graded Region. and click Select and Edit. Copying internal points lets you delete only the points in the parking area without altering the remaining elevation points. Click OK to set the subregion phase to match the toposurface. click (Element Properties). stating that subregions must have the same Phase Created parameter and the same Phase Demolished parameter as the host toposurface. see the tutorial. RELATED For more information regarding phasing. under Phasing. 7 In the Graded Region dialog. Using Phasing on page 761. select Existing for Phase Created. click Modify. select Copy Internal Points. The display settings are controlled by the phase filter.3 On the Options Bar. 5 On the Design Bar. 4 In the Element Properties dialog. Notice that the toposurface displays differently. and click OK.

700 | Chapter 19 Site . 10 Press DELETE.Delete elevation points 9 Draw a pick box outside the main parking area as in the following illustration. The intent is to select all the elevation points inside and around the parking area. Make sure the pick box allows a significant buffer around the area.

Grading the Toposurface | 701 . demolished. 11 On the View Control Bar. and new. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line.Notice the toposurface displays with different colors representing the different phases: existing. 12 Draw another pick box around the driveway and remaining parking area as in the following illustration.

click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. click (Default 3D View). Place the points until there are no contour lines crossing the parking area or walkway. The parking and walkway areas are now elevated and flat. specify an Absolute Elevation of 5500 mm. click Point. 15 On the Options Bar. 17 On the Design Bar. Add new elevation points 14 On the Design Bar. click Finish Surface. 16 Add elevation points outside the perimeter of the entire parking area and walkway as in the following illustration. 19 On the View Control Bar.13 Press DELETE. 702 | Chapter 19 Site . 18 On the View toolbar.

26 Click File menu ➤ Save. nor can you add it without first adding a topographic surface. Adding a Building Pad In this exercise. 22 In the Element Properties dialog. only the original toposurface displays.20 On the View toolbar. it automatically cuts a hole in the toposurface and places it at the depth you specify. because you assigned it to the Existing phase before grading. under Phasing. A building pad is a toposurface hosted element and cannot be added to any other element. Adding a Building Pad | 703 . Therefore. Because this toposurface is no longer required for this project. under Phasing. you can delete it. 27 Proceed to the next exercise. Delete the demolished toposurface from the project 21 On the View menu. and click OK. 23 Select the toposurface. click to view it at various angles. and use the Orbit tool to spin the toposurface The phase filter for this view allows both the new and demolished surfaces to display. specify Existing for Phase. Adding a Building Pad on page 703. click View Properties. Only the components created in or assigned to the Existing phase display in this view. When you add a building pad. click View Properties. 24 On the View menu. and click OK. (SteeringWheels). NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. and delete it. Only the graded topography displays. this project file is required in its current state. This accounts for the red surface that you see in this view. specify New Construction for Phase. 25 In the Element Properties dialog. you create a building pad.

3 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. click Finish Sketch.Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. under Floor Plans. If you have an existing building model. click Pad. 6 On the Design Bar. NOTE By default. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. sketch an approximate replica of the outline shown in the following illustration. 2 On the View Control Bar.rvt. you can pick the exterior walls to define the building pad. 4 On the Design Bar. The building pad should border the concrete walkway on the right and the upper parking area. 704 | Chapter 19 Site . Add a building pad to the project 1 In the Project Browser. the Pick Walls command is active. double-click Site. 5 Using the sketching tools available on the Options Bar. Site tutorial-in progress. click Lines.

click (Default 3D View). Properties of the slope arrow specify height offsets for the slope of the pad. Notice the new building pad. 10 Click File menu ➤ Save. 7 On the View Control Bar. For additional information on using slope arrows to modify geometry. and use the Orbit tool to spin the toposurface to view it at various angles. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. Adding Site Components on page 706. Adding a Building Pad | 705 . this project file is required in its current state. see Adding Slope Arrows to a Shed Roof on page 572. 9 On the View toolbar. 11 Proceed to the next exercise. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. 8 On the View toolbar.TIP You can slope building pads by adding a slope arrow to the sketch. click (SteeringWheels).

5 On the Design Bar. you add parking and planting components to the site surface.Adding Site Components In this exercise. 4 Zoom in on the upper parking area that borders the building pad and add a parking component to the area. click Modify. click Parking Component. 6 Use the flip arrows so it displays as shown below and move it toward the lower left corner of the parking area. select M_Parking Space: 4800 x 2400mm . Add parking components 1 In the Project Browser. 3 In the Type Selector. and select the parking space. Site tutorial-in progress. 706 | Chapter 19 Site . double-click Site. under Floor Plans. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise.rvt.90 deg. 2 On the Site tab of the Design Bar.

8 On the View toolbar. 7 Add 6 additional parking spaces to the right of the first space. click (Default 3D View). Adding Site Components | 707 . TIP You could also use the Array tool to accomplish this task. Verify that the spaces are horizontally aligned and the left edge of each space is aligned with the right edge of the previous space.NOTE Make sure you place the parking space a slight distance above the building pad.

12 In the Type Selector. Notice the new parking spaces. Add planting components to the site 10 In the Project Browser. and use the Orbit tool to spin the toposurface to view it at various angles. click Site Component.9 On the View toolbar. click (SteeringWheels). and add a tree to each of the two round parking islands as shown below. under Floor Plans. 11 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. 708 | Chapter 19 Site . double-click Site. choose any tree type.

click (Default 3D View). In the following illustration. 16 Click File menu ➤ Save. Notice how the trees vertically attach to the toposurface. NOTE Plants are displayed as simple geometry unless rendered. click (SteeringWheels). 14 On the View toolbar. the landscape shown in the previous illustration has been rendered. 15 On the View toolbar. and use the Orbit tool to spin the toposurface to view it at various angles.13 Add some more trees outside the parking area as shown below. Adding Site Components | 709 .

17 Proceed to the next exercise. and click OK. select the line for the category Parking Tags that uses the loaded tag M_Parking Tag: Boxed. click Tag All Not Tagged. you tag the planting and parking components that you added previously. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 6 Zoom in to the upper parking area and around the trees. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 4 Select the line for the category Planting Tags that uses the loaded tag M_Planting Tag: Boxed.rvt. and click Apply. You also add spot dimensions to the parking area and the terrain to display the actual elevation at selected points. click Hidden Line. under Floor Plans. double-click Site. 710 | Chapter 19 Site . Site tutorial-in progress. Tagging Site and Parking Components on page 710. 5 On the View menu. Tagging Site and Parking Components In this exercise. Tag site components 1 In the Project Browser. click Apply. 3 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog.NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. this project file is required in its current state.

9 Add a spot dimension to the drive entrance: ■ ■ ■ Click in the upper left corner of the drive entrance. The exact position of the dimensions is not important. verify that Leader and Shoulder are selected. NOTE Site components can also be numbered by clicking the tag number and changing the value. as shown: 10 Using the same method. You place spot dimensions on either side of the drive entrance. 8 On the Options Bar. Add spot dimensions 7 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click Spot Dimension ➤ Spot Elevation. add 2 more spot dimensions: ■ Add a spot dimension in the lower left corner of the drive entrance. you use a parking schedule to number the parking spaces. Click again to the left to position the leader. You also add a spot dimension to the terrain to see how the elevation is reported.Notice each is tagged with no instance mark. outside of the site. Tagging Site and Parking Components | 711 . In the following exercise. Click up and to the left. to position the shoulder of the leader.

12 Press and hold CTRL. click Modify.■ Add a spot dimension to the terrain below the drive. and select the 3 spot dimensions. 13 Modify the display of the spot dimensions by selecting and clearing options on the Options Bar: ■ Clear Shoulder. 712 | Chapter 19 Site . 11 On the Design Bar.

you create a parking schedule. 16 Proceed to the next exercise. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. 14 On the Design Bar. click Modify. 15 Click File menu ➤ Save. Creating Parking Space Schedules | 713 . ■ Select Leader and Shoulder. You can use a parking schedule to report the quantity and area of each type of parking space. Creating Parking Space Schedules In the final exercise of this tutorial. this project file is required in its current state. Creating Parking Space Schedules on page 713.■ Clear Leader.

7 Under Fields. zoom in around the upper parking lot where you previously added the parking spaces. and click Add. and click OK. number the first three spaces consecutively. select Parking for Category. click the Fields tab. The parking schedule is displayed. under Views (all). 5 Under Available fields. enter Space. 4 Under Available fields. and click Add. 11 On the Window menu. 10 In the Project Browser. 6 Click the Formatting tab. 3 In the Schedule Properties dialog. 714 | Chapter 19 Site . you can resize the column width by dragging the column edges. 8 Under Fields. under Floor Plans. select Type.rvt. click Schedule/Quantities. 2 In the New Schedule dialog. select Mark. 9 On the Window menu. select Mark. double-click Site. If necessary. This tiles the Site plan next to the parking schedule. select Type. 12 In the Site plan. click Tile. Create a parking schedule 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. click Close Hidden Windows. 13 In the Parking Schedule. and click OK. enter Size. This closes all the views except the parking schedule. Site tutorial-in progress.Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. and under Heading. and under Heading. under Space.

This allows you to know which space you are numbering.Notice that the parking spaces in the Site plan update automatically. 15 Click File menu ➤ Save. finish numbering the remaining spaces. Creating Parking Space Schedules | 715 . Also notice that when you place the cursor in the parking schedule. the selected space highlights in the Site plan. 14 In the Parking Schedule. under Space.

716 .

This involves simultaneously working on and saving different portions of the project at the same time. Only one user can edit each workset at a given time. and so on. however. All other team members can view this workset. select the desired workset. you can borrow that element without requiring the workset owner to relinquish control of the entire workset. you must first enable Worksharing. are automatically assigned to the view workset of the current view. you specify an active workset. After the project is shared. such as annotations and dimensions. you learn how to use Worksharing to divide a project into worksets so multiple users can access the project and have all their changes coordinated by Revit Architecture 2009. The first time you activate worksets within a project. Using Worksharing. use Element Borrowing. a dialog displays allowing you to set up the initial sharing of the project. To make a workset editable. you can select which worksets are open or closed. Overview Sharing a project for the first time To share a project. Elements in closed worksets are not read from disk until they are required. architects commonly work in teams with each person assigned to a specific functional area. Elements specific to a view. You can change the workset assignment of any modeling element within the property dialog for that element. go to the Worksets dialog. doors. You can enable Worksharing for any project. If you need to modify an element that belongs to a workset that someone else is actively working on. and click Editable. This reduces the time it takes to open the file and the amount of memory it uses. Any new model elements are automatically assigned to the active workset. stairs. Increasing performance using selective open When opening a Worksharing-enabled project. they cannot make changes to it. team members adding and changing elements in worksets can save their work to a local file on the network or their own hard drive and publish work to a central file whenever they choose.Sharing Projects 20 When working with large building projects. Each workset can only be editable by one user at a time. This prevents possible conflicts within the project. If you only need to modify a single element within a workset that someone else has checked out. In this tutorial. A workset is a collection of building elements. Working in a shared project In a shared project. They can update their local files at any time in order to see the changes other team members have published. floors. called Worksharing. you can only make changes to the worksets that are editable by you. You can close or open worksets at any time using the Worksets 717 . each building element in the project is contained in exactly one workset. such as walls. When you are working on a shared project.

You gain valuable practical experience setting up a project for worksets and working within that project. Shared Levels and Grids. Unlike AutoCAD Xrefs. You learn what to consider before enabling and using Worksharing. You learn the basic steps of project sharing as well as tips for dealing with common workplace scenarios. After learning the fundamentals. In a multi-story structure. In the lessons and exercises that follow. you learn some of the strategies that maximize your use of worksets. In most projects. you learn how to work as an individual with the central and local project files. and View worksets. Using Worksharing in a Project In this lesson. This includes how to plan and execute the use of worksets in a project in order to maximize project and team performance. Project size The size of your building may affect the way you decide to segment the worksets for your team. If the project floor plan is so large that you need to split it with match lines to fit it on sheets. You then learn how to work within a Worksharing-enabled project with multiple users and borrow particular elements from other users. you do not need to make separate worksets for each floor of the building. you enable Worksharing within a project and set up the initial workset environment. you learn the fundamentals of Worksharing application. Experience has shown that. Establishing practical policies on how all team members access and create new worksets in the project will maintain performance for existing users and ease the process of introducing new team members to the project. 718 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . Team size You should take into consideration the size of the project team at the time you enable Worksharing. In the next exercise. such as a tenant interior. for a typical project. you learn the fundamentals of Worksharing. When planning a Worksharing-enabled project The decisions you make when sharing a project and setting up its worksets can have long-lasting effects on the project team. You can improve the display-related performance of Revit Architecture by opening only those worksets required for your work. you may want to create separate worksets for each portion. When setting up Worksharing. Understanding Worksharing Fundamentals In this conceptual exercise. you should separate the project into worksets that allow team members to work without interfering with each other. not including the Project Standards. Instead. you should take several considerations into account: General Considerations: ■ ■ ■ ■ Project size Team size Team member roles Default workset visibility You can maximize long-term project performance more easily if you plan Worksharing appropriately and use the feature correctly. greater subdivision improves workflow by reducing interference between team members. the optimum number of worksets is approximately four for each team member. you could create separate worksets for a set of building elements that will only appear on one floor.dialog. You should have at least one workset for each person.

you can turn off the visibility of that workset within that view. you control workset visibility on a per view basis. On this tab. a Worksets tab displays on the Visibility/Graphics dialog. Default workset visibility After a project has been shared. Long-term performance is improved if new worksets are not visible by default unless they need to be. the project coordinator should enable Worksharing. When you create a new workset. Regardless of the default setting. Team size usually increases as the project progresses from the design stage to the documentation stage. Step 3: Create additional worksets After enabling Worksharing. make sure visibility defaults are set appropriately. Notice that the workset names refer to functional roles. This allows Revit Architecture to display the view faster because computing time is not spent figuring out if the element belongs to a workset that should be displayed. designers work in teams. you can change the visibility setting in the Visibility/Graphics dialog. Step 2:Activate Worksharing After the building model is ready for multiple user access. you decide whether or not the elements in that workset are visible by default in each view. TIP As new team members create new worksets for their own use. For example. Step 4: Subdivide the building model into worksets After you have created the initial worksets. remember to create worksets for functional roles and properly assign default visibility. each team member has control over a portion of the design. you must assign building model elements to their respective workset. the worksets they add often do not need to be visible by default. When creating the new worksets. The building model should also reach a reasonable point of development before you enable Worksharing. Understanding Worksharing Fundamentals | 719 . As new members create worksets for their own use. This project file should incorporate as many office/project standards as possible and it should include many of the families required by the project. with each assigned a specific functional task. If you are sure that the elements of a particular workset should not appear in a view. you would want to assign the interior walls and other interior components to that workset. By subdividing the project based on these task roles. Conceptual stages of project sharing The following steps explain the basic stages of project sharing. the project coordinator should create the additional worksets required by the team.Team member roles Typically. if a workset named Interior was created. Step 1: Start the project with one user One user starts to work on the project. A typical scenario for a multi-story commercial building is shown in the following illustration.

you make that workset editable by you. Therefore. Generally. On the Options Bar. you should then save to your local file. within the local file. When you save to the central file. Step 7: Open worksets Whenever you open a central or local file. the central file is not a file that a team member would open and work in directly. There is no limit to the number of worksets you can have editable at one time. you have the option to choose which worksets to open. As you work. Step 6: Create local files Each team member creates a local file that makes it possible to check out worksets and work on their respective portion of the building model. proceeds as usual. 720 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . The tips discussed below provide useful information for working creatively with worksets. the file is saved as the central file. You can make a workset active only if it is editable by you. This gives you the right to make changes to the elements in the workset and to add to the workset. each user saves their changes back to the central file where the changes can be propagated to all team members. When you save locally (to your local file). Step 9:Work on the project Work on the project. however.” When opening a Worksharing-enabled project. you should save the file locally and to the central file at regular intervals. you can still work remotely as an individual and as a team. your changes are saved. This ensures that your local file is synchronized with the central file. The central file coordinates and propagates the changes of each user and keeps track of which worksets are available. you should save to the central file and relinquish control of all worksets that you set as editable. Step 10: Saving your changes As you work on the project throughout the day. Tips and common scenarios 1 When working on a Worksharing-enabled project. This makes them available to other team members. you should relinquish any worksets that you no longer need. it is essential that you save the central file to a location accessible to all team members. Step 8: Check out worksets from the central file When you “check out” a workset. Any changes that other users have made to the building model become visible to you after you save to the central file or when you select Reload Latest. new building elements are assigned to the workset that is active at the moment. When you save to the central file. they are not propagated to the rest of the team. After saving to the central file. Step 11: Closing a local file At the end of a work session. However. you can shorten the time required to open the file by selecting to open only the worksets required to complete your assigned tasks. When finished or at regular intervals. Local files are user-specific and can only be accessed by the users that created them. you can select which workset is active. your changes propagate to the entire team.Step 5: Create the central file The first time you save a project after Worksharing has been enabled. You create a local file by opening the central file and using “Save As” to create a local copy of the central file. This is called “Selective Open. no other users can make modifications to any elements in those worksets until you check them back into the central file.

In this instance. You can work on the project from a remote location by doing the following: ■ Before leaving the office and disconnecting from the networked access to the central file. you may want to request that someone start a session of Revit Architecture. Multiple users working remotely 3 Users can work remotely provided the remote users have high-speed network access to the central file. you should use it only when: ■ ■ You do not intend to save your changes back to the central file. WARNING You should avoid editing a workset “at risk” whenever possible. To do this. and transfer the updated local file back to the remote user.Taking your computer to a remote location with the project 2 You do not need to have access to the central file in order to work on the project. you should check out the Materials workset. you enable Worksharing in a project and set up some initial worksets. If you intend to render the building model while away from the office. you can make the workset Editable at Risk. If the owner of the at-risk workset agrees to relinquish editability of the contested workset. you will not only lose the changes to that workset. Remote rendering 4 While rendering remotely is supported. you will not be able to save your changes back to the central file if another user has changed the same workset and already published those changes back to the central file. you can save your changes back to the central file but then the other owner loses all their work. In this situation. ■ If you realize that you need to modify elements in a workset that you did not make editable before going remote. save to the central file. or You are very confident that no other user will make that workset editable in your absence. you may want to phone them and make arrangements rather than waste valuable work time. it is not recommended unless you understand the implications for the rest of the team. Alternatively. In the next exercise. You can also add new elements to any View or Project Standards workset even if they are not editable. This means that other team members will not be able to change any materials while you have the Materials workset checked out. Since making a workset Editable at Risk carries a high risk that work will be lost. make any required worksets editable. you will probably be changing material definitions and other project settings. you will lose the changes you made to all your worksets. You can modify any elements in an editable workset and all new elements are added to the active workset. When working remotely. If you have a colleague who is in the office with access to the central file. You learned the basic steps of project sharing as well as tips for dealing with common workplace scenarios. and then save the local file. if you know who checked out the required workset. Understanding Worksharing Fundamentals | 721 . a user can transfer a local file to someone with network access who can then publish the changes back to the central file. for instance. reload the latest changes from the central file. you work no differently then you would in the office. and make that workset editable. This will guarantee that no other user can make it editable during the remainder of your absence. you learned what to consider before enabling Worksharing. change the username to your name under Settings ➤ Options. using VPN. If you choose Editable at Risk and the owner of the at-risk workset has already published their files to the central file. In this conceptual exercise.

Your username displays as the present owner. under Show. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Enable Worksharing 1 On the File menu. and open Common\c_Worksets. When you enable worksharing.rvt. Revit Architecture creates new worksets and moves project elements and settings into the new worksets: ■ Families: Loaded families in the project move into separate worksets. 2 Click OK to accept the default workset names. you enable Worksharing within an existing project. click Worksets." Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Do not change your username during this exercise unless explicitly instructed to do so. You cannot change your username with an unsaved Worksharing-enabled project open. 722 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects .Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets In this exercise. select: ■ ■ ■ Families Project Standards Views 4 Scroll down the list of workset names. The Worksets dialog displays. Notice that all worksets are open and editable by you. You subdivide the project into worksets and save the project as the "Central File. 3 In the Worksets dialog. A confirmation dialog displays indicating that you are about to enable Worksharing. and notice all are editable by you. TIP You can change your username by selecting Options under the Settings menu. It also informs you that existing elements in your project move to a default workset. click Training Files.

This improves performance since fewer components need to be generated in each view. and the remainder of the team must work on wall section details. a third team member is assigned furniture placement. Because the interior walls appear in many views. all building model elements are placed into Workset1 by default. The final new workset is for the exterior shell of the building model. In this case. The project must be subdivided in such a way as to reflect the tasks of each user. Subdividing the project into worksets 15 In the Project Browser. In this simple training project. When you initially activate Worksharing. 17 On the Options Bar. clear Visible by default in all views. 14 In the Worksets dialog. expand Floor Plans. 12 Click Rename.■ Project Standards: All project-wide settings defined from the Settings menu move to Project Standards worksets. For example. expand Views (all). you must create worksets that allow each team member to work independently. furniture components have not been added to the building model and therefore do not need to be moved to the respective workset. In this training file. For training purposes. you should turn off Visible by default in all views. a small number of team members are working on the building model. Notice that Visible by default in all views is checked. 8 Click OK. and double-click Level 1. however. Only User-Created worksets should display. Because you renamed Workset1 to Exterior Shell. Creating new worksets 6 In the Worksets dialog. 18 In the Element Properties dialog. need to reassign the interior elements to the Interior Layout workset. Therefore. Floor Plan Level 1 view moves into a workset called View: "Floor Plan Level 1". The next workset you create is for the furniture layout. it is better to make them visible by default. 11 In the Worksets dialog. 13 In the Rename dialog. click New. 7 Enter the name Interior Layout. Views: Each view moves into a separate View workset. select any of the exterior walls of the building model. This is why all worksets are editable immediately after you enable worksets. and click OK. You do. click . notice that the Workset parameter is set to Exterior Shell. Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets | 723 . 10 Enter Furniture Layout. all building model elements are assigned to that workset. click OK. Rather than create a new workset for these elements. currently named Workset1. The next step is to assign elements within the building model to specific worksets. you can rename the default workset. and Views. and click OK You have created the required worksets for each team member working on this project. ■ 5 Under Show. 9 Click New. 16 In the drawing area. another is assigned the interior layout. clear Families. one user is assigned to the development of the exterior. select Workset1. type the name Exterior Shell. under Identity Data. imagine four users including yourself. Project Standards. Because furniture should only be visible in specific views.

28 Clear Interior Layout to turn off the visibility of that workset in the view. select Interior Layout for Workset. select Interior Layout for Workset. 26 On the View menu.19 Click OK. and click OK. click the Worksets tab. You can verify that all interior elements have been reassigned to the Interior Layout workset by turning off the visibility of that workset. 29 Click OK. The easiest way to do this is to drag a pick box beginning inside the lower right corner and up to the upper left corner. 724 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . 23 Select all of the interior elements. including the interior doors. 24 On the Options Bar. Hold Shift down to deselect an element. and walls. click . 25 In the Element Properties dialog. under Identity Data. stairs. 21 On the Options Bar. click . Notice that the visibility of the Furniture Layout workset is turned off in this view. click Visibility/Graphics. TIP You can also hold CTRL down to select multiple elements. 27 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. 22 In the Element Properties dialog. under Identity Data. 20 Select one of the interior walls. and click OK. This is because you turned off “Visible by default in all views” when you created the workset.

Notice that your name has been removed as the owner of the worksets and all Editable values are set to No. 39 Click Save. Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets | 725 . click . 32 Select Interior Layout. click Non Editable. click Save As. double-click Level 2. You must access it in each of the remaining exercises. 36 In the Element Properties dialog. If any interior elements remain. click Visibility/Graphics. You then created the central file and checked in all worksets. In this exercise. select Interior Layout for Workset. 41 In the Worksets dialog. The central file is created automatically the first time you save the project after enabling worksets. select all the User-Created worksets by pressing CTRL + A. 34 In the drawing area. 30 On the View menu. under Floor Plans. under Identity Data. This project is now ready for individuals to access it and check out their required worksets. created new worksets to accommodate each team member. Checking in the worksets 40 On the File menu. click Close. but be sure not to save the file in the training files location. make sure you remember the location of this central file. If you do not have access to a network and still want to complete that exercise. click Worksets. This is imperative if you and another user intend to complete the multi-user exercise later in this tutorial. Create the central file 37 On the File menu. you must relinquish workset editability so that other users can have access to the worksets they need. select them and change their workset assignment to Interior Layout. this can be accomplished by saving the central file to your hard drive and changing your user name before accessing the project. enter Worksets Project-Central as the file name. Now that you have created the central file. 44 On the File menu. 35 On the Options Bar.The Level 1 floor plan should display with only the exterior shell visible. and click OK. Navigate to a location on a network drive that all team members have access to. 31 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. and click OK. 38 In the Save As dialog. under Views (all). 42 On the right side of the dialog. If you intend on completing the remaining exercises in this tutorial. 33 In the Project Browser. click the Worksets tab. you enabled Worksharing on a project. and then assigned building model elements to the worksets. select all of the interior elements of the building model. 43 Click OK.

expand Floor Plans. click Open. Your name displays as the owner of the Interior Layout workset. click Save As. select Interior Layout. and select Specify. and double-click Level 1. Only the worksets that are opened are visible during that session. and click OK. 11 In the Worksets dialog. 9 Navigate to a directory on your hard drive. In this case. You have created a local file which is for your use only. Any new elements that you add to the building model are automatically assigned to the active workset. and navigate to the location where you saved the central file created in the previous exercise. Creating a local file 1 On the File menu. select all the User-Created worksets. any referenced workset is opened but hidden. In addition. name the file Worksets Project_Local-User1. The Worksets toolbar displays with a drop-down list that allows you to specify the active workset. 2 In the Open dialog. you create your local file. This reduces the amount of time required to open very large project files and increases performance while you work. select the central file. 12 Click OK. This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise and access to the resulting central file. 14 On the Worksets toolbar. 6 On the File menu. click Options. and click OK. Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets on page 722. 4 Click Open. 3 Click the arrow next to the Open button. you are assigned the task of designing the interior layout of the building model. Checking out worksets 10 On the File menu. click Worksets. The project sharing environment allows you to choose which worksets are opened during a working session. Before working on the model. and publish your changes back to the central file where other team members can see them. 13 On the Window menu. you should activate the Worksets toolbar. select Interior Layout for Name. 7 In the Save As dialog. You are now ready to modify the interior layout of the building model. Using selective open allows you to choose which worksets you want to open.Working Individually with Worksets In this exercise. and click Save. you check out worksets so you can modify the building model. 15 In the Project Browser. 5 In the Opening Worksets dialog. 8 In the File Save Options dialog. and select Yes for Editable. 726 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . verify that Make this a Central File after save is not selected. make modifications to the building model. Next. Only the worksets you select and any worksets already editable by you are opened. click Toolbar ➤ Worksets. check out worksets. If you have not yet completed the exercise. please do so before continuing. expand Views (all).

20 Under Constraints. 24 Click OK. you have borrowed the ownership of the upper exterior wall. Notice that the wall still belongs to the Exterior Shell workset. 21 On the Options Bar. The upper exterior wall should still be selected. a message would display and you would have the option to cancel the change or make the element editable. click . notice that you do not own the Exterior Shell workset. notice that this element is assigned to the Exterior Shell workset and that the Edited by value is blank. notice the Editable Only option. click Worksets. 19 In the Element Properties dialog. 17 Select the upper exterior wall and notice a symbol displays indicating that the element belongs to a workset that is not currently editable. click . however. In the Worksets dialog. and click OK. Verify that it is cleared. select Finish Face: Exterior for Location Line. If this is selected. On the Options Bar. Even though you have not checked out the Exterior Shell workset. Because this element is not owned by another user. you can only select editable elements within the drawing area. Working Individually with Worksets | 727 . 23 On the File menu. If it was owned by another user. 22 Click OK. Revit Architecture borrows it for you and applies your changes. under Identity Data. click Modify. the Edited by value is now assigned to you. 18 On the Options Bar.16 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. but you are listed as a borrower of that workset. you can still edit this wall. In this case.

34 In the Type Selector. click Modify. and extend the lower end until it intersects the horizontal wall you added previously. 29 In the Type Selector. 33 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Door. The precise location is not important. select M_Sgl Flush: 864 x 2032mm. 728 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . 31 On the Design Bar. add a horizontal wall in the lower right corner. and modify the length so that the corridor is open. 26 Delete the door.126mm Partition (2-hr). click Wall.Modify the building model 25 Select the door on the right side of the corridor. select Basic Wall: Interior . 32 Select the vertical interior wall in the upper right corner. 28 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 27 Select the wall that hosted the deleted door. 30 Using the following illustration as a guide.

Using Worksets with Multiple Users In this exercise. By default. It is recommended that you locally save your work approximately every 30 minutes and save to central every 1-2 hours. Each modifies the building model within their local file and publishes it back to the central file where the other user can see the changes. At the end of a work session. Although this is not a necessary option if you are in the middle of a work session. select: ■ ■ ■ Borrowed Elements User-created Worksets Save the Local File after “Save to Central” 38 Click OK. Using Worksets with Multiple Users | 729 .35 Using the following illustration as a guide. you borrowed the upper exterior wall in order to modify it. You modified the building model. make elements editable. leave this file open in its current state. they are referred to as User 1 and User 2. click Save to Central. All of the new elements that you added were automatically assigned to the Interior Layout workset. save to central. Whenever you save. notice that there is an option to save the local file immediately after the save to central. and published your changes back to the central file where other team members can see them. Saving your work 36 On the File menu. In this exercise. If you have not yet completed these exercises. you should perform regular saves. and save locally immediately afterward. Throughout the process. each user must check out worksets. you should relinquish all worksets. checked out worksets. The Save to Central dialog displays with the path to the central file automatically filled in. and reload the latest changes. please do so before continuing. a tooltip. displays the workset as well as the element type. add two door openings into the rooms you created. If you intend to complete the remainder of this tutorial by proceeding to the multi-user exercise. In addition. When working in your local file. This exercise requires the completion of the previous workset exercises and access to the resulting local and central files. which matches the information in the Status Bar. Borrowed Elements is selected. two users access the central file through a network connection. you created your local file. You should check this element back into central so that others can use it if necessary. In this particular case. and borrowed an element from a workset you did not own. it is recommended. 37 In the Save to Central dialog. If you click Modify on the Design Bar and then place the cursor over any of the new elements. For training purposes. you can relinquish the user-created worksets as well as any borrowed elements.

return to the Settings dialog. two users work on the building model residing in the central file you created and saved in a previous exercise. The next series of steps create a local file for User 2. consider that person to be User 1. select all the User-Created worksets. click Open. For training purposes. and click OK. 16 Select the Exterior Shell workset. and select Yes for Editable.rvt. 15 On the File menu. Using a second Revit Architecture session to mimic User 2 1 Minimize the current Revit Architecture window. one user has already created a local file. under Username. and refer explicitly to User 1 and User 2. 12 In the Save As dialog. 11 On the File menu. Using selective open allows you to choose which worksets you want to open. instructions are staggered. click Options. click Save As. The user who has not yet created a local file for the chosen central file is User 2. Throughout the remainder of this exercise. and click OK. This file is for your use only. and click OK. specifically sequenced. User 2: Create a local file. 3 On the Settings menu. This is a system setting. and check out worksets 6 On the File menu. and select Specify. 7 In the Open dialog. instructions are provided on how to accomplish this. NOTE If you are working with a second user (User 2). 14 Navigate to your preferred location on the hard drive. 13 In the File Save Options dialog. If both users have completed the previous worksets exercises and created central files on the network. This reduces the amount of time required to open very large project files and increases performance while you work. Regardless of which central file you choose to use. and navigate to the location where you saved the central file named Worksets Project-Central. and click Save. select one of those central files to be used in this exercise. and reset the Username to your computer login name. In addition. verify that Make this a Central File after save is not selected. 730 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . click Worksets. click Options. 8 Click the arrow next to the Open button. a single user can complete this exercise by opening up an additional session of Revit Architecture and setting the username to User 2. select the central file. In the following section of this exercise. Creating a local copy 5 In this exercise.Although this exercise is designed specifically for two separate users with network access to the central file. 4 Click the General Tab and. 10 In the Opening Worksets dialog. any referenced workset is opened but hidden. WARNING After completing this tutorial and closing the project file. and proceed to Creating a local copy. You now have a local copy of the project. enter User 2. name the file Worksets Project_Local-User2. 9 Click Open. Only the worksets you select and any worksets already editable by you are opened. skip the following section. 2 Start a new Revit Architecture session by double-clicking the Revit Architecture icon on the desktop or by selecting it from the Start menu.

Notice that the Exterior Shell workset is checked out by User 2. and double-click Level 1.You are now the owner of that workset. Using Worksets with Multiple Users | 731 . select Save the Local File after “Save to Central. 27 On the File menu. and move it upward approximately 2 meters. 23 Click OK. expand Floor Plans. 21 Click OK to return to the Worksets dialog. 25 Select the vertical interior wall shown in the following illustration. 28 In the Save to Central dialog. open it now. and move it to the left until it approaches the centerline of the exterior double door on the south wall. 17 Click OK. Notice that the changes made by User 1 do not immediately display in the local file of User 2. click Worksets. click Save to Central. and double-click Level 1. A warning is displayed informing you that you cannot check out this workset because it is already checked out by another user. User 1: Check out worksets. User 2: Modify the building model and publish changes 30 In the Project Browser. and select Yes for Editable. select the lower exterior wall. 24 In the Project Browser. A warning is displayed informing you that a conflict exists. and publish changes 18 User 1 should still have the local file open. If it is not open. 20 Try to change the Editable status for Exterior Shell to Yes. If you only have one workset checked out. 26 Click anywhere in the empty drawing area to ignore the warning. Notice that you own this workset and the active workset is now Interior Layout. 31 Using the following illustration as a guide.” 29 Click OK. it becomes the active workset. That is because changes made to the central file display in local files only when the worksets are explicitly updated. expand Views (all). modify the building model. expand Views (all). 19 On the File menu. 22 Select the Interior Layout workset. expand Floor Plans.

33 On the File menu. under Floor Plans. 41 On the File menu. under Views (all). and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. you should create a furniture plan view. select Yes for Editable. you are asked if you want to make the Furniture Layout workset the active workset. 36 Using the following illustration as a guide. select Save the Local File after “Save to Central. Click Yes. 46 In the Project Browser. delete the left window on the lower exterior wall. Because you now have more than one workset checked out. The changes User 2 made are apparent. User 1: Reload latest worksets. under Floor Plans. and click OK. Before adding any furniture. you still have complete access to the elements belonging to the Interior Layout workset. right-click Copy of Level 1.A message displays warning you that several windows are not cutting anything. 42 Select Furniture Layout. The wall conflict with the door opening that User 1 introduced now displays. 45 In the Rename View dialog. any elements added to the building model are automatically assigned to the active workset. 43 In the Project Browser. you publish your changes and load the changes other users have made to the building model. enter Level 1 Furniture Plan. click Save to Central.” 39 Click OK. and check out additional worksets 40 On the File menu. and move the door to the right in order to avoid the conflict. When you save to central. 32 Click Delete Instances to delete the windows. However. right-click Level 1. 38 In the Save to Central dialog. Even though the Furniture Layout workset is active. 44 In the Project Browser. select Save the Local File after “Save to Central. and click OK. 34 In the Save to Central dialog. under Floor Plans. 732 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . click Reload Latest.” 35 Click OK. This is because windows are wall-hosted components and cannot float in the air without a wall to host them. double-click Level 1 Furniture Plan. 37 On the File menu. click Save to Central. click Worksets. and click Rename.

click Edit/New. NOTE System families. 60 In the Rename dialog. the visibility of the workset is not turned on even though it is checked out and is the active workset. This is because when the Furniture Layout workset was created. 51 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. 58 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. click Modify. 63 In the Worksets dialog. rather than Families. click Worksets. 59 In the Type Properties dialog. 48 In the Type Selector. 61 Click OK 2 times. click the Worksets tab. Notice you have borrowed a portion of the workset. click Save to Central. A message displays informing you that the component you are trying to place is not visible in that view. and click Element Properties. 50 On the View menu. are placed under Project Standards. click Component. 62 On the File menu. and click inside any room. enter Exterior Wall . Notice the new Level 1 Furniture Plan view in the Project Browser. select Project Standards. 52 Notice that the desk you added previously now displays. click Rename. under Show. select Save the Local File after “Save to Central. and click OK.” 55 Click OK. 66 On the File menu.47 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 64 Scroll down to the bottom of the list until you see Wall Types.200mm. 65 Click OK. User 2: Make an element editable on the fly 56 On the File menu. 54 In the Save to Central dialog. You should turn on the visibility before adding furniture. select Furniture Layout to turn on its visibility. the Visible by default option was not selected. 67 In the Save to Central dialog. Using Worksets with Multiple Users | 733 . click Visibility/Graphics. click Reload Latest. Therefore. 53 On the File menu. choose any desk. select: ■ ■ ■ Borrowed Elements User-created Worksets Save the Local File after “Save to Central” 68 Click OK. click Save to Central. 49 On the Design Bar. 57 Right-click the upper exterior wall. such as Wall Types.

modified the building model. you need to set up your central and local files. 3 In the Save As dialog. leave this file open in its current state. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. they are referred to as User 1 and User 2. 2 Navigate to a directory on the network that both users have access to. Only one user needs to open the training file and save the central file to a network location. Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users In this exercise. click Training Files. a single user can complete this exercise by opening up an additional session of Revit Architecture and setting the username to User 2. 71 In the Save to Central dialog. throughout this training. and still have your local files open. two users are working on the same project with separate local files. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Each user checked out worksets. Although this exercise is designed specifically for two separate users with network access to the central file. and click OK. Each user must have network access to the central file. At the appropriate point in this exercise. 734 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . select Reload Latest. select the following. you must borrow elements that belong to worksets that the other user has checked out. In the final exercise of this tutorial. you learn how to borrow elements from worksets that other users are actively working on. Click OK to this message and subsequent messages. you may receive a message informing you that the central file has been relocated.If you intend to complete the final portion of this tutorial by proceeding to the Element Borrowing exercise. This exercise requires two users and. and these problems are rectified. and open Common\c_Worksets Project-Central. leave this file open in its current state. There are specific instructions for each user. instructions are provided on how to accomplish this. 70 On the File menu. ■ ■ User-created Worksets Save the Local File after “Save to Central” In this exercise. In subsequent steps. proceed directly to the section Checking out worksets. If you intend to complete the final exercise of this tutorial.rvt. click Save As. select Save to Central. Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users on page 734. NOTE If you are working with a second user (User 2). Checking out worksets. and save 69 On the File menu. This exercise also requires two users and you can skip the first sections of the exercise and proceed directly to the section. Save the training file as the central file on the network 1 On the File menu. NOTE When you open the training file for this tutorial. and published their changes back to the central file. If you have not completed the previous workset exercises. User 1: Reload latest. click Options. You learn how to make borrowing requests and how to grant them. finished the previous workset exercises. two users worked on the same building model using worksets. As each of you work. you save the training file as a central file. These messages are a result of the central file being relocated (to your PC).

15 Click Open. 6 On the File menu. Only the worksets you select and any worksets already editable by you are opened. and click OK. and click Save. 19 In the File Save Options dialog. Next. User 2: Create local file 11 If you are a single user and want to replicate the multi-user experience. 13 In the Open dialog. select Make this a Central File after save. 7 Navigate to a directory on your hard drive. Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users | 735 . and click Save. 17 On the File menu. Using selective open allows you to choose which worksets you want to open. The central file should still be open. and click OK. Click the General tab of the Options dialog. 5 Click Save. click Options. and navigate to the network location where User 1 saved the central file. click Save As. you check out worksets so you can modify the building model. and click OK. This is the local file for User 1. verify that Make this a Central File after save is not selected.4 In the File Save Options dialog. 10 Name the file Worksets Project_Local-User1. This reduces the amount of time required to open very large project files and increases performance while you work. User 1: Create local file For the sake of simplicity. and reset the Username to your computer login name. This is a system setting. click Open. WARNING After completing this tutorial and closing the project file. click Save As. perform the following steps to create a session for User 2: ■ Start a second session of Revit Architecture by double-clicking the icon on the desktop or by selecting it from the Start menu. and click OK. On the Settings menu. and click OK. You have created a local file which is for your use only. 9 In the File Save Options dialog. name the file Worksets Project_Local-User2. click Options. any referenced workset is opened but hidden. 16 Select all the User-Created worksets. return to the Settings dialog. 12 On the File menu. ■ ■ ■ This Revit Architecture session is now set up for User 2. select the central file. In addition. 14 Click the arrow next to the Open button. 20 Navigate to a directory on your hard drive. click Options. the user that saved the central file should be User 1. Set the Username to User 2. and select Specify. 8 In the Save As dialog. verify that Make this a Central File after save is not selected. You have created a new central file for User 1 and User 2. 18 In the Save As dialog.

a message informs you that you are waiting for permission from User 1. Leave this dialog open until User 1 grants permission. verify that Editable Only is cleared. At this point. 31 Move the window 500 mm toward the upper exterior wall. You are now the owner of that workset. 29 On the Options Bar. 23 Select the Exterior Shell workset. and click Editing Requests. and select Yes for Editable. select them. the steps for each user have to be followed in sequence. After you submit the request. User 2: Check out worksets 25 On the File menu. 736 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . This allows you to select elements that belong to worksets that you do not own. and select Yes for Editable. Afterwards. click Worksets. User 1: Grant User 2 permission to borrow element 33 When User 2 contacts you and informs you that a borrowing request is pending your authorization. select the Interior Layout workset. 22 In the Worksets dialog. You can do this by dragging the window or by modifying one of the temporary dimension values. 30 On the left exterior wall. double-click Level 1. click Worksets. if any User-Created worksets are not open. You are now the owner of that workset. A symbol appears letting you know that it belongs to a workset you do not own. and click Open. select the second window from the top. 24 Under Active Workset. under Floor Plans. 27 Under Active Workset. 32 Click Place Request to ask User 1 for permission to edit the window. and then click OK. User 1: Check out worksets 21 On the File menu. A warning message informs you that you must obtain permission from User 1. click the File menu. User 2: Borrow an element from User 1 28 In the Project Browser. 26 In the Worksets dialog. select Exterior Shell. select Interior Layout. and then click OK. you should inform User 1 that you are waiting for permission to edit a borrowed element.Checking out worksets Both User 1 and User 2 can check out their worksets at the same time.

select the following. and notice the window is in the new location. and close 39 On the File menu. A message informs you that your request has been granted. and the other user granted it. and click OK. 35 Click Grant. you requested permission to edit the element. In this multi-user exercise.34 In the Editing Requests dialog. click Close. User 2: Check for editability grant 37 In the Check Editability Grants dialog. 40 In the Save to Central dialog. click Check Now. 38 Click OK. ■ ■ ■ User-created Worksets Borrowed Elements (User 2 only) Save the Local File after “Save to Central” 41 On the File menu. to Local. 36 Click Close. select Save to Central. select the request submitted by User 2. you learned how to borrow elements from another workset even though that workset was actively being edited by another user. Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users | 737 . User 1 and 2: Save to Central. In this case.

738 .

After you and the client agree on the final design. Creating Multiple Design Options in a Project You can use design options to explore multiple design schemes as the project develops. The client has asked you to create various options. In this tutorial. you can have an option set called roofing with multiple subordinate roofing schemes. and each option set can have multiple schemes. you can designate a primary design scheme for each option set. Because all design options coexist in the project with the main model (the main model consists of elements not specifically assigned to a design option).Creating Multiple Design Options 21 When working with a building model. These schemes can be conceptual or can be detailed engineering designs. 739 . you can have an option set for the roof structure with multiple subordinate structural design schemes. The client is interested in a pergola and sunshade for the roof terrace but is not sure of the specific layout or materials. the task is to develop two roof schemes for an addition to an existing house. Using design options. you can study and modify each design option and present the options to the client. For example. you create multiple design schemes within a single project file. you learn how to create and manage multiple design sets and options within a single building model. In this particular case. it is common to explore multiple design schemes as the project develops. you can have multiple sets of design options. In addition. At any time in the design process.

2 In the Design Options dialog. you design each of the structural options. each with multiple design options. and delete the unwanted options from the project. Creating the Structural Design Options In this exercise. Any new elements introduced at that time become part of that option. make your final design decision. under Option Set. 3 Select Option 1 (primary). This option will be the first structural scheme consisting of 75 mm round columns and 50 mm round bars. The first time you open the Design Options dialog within a project. Notice Option Set 1 has been created with a design option: Option 1 (primary). Each option set represents a portion of the building model wherein design alternatives are being considered. therefore. In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt. the roof and structure systems must work together. you set up the design option names and add the modeling elements to the structural design option set. After you create a design option. each is constructed for interchangeability. you create a unique in-place family as the structural system. and open Metric\m_Urban_House. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. There is no limit to the number of option sets you can create. In the final exercise of this lesson. click Edit Selected. click New. you learn how to manage and organize the design options. TIP In this exercise. Create first design option 1 On the Tools menu. With the second option. The first option is a simple combination of columns and beams. 740 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . In the second exercise. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. the only available command is to create a new option set. and click Close. you set up multiple design option sets. After setting up the design option sets and their subordinate options. These three exercises are designed to be completed sequentially with the second and third exercises dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. Any new elements introduced to the building model are added to this option. you create two roof system design options that work with the structural options. you can edit it.In the first exercise in this lesson. click Training Files.

5 On the View menu. the midpoint of the lower notch line is selected. TIP To center the middle column.4 In the Project Browser. expand Views (all). You should delete the dimension and unconstrain after adding the column. and click the EQ symbol to equalize the segments. By selecting Multiple. Because it is important that you select the same location on the notches you copy to. 10 Select the three columns either by dragging a pick box around them or by selecting them individually while holding CTRL. click Modify. and double-click ROOF TERRACE. 14 Click at an identifiable part of the notch construction. make sure you select a point that is easily recognizable. click Column. In the following illustration. the second column directly across from it at the intersection of the two walls. either add a centered reference plane and snap the column to it. 11 On the Edit toolbar. Creating the Structural Design Options | 741 . select: ■ ■ ■ . you can continue adding new copies without reselecting the reference point (the first click). and zoom in on the upper half of the building model. or add a dimension string between the columns. Arrows and the dimension lines have been added for training purposes only. and the third column centered between the two. In this case. 8 Using the following illustration as a guide. 13 Zoom in around the left column that is embedded in the notch. The first click specifies the reference point on the element to be copied. 7 In the Type Selector. Constrain Copy Multiple The Copy command is a two-click process. click 12 On the Options Bar. and the second click specifies the point on the building model the reference point is copied to. expand Floor Plans. select Round Column: 75mm Diameter. The left column should be centered at the intersection of the notch and the wall. Selecting Constrain limits the movement and helps ensure the post-copy alignment of the columns. the three columns need to be copied three times to create a 3 x 4 grid of 12 columns. add three columns. 9 On the Design Bar. click Zoom ➤ Zoom in Region. 6 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar.

18 On the View toolbar. Because of the size of the columns. click . add a copy of the columns to the next two notches below this one. click Modify on the Design Bar to end the copy process. 15 Zoom out and move downward to the notch just below this one.TIP You can zoom in and out easily during this process using the wheel on your wheel mouse. and click in the same location as you did for the previous notch. 16 Zoom in around the notch construction. they are difficult to see in this view. using the same technique. 17 Zoom out and. 742 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . When you are finished. A copy of the three selected columns is added.

20 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. and click on the center to set the beam endpoint. The beam needs to be added between the remaining columns. select Round Bar : 50mm. The second click specifies the end of the beam.Notice the 12 columns that you added. Use the following illustration as a guide. Zoom in on the upper right column. 21 In the Type Selector. two callouts with thin lines have been added to clarify the location of the start and end points of the beam. 22 Add the first beam between the upper left and right columns by using the following steps: ■ ■ ■ Zoom in on the upper-left column. under Floor Plans. The first click specifies the beam start point. you add the beams that span the columns. In it. Zoom out and move the cursor over the upper right column. You can do this manually or use the Copy command. Creating the Structural Design Options | 743 . 19 In the Project Browser. double-click TOP OF CORE. click Beam. click Modify. Adding a beam is a two-click process. and click at its center to set the beam start point. Next. 24 Select the Beam you added previously. 23 On the Design Bar.

744 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . 30 On the View toolbar. 28 Zoom out. click 26 On the Options Bar. click . zoom into the left column. and select the center of the column to add a copy. 29 Repeat this step twice more until a beam is added to each set of columns.25 On the Edit toolbar. This is the reference point for the subsequent copies. and click the center point. select: ■ ■ ■ . Constrain Copy Multiple 27 Zoom in around the upper left column that is embedded in the notch. move down to the next set of columns.

click Rename. 33 Click Finish Editing. click Rename. 41 Under Option Set. 43 In the Rename dialog. 46 Under Option. click Rename. 35 Select Option 1 (primary) and. click New. 42 Select Option Set 1 and. under Option. not a new option set. click New. NOTE Be sure you are creating a new option. under Option Set. name the option Louvers. and click OK. under Option. select Option 1 (primary). 32 In the Design Options dialog. under Option. click New. 40 In the Rename dialog. and click OK. 39 Select Option Set 1 and. 44 Select the option set Roofing and. click Rename. 45 Under Roofing. There should now be two roofing design options. and click OK. enter Brackets for New. and click OK. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. enter Roofing for New. notice that you are still editing Option Set 1: Option 1 (primary). Logically naming the option sets and relative options allows you to more easily manage them. under Option. under Option Set. Organize design option sets and subordinate options 31 On the Tools menu. 34 In the Design Options dialog. Creating the Structural Design Options | 745 . 37 Select Option 2 and.Notice that the beams complete the bracket structure for the proposed roof. enter Beam for New. enter Structure for New. click Rename. and click OK. 38 In the Rename dialog. 36 In the Rename dialog.

50 In the Design Options dialog. Design the second structural design option 49 In this section of the exercise. and click OK. 48 Under Option. When finished. Under Now Editing. Notice that the columns added to the Brackets design option do not display. double-click ROOF TERRACE. 746 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . select Beam. name the option Sunscreen. You have completed the initial setup of the design option sets and their subordinate design option names. 54 Zoom in toward the top of the roof terrace near the stairs. select Edit Selected. you create the second design option. under Floor Plans. This allows you to more easily manage the project. it will resemble the following illustration.47 Under Roofing. 53 In the Project Browser. under Structure. notice that Structure: Beam is displayed. click Rename. select Option 2. 51 Under Edit. 52 Click Close.

59 Align the roof beam by clicking the lower edge of the adjacent horizontal wall and then clicking the lower edge of the roof beam. The first click sets the plane that the object will be aligned to. click Component. Using the Align tool requires two clicks. select M_Roof Beam. 57 Place a roof beam into the drawing area as shown. click Align. The second click represents the plane that is moved. Creating the Structural Design Options | 747 .55 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Refer to the following illustration. 58 On the Tools menu. 56 In the Type Selector.

Clear Group and Associate Enter 4 for number Select 2nd for Move To: Select Constrain Using the Array tool requires two clicks. 64 Click the start point at the alignment of the beam and wall as shown.60 After aligning the beam. 61 On the Design Bar. click Modify. 748 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . The second click represents the move end point. click 63 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ ■ . click the padlock that displays to lock the alignment. The first click sets the move start point. 65 Move the cursor down to the next intersection of the lower edge of the horizontal wall and the beam. on the Edit toolbar. 62 Select the beam and. Click to indicate the end point of the move.

and click Save. 66 On the View toolbar. click Finish Editing. the 3D view has reverted back to the brackets rather than the structural beams you just created. 69 Click Close. You can leave it open and proceed immediately to the next exercise. 67 On the Tools menu.rvt. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. name the file. click Save As. 70 On the File menu. click . m_Urban_House-in progress. NOTE If you intend to continue with the next exercise. Creating the Structural Design Options | 749 . 71 Navigate to your preferred directory. you need this file in its current state.Three more roof beams are placed at the same intersection as the first beam. Notice that even before you close the dialog. which is visible by default. Notice the new design option for the structural elements supporting the roof system. 68 In the Design Options dialog. That is because the brackets option is set to primary. Design option visibility is covered in more detail later in the tutorial.

In the next exercise. delete them after the rafter is in place. 4 Under Edit. Creating the Roof System Design Options In this exercise. Roofing: Louvers (primary) should display.In this exercise. you create the roof systems that compliment these structural design options. The first option. 2 On the Tools menu. 7 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 5 Click Close. select Louvers (primary). is a simple fabric roof created using an extrusion. you created a unique in-place family as the structural system. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. the other for beams. This exercise is designed to work in conjunction with the other exercises in this tutorial. you set up multiple design option sets. Under Now Editing. 9 Zoom in on the lower half of the building model until you can see the bottom set of columns and the beam traversing the span. click Component. under Roofing. open it now. 8 In the Type Selector. 6 In the Project Browser. With the second option. a Louver system. You should have named it m_Urban_House-in progress. The dimensions shown are for training purposes. 750 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options .rvt. expand Views (all). If you need to add dimensions. Both of these options are designed to work in conjunction with each of the structural design options. is constructed of 50 mm x 250 mm rafters and 50 mm x 150 mm louvers. place the rafter 900 mm inside the wall shown and overlap the horizontal beam 900 mm. After setting up the design option sets and their subordinate options. do so now. The first option is a simple combination of columns and beams. Create the first roofing design option 1 If you do not have the project file that you saved at the end of the previous exercise open. 10 Referring to the following illustration. each with multiple design options to pick from. Sunscreen. you designed each of the structural options: one for brackets. and double-click TOP OF CORE. expand Floor Plans. If you have not completed the first exercise in this tutorial. click Edit Selected. 3 In the Design Options dialog. select Rafter 50mm x 250mm. you design each of the roofing options. All are sequential and dependent on the previous exercise. The second roofing system.

11 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click in the center of the intersection to specify the array start point. 17 Zoom in on the intersection of the lower end of the rafter and the intersecting beam. The rafter should now span the entire vertical length of the proposed roof system. click Array. click . Creating the Roof System Design Options | 751 . Select 2nd for Move To. 16 On the Options Bar. You are creating an array of five rafters that are 990 mm apart. 12 Select the rafter you added previously. click Modify. 13 On the Options Bar. Select Constrain. 15 On the Edit menu. and click OK. Enter 5 for Number. 14 In the Element Properties dialog. enter 11750 mm for Length. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Clear Group and Associate. under Other.

18 Move the cursor horizontally to the right and. 752 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . and press ENTER. when the listening dimension displays. Zoom out to see that the rafter array is created. enter 990.

and click OK. enter 5475 mm for Length. click in the center of any intersection between the louver and the beam. 23 On the Options Bar. Enter 34 for Number. click . Creating the Roof System Design Options | 753 . 22 On the Design Bar. under Other. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Clear Group and Associate. click the Edit menu. 26 On the Options Bar. 20 In the Type Selector. click Modify.Add the louvers to the design option 19 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 24 In the Element Properties dialog. Select 2nd for Move To. 27 For the array starting point. 25 With the louver still selected. select Louver 50mm x 150mm. and click Array. and select the louver you just placed. Select Constrain. The louver now spans the horizontal plane of the roof system. click Component. 21 Place the first horizontal louver in the upper left corner according to the following illustration.

29 On the View toolbar. click . enter 300. and press Enter. when the listening dimension displays.28 Move the cursor vertically downward. Zoom out to see that the 34 louvers array 300 mm apart. 754 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . and.

The louver roof system is complete. 37 In the Work Plane dialog. 39 On the Design Bar. The louver roof system still displays in the 3D view because it is the primary option. Creating the Roof System Design Options | 755 . expand Elevations. 33 Under Editing. click Lines. Create sunscreen roof system 32 In the Design Options dialog. click . you must create a draped canvas sunscreen. under Edit. Notice that the louver roof system no longer displays. the sketch should be a series of arcs connected at the ends where they connect to the columns. 38 You are prompted to verify the roof level and offset. Because an extruded roof has a roof type associated with it. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. The roof extrusion reference plane has been added to the training file specifically for this purpose and is hidden in all views. you only need to sketch a single line or a string of lines to define the shape of the extruded roof. and then click Close. Therefore. under Roofing. click Roof ➤ Roof by Extrusion. 36 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 30 On the Tools menu. select Reference Plane : Roof Extrusion for Name. click Finish Editing. 31 In the Design Options dialog. and double-click West. click Edit Selected. 35 Zoom in on the upper level where the roof design is taking place. and click OK. select Sunscreen. 40 On the Options Bar. Click OK. 34 In the Project Browser. In this case.

NOTE As you sketch the arcs. Select the right arc. click Properties. 46 On the Tools menu. You can adjust the degrees by clicking the blue temporary dimension value immediately after you create the line. 48 On the Design Bar. 42 Repeat the previous step and create two more arcs between the columns. click Finish Sketch. 45 Click OK. then the center arc. then you can modify it through the dimension. 44 In the Element Properties dialog. enter 5800 mm for Extrusion End. The first two points define the ends of the line. 41 Select the top of the left column. The easiest way to accomplish this is to use the Trim tool. try to get the angle value as close to 60 degrees as possible. the top of the next column on the right. 43 On the Design Bar.This tool allows you to sketch an arc line using three points. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Select Sunscreen Fabric for Type. You must make sure the arcs are connected where they connect to the columns. 47 Select the left arc and then the center arc. and then adjust the dip of the arc until it is 60 degrees. and the third point defines the arc. The arcs should connect. Under Constraints. 49 On the View toolbar. You will fix this in a later step. click Trim/Extend. enter 300 mm for Extrusion Start. Under Constraints. 756 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . click . Do not be too concerned if your sketch lines do not exactly connect. The roof sketch must be a continuous line.

click Finish Editing. and click Duplicate. The second roofing system. Managing Design Options | 757 . under Views (all). 3 In the Rename View dialog. do so now. click Save. you select a design. NOTE If you intend to continue with the final exercise. enter Primary Option. secondary. This exercise is designed to work in conjunction with the other exercises in this tutorial. The first option.The louver roof system is complete. and then click Close. make it part of the building model. under Views (all). tertiary. Managing Design Options In this exercise. under 3D Views. Create new views for each design option 1 In the Project Browser. right-click {3D}. 2 In the Project Browser. Both of these options are designed to work in conjunction with each of the structural design options. Sunscreen. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. After exploring the combinations. All are sequential and dependent on the previous exercise. If you have not completed the previous exercises in this tutorial. was a simple fabric roof created using an extrusion. In this exercise. you designed each of the roofing options. and delete the discarded design options. you must create a named 3D view for the primary. Because the client wants to see 3D building models of each of the designs. Repeat this step two more times until you have three copies of the view. you need this file in its current state. You have completed the sunscreen roof system. 4 In the Project Browser. a Louver system. was constructed of 50 mm x 250 mm rafters and 50 mm x 150 mm louvers. and click Rename. 52 On the File menu. 51 In the Design Options dialog. and last options. you explore how to present each of the design options by creating multiple views to display the various combinations. under Edit. expand 3D Views. 50 On the Tools menu. You can leave it open and proceed immediately to the next exercise. and click OK. right-click the 3D View Primary Option.

This ensures that the primaries (currently bracket and louver) are visible. Notice that both option sets are set to automatic. under Views (all). click the Design Options tab. 12 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog.5 Right-click each of the copies. under 3D Views. 10 In the Project Browser. click Visibility/Graphics. 9 Click OK. 13 Specify Beam for the Structure design option. under 3D Views. double-click Primary Option. under Views (all). double-click Secondary Option. 7 On the View menu. click the Design Options tab. 8 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. Rename the three copies as follows: ■ ■ ■ Secondary Option Tertiary Option Last Option 6 In the Project Browser. 758 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . and click OK. and click Rename. click Visibility/Graphics. 11 On the View menu.

15 On the View menu. In this case. 17 Specify Brackets for the Structure design option. 16 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. 18 In the Project Browser. the beam and the louver roofing should be selected as primary. specify Sunscreen for the Roofing design option. 20 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog.14 In the Project Browser. 19 On the View menu. under Views (all). click the Design Options tab. double-click Tertiary Option. under 3D Views. double-click Last Option. click Visibility/Graphics. Managing Design Options | 759 . click Visibility/Graphics. under Views (all). and click OK. At this point. all isometric views are ready to be placed on a titleblock or exported and e-mailed to the client. In your design options. specify Sunscreen for the Roofing design option. click the Design Options tab. 21 Specify Beam for the Structure design option. under 3D Views. the client has reviewed the design options and has decided that the beam system coupled with the louver roofing system is the preferred design. and click OK.

29 Select Roofing. An alert is displayed. 26 Under Option Set. The other options were removed along with any dedicated option views. double-click Primary Option. the beam option becomes part of the model. click Accept Primary to take the louvers into the model. Because the client has selected the design option. 33 In the Design Options dialog. 27 In the alert dialog. 34 In the Project Browser under 3D Views. click Close. 25 Select Structure. 32 In the Delete Dedicated Option Views dialog. and you get a dialog asking if you want to delete dedicated option views. 24 Under Option. click Accept Primary. The beam and louver systems are now part of the building model. 30 Under Option Set. delete the other design option geometry and any dedicated option views. and deleted the discarded design options. 23 In the Design Options dialog. since you no longer need them. click Delete to remove the views that used options. This was the client choice for structural. but should be accepted as part of the building model. 28 In the Delete Dedicated Option Views dialog. under Structure. you learned how to present each of the design options by creating multiple views to display the various combinations. After exploring the combinations. click Save. made it part of the building model. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. select Make Primary. 760 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . asking if you are sure you want to delete all elements of secondary options in this option set and remove the option set. click Yes.22 On the Tools menu. click Yes. 35 On the File menu. you selected a design. In this exercise. The set is deleted. select Beam. the current primaries are no longer options. 31 In the alert dialog. click Delete.

This changes room definition and total building model area. you apply phase-specific room tags to rooms that vary with each phase.Project Phasing 22 In any project. you work in a simple building model that requires renovation. You can use phase filters to control the flow of building model information into views and schedules. You create new phases. you or the client may want to view the model according to phases. Phases represent distinct time periods over the duration of a project. demolish existing construction. You can create as many phases as necessary and assign building model elements to specific phases. complete with schedules. and then add new building model elements. This allows you to create phase-specific project documentation. In the second exercise. you work in a simple building model that requires renovation. you apply phase-specific room tags to rooms that vary with each phase and observe the differences in the phase-specific room schedules. Using Phasing In the lesson and exercises that follow. For the client. then add new walls and doors in a different location. In the lesson and exercises that follow. You create new phases. demolish existing walls and doors. 761 . In the second exercise. you can create a visual time line of phase-specific 3D views.

View current phase conditions 1 In the Project Browser. click Project Units. expand Views (all). NOTE The units of measurement in this project file are imperial. they are assigned to the New Construction phase by default. You create new phases and phase filters and modify graphic overrides. You can control the default phases and view phase setting by changing the settings within a template. go to the Settings menu. notice that Show All is selected for Phase Filter and New Construction is selected for Phase. 762 | Chapter 22 Project Phasing . This phase assignment is controlled by a setting within the view properties. you create new phase-specific views in order to visualize the changes that you make to the model. click Training Files. and None is selected for Phase Demolished. you do not need to change the project units to metric. define the units. expand Floor Plans. In the Element Properties dialog. Any new elements that you add to the building model are assigned to the New Construction phase. 5 Select any of the exterior walls. As you add new elements to the building model. 6 On the Options Bar. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click (Element Properties). and double-click Level 1. two phases exist by default: Existing and New Construction. If you wish to do so. click Modify. When you create a new project. regardless of phase. 7 Click Cancel. This means that all building model elements. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.Phasing Your Model In this exercise. are visible in this view.rvt. then new building model elements are assigned to a phase according to those settings. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. 8 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. under Phasing. 4 Click Cancel. under Phasing. notice that New Construction is selected for Phase Created. you work in a simple model that requires renovation. and open Common\c_Phasing. 2 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. If you change the view property settings and the phase definitions within a template file. and click OK. Because units of measurement have little bearing on the goals of this tutorial. During the demolition and renovation process.

and click OK. you modify their view properties to make each view phase specific. you do not want to rename the corresponding views and level. Because this is a phase-specific view. under Floor Plans.Change the phase of the existing building model elements 9 In the drawing area. 13 In the Element Properties dialog. After you create the views. under Floor Plans. 17 Click No. and click OK. for Phase Created. right-click Level 1. right-click Copy of Level 1 . and click Rename. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. Phasing Your Model | 763 . 16 In the Rename dialog. 20 In the Rename dialog. 14 On the Design Bar.Existing. enter Level 1 . TIP If this were a multi-story building. right-click Level 1 . you may want to select the building model in a 3D view to ensure you capture all of the components. 19 In the Project Browser. You are asked if you want to rename corresponding level and views. under Phasing.Demo. it requires a plan view for demolition and for new construction. draw a selection window around the entire building model to select all of the elements in it. and click OK. enter Level 1 . 12 On the Options Bar. 18 In the Project Browser. and click Rename. 10 On the Options Bar. click Modify. Door tags are not phase-specific and must be filtered from the selection.Existing. clear Door Tags. Because this is a renovation project. click (Filter Selection). Create phase-specific views 15 In the Project Browser. 11 In the Filter dialog. are highlighted in red. select Existing. and click OK. click .Existing. including the door tags. Notice that the line style of the walls and doors is displayed as gray rather than black because of the phase and phase filter settings in the view properties. After you release the mouse button. all of the building model elements. under Floor Plans. This refers to the ceiling plan and the level line visible in any of the elevation views.

to which all the building model elements belong. This new filter uses graphic overrides to set the display of all building model elements: New. select Overridden.Demo. click the Phase Filters tab. and Temporary. double-click Level 1 . 27 Click New. Graphic Overrides define the appearance of building model elements according to their phase status. under Floor Plans. Demolished.Existing. This view uses a different line style because the phase property of this view is set to New Construction. Phase status is time-dependent. Because of this time relationship. 23 In the Element Properties dialog. you need a filter that takes all of the phases into account with a particular graphic override. A new phase filter is displayed at the bottom of the Filter Name list.You should now have a separate floor plan for the existing building model and the planned demolition. 29 For Composite Plan. Notice that the line pattern is still gray. Later in this exercise. new construction occurs after existing construction. 22 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. 21 In the Project Browser. The line style of the walls and doors returns to black. and click OK. under New. Existing. On a logical time line. There are five default phase filters. You can change the cut and projection line color for a demolished object. under Floor Plans. View graphic overrides 30 Click the Graphic Overrides tab. a graphic override is used to make “older” elements use the gray line style. 28 Under Filter Name. enter Composite Plan. 26 In the Phasing dialog. Next. In this case. 764 | Chapter 22 Project Phasing . you use phase filters to define which building model elements display in a particular view. for Phase. 24 In the Project Browser. double-click Level 1 . you modify these settings. under Phasing. Define phase filters 25 Click Settings menu ➤ Phases. however. select Existing. You may need to zoom in to see this.

you demolish all elements hosted by it. or you can use the demolish tool. There are two ways to demolish an element.Demo. select Demolished. its display changes to a red dashed line. specify red for the Projection/Surface line style for the Demolished phase. Demolish building model elements 40 On the Tools toolbar. double-click Level 1 . select a lighter blue. This was the display override that was set for demolished objects in the previous steps. click OK. As you click each wall. under Floor Plans. double-click Level 1 .31 Under Phase Status. Notice that the doors display as demolished even though you did not specifically demolish them. select the interior walls one at a time. under Floor Plans. click (Demolish). Change cut lines and patterns for new objects 37 Change the line style for New ➤ Cut ➤ Lines to blue. under Cut ➤ Lines. you begin demolition. Notice that the demolished walls continue to display. 42 In the Project Browser. 36 Using the same method. 38 For New ➤ Cut ➤ Patterns. That is because doors are wall-hosted elements. This is because the view phase filter is set to Show All. 32 In the Demolished row. 41 Referring to the walls that display as dashed lines in the following illustration. select the line style. select red. Phasing Your Model | 765 . 39 In the Phasing dialog. Next. The cursor is displayed as a hammer. click the value for Color. 33 In the Line Graphics dialog. Add new construction 43 In the Project Browser. 35 Click OK twice.Existing. You can select it and change its Phase parameter to Demolished. 34 In the Color dialog. When you demolish the host.

52 Open Level 1 . 53 Open Level 1 . Notice this view still displays the original walls and doors. select Basic Wall: Interior . and click OK. and click OK. under Phasing. 49 On the Design Bar. for Phase Filter. 48 Using the following illustration as a guide. for Phase Filter. add a long horizontal wall. under Phasing.44 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. 46 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.Existing. 51 Add a door leading into each room. select Sgl Flush: 34" x 84". click Door. The demolished walls no longer display.4 7/8" Partition (1-hr). and then add four short vertical walls between it and the upper exterior wall. 766 | Chapter 22 Project Phasing . 45 In the Element Properties dialog.Demo. click Wall. 54 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. select Show Previous + New. 50 In the Type Selector. 47 In the Type Selector. select Composite Plan for Phase Filter. 55 In the Element Properties dialog. Click the control arrows to adjust the opening and face directions.

This filter displays all original components that were not demolished (Show Previous) and all new components added to the building model (+ New). You could create multiple 3D views that display each phase just as you did with the floor plans.Demo. new is shown in blue. click (Default 3D View). which are displayed as red. spin the building model so you can see the demolished walls. right-click Level 1 . and change the Phase Filter to Show Previous + New. The renovated building model plan is displayed. All elements are displayed in this view. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. and existing shows as half-tone.New. 58 Rename the copy to Level 1 . because the phase filter is set to Show All.The composite plan phase filter uses graphic overrides and shows demolished as red dashed. Notice that all building model elements display using the composite filter. Phasing Your Model | 767 . 60 On the View toolbar. 61 On the View Control Bar. regardless of phase. 57 In the Project Browser.New. 59 Open Level 1 . 62 If necessary. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. Create a new construction view 56 Change the Phase Filter to Show Previous + Demo.

you can see the new walls added to the building model. you can do so at this time.Demo. and click OK. click Training Files. NOTE The units of measurement in this project file are imperial. In this view. you do not need to change the project units to metric. Using Phase-Specific Room Tags In this exercise. you learn how to use phase-specific room tags. and double-click Level 1 . Notice that this view is the original building model. If you wish to save this file. demolition. 3 Open Level 1 . the rooms change in both definition and size. define the units. All room boundaries are phase-specific. 63 Close the file. room tags report information based on the phase of the view in which the rooms were added. expand Floor Plans.rvt. you add room tags to a building model that has multiple phases. and locations change depending on the phase of the project. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 2 Open Level 1 . You can also see that the room quantities.Notice that all the elements are displayed using the material defined by the graphic overrides. The three level 1 floor plan views show the progression of the renovation. If you wish to do so. go to the Settings menu. Floor plans have been created to display each phase of the project: existing conditions. you created a building model with three distinct phases and created views with appropriate phase filters to display each phase. therefore. They are the same walls that display as red in the 3D view. In the next exercise. click Project Units. In this exercise.New. Add room tags 1 In the Project Browser. the walls marked for demolition display using a dashed line style. and open Common\c_Phase_Specific_Room-tags. expand Views (all). Because units of measurement have little bearing on the goals of this tutorial. and new construction. As the renovation process continues.Existing. In this view. sizes. 768 | Chapter 22 Project Phasing . Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and the information that each room tag reports adjusts accordingly.

New. Using Phase-Specific Room Tags | 769 . click Room. click Room Tag. 6 Open Level 1 . 7 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Use the following illustration as a guide. Notice that the two rooms in the lower corners are identical to both the existing phase and the new phase.4 Click Settings menu ➤ Phases. 11 On the Design Bar. notice that there are two phases defined in this project. click Room. click Modify.Existing. 13 Open Level 1 . 10 Open Level 1 . 5 Click OK. click in each room to create a room and place a room tag. In the Phasing dialog. 14 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. and maximize the view. 8 Using the following illustration as a guide. 12 Starting in the room in the upper left corner. Phase 0 is for existing conditions and Phase 1 is for demolition and new construction. 9 On the Design Bar. yet they have different room numbers. click in each room as you move to the right.Demo.

View phase-specific room schedules. 18 Open Room Schedule . In addition. This is because the additional interior walls in the new construction occupy more space than the original. You also opened two schedules to observe how the room information is reported by phase. In this case. The room tag command allows you to tag existing rooms. Notice that in each phase-specific schedule.Existing. In this exercise. room information differs based upon the phase of the view the tags are in. 20 Close the file. you added room tags to various floor plans that are assigned different phases. notice the new construction has 25 less total square feet than the original building model. 16 In the Project Browser. and double-click Room Schedule . both views are assigned the same phase yet have different phase filters. click Close Hidden Windows. 770 | Chapter 22 Project Phasing . click Tile. expand Schedules/Quantities. That is because the same phase is assigned to both views.New Construction. add a room tag to the three rooms adjacent to the lower exterior wall.15 Using the following illustration as a guide. The two schedule views tile. Notice the room tags in this view get the same room tag numbers as the tags in the view displaying new construction. 19 On the Window menu. 17 On the Window menu.

and manage the links throughout the project. In this tutorial. you can use model linking and shared coordinates to create the campus within one project file while allowing work to proceed on the individual building models in other project files. In the final lesson. Specific examples when you may want to use model linking and shared coordinates: ■ ■ ■ A campus plan that contains links to several structures. This maximizes efficiency. and productivity by working in a smaller project file while retaining the ability to place that building model into a larger context. or of a group of related but semi-independent sub-projects. you link several building models within a single project file in which only a site plan has been developed. 771 . modify their visibility. In these situations. You position the building models on the site plan. performance. Comparison of alternatives on a site.Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates 23 Many projects consist of disparate buildings in an overall campus. you share the coordinates so that the linked files remember their location within the host project. A residential development in which a few different prototypes are configured differently in an area.

Placement options when linking building models When you link a building model in a project. you open a project in which only site components have been developed. One building model is a condominium. and manage their locations in coordination with their originating project files.Center to Center: Revit Architecture places the center of the imported geometry at the center of the model. 772 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . Linking Building Models from Different Project Files In this exercise.Linking Building Models In this lesson. modify their visibility. and the other is a townhouse. You position the building models on the site. NOTE You must complete the exercises in this lesson in sequence. you have the option to manually place the linked building model or allow Revit Architecture 2009 to automatically place it. Automatic placement options: ■ Auto . You link two building models to the project. you work within a project in which only the site components have been developed. This center changes as the footprint of your model changes. NOTE The center of a Revit Architecture model is the center of the model geometry. You link multiple instances of one building model and a single instance of another.

use the following steps to copy the training files to a new location. 6 Repeat the previous five steps for the following files: ■ ■ c_Townhouse c_Condo_Complex 7 Open the Model Linking folder. Linking Building Models from Different Project Files | 773 . and click Properties. navigate to the Model Linking folder you created in the first step. Auto . click Close. and save the file there. with write permission. NOTE You may need to scroll down in the left pane to see the Training Files folder. in the Model Linking folder that you created. ■ ■ Manual . Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models on page 789. this option will place the link at a predefined location. The required files can be found in the Common folder of the Training files: c_Site. 4 On the File menu. Otherwise. 3 In the left pane of the Open dialog. Click Open. Select c_Site.By Shared Coordinates: When using Model Linking in conjunction with Shared Coordinates.■ Auto . 2 On the File menu. 5 On the File menu. this system is not exposed to the user. click Open. 8 Clear Read-only.Center: The geometric center of the linked document is at the cursor location. select the three files. c_Condo_Complex. c_Townhouse. right-click.Origin: The origin of the linked document is centered on the cursor. Because training files are used in multiple tutorials and are normally installed as read-only. ■ Manual placement options: ■ Manual . ■ ■ ■ Navigate to the Model Linking folder. you need to copy the three training files to a different directory and make them writable. All three files now reside. click Save As. Save training files to different folder 1 Create a new folder on your hard drive called Model Linking. Link condo complex into site project 9 On the File menu. and click OK. click Training Files. you can do so. and open Common\c_Site.rvt. NOTE Revit Architecture projects have an internal coordinate system. click Open. however.Base Point: Not applicable for linked Revit Architecture Files. This tutorial requires write permission to all the training files used. Manual . This option is grayed out. RELATED See the lesson.Origin to Origin: The origin of the imported geometry is placed at the invisible origin of the Revit Architecture model. If you are comfortable doing this using Windows Explorer.

you can go to the Settings menu. select Auto . Because model linking and sharing coordinates are not dependent on project units. click Import/Link ➤ Revit.NOTE The three project files used in this lesson use imperial units of measurement. click Project Units. For Positioning.Origin to Origin. Notice the blue detail lines. you do not need to change the project units to metric. 13 Click Open. expand Floor Plans. These represent the footprint outlines of the three building model sites. 10 In the Project Browser. If you wish to do so. 12 In the Import/Link RVT dialog: ■ ■ Navigate to the Model Linking folder and select c_Condo_Complex. and make your changes. expand Views (all). 774 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . and double-click Level 1. 11 On the File menu.

Linking Building Models from Different Project Files | 775 . 15 On the Edit toolbar. Move the condo complex building model 14 Select the linked building model. The first click specifies the move start point. Standard move commands work with linked building models.The condo complex building model is placed approximately at the center of the site model.rvt displays in the Type Selector. The second click specifies the move endpoint. After you select it. The linked model moves as one object. 16 For the move start point. Linked Revit Model: c_Condo_Complex. 17 For the move endpoint. similar to the behavior of imported DWG objects. click the upper-left corner of the linked condo complex building model. click (Move). click the upper-left corner of the matching blue detail lines above it. The Move command requires two clicks.

21 Click Open. 20 In the Import/Link RVT dialog: ■ ■ Navigate to the Model Linking folder. 776 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . 18 On the View menu. the linked file displays within the confines of the blue detail lines. and select c_Townhouse. For Positioning. click Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit.After you specify the location to move to. Link the townhouse building model 19 On the File menu. click Import/Link ➤ Revit. select Auto .Origin to Origin.

In this case. 23 On the Edit toolbar. the townhouse must be rotated 90 degrees clockwise.The townhouse building model displays above the site model. 25 Move the cursor 90 degrees clockwise. Linking Building Models from Different Project Files | 777 . click to specify the rotation start point. and click to specify the end of the rotation. 24 Place the cursor just north of the townhouse and. and then click to specify the end of the rotation. you first specify the rotation start point. Rotate the townhouse 22 Zoom in around the townhouse model and select it. when the vertical line displays. To rotate an object. click (Rotate).

778 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . This townhouse building model needs to be moved inside the blue detail lines in the lower-left corner of the site model. Do not be concerned if the detail lines do not match the exact footprint of the townhouse. click (Move).The rotated townhouse should resemble the following illustration. 27 Click the lower-left corner of the townhouse building model as the move start point. 28 Select the lower-left corner of the lower-left set of blue detail lines as the move endpoint. Move the townhouse 26 On the Edit toolbar.

The first click specifies the start point. 30 For the starting point.The townhouse is located within its required footprint. select the upper-right corner of the townhouse. Linking Building Models from Different Project Files | 779 . Copy the townhouse 29 On the Edit toolbar. and the second click specifies the copy-to point. The Copy command works much like the Move command. click (Copy). 31 Select the upper-right corner of the blue detail lines on the right to specify the copy-to point.

and click OK. 32 On the Edit menu. 36 Use the same technique to name the instance of the Townhouse on the right to Townhouse B. use the Move command to make any adjustments. click Rotate. NOTE After you rotate the townhouse. if it does not fit reasonably well within the detail lines. for Name. and rotate the townhouse 180 degrees. 34 On the Options Bar. click (Default 3D View). 33 Click the first instance of the townhouse on the left.A copy of the townhouse displays on the right side of the site project. 37 On the View toolbar. under Identity data. click . enter Townhouse A. 780 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . 35 In the Element Properties dialog.

38 On the File menu. click and hold Orbit. When you originally linked the files. you reposition the townhouses in respect to their elevation. NOTE If this is the first time you are using the SteeringWheels. Repositioning Linked Building Models In this exercise. 2 On the SteeringWheels. In this exercise. Modify the vertical position of the townhouses 1 On the View toolbar. you need this project file open and in this view. they were placed too low within the site topography. click (SteeringWheels). In the next exercise. do so before continuing. click Try Me for the Full Nav Large Wheel. you linked two separate Revit Architecture 2009 models into a site model. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise of this tutorial. you modify their vertical position so that the townhouses sit correctly on the site. you rotated and moved the building models to fit them into their designated positions within the site development. Repositioning Linked Building Models | 781 . After linking the files. and then spin the model until it resembles the following illustration. In this exercise. you modify the elevation of the townhouses. If you have not completed the previous exercise. click Save. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise in this tutorial and the resulting project files.

5 Place the cursor over the townhouse and notice that. TIP Place the cursor over the Level 1 line of the Site project. under Views (all). In the steps that follow. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. clear Visibility for the c_Condo_Complex. This process ensures that you are aligning to the level marker in the site project and not to the linked condo complex project. click (Align). you may want to hide the Condo Complex from the view. 8 Select the Level 1 line of the Site project. expand Elevations.Notice that the townhouse is not at the proper elevation in relationship to the site toposurface. Click the Revit Links tab.rvt. In this case. and click to select the line. 3 In the Project Browser. press TAB until Level 1 : Reference displays in the status bar. If you experience difficulty finding the Level1 : Reference. you first select the plane you want to align to. when it highlights. When using the Align command. 4 Zoom in around the townhouse on the left. 782 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . Remember to turn on visibility of the Condo Complex after you have completed this task. you align the Ground Floor level to Level 1 of the site plan. 7 On the Tools toolbar. you use the Align command to reposition the linked model within this project. move the cursor over the Ground Floor level of the Townhouse project. and then select the plane that you want to align. and double-click South. This is apparent because there is a planter below ground level that was designed to sit on top of the site surface. 6 Zoom in closer on the lower half of the townhouse and notice the ground floor level of the townhouse is 11 feet below Level 1 of the site project. and click OK. To do this. and click to select it. the status bar displays the name of the linked file.

and then spin the model until it resembles the following illustration. click Save. Repositioning Linked Building Models | 783 . 9 In the Project Browser. 10 Using the same technique learned in the previous steps. (SteeringWheels). click (Default 3D View). 12 On the View toolbar. align the Ground Floor level of the remaining townhouse to Level 1 of the Site project. 11 Return to the South elevation view. Also notice the option displays for you to lock the alignment. click and hold Orbit. Both townhouses should be at the proper level. under Elevations. This would over-constrain the model.Notice that the townhouse is now at the proper height within this project. 15 On the File menu. Do not lock the alignment of the linked file. 14 On the SteeringWheels. click 13 On the View toolbar. double-click North.

rvt. Modify visibility settings 1 In the Project Browser. Controlling Linked Building Model Visibility In this exercise. As you can see.NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise of this tutorial. 784 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . click the Revit Links tab. or Custom. scroll down and clear Levels. under Elevations. each linked file can have a separate set of levels and relative heights and you can accommodate those differences within the host project. 7 Click the Annotations Categories tab. In the next exercise. you can independently control the visibility settings. 5 Under Display Settings for c_Townhouse. detail level. By host view matches the display to the settings of the current active project view. click Custom. you changed the elevation of the townhouses relative to the host project. and the halftone settings for each linked project. Notice the Level lines for both townhouses no longer display. click Visibility/Graphics. then the other pages on the RVT Link Display Settings dialog may be set to By host View. 8 For Annotation Categories. expand c_Townhouse. NOTE You have three options for controlling visibility settings of a linked file. 3 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. After you link a Revit Architecture 2009 project file within another project. The townhouse level lines still display in the remaining elevation views. In this exercise. you need this project file open and in this view. If the Basics page is set to Custom. By linked view. you modify how the linked files display within the host project. When you link a file. click OK. 6 On the Basics tab of the RVT Link Display Settings dialog. 4 Under Visibility. 11 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. By linked view matches the display to the settings of the linked project view. select <Custom>. do so before continuing. Custom allows you to override specific visibility settings for a linked project or an instance of the linked project. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercises in this tutorial and the resulting project files. 2 On the View menu. click By Host View. If you have not completed the previous exercise. 10 Click OK. Notice that you can change visibility settings of an entire linked file or selected instances of a linked file. 9 Under Visibility. double-click South. display settings.rvt. the defaults are set to By host view for all options. you modify the visibility settings of the linked files within the site project. NOTE Changes to Visibility/Graphics are per view only.

under Floor Plans. 15 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog.rvt. You can click the value for Detail Level. This means that the detail level of the linked file is matched to the detail level of the current active project view. click Visibility/Graphics. you can independently set the detail level for each model category for each link on a per view basis. 22 Click the Model Categories tab. 24 Click OK. or fine. 14 On the View menu. select Custom. 17 Select Halftone for the Townhouse project. By default.12 Using the same technique learned in the previous steps. Halftone displays objects with half their normal darkness.rvt. click By Host View. on the Basics tab. select <Custom>. click Visibility/Graphics.rvt. Notice the option to halftone individual instances of the townhouse model. you can apply halftone to the entire linked project or individual instances of the model. under Display Settings. expand c_Townhouse. and click OK. clear the Levels display for c_Condo_Complex. By selecting custom under Model Categories. medium. Notice both townhouses display in halftone. In this case. click the Revit Links tab. the detail level for the linked townhouse project is set to By Host View. Detail levels of a linked file 18 On the View menu. double-click Level 1. 20 For c_Townhouse. Controlling Linked Building Model Visibility | 785 . Using the Custom option. and then set the detail level to coarse. 16 Under Visibility. 21 In the RVT Link Display Settings dialog. Apply halftone 13 In the Project Browser. you can also apply halftone to individual categories. no detail level changes are required. 23 In the Model categories list. click the Revit Links tab. 19 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. With linked files.

and phase filter of a specific link. under Visibility. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise of this tutorial. By default. click OK. With the Show All filter applied. the townhouse view range now uses the same view range defined within the Floor Plan: Ground Floor of the original linked file. After you link a Revit Architecture 2009 project into another project. on a sloped site for instance.Modify display settings of linked files You can use display settings to control the view range. you manage the links within the host project by unloading and reloading the linked projects.rvt. those modifications are reloaded into the host project when it is reopened. In this case. In this exercise. You also changed the view range of the townhouse so it would cut through the building model at the same height as the other linked building model. click Custom for the Townhouse link. 786 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . existing. with Show All as the phase filter applied to the link. there are situations. Notice the Phase and Phase filter specified are By host view. you modified the visibility settings of the townhouse link by turning off the visibility of the level lines and applying halftone in a plan view. 27 In the RVT Link Display Settings dialog. 26 Under Display Settings. 29 Click OK. Managing Linked Building Models In this exercise. demolished. select Floor Plan: Ground Floor for Linked view. 25 On the Revit Links tab. you need this project file open and in this view. the host view specifies New Construction for the Phase and Show All for the phase filter. this is preferable. Notice that the Custom button displays under Display Settings. you manage the linked files. and temporary components in that particular phase (New Construction) are displayed. a connection to the linked project continues to exist. However. If the host file is closed and one of the linked files is modified. In the next exercise. 28 Select By linked view for View range. the view range of a linked project uses the current view of the host project to define its view range. phase. This means that the phase named New Construction for the linked building model is displayed. In most cases. In this case. All other components are grayed out. click Save. where you need to specify a different view range so that all the building model plan views cut at the same height. all new. 31 On the File menu. 30 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. select c_Townhouse.

If you have not completed the previous exercise. Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models. The most common scenario for using Absolute is when the linked file is on a network where multiple users need access to it. 2 In the Manage Links dialog. you should use a relative path rather than an absolute. click the Revit tab. 4 Under Linked File.NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercises in this tutorial and the resulting project files. The Loaded option for that linked file is now clear. select c_Condo_Complex. 3 Under Path Type. NOTE Unloading linked projects may increase performance by reducing the quantity of components that must be opened and drawn.rvt. any changes made to the locations of a linked file are saved within the linked file rather than the host project. Managing Linked Building Models | 787 . Locations Not Saved. 6 At the confirmation prompt. the link is maintained. NOTE The Locations Not Saved field is only relevant for links with shared coordinates. The default path type is Relative. the link is broken because the host project continues to look for the link in the absolute path specified. Notice the Loaded. If you use a relative path and move the project and linked file together to a new directory. Notice that the condo complex link no longer displays in the host project. 7 Click OK. click Yes. As links are moved to new locations in the host project. In a shared coordinate environment. and Saved Path fields are read only. Unload and reload links 1 On the File menu. You learn more about this in the next lesson. In general. If you use an absolute path and move the project and linked file to a new location. click Manage Links. The buttons at the bottom of the dialog are now active. 5 Click Unload. you can use the Save Locations command to save the new locations to the linked project. They supply information regarding the links. do so before continuing. notice that you have a choice between Relative and Absolute.

you must keep in mind which workset the link is placed in. 9 On the File menu. you may need to link projects that have Worksharing enabled. you can also remove a link completely or reload the link from a different location. A link is only loaded if the workset that the link instance is assigned to opens. Changing the linked worksets: While working in a host file with Worksharing-enabled linked files. You can then specify the additional worksets you need opened. you can specify which worksets to open after the link is made. the link is not loaded. Host files with Worksharing enabled: When the host file has Worksharing activated. go to the Manage Links dialog and use the Reload From command. In general. ■ ■ ■ TIP When opening a Worksharing-enabled host file. In the Import/Link RVT dialog. expand Revit Links. NOTE Some of the more frequently-used commands from the Manage Links dialog can be accessed by right-clicking the link in the Project Browser.TIP In the Manage Links dialog. This enhances performance by reducing the quantity of components that must be opened and drawn. click Save As. link instances can be reassigned to different worksets. you may decide that you need to see additional worksets of one of those linked files. The user who creates the first link determines the status for all other linked files. However. Linking building models with Worksharing enabled In some cases. In these cases. and select Specify. To do this. the specific worksets opened in each host project must be identical.rvt. Linking a building model into multiple host projects: Although the same Worksharing-enabled building model can be linked within multiple host projects. 8 In the Project Browser. you should consider the following: ■ Selective open of worksets: When linking a Worksharing-enabled building model. Notice the condo complex building model has been reloaded into its previous location. both the link symbol and the link instance are placed in the active workset. Links consist of two parts: the link symbol and the link instance. right-click c_Condo_Complex. When you initially place the link. you should try to keep all instances of a link on the same workset. it is possible to specify which links are loaded when the host file opens. 788 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . If you choose not to open that workset. and click Reload. click the arrow next to the Open button.

you can keep track of the multiple locations in which a linked building model may reside. When Revit project views are exported to DWG. This lesson requires the completion of the lesson Linking Building Models on page 772. In essence. When used in conjunction with model linking. NOTE If you intend to complete the next lesson. do so before continuing. The host file consists primarily of site components. you are deciding which coordinate system will be used by the two files. Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models In this lesson. you learn how to share coordinates between project files so that you can correctly locate building models with respect to each other. Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models.10 In the Save As dialog. and save it as an RVT file. In the next lesson. you managed the linked files by unloading and reloading the townhouse project. Acquiring and Publishing Coordinates In this exercise. When you share coordinates between projects. you are establishing a shared origin point. In most cases where the host project consists primarily of site components and the linked projects contain the building models. When you link a Revit Architecture 2009 project into another project (the host project). you publish the coordinates from a host project file to two different buildings that are linked to that project. you learn how to share the coordinates between the host and linked projects. and the resulting project files. it is important that this file exist in the same directory as the condo complex and townhouse projects. If you intend to complete the next lesson now. If you have not completed the previous lesson. name the file Site_Project. leave the project file open in its current view. you can choose to use the coordinates of either the host project or the linked project. the host project Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models | 789 . In this exercise. TIP You can also use shared coordinates with linked DWG files. navigate to the Model Linking folder you created in the first exercise. project or shared coordinates can be specified in the Export Options dialog.

NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous lesson. 3 In the drawing area. In this case. Training File ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. click the Condo Complex. click Shared Coordinates ➤ Publish Coordinates. Linking Building Models on page 772. Publish coordinates 1 Verify that the floor plan Level 1 is the active view. You can also acquire coordinates when working in the host project. As indicated in the Status Bar. If you have not completed the lesson. the host file acquires the coordinates of a specified linked file. do so before continuing. This sends the coordinate information to the linked project so that its internal coordinate system matches the host project. and the resulting project files. It is the building model in the upper center of the host project. Select Site_Project. If you have closed the project. you must now select a linked project to publish coordinates to. open it before continuing.coordinates are used. you can publish the coordinates of the linked files. You may want to do this in a case when the link refers to a DWG that has an established coordinate system that you want the host project to adopt. This ensures all the linked building models define their position with respect to the site data. click Open. Navigate to the Model Linking folder you created in the first exercise of this tutorial.rvt and click Open. When you are working in the host project. 2 On the Tools menu. 790 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates .

when the edges highlight. Linked files using shared coordinates must have at least one defined location. This makes it possible to use the same building file to represent identical buildings on a site. However. Until coordinates are shared between the link and the host. even though both models originate from one linked file. move the cursor over the left townhouse and. it is placed at a specific location. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise of this lesson. click Modify to end the Publish Coordinates process. 5 On the Design Bar. you specify and save the two townhouse locations.4 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. Both projects now share a coordinate system and can be linked to one another using this common coordinate system. you need this project file open and in this view. You also relocate the shared origin of the project. These three locations can be named Lot A. if coordinates are published from the host to the linked project. In this exercise. this location is not saved outside of the host project. notice you are still in Publish Coordinates mode and Revit Architecture is waiting for you to select another link. Relocating a Project with Shared Coordinates When a Revit Architecture 2009 model is linked into a host project. then the location becomes saved in the linked file. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise within this lesson and the resulting project files. Specify a townhouse location 1 In the drawing area of the floor plan Level 1. click to select it. and click OK. do so before continuing. You have published the coordinates of the host project to the linked project. but can have multiple additional locations. Each of these lots is simply a different position for the same house design. Lot B. and Lot C. This location is defined as being a specified location with respect to the origin of the Host. On the Status Bar. Each of the locations can then be saved within the linked file for reference. An example of a linked file with many locations is a prototype model of a house that is placed on 3 different lots. select Location 1. Relocating a Project with Shared Coordinates | 791 . If you have not completed the exercise.

This is because the coordinates for this linked file have already been shared. Because this is the first time you are setting up the shared coordinates between the host and the linked models. notice the Shared Location value is Not Shared. It is only necessary to reconcile coordinates once. click Rename. click . In the Choose Location dialog. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. click Reconcile. click 13 In the Element Properties dialog. 7 In the Rename dialog. When constraining a link to a location. click OK. . This means that you need to choose which coordinate system will be shared by both files. 792 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . a dialog displays telling you to reconcile the coordinates. After a link instance is assigned a shared location. and click OK. under Instance Parameters. enter Lot A for New. 4 Under Value. 12 On the Options Bar. Record the current position as a location. notice that you do not have an option to acquire or publish coordinates. 6 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. 5 In the Share Coordinates dialog: ■ ■ Select Publish the shared coordinate system. click Not Shared for Shared Location. click Not Shared for Shared Location. select Move instance to. and click OK. Under Record selected instance as being positioned at location. under Instance Parameters. changing the position of that instance can affect the definition of the location that is saved with the linked file. click Change. notice the Shared Location value is now Lot A. Constrain a link to a specific location 11 Select the townhouse building model on the right side of the host project.2 On the Options Bar. 9 In the Select Location dialog. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. you have only two choices: ■ ■ Move the instance to an existing location that is not already in use. This is a one-time operation. 8 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. 14 In the Choose Location dialog.

To explicitly save a location. and click OK. This is because you cannot choose a location where an instance link already exists. The second click specifies the move endpoint. click Zoom ➤ Zoom to Fit. NOTE If you attempt to close a host file without saving location changes made to linked files. and click OK. You are informed that you have attempted to move a linked file that has been saved to a specific location. you essentially move the origin of the shared coordinates. 30 On the Tools menu. Save locations 21 On the File menu. click OK. Because Lot A is currently in use. although it may appear that the linked files are moving. select Save. make sure Lot B is selected. By relocating a project. 26 Click OK. You now have two different locations for the townhouse building model: Lot A and Lot B. you are prompted to save the locations to the linked files. the active location position is moved. 23 Click Save Locations. Notice the OK button is still not active. click Manage Links. or cancel the action. 25 In the Manage Links dialog. enter Lot B for Name. 17 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. 27 Select the townhouse on the right in Lot B and drag it a short distance in any direction. 20 In the Element Properties dialog. You can relocate an entire project with respect to all the linked files that are shared with it. click Duplicate. When you create a location. Record current position as. and click OK. Relocating a Project with Shared Coordinates | 793 . 18 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. 24 In the Save Modified Linked Model dialog. 28 Click Cancel to return the townhouse to Lot B. This is a two-click process. The first click specifies the move start point. Relocate a project 29 On the View menu. click Project Position/Orientation ➤ Relocate this Project. click the Revit tab.Notice the OK button is not active. You created the Lot A location in previous steps. 31 Click just north of the site topography and just below the North elevation symbol. and the left townhouse resides at that location. you cannot redefine its location. and then select the townhouse project. When you relocate a project. ignore the warning. 15 In the Choose Location dialog. it is not automatically saved within the linked file. notice the Locations Not Saved option for the townhouse project is no longer selected. select the second option. 19 In the Select Location dialog. You are given the opportunity to save the new location. you must go to the Manage Links dialog and save the locations there. a warning displays. When you release the mouse button. click OK. 22 In the Manage Links dialog. 16 Click Change.

click Save.32 Move the cursor horizontally to the left approximately 40' and click to relocate the shared origin. 35 In the Save Modified Linked Model dialog. In this exercise. You have also learned how to relocate the host project with respect to the linked projects. click Close. select Save. 33 On the Edit menu. you created and saved the locations of each townhouse. and click OK. You cannot work on a host file and one of its linked files simultaneously in the same session of Revit Architecture. 34 On the File menu. Notice the site topography and the linked building models no longer line up. click Undo to return the origin to its original position. 36 On the File menu. and the linked projects are offset the distance that you moved the origin. you work in one of the linked projects. NOTE In the following exercise. 794 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates .

rvt file. under Floor Plans. if other models were linked into the same host.Working with a Linked Building Model After a file has been linked into a host and its coordinates are shared. it is placed automatically within the host project.rvt file. click Import/Link ➤ Revit. 4 Zoom out to see the condo complex building model. Working with a Linked Building Model | 795 . Link a project 1 In the Project Browser. double-click 1st Floor. 3 In the Import/Link RVT dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Navigate to the Model Linking folder you created in the first exercise of this tutorial. In this exercise. click Open. the linked file contains information about its location with respect to the host. do so before continuing. Navigate to the Model Linking folder you created in the first exercise of this tutorial. select Auto . For Positioning.By Shared Coordinates. Select c_Condo_Complex. Training File ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercises within this lesson and the resulting project files. you could link them in and have them retain their correct position. you can select which of the defined locations is the active location that you would like to work on. Click Open. The current active location is Lot A. This project is currently linked to the Site_Project. 2 On the File menu. Also. If you have not completed the exercises. the condo complex is linked within the Site_Project. It is located in Lot A and Lot B within that project file. Select c_Townhouse and click Open. When opening the linked file. you work on the townhouse building model and modify its location. In addition. Because this building model only has one named location. The condo complex is positioned relative to the active location of the townhouse building model.

and click Make Current. 4 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. In this exercise. Notice that the condo complex link has repositioned itself as though the townhouse was on Lot B. Lot C now exists as a location although it has not been specified as an instance. click Manage Place and Locations. select True North for Orientation. under Graphics. and click OK. do so before continuing. you create a new location. you worked within a project that is linked within another project. you need this project file open and in this view. In the next exercise. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise of this lesson. 6 Select Lot B. and click OK.Change the active location 5 On the Settings menu. and use the Report Shared Coordinates tool. click View Properties. Managing Shared Locations The Manage Place and Locations command allows you to quickly create new location names or rename existing ones. you manage the shared locations. click OK. If you have not completed the exercises. You loaded a linked file into the townhouse project and then changed the active location to see how the project reacts to the changes. Notice that Lot A is the current active location. Orient a view to true north 5 On the View menu. you can select Lot C if necessary. 2 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. In the host file. orient a view to true north. These new locations can be assigned later within a host file. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercises within this lesson and the resulting project files. enter Lot C. 3 In the Name dialog. 796 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . In this exercise. Manage locations 1 On the Settings menu. 7 Click OK. click Manage Place and Locations. 6 In the Element Properties dialog. click Duplicate.

On the Options Bar. You rotated a view to true north and used the Report Shared Coordinates tool to locate components in regards to the origin. Create a door schedule 1 Verify that the floor plan Level 1 is the active view. This command allows you to determine the location of elements and points in the model with respect to the shared coordinate origin.7 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom to Fit. click Open. Scheduling Components of Linked Files | 797 . In this exercise. 9 Click any component or in any location on the drawing area. Navigate to the Model Linking folder you created in the first exercise of this tutorial. Select Site_Project. you schedule components of the host file and of all linked files. If you have not completed the exercise. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercises within this lesson and the resulting project files. 10 On the File menu. Report shared coordinates 8 On the Tools menu. You can save the file if you wish. click Close. do so before continuing. Notice that the orientation of the model resembles the site project. click Shared Coordinates ➤ Report Shared Coordinates.rvt and click Open. you created a new location using the Manage Place and Locations tool. Scheduling Components of Linked Files In this exercise. Training File ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. notice the coordinates display in regards to the direction and distance to the origin.

click Schedule/Quantities. 6 Add the remaining fields in the following order: ■ ■ ■ Family and Type Comments Cost 7 Select Include elements in linked files. 3 In the New Schedule dialog. and click Add. 5 Under Available fields. and click OK. 798 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . Select the fields to display in the door schedule 4 In the Schedule Properties dialog. under Category. select Doors.2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. click the Fields tab. select Count.

you created a schedule of doors in the host file and all linked files of a project. You have completed this tutorial. select Family and Type for Sort by. under Other. Because you did not itemize every instance of each door type. Sort schedule data 9 In the Project Browser. 11 In the Schedule Properties dialog. and click Properties. expand Schedules/Quantities. 13 On the File menu. 14 On the File menu.8 Click OK. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. and a grand total for the number of doors in the project buildings. you can sort the schedule data and display a single table entry per door type. Scheduling Components of Linked Files | 799 . the schedule lists the total count for each door type. click Edit for Sorting/Grouping. right-click Door Schedule. and then click OK twice. click Close. 12 Select Grand totals. click Save. clear Itemize every instance. In this exercise. In order to see a concise listing of all the doors in the campus project. You also sorted the schedule data to produce a consolidated listing of the components.

800 .

Customizing Project Settings and Templates 801 .

802 .

you modify project settings to control the appearance of components and subcomponents within that project. click Training Files. selection default options. Modifying System Settings In this lesson. and open Metric\Templates\m_Tutorial_Default. 3 In the Options dialog. 803 . click the Graphics tab. select Invert background color. and click OK. 9 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. These settings control the graphics. click OK. journal cleanup options. 6 In the New Project dialog. Notice that the drawing area is black. and set it as your default template. click the value for Selection color. Set graphics settings 1 Click File menu ➤ Close to close all open projects. Modifying General System Options In this exercise. 7 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog.Modifying Project and System Settings 24 In this tutorial. 11 Under Colors. click the Graphics tab. under Template file. In the second lesson. 2 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. which is independent of the project settings. and your username when using worksets. you create an office template. you modify the settings that control your local Revit Architecture working environment. 8 In the New Project dialog. 5 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project to open a new Revit Architecture project. 4 Under Colors. Finally. In the first lesson. click Browse. System settings are local to each computer and applied to all projects. 10 In the Options dialog. notification preferences.rte. you learn how to control the system settings for Revit Architecture. you modify the system environment. they are not saved to project files or template files. you learn how to modify your Revit Architecture 2009 working environment.

Notice that a tooltip is not displayed. 18 On the Design Bar. and click OK. 15 Click OK. click Modify. 23 Click File menu ➤ Open. 14 Under Notifications. select red. click Wall. 804 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . specify the following options: ■ ■ For Save reminder interval. click Modify. However. 22 When prompted to save changes. and select the wall. clear Invert background color. click the Graphics tab. 26 In the Options dialog.rvt. NOTE You can also specify the Alert Color. click Training Files. 24 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 25 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. select One hour. For Tooltip assistance. 19 On the Design Bar. click No. select yellow.12 In the Color dialog. 16 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. When an error occurs. and open Metric\m_Settings. the status bar displays information about the highlighted element. 20 Place the cursor over the wall but do not select it. Notice the selected wall is yellow rather than the default red. the elements causing the error display using this color. 13 Click the General tab. Notice that the system settings apply to this project. select None. and make the following changes: ■ ■ Under Colors. 17 Sketch a straight horizontal wall in the center of the drawing area. 21 Click File menu ➤ Close. For Selection color.

Notice that you can choose an industry-specific template as your default template. These are the family templates that you use to create new families. select the folder to save your files to by default. centralized. select your preferred Save reminder interval. such as in a large. 4 Click Cancel. TIP To view a template. click the File Locations tab. click Places. However. This path is set automatically during the installation process. 2 In the Options dialog. These settings control locations of important Revit Architecture files. For Tooltip assistance. notice the list of library names. Journals can be run to detect a problem or recreate lost steps or files. 29 Click File menu ➤ Close. Journal files are text documents that record each step during your Revit Architecture sessions. under Default path for family template files. select Normal. you can start a new project with that template. It is unlikely that you would ever want to modify this path. The list is dependent on the options that you selected during installation. and make the following changes: ■ Under Notifications. Set file locations 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. and family libraries. click Browse. 30 Proceed to the next exercise.27 Click the General tab. 10 In the Places dialog. Specifying File Locations on page 805. Notice that the drawing area background colors are no longer inverted and that tooltips display when you place the cursor over any building component. and click Browse to select a template. family template files. Under Username. including your default project template. 3 Under Default template file. 5 Under Default path for user files. Specifying File Locations In this exercise. you specify default file locations. 7 In the Options dialog. enter the name you want to use during worksharing. click Browse. select values for When number of journals exceeds and Delete journals older than (days). architectural firm where customized templates reside on a network drive. Under Journal File Cleanup. They are saved at the termination of each Revit Architecture session. You can modify the existing Specifying File Locations | 805 . These files are used in the software support process. Specify library settings and create a new library 9 In the Options dialog. Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. do not save the changes. click Browse. 8 Click Cancel. If prompted. ■ ■ 28 Click OK. and click Open. Each library path points Revit Architecture to a folder of families or training files. there are some circumstances where you may need to modify the path. 6 In the Browse For Folder dialog. Your login name displays by default. Journal files are deleted automatically after their number exceeds the value you specify.

you can click on the library folder located in the left pane of the dialog. and click Open. Load. and select it as the library path. TIP You may want to create a new folder first. An icon for each library displays in the left pane of all Revit Architecture Open. When you are opening. saving. click (Add Value). or loading a Revit Architecture file. templates. or families. and change the name to My Library. that displays on the right 14 Navigate to C:\My Documents or a folder where you want to create a personal library of Revit Architecture projects. and you can create new libraries. 13 Click in the Library Path field for My Library. Save. 12 Click in the Library Name field of the new library. notice that the libraries display as icons in the left pane of the dialog.library names and path. and click the icon side of the field. In the following illustration. and Import dialogs. under Libraries. 11 In the Places dialog. 806 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings .

This path specifies the location of the Render Appearance Library. Under Additional Render Appearance Paths. If you want to relocate this path. 15 Under Library Name. enter sheetmtl-Cu. The library icons display in the order in which they are listed in the Options dialog. 9 In the text editor. select Ignore words in UPPERCASE. Notice that Revit Architecture navigates directly to the library path. If you work in a large office. custom color files. 27 Under Render Appearance Library Location. Specify rendering settings 26 Click the Rendering tab. 6 Click File menu ➤ Save. click the My Library icon. 4 Under Personal dictionary contains words added during spell check. 18 In the left pane of the Open dialog. and Import dialogs. scroll down the list of building industry terms. Load. specify the new location here. 2 In the Options dialog. 28 Click OK. click Edit. 8 Under Building industry dictionary. 10 Click File menu ➤ Exit. Specifying Spelling Options | 807 . click the Spelling tab. (Remove Value) to delete the library. 29 Proceed to the next exercise. you can specify the locations of other files used to define render appearances. and decal image files. Save. 7 Click File menu ➤ Exit. 24 Click 25 Click OK. such as bump maps. 3 Under Settings. and click OK twice. you may want to set up an office library on a network path to increase productivity and maintain office standards. Modify spelling settings 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. 19 Click Cancel. view the current path.The new library displays in the left pane of all Revit Architecture Open. This path is determined during installation. 5 In the text editor. 20 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. 17 Click File menu ➤ Open. 23 Select My Library. 22 Click Places. 21 Click the File Locations tab. Specifying Spelling Options In this exercise. 16 Click (Move Rows Up) until My Library is at the top of the list. click Edit. you modify the spelling settings and the custom dictionaries for Revit Architecture. Specifying Spelling Options on page 807. The custom dictionary opens in your default text editor. click My Library.

click Browse. Notice that you can modify both length and angular snap increments.rte. 25 Proceed to the next exercise.11 In the Options dialog. click Training Files. click Restore Defaults. 12 On the Standard toolbar. 5 Click Settings menu ➤ Snaps. click Text. 19 Under Settings. click File menu ➤ Save. 15 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Edit. work with snapping turned off. click the Spelling tab. 16 Click Tools menu ➤ Spelling. click Modify. If prompted. It allowed SHTMTL-CU because you set the spelling options to ignore words in uppercase. Modifying Snap Settings on page 808. 18 In the Options dialog. Modifying Snap Settings In this exercise. You can add an increment by entering the value with a semicolon after it. As you zoom in and out within a view. or use the shortcut keys to force a particular snap method. click OK. click OK. and use shortcut keys to control snapping on an instance basis. Notice that the spell checker allowed sheetmtl-Cu because you added it to the custom dictionary. under Template file. (New) to open a new Revit Architecture project using the 13 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. The custom dictionary opens in your default text editor. This command resets the spelling settings to their original configuration. delete sheetmtl-CU. Revit Architecture uses the largest increment that represents less than 2mm in the drawing area. 23 In the Options dialog. 17 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. 22 In the text editor. In this exercise. you modify snap settings. do not save the changes. 14 Click in the drawing area. click OK. 808 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . Snap settings are system settings that are applied to all projects and not saved within a project file. click default template. Modify snap increments 1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project to open a new Revit Architecture project. 20 Under Personal dictionary. you modify snap increments. and enter This is sheetmtl-Cu and SHTMTL-CU. 3 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. 4 In the New Project dialog. and then click File menu ➤ Exit. 24 Click File menu ➤ Close. and open Metric\Templates\m_Tutorial_Default. 21 In the text editor. You can turn snap settings on and off. 2 In the New Project dialog.

If it does not. click OK. snapping reverts to the system default settings. and enter 500 . You can use these shortcut keys at any time when working on the design. use the wheel button on your mouse. notice the 2-letter acronyms next to each object snap option. zoom out until it does so. Notice that the listening dimension snaps at 1000 mm increments. If you do not have a wheel button. 11 Click in the center of the drawing area. 7 Under Object Snaps. you can right-click and select a zoom option from the shortcut menu. After you click to place the object at the midpoint. click Wall. 9 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. you can also use the zoom shortcut keys. While sketching. This dimension reacts to the movement of the cursor and numerical keyboard entries. and move the cursor to the right. Modifying Snap Settings | 809 . 8 In the Snaps dialog. clear Chain. enter SM. A listening dimension refers to the dimension that displays while you are sketching. if you want to snap an object to a wall midpoint.. and only midpoint snaps are recognized until you commit an action. such as ZO to zoom out. click in the Length dimension snap increments box following the value 1000 . TIP To zoom while sketching. For example.6 Under Dimension Snaps. 10 On the Options Bar.

Use snapping shortcut keys 16 On the Design Bar. enter the shortcut key SO to turn snaps off. 25 Click File menu ➤ Close. Modifying Project Settings on page 811. Make sure you also delete the semicolon. it will snap to the endpoints. 810 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . the midpoint. 20 Click to start the wall at the midpoint. 18 Enter SM. and click Wall. and do not save the file. When you use shortcut keys to control snapping. and specify the wall endpoint. This is the snap shortcut key that restricts all snapping to midpoints. Notice that snapping is once again active. zoom in until the listening dimension snap increment shifts to 500 mm. 17 Place the cursor over the horizontal wall you added previously. This is the increment that you added previously.12 While sketching a generic straight wall. Do not set the wall end point. 26 Proceed to the next lesson. Notice that when snapping is turned off completely. Notice that the cursor snaps to various points on the wall. click Modify. If you move the cursor along the wall. 15 Click in the drawing area to start a second wall. 22 Click Settings menu ➤ Snaps. 21 Move the cursor downward. and delete the value 500 . 19 Notice that the cursor now snaps only to the midpoint of the wall. and the wall edges. click in the Length dimension snap increments box. 24 Click OK.. Sketch without snapping 13 While sketching the wall. the command is only active for one click of the mouse. and move the cursor to the right. 14 Click to set the wall endpoint. 23 Under Dimension Snaps. the listening dimension reflects the exact length of the wall as you move the cursor to the left or right.

it defines the appearance of that element in shaded and rendered views. When you apply a material to an element. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Well designed materials provide the foundation for photorealistic renderings.Modifying Project Settings In this lesson. click Training Files. fill patterns. This building model has a generic roof and generic floor. Using these options. you modify the way the Project Browser organizes the project. Finally. In the left pane of the Open dialog. save the project file with a unique name. Creating and Applying Materials In this exercise. you render a region to observe the changes. you learn how to control the project environment by using the options available on the Settings menu. annotations. Create a new material 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Materials. and open Metric\m_Settings. and object styles. The exercises in this lesson should be done sequentially using the same project file. you begin with a simple building model consisting of brick on CMU exterior walls. and use it to complete the remaining exercises. you create a new material and apply it to a model element. you modify the appearance of components and subcomponents in a project.rvt. Modifying Project Settings | 811 . After you create a new fieldstone material and apply it to the exterior wall face. In the steps that follow. You create and modify materials. lines. If you cannot complete the exercises in their entirety.

8 Select Riverstone Blue. Change the render appearance 5 Click the Render Appearance tab. This command creates a new material using the selected material settings as the starting point. Notice that the material settings have not changed from the material that you duplicated. 6 Click Replace. 3 Click (Duplicate). In the next exercise. scale. This list includes all materials available for use on model elements. Notice that no surface pattern is defined for this material. 812 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . expand Views (all) ➤ Floor Plans. 13 Select the lower exterior wall. the Render Appearance tab updates to display properties for the selected stone. The list displays only render appearances that belong to the stone class. 10 Click the Graphics tab. and double-click 02 Entry Level. read-only library for render appearances. In the Materials dialog. It is not stored in the read-only Render Appearance Library. enter Masonry . When you change properties of a render appearance. and click OK. the modified render appearance is stored as part of the project file. These details will display in rendered images. this material provides a starting point for the new material. You have created a new material that can be applied to any model element in this project.Notice the materials listed on the left side of the dialog. all materials that are part of that family are also loaded into the project. The Render Appearance Library is a local. and click OK.Fieldstone material. However.Stone. Notice that the surface pattern is still blank. The properties describe the color. and texture of the material. 2 Scroll down the materials list. and select Masonry . Apply the new material 12 In the Project Browser. Masonry . 9 Click Apply. select Stone. you modify the material so that it displays correctly in a shaded or rendered view.Fieldstone. When a model element is loaded into a project. 11 Click OK. 7 In the Render Appearance Library dialog. you create a fieldstone pattern and apply it to the Masonry . In the steps that follow.Fieldstone. 4 In the Duplicate Revit Material dialog. and click (Element Properties). for Class.

19 On the right side of the Material field. select Basic Wall: Fieldstone on CMU.Fieldstone. Fieldstone on CMU. and verify that Shading with Edges is selected. When you render a 3D view that includes the lower wall. 26 On the View Control Bar. 20 In the Materials dialog. All of the exterior walls of this project are now Fieldstone on CMU. Layer #1 is the exterior finish of the wall.Brick. 23 While pressing CTRL. click Edit/New. select the rear exterior wall. and click OK. . click Model Graphics Style. It is currently assigned the material Masonry . Creating and Applying Materials | 813 .14 In the Element Properties dialog. 22 Select the left exterior wall. 17 For Structure.Fieldstone. and click OK. 25 On the View toolbar. click in the Material field. the wall will display the render appearance specified for Masonry . click (Default 3D View). 21 Click OK three times. click This is the material that you created. click Edit. 24 In the Type Selector. select Masonry . 15 Click Duplicate. 16 Enter the new wall name. 18 For Finish 1.

Higher quality renderings require more time to generate. The rendering process begins. 32 In the Rendering dialog. select Low or Medium. click Render. 27 On the Rendering tab of the Design Bar.Notice that the exterior walls are no longer brick. select the render region (a red rectangle). select Region. 29 In the 3D view. When finished. for Setting. and there is no stone pattern applied in this view. 814 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . the rendered image displays fieldstone walls. right-click the Design Bar. In the following exercise. under Quality. and drag its blue grips to adjust the render region around the building. and click Rendering. you create a fieldstone pattern and apply it to this material. 30 Zoom in on the render region so you can see the building more clearly in the drawing area. click Rendering Dialog. TIP If the Rendering tab is not available on the Design Bar. This is because a surface pattern was not selected when the fieldstone material was defined. Creating and Applying Fill Patterns on page 815. 31 In the Rendering dialog. 28 In the Rendering dialog.

Create a new fill pattern 1 In the Project Browser. 33 In the Rendering dialog. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. click Show the model. Drafting pattern density is fixed. Then click Render again. 34 Close the Rendering dialog. click Show the model. and clear Region. such as brick coursing or ceramic tile on a wall. There are 2 types of fill patterns: model and drafting. 4 Scroll down the list of patterns.rvt.rvt. 2 Click Settings menu ➤ Fill Patterns. 7 Under Custom. you create a new pattern called Fieldstone and apply it to the material you created in the previous exercise. Both pattern types are created and applied in a similar way. such as steel. Zoom into the model. click Import. Model patterns are fixed and scale with the model.TIP If you want to see the material in greater detail. 35 Click File menu ➤ Save As. expand Elevations. Creating and Applying Fill Patterns In this exercise. and double-click West. 6 In the Add Surface Pattern dialog. Drafting patterns represent material in symbolic form. choose Model. Creating and Applying Fill Patterns | 815 . Creating and Applying Fill Patterns on page 815. Notice that a fieldstone pattern is not available. m_Settings-in progress. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise. and adjust the boundaries of the render region to describe a smaller area. select Custom. which consists of a double-diagonal hatching pattern. in the Rendering dialog. 5 Click New. 37 Proceed to the next exercise. 3 Under Pattern Type. Model patterns represent actual element appearance on a building. Notice that no model surface pattern displays on the fieldstone wall. and save the file as m_Settings-in progress. 36 Navigate to a folder of your preference.

and open Common\Fieldstone_Model. and click OK. enter . notice that no surface pattern is applied to the Masonry . The new model pattern is available in the Fill Patterns dialog. 21 In the Materials dialog. and for Import scale.8 In the left pane of the Import Fill Pattern dialog. 24 Zoom into the model until the fill pattern appears. 14 In the Element Properties dialog.Fieldstone material. click Edit. It is currently assigned the material Masonry . 22 Click OK three times. 23 On the Design Bar. 17 On the right side of the Materials field. 13 On the Options Bar. under Pattern Type. click in the Material field. click to select a fill pattern. click Edit/New. enter Fieldstone. 10 For Name. 20 Select the Fieldstone model pattern. click Training Files. 19 In the Fill Patterns dialog.Fieldstone. click OK. 16 In the Edit Assembly dialog. 11 Click OK. (Element Properties). Apply the fieldstone pattern 12 Select the west exterior wall with windows. 18 Under Surface Pattern. click 15 For Structure. select fldstn. Finish 1 is the exterior finish of the wall. click Modify. select Model. 816 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings .pat. The west wall of the building displays as solid fill. click .56. In the Materials dialog. 9 Under Custom. for Finish 1. and click OK.

For example. Controlling Object Styles on page 817. 2 On the keyboard. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise. and drag a rectangle around the 3 windows facing you. Controlling Object Styles | 817 . m_Settings-in progress. use the shortcut keys ZR (Zoom in Region). You can then change the material in the Object Styles dialog and apply it to all window types. Apply object styles by category 1 In the Project Browser. there are often multiple window types within a project. adjust your zoom settings as needed. Object styles are applied in every view and can be overridden in a particular view by modifying the Visibility/Graphics settings. expand 3D Views. you can set the window frame material to By Category. The client may not be certain of the exact window frame color to use and may want to see renderings of various options. Controlling Object Styles You can use object styles to control the appearance of components and subcomponents.rvt. 26 Click File menu ➤ Save. Rather than continually modify the type properties of each window type. and double-click 3 Windows. 27 Proceed to the next exercise. TIP If the pattern does not display. Object styles allow you to control the appearance of multiple component types.25 On the View toolbar. click (Default 3D View). NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise.

click (Element Properties). 8 In the Materials dialog. and click 15 Click OK twice. This means that the material is assigned by the Object Styles setting. click Edit/New. click in the Value column. for Trim Exterior Material. 10 Select the arched window. click (Element Properties). 818 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . under Materials and Finishes. 16 On the Design Bar. 9 Click OK twice. click Edit/New. 5 On the Options Bar. 14 In the Materials dialog. click in the Value column. 4 Select one of the rectangular windows. for Trim Exterior Material. under Materials and Finishes.3 On the View Control Bar. click By Category (located under the materials list). 13 In the Type Properties dialog. click By Category. . 12 In the Element Properties dialog. Notice the exterior frames of all the windows are now gray. 11 On the Options Bar. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. click Modify. 7 In the Type Properties dialog. and click . 6 In the Element Properties dialog.

click OK. and select Trim. It uses this color to represent the material in 2D and 3D views whose model graphics style is Shading or Shading with Edges. descriptions. and click 20 In the Materials dialog. expand Windows. select Paint. Revit Architecture determines the average color for the render appearance. Controlling Object Styles | 819 . . (Duplicate). enter Trim . for Name. 24 In the Render Appearance Library dialog. and click 22 Click the Render Appearance tab.red paint. the rendered image will show dark red paint for the window trim. Change the color in shaded views 27 Click the Graphics tab.Change the render appearance 17 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. click in the Material column. 25 In the search field. select Trim. Notice that the red paint trim material is applied to all windows regardless of their type. and click OK. The list displays render appearances that belong to the Paint class and whose names. click OK. 19 For Trim. select Use Render Appearance for Shading. or keywords include the word red. 26 Select Paint Dark Red Glossy. type red. 23 Click Replace. and click OK. 30 In the Object Styles dialog. 28 Under Shading. When you render a 3D view. 29 In the Materials dialog. 18 On the Model Objects tab. 21 In the Duplicate Revit Material dialog. for Class.

Create a new line pattern 1 Verify that the project from the previous exercise. you can apply it using either of the following methods: ■ ■ Use Visibility/Graphics settings to modify the roof appearance in a specific view.rvt.31 On the View toolbar. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. under Category. (Default 3D view). 8 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. You then create a new line style to mark the zoning setback from the property line. Modifying Line Patterns and Styles In this exercise. enter Roof Line. 820 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . Modifying Line Patterns and Styles on page 820. select Red. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. 4 In the Line Pattern Properties dialog. select Roof Line. 11 For Line Pattern. 10 For Line Color. 9 In the Object Styles dialog. click New. m_Settings-in progress.rvt. m_Settings-in progress. 33 Proceed to the next exercise. is open with the 3D view active. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise. Use object styles to apply the change to all views. 7 On the View Control Bar. 2 Click Settings menu ➤ Line Patterns. for Name. Now that you have created a line pattern. click 32 Click File menu ➤ Save. 5 Enter the Types and Values shown in the following illustration: 6 Click OK twice. select Roofs. 3 In the Line Patterns dialog. you create a new line pattern and apply it to the fascia of the roof.

under 3D Views. Modifying Line Patterns and Styles | 821 . double-click to Building.12 Click OK. 13 In the Project Browser. click Model Graphics Style. and verify that Hidden Line is selected. Notice that the line color displays in this view. The line style is applied to the roof in the view. but not the line pattern. 14 On the View Control Bar.

sections. 21 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. Plans. under Category. for Visibility. select Blue. 17 In the Object Styles dialog. select 5. 18 For Line Color. and orthogonal 3D views show line color and pattern. select Solid. 16 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. 20 Click OK. 24 In the Line Graphics dialog. The pattern is not applied in a perspective or camera view where you expect to see a solid line. specify the following options: ■ ■ ■ For Weight. elevations. For Pattern. 23 For Projection/Surface Lines. For Color. 19 For Line Pattern. under Floor Plans. 22 On the Model Categories tab. 15 In the Project Browser. select Roofs.NOTE The line pattern is most appropriate in plan views. select Roof Line. double-click 03 Roof. 822 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . select Roofs. select Black. click Override. This setting overrides the appearance of the roof only in the current view.

28 In the Line Styles dialog. Notice the site topography and the property lines. under Floor Plans. For Line Pattern. click Lines. (Line). and click OK. 30 For the Zoning Setback category.25 Click OK twice. 33 In the Type Selector. 31 Click OK. enter Zoning Setback. Click Click (Draw). For Line Color. under Modify Subcategories. double-click Site. Create a new line style 26 In the Project Browser. specify the following values: ■ ■ ■ For Line Weight Projection. specify the following: ■ For Plane. select Double dash. 34 On the Options Bar. select Level: 02 Entry Level. 32 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. select 2. ■ ■ 35 Draw lines for the setback approximately as shown: Modifying Line Patterns and Styles | 823 . 27 Click Settings menu ➤ Line Styles. click New. select Red. select Zoning Setback. 29 For Name. This places the line above the topography.

and clear Property Lines. and clear Zoning Setback. 42 On the Model Categories tab: ■ ■ Expand Lines. (Default 3D View). use the Detail Lines command on the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 44 On the View toolbar. 43 Click OK. Modifying Annotations on page 825. 40 In the Project Browser.NOTE If you only want the setback to display on the site view. 39 Click OK. click 45 Click File menu ➤ Save. Expand Site. This turns off the visibility of the Zoning Setback lines only in this view. 37 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 46 Proceed to the next exercise. NOTE If Site is not selected. 36 On the View toolbar. and clear Zoning Setback. and then clear Property Lines. 41 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. expand Lines. double-click 02 Entry Level. click (Default 3D View). as if they are placed on an overlay of the view. select it. under Floor Plans. Detail lines only show in the view where they are created. 38 On the Model Categories tab. Notice that the Zoning Setback lines display in this view. 824 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings .

7 Click OK twice. Create a new dimension style 1 Verify that the project from the previous exercise. 4 Enter the name Linear . click the default value.Imperial and click OK.rvt. 3 In the Type Properties dialog. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise. and that the tags display the window type rather than the window instance number. for Units Format. double-click 02 Entry Level. Modifying Annotations | 825 . and place a dimension on the floor plan. 11 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. click another wall. m_Settings-in progress. 2 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Dimensions ➤ Linear. m_Settings-in progress. select Linear . 6 In the Format dialog: ■ ■ Clear Use project settings. 10 On the Standard toolbar. 9 In the Type Selector.rvt. select Feet and fractional inches. click Duplicate. click one wall. To place a dimension. is open with the 02 Entry Level floor plan active. For Units. click Load a new window tag 12 In the Project Browser. You have created a new dimension style. Notice that the windows on the west wall are tagged. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise.Modifying Annotations In this exercise. 5 Under Text. You also load a new window annotation symbol and apply it to show the window instance number rather than the window type.Imperial. click Modify. 13 Select a tagged window in the west wall. (Undo). you create a new dimension style using units of measurement that differ from the project settings. click Dimension. 8 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and then click outside the second wall.

Then press Delete. 21 In the Tags dialog. A window instance tag displays on the selected window. 26 On the Options Bar. click M_Window Tag . select the 3 window tags.rfa. The window tag used in this project is designed to display the type. click Tag ➤ By Category. Notice that you can choose between the two window tag types loaded into this project. scroll to Windows and notice that M_Window Tag .14 On the Options Bar. 826 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . click Training Files. under Category. 22 Under Loaded Tags.Number. notice that the label displays 1i.Number is now the assigned tag. 28 On the Design Bar. This tag is used when tagging windows By Category. scroll down to Windows. and select the drop-down arrow that displays. click (Element Properties). In the preview image. 19 Click Load. 16 Click Cancel. clear Leader. This indicates this tag is designed to display the window instance value rather than the type value. and open Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Window Tag . 27 On the west wall. click Tag All Not Tagged. Leave M_Window Tag . 18 In the Tags dialog.Number. notice the Mark value differs from the window tag value. you load a new window tag that displays the window instance mark. In the steps that follow. Notice that there is a window tag loaded and applied to windows. 20 In the left pane of the Open dialog. click the bottom window. 23 Click OK. 15 In the Element Properties dialog. 24 While pressing CTRL. 25 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 17 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Loaded Tags.Number as the assigned tag.

M_Window Tag . Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise. In the final section. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. for Length. dimensions use these project settings. Specifying Units of Measurement. and Detail Level Options on page 827. 8 Under Walls. you modify the detail level assignments. Modifications to area rounding are displayed in schedules and area tags. Both window tag types can coexist within the same view. TIP Using the techniques learned in the previous steps. 2 In the Project Units dialog. and click OK. click the default value. and Detail Level Options In this exercise. verify that Create is clear. m_Settings-in progress. and click OK. 6 Click OK. select Faces. for Rounding. notice Window Tags appears twice. In the first section. select To the nearest 100. Set units of measurement 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Units. for Area. 34 Proceed to the next exercise. Click OK. Temporary Dimensions. click the default value. you modify the temporary dimension settings.Under Category. Each Window Tag category has a different loaded tag: one displays the type value. you can have multiple views: one displaying window type tags and the other displaying window instance values. you specify the project units of measurements. Unless overridden. (Default 3D View). In the second section. For Unit symbol. Specifying Units of Measurement. 32 On the View toolbar. Unless overridden. 4 In the Project Units dialog. you modify 3 settings that have a broad impact on the project. The remaining untagged windows are tagged by instance value. select meters squared. 3 In the Format dialog. 31 On the Design Bar. 9 Under Doors and Windows.Temporary Dimensions. 29 Select the Window Tag category with the loaded tag.Number. and Detail Level Options | 827 . dimension values display using this setting. Specifying Units of Measurement. click 33 Click File menu ➤ Save. select Openings.rvt.Temporary Dimensions. the other displays the instance value. Specify temporary dimension properties 7 Click Settings menu ➤ Temporary Dimensions. 5 In the Format dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Rounding. click Modify. select 0 decimal places. and click OK. 30 Under Leader.

Modifying Project Browser Organization on page 828. click Training Files. and open Common\c_Project_Browser. Any new view created using this scale is automatically assigned the detail level Medium. Organize the Project Browser by views 1 In the Project Browser. and expand 3D Views. When you create a new view and specify its view scale. the detail level is specified automatically according to the arrangement in the table. you modify the Project Browser organization and create new methods of grouping and sorting the views and sheets. 14 Click File menu ➤ Close. Notice the 1 : 50 view scale moved to the Medium column. In this exercise. expand Views (all). To organize the views and sheets into sets of deliverables.In this project. In this table. The location of temporary witness lines can be changed by clicking their controls. 828 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . Specify detail levels 10 Click Settings menu ➤ Detail Level. The view scale moves either from the bottom or the top of the column based on the direction. You do not select a view scale to move it. TIP You can override the detail level at any time by specifying the Detail Level parameter in the View Properties dialog or the Detail Level icon on the View Control Bar.rvt. Modifying Project Browser Organization In a typical project. 11 Between the columns Coarse and Medium. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. you often produce multiple packages of related drawings. 15 Proceed to the next exercise. 13 Click File menu ➤ Save. you use the arrows between the columns to move view scales from one detail level to another. expand Floor Plans. These drawings and sheets can become so numerous that navigating a lengthy Project Browser list can be cumbersome. temporary dimensions now snap to the wall faces and to the door and window openings. you can use the Project Browser settings to instantly modify how the Project Browser groups and sorts. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 12 Click OK. click .

Phase 3-Structure Completed Project-Structure Completed Structure w/ Roof&Floors Completed Project Each of the 3D views varies by phase and discipline. select Discipline. notice that Views are divided into Architectural and Structural disciplines. 9 In the Browser Organization dialog. expand Sheets (all). 6 In the Project Browser. and click OK. 8 Select Phase. 5 On the Views tab. and notice the progression of each view: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Main Bldg . notice that views are grouped by phase.Phase 2-Structure West Wing . expand both the Architectural and Structural views. Modifying Project Browser Organization | 829 .Notice that the views are listed alphabetically. 2 In the Project Browser. select Type/Discipline.Phase 1-Structure East Wing . 10 In the Project Browser. In the Project Browser. In the Project Browser. and notice that each is grouped by discipline. Notice that the sheets are listed alphanumerically based on the sheet number. and click OK. 7 Click Settings menu ➤ Browser Organization. 3 Open each of the 3D views in the following order. expand each view type. and click Apply. 4 Click Settings menu ➤ Browser Organization.

and click OK. expand each sheet set. and specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Group by: Phase Then by: Family and Type Then by: Discipline 19 Click OK. 13 Select Sheet Prefix. 18 In the Browser Organization Properties dialog. 830 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . under Sheets. and click New. 16 Click the Views tab.Organize Project Browser by sheets 11 Click Settings menu ➤ Browser Organization. 17 Enter Phase/Type/Discipline. 12 Click the Sheets tab. 14 In the Project Browser. click the Folders tab. Create a new browser organization name 15 Click Settings menu ➤ Browser Organization. and click OK.

expand 3D Views. The template selection may vary depending on your installation. and open Metric\Templates. you select the starting point for your office template. when you create a new project. If you want to save this file. For example. Whenever you create a new project or template. 4 Select the Construction-DefaultMetric. and Discipline. Notice that the Project Browser has reorganized all the views within this project according to Phase. and view names. Creating an Office Template on page 831. certain baseline settings are still assigned to the new project. and expand both Architectural and Structural. When you create a new template based on an existing template. click Browse. A well designed template will ensure that office standards are maintained and will reduce repetitive work. the project template is used to provide the initial project settings such as materials.rte template. 3 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. You can also save these settings in a template file. Even if you choose not to base that project on a template. Review existing templates 1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. Creating an Office Template In this lesson. You can choose from several templates. click Training Files. select Phase/Type/Discipline as the current browser organization. 2 Under Template file. The first step in creating your office template is deciding which template to use as your starting point. In that case. and click OK. dimensions styles. you may decide to modify one or more of these templates to the specific needs of your company. you create an office template. 22 Click File menu ➤ Close. You can save Project Browser organization schemes and named print settings in a template.20 In the Browser Organization dialog. you create a Revit Architecture template file and specify it as your default template. The lesson begins with choosing the correct base template and progresses through many of the most common modifications that you should consider to make a template unique to your situation. enter a unique file name. and click OK. you modified various project settings that affect project appearance and organization. In this lesson. under Views. Creating an Office Template | 831 . View Type (Family and Type). you maintain consistent standards and reduce the amount of repetitive work. You may need to have a variety of office templates if your work requires it. expand Complete. a group of settings is used to specify the project environment. When you create new projects. the same rules apply. In the lesson that follows. Choosing the Base Template In this exercise. you can modify one template and use Transfer Project Standards to copy the changes to other templates. All the settings that you changed in this lesson are saved with the project. Proceed to the next lesson. By saving these settings as a template and using it throughout the office. and click Open. navigate to your preferred directory. You should choose the option that will help you develop the best template with the least amount of work. 21 In the Project Browser. You can use an existing template as the baseline or use no template at all. you can select an existing template or begin the project with no template. Although Revit Architecture provides many templates to choose from. levels.

and patterns Annotations Project units Temporary dimensions Detail levels Project Browser organization In addition to the list above. 12 Under Template File. expand Views (all) ➤ Elevations. Other templates are simple in respect to the predefined views and schedules. 8 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom in Region and. select Project template. 16 Proceed to the next exercise. In this exercise. you can create the materials commonly used in most projects. 10 Click File menu ➤ Close. you modify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Materials Fill patterns Object styles Line styles. you can dictate its appearance in all views and when rendered. click Browse. 14 Click Open.5 In the New Project dialog. The specifics regarding each of these are addressed at the end of this exercise. for Create new. If you want to use a template other than the default. you modify the project settings for your new template. navigate throughout the various views and schedules. and click OK. Notice that the construction template is more complex than the default template. 11 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. If you have additional projects open. For example. there are additional commands under the Settings menu that allow modifications that can be saved in a template. close them. you can select it now. 15 Under Create new. Modifying Project Settings on page 832. These settings control the appearance of components and their subcomponents within a project. weights. 9 In the Project Browser. 7 In the Project Browser. 832 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . and double-click North. but the view properties have been modified to maximize the use of various tools. When you create the material. Modifying Project Settings In this exercise. Notice that there are more predefined levels than you normally see in the default template. 13 Select the default template. TIP This template is the starting point for your new template. you can establish settings that are common to most projects. in the drawing area. select Project. To maintain office standards and reduce rework. drag a zoom region around the level heads. 6 Click OK.

7 Scroll through the list of model patterns and drafting patterns. and imported objects. including color. 11 Click the Model Objects tab. and materials for model objects. not in the read-only Render Appearance Library. 8 Create new fill patterns as needed. 9 Click OK when finished. You are merely pointed to each area where you can adapt the template to your needs. 5 Click OK twice to close the Render Appearance Library and Materials dialogs. You can assign a different render appearance to a material. Create and modify materials 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Materials. texture. Specify object styles 10 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. If certain materials are commonly used in your office or industry. Observe the materials that are already defined. You can also dimension to model pattern lines. you can set line weights. and scroll through the list of categories. For more details on modifying these settings. 2 Scroll down the materials list. you can specify its appearance in rendered images. When you create or modify a material. the changes are saved as part of the project template. see Specifying File Locations on page 805. see the previous lesson. and similar attributes. transparency. rotate. or modify existing patterns. 13 If necessary. TIP When the material of an object is set to by category. See Modifying Project Settings on page 811 for more information on creating new fill patterns. and change render appearance properties.During this exercise. You may want to rename or modify some of the existing materials. Modifying System Settings on page 803. specific modifications are not dictated. create new subcategories. Drafting patterns represent materials in symbolic form. see a preview of the rendered material. 12 Modify the properties of any existing categories as needed. You do this by defining the render appearance. or refer to the online help. TIP For more information about creating new materials. Model patterns represent actual element appearance on a building. Modifying Project Settings | 833 . You can align. If you change render appearance properties. it adopts the material assigned to its object styles category. 14 Click the Annotation Objects tab. 3 Click the Render Appearance tab. For more information. Any related files (such as image files or bump maps) should be stored in a location that is accessible to all users of the template. and move model patterns. create and modify them as needed. see Modifying Project Settings on page 811. In the Object Styles dialog. line colors. or refer to the online help. 4 Click Replace. line patterns. Create and modify fill patterns 6 Click Settings menu ➤ Fill Patterns. annotation objects.

18 For existing line categories. 834 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . click Duplicate. and dimensions. 38 Click Rename if you want to rename an existing arrowhead. The Perspective Line Weights tab controls the line width of model elements in perspective views. modify the line weight. 36 Select the Type drop-down list. 24 Add and delete view scales as needed. 23 Modify existing line weights as needed. The Line Weights command controls the display of line widths for each scale of a view. 32 To modify a line pattern. The widths are dependent on the scale of the design. The arrowheads configured within this dialog can be applied to text notes. select it. 29 Click OK. 25 Click the Perspective Line Weights tab. and specify the properties. 20 Click OK. 37 Modify the properties of existing arrowhead styles if necessary. line color. Modify arrowheads 35 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Arrowheads. The Annotation Line Weights tab controls the line width of annotation symbols. 28 Modify existing line weights as needed. 39 If you need to create a new arrowhead style.15 Modify categories. Modify line patterns 30 Click Settings menu ➤ Line Patterns. You can add and delete view scales. 33 Add and delete line patterns as needed. 34 Click OK. tags. 26 Modify existing line weights as needed. and notice the list of existing arrowhead styles. 19 If necessary. ■ ■ 22 Click the Model Line Weights tab. and click Edit. name the style. select it from this list. Annotation line widths are independent of the view scale. Modify line weights 21 Click Settings menu ➤ Line Weights. create new line subcategories. The dialog has 3 tabs: ■ The Model Line Weights tab controls the line width of model elements (such as walls and windows) in orthographic views. such as section lines and dimension lines. and create new subcategories as needed. or line pattern as needed. 27 Click the Annotation Line Weights tab. To see the details of a particular style. 31 Scroll through the list of line patterns. Modify line styles 17 Click Settings menu ➤ Line Styles. You can define the widths of 16 different pens for 6 different drawing scales. 16 Click OK to close the Object Styles dialog.

■ ■ Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Dimensions ➤ Angular. 42 Select the Type drop-down list. In the Tags dialog. click Duplicate. 45 If you need to create a new linear dimension style. 62 Click OK. TIP In the drawing area. Specify temporary dimensions 59 Click Settings menu ➤ Temporary Dimensions. 44 Click Rename if you want to rename an existing style. select it from this list. the last loaded tag becomes the default tag. 49 Scroll through the list of loaded tags. click Load. Volume. make sure each category is assigned the desired tag. 53 For Length. you can modify the location of temporary dimension witness lines. 57 Specify the Slope option. Notice many categories do not have loaded tags. You can have multiple tags loaded for any category. 55 Click OK. when you add a door with the tag option selected. angular. Modifying Project Settings | 835 . 60 Under Walls. For example. and choose a decimal symbol. You can override tag assignment using the Type Selector. Modify loaded tags 48 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Loaded Tags. you can override the assignment by selecting a different tag from the drop-down list. 50 To load new annotation tags. 58 Click OK. specify the default location for temporary dimensions. 54 Modify the unit settings if necessary. To see the details of a particular style. specify where you want the temporary dimensions to measure from by default. and click OK. name the style. Specify project units 52 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Units. 47 Repeat the previous 5 steps for angular and radial dimensions. and radial dimensions are modified separately. 43 Modify the properties of existing linear dimension styles if necessary. 61 Under Doors and Windows. and Angle settings. Modify dimension styles 41 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Dimensions ➤ Linear. When more than one tag has been loaded for a category. and specify the properties.40 Click OK. Linear. The tag assignments in this dialog dictate the default tag for each category. 56 Repeat the previous two steps for the Area. click Format. and notice the list of existing linear dimension styles. 46 Click OK. the door is tagged using the tag assigned to the Doors category in this dialog. 51 After you have loaded the necessary tags. Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Dimensions ➤ Radial.

Each command is available on the Settings menu. or edit existing organization types. In a typical project. you must decide if the time investment is offset later by the reduction in repetitive work. Use the table below as a checklist. click the arrows between columns. 67 In the Browser Organization dialog. or edit existing organization types. see Modifying Project Browser Organization on page 828. rename. the detail level of that view is automatically assigned using this table. Using the arrows between the columns. For example. This could be useful 836 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . create new browser organization types. or Fine. 71 Delete. Although these settings can be saved within a template. 69 If necessary. To organize the views and sheets into sets of deliverables. and make modifications in each area as necessary. Modify project browser organization 66 Click Settings menu ➤ Browser Organization. To move the view scales. Settings Menu Command Project Parameters Associated Tutorial Considerations This command is covered in an exercise later in this lesson. you can add project (and shared) parameters to a template. View scales are organized under the detail level headings Coarse. you often produce multiple packages of related drawings. NOTE You cannot select specific scales in this dialog. 64 Review the table. 72 If necessary. If you routinely create the same documentation sets. Each of these areas is covered later in this lesson or in other tutorials. 73 Click OK. 70 Click the Sheets tab. Additional project settings 74 The Settings menu offers several additional commands that control the project environment. In such a case. you may only want to add generic settings that would be applicable to most projects. You can override the detail level at any time by specifying the Detail Level parameter in the View Properties command. create new browser organization types. These views and sheets can become so numerous that navigating a lengthy Project Browser list can be cumbersome. RELATED For more information on modifying browser organization. 65 Click OK. rename. you can use the Project Browser settings to instantly modify the grouping and sorting within the Project Browser. you can save phases or named print settings in a template. click the Views tab. Links to associated tutorials are provided. and move view scales as needed. When you create a new view.Specify detail levels 63 Click Settings menu ➤ Detail Level. The view scales move from the lower-left to the upper-right and vice-versa. you should consider each carefully before applying changes to a template. You can find additional information in Help. Medium. See Setting up If necessary. The detail level is based on view scale. However. you can move view scales from one detail level to another. you may want to modify the browser organization settings within the template. 68 Delete.

You can load any family or group into a template.Settings Menu Command Associated Tutorial Considerations Shared and Project Parameters on page 843. notice the list of doors already loaded. each component loaded will add to the length of the relative Type Selector list. If necessary. Although this is possible. You may want to modify wall types to add a more diverse selection within the template. it is not recommended because it would increase the file size significantly before the first component was added to the project. Modifying Contour Visibility and Site Settings on page 689 Site Settings If necessary. or electrical fixtures. click Door. you load and modify families or groups into the template started in the previous exercise. and the poche depth. You should only load components that tend to be used in every project and are not likely to change. This would be cumbersome and counterproductive. Depending on the intended use of this template. For example. Area and Volume Computations Area Analysis on page 593 View Templates This command is covered in an exercise later in this lesson. Loading and Modifying Families and Groups In this exercise. or add to this selection. See Modifying Views and View Templates on page 839. Loading and Modifying Families and Groups | 837 . you can set up the phases. Load and modify families 1 Use the project started in the previous exercise. and graphic overrides applicable to most projects. You should not load every conceivable family into a template file. You can create area schemes if default settings apply to most projects. Although the options are endless. you must scroll through a lengthy list of windows every time you change a window in a project. For example. modify. Loading and Modifying Families and Groups on page 837. In the steps that follow. If you have not completed the previous exercise. phase filters. You can do this in several ways: select a component type and click Properties. furniture. you may want to load families into the template to save time later or ensure consistency throughout the office. In addition. if you load every available window type. If this selection is satisfactory. the section cut material. However. and electrical fixtures. or use the Project Browser. 2 In the Type Selector. there are some important thoughts to consider. you do both. do so before starting this exercise. you can set the default contour line interval. you can move onto the next component type. Phases Project Phasing on page 761 for things such as hardware. Create and modify the view templates to control the appearance of default views and rendered images. you could load detail components. 75 Proceed to the next exercise. title blocks. You can also specify how room volumes are computed. you may want to delete. You should think very carefully about what families or groups to load and modify within a template. and in the Basics tab of the Design Bar.

click Edit/New. Click Duplicate. Modify door type Create new door type 4 Click OK. You can use the Project Browser to modify family types. create. or modify a door. Notice that each family category is listed. Make modifications. 7 Press ESC twice to return to the template. 6 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library. You can also load families and groups from the File menu.3 To modify. 5 Repeat the process for any component type that you want to modify. and click OK. expand Families. click Load. Notice that you have the option to Load Family or Load File as Group. Loading from the library is the quickest when you know exactly what families you want to load. 838 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . create. (Element Properties) on the Options Use the instructions in the table below to load. or load a new door type. Enter a name. You may want to open other Design Bar tabs and make modifications to components not available on this tab. Goal: Load new door type Steps: In the Element Properties dialog. Use the Project Browser to modify families 8 In the Project Browser. In the Element Properties dialog. click Edit/New. click Bar. and click OK. Modify type properties. Select it. Navigate to the directory containing the door type. and click OK. In the Element Properties dialog. and click Open.

click 12 Click Preview. load. Modifying Views and View Templates At the beginning of this lesson. and select the title block type. In addition. 14 Using any of the techniques learned in previous steps. Detail Level. you create and apply the underlying view templates that control their initial appearance. (Element Properties). You may want to load a title block applicable to your office and then delete this title block. 15 Proceed to the next exercise. The view inherits view properties such as View Scale. Modifying Views and View Templates on page 839. and click Delete. 13 Click OK. In this exercise. click Load. View templates help standardize the look of all views by providing the initial settings for a view. Discipline. (The title block name may vary depending on the template you started with. you can apply a template to an existing view at any time using the Apply View Template command. or modify any component families or groups as necessary. and the visibility Modifying Views and View Templates | 839 . and you noticed that each template had a unique set of predefined views. right-click the component.9 Expand Annotation Symbols. View Range. you create the views required for your template. To do so. This title block is currently part of the template. You can use the Project Browser to delete a component from the project or template. 11 On the Options Bar. create.) 10 Expand the title block. Notice that a title block symbol is loaded. In addition. you created new projects using different templates. To load a title block. Notice it has Autodesk Revit in the upper-right corner.

select Site Plan. double-click South. 2 Under Names. there is no limit to the number of view templates that you can apply. In this exercise. Applying a view template to a view is a one-time action. 15 In the Project Browser. and then click OK. you can apply a view template to any view. and click OK. Subsequent modifications to the view template do not affect any current views unless you reapply the view template. At any time. and apply the appropriate template.settings of categories and subcategories. 3 Specify each value according to your needs. 6 Click OK. under Elevations. click Apply. rename or duplicate the view template and make modifications. 5 Repeat the steps above for each of the view templates in the list. Create and modify views 19 In the Project Browser. 8 Click View menu ➤ Apply View Template. This would result in the Site Plan view template becoming the default template for all new plan views. 4 If necessary. open the view from the Project Browser. 14 Select the Architectural Plan template. Keep in mind that these settings are the default settings for this view type. expand Views ➤ Floor Plans. Apply view templates 7 In the Project Browser. In addition. select Architectural Plan. under Floor Plans. These values represent the starting point for each plan view. and double-click Level 1. 13 Click View menu ➤ Apply View Template. 12 In the Project Browser. double-click Site. These settings are applied when you create a new plan view by adding a new level. under Floor Plans. After applying the template. and click OK. double-click Level 2. 11 Click Apply. the view is not linked to the template in any way. and then create new views that will automatically use those templates. 10 Select Apply automatically to new views of same type. 9 Select the Architectural Plan template. 18 If you modified any other view templates. 840 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . Every time a new plan view is created. By modifying the view templates according to your specific needs. The view properties of the target view are instantly reset to match those of the template. There is no limit to the number of times you can apply a view template to a view. Create and modify view templates 1 Click Settings menu ➤ View Templates. click Apply. it will use this view template to set the initial view properties. you will first modify view templates. you reduce rework and increase consistency across projects. 17 If you made modifications to the Site Plan template. NOTE Do not select Apply automatically to new views of same type. 16 Click View menu ➤ Apply View Template.

and click Save View. The view is listed in the Project Browser under Views (all) ➤ 3D Views. 21 In the Project Browser. and. Rename. Create and modify schedules 34 On the View tab of the Design Bar. To orient the 3D view to another view. and click Rename.Notice the level names. The associated floor plan will use the Architectural Plan view template to set its initial view properties. the ViewCube displays in the upper right corner of the drawing area for 3D views. ceiling plans. Make sure you are still in the South elevation view. 27 Create additional levels as needed. a face. 32 (Optional) To change the orientation of the 3D view. right-click the view name. use the ViewCube. (Default 3D View). click Orient to a Direction. Modifying Views and View Templates | 841 . enter a view name. If prompted. under 3D Views. under Floor Plans. Blue level heads have associated plan views. ■ 33 To save the re-oriented view. and click Properties. click Level. You can change the view orientation in many ways: ■ ■ Click a corner. and elevations. 30 In the Project Browser. on the View toolbar. right-click Level 1. click Window menu ➤ ViewCube. on the Basics tab of the Design Bar. right-click {3D}. or delete this view. Black level heads have no associated views. and select the desired view. right-click the ViewCube. By default. expand 3D Views. select Make Plan View. Create 3D views 28 To add 3D views to the template. 26 Rename and reposition the level as needed. under Floor Plans. and select the desired direction. or delete them as needed. in the shortcut menu. 24 On the Options Bar. 25 Add the new level within the elevation view. duplicate. notice that you have the option to rename. review the floor plans. duplicate. 31 Rename the 3D View. If it does not display. in the Project Browser. 22 In the Project Browser. right-click the ViewCube. or an edge of the ViewCube. click Orient to View. click 29 In the Project Browser. right-click the ViewCube. 20 In the Project Browser. To orient the 3D view to a direction. 23 To add more levels to the template. review the existing floor plans. click Schedule/Quantities. If you want to modify view properties.

select one. click Sheet. and click OK. modify settings as needed. Revit Architecture presets the layer names to American Institute of Architects (AIA) industry standards. select the default title block. 42 Create new sheets as needed. you modify the export layer settings for DWG/DXF and DGN files. You may want to consider adding the schedules that you use most often. On the Appearance tab. modify settings as needed. 842 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . 40 To add views to the sheet. and click Add View to Sheet. click Add View. each layer in the file is assigned a line weight based on the pen number/line weight settings you created. To later add a title block to a sheet. After the sheet is created. TIP You can add sheets to the template and delete the title block. You are prompted to select a title block. and click OK. 35 If you want to add schedules to your template. 43 Proceed to the next exercise. Modifying Import/Export Settings In this exercise. On the Filter tab. make the following modifications as needed: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Fields tab. The Export Layers command maps Revit Architecture categories and subcategories to specific layer names that are available after exporting to other CAD programs. When you import a DWG or DXF file. and modify their properties accordingly. in the Project Browser. Select a view. select and order required fields. 38 Repeat the steps above for each schedule type you add to the template. 41 To rename or renumber the sheet.txt for MicroStation). Right-click the sheet name. Subsequent sheets are numbered consecutively based on the previous sheet. on the View tab of the Design Bar. The layer names are stored in a text file (exportlayers. TIP You can also drag and drop views directly from the Project Browser onto the sheet. On the Sorting/Grouping tab. You can still add views to the sheet. Modifying Import/Export Settings on page 842. select the title block and delete it. On the Formatting tab. To do so. and click OK. Add sheets to the template 39 On the View tab of the Design Bar. This can save significant time and ensure that office standards are maintained. 36 In the Schedule Properties dialog. If you have already loaded your office title blocks into the template.txt for AutoCAD. or exportlayersdgn. The layer mapping files reside in the Data folder of the Revit Architecture program installation directory. select the category type. Modify export layers for DWG and DXF 1 Click File menu ➤ Import/Export Settings ➤ Export Layers DWG/DXF. and click Rename. click View menu ➤ New ➤ Place Titleblock. You then set the import line weights for DWG/DXF. assign filters.You can add schedules to a template. 37 Click OK. expand Sheets (all). and then are exported along with your project into the appropriate CAD program. modify settings as needed.

name the file. and they become the set mappings for the project. 10 Proceed to the next exercise. Setting up Shared and Project Parameters In this exercise. Modify export layers for DGN 4 Click File menu ➤ Import/Export Settings ➤ Export Layers DGN. When you import a DWG or DXF file. each layer in the file is assigned a line weight based on the pen number/line weight settings you created. When you create a multi-category schedule. 2 For each category. Pen Number 1 to Line Weight Number 1. Set as many pen-line weight mappings as desired. Their definitions are stored in an external file ensuring consistency across families and projects. you normally schedule a single category: rooms. doors. for example. 8 In the dialog. and so on. Using shared parameters. These settings are retained within the project template. project parameters. and so on. and related multi-category tags and schedules. and click Save. you can use shared parameters to add specific parameters to an existing family component for scheduling and tagging when those parameters are not initially present by default. match the pen (DWG/DXF Color Number) to the appropriate line weight. you do not need to worry about where the text file is saved. Layer name corresponds to level name for MicroStation. Project parameters are parameters (either instance or type) that are used within a single project for the purposes of scheduling information specific to that project. Multi-category tags use shared parameters to permit tagging of any family component regardless of category. For example.TIP In the Export Layers dialog. you continue the refinement of the template by setting up shared parameters. and they cannot be used to tag objects (as with shared parameters). it lists components regardless of category by using an external parameter as a filter. You can save these mappings to a text file. and click Save. Color ID corresponds to an AutoCAD or MicroStation color ID. Their values may also be aggregated and reported using multi-category schedules. They cannot be shared with other projects. You can add these shared parameters to any family regardless of category. windows. click Save As. When scheduling. specify the following: ■ ■ Projection Level Number and Color ID Cut Level Number and Color ID 6 If you modified the settings in this dialog. and click Save. therefore. You can import pen numbers from a DWG or DXF file and map them to a Revit Architecture line weight. name the file. select Save As. Setting up Shared and Project Parameters | 843 . Setting up Shared and Project Parameters on page 843. Pen Number 2 to Line Weight Number 2. specify the following: ■ ■ Projection Layer name and Color ID Cut Layer name and Color ID 3 If you modified the settings in this dialog. Modify import line weights 7 Click File menu ➤ Import/Export Settings ➤ Import Line Weights DWG/DXF. name the file. 9 Click Save As. 5 For each category. you can define additional parameters that are not included in the pre-defined instance and type parameters within family components or within the project template.

and click OK. 12 Click OK when you have finished creating shared parameters. select a group to add parameters to. 9 Name the parameter. click New. 15 In the Parameter Properties dialog. Set up project parameters 13 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Parameters. and the creation of multi-category tags and schedules. and specify its discipline and type. 21 Under Categories. Create parameter groups 4 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog. If you do not need to make changes to shared or project parameters. 19 Under Group parameter under. under Groups. you can create a list of parameters. 22 Click OK. 2 Click Create. see Scheduling Shared Parameters on page 249 or Adding Project Parameters to a Window Schedule on page 226. 8 Under Parameters. 26 Click OK. 5 Enter the group name. select the element categories to which this parameter applies. for Name. project parameters. 17 Under Discipline. 14 Click Add. select Project parameter. you may want to save the file to a network location. If you are unfamiliar with shared parameters. you can skip this exercise and move onto the last exercise of this lesson. and choose a shared parameter. 20 Choose whether the parameter is stored by instance or type. 10 Click OK. click Add. Set up shared parameters 1 Click File menu ➤ Shared Parameters. If a file already exists.This exercise does not provide detailed instructions. Create shared parameters 7 Under Parameter group. NOTE This procedure is for creating a new shared parameter file. select a parameter value type. select the group you want the parameter to be listed with in the Element Properties dialog. 3 Name and save the file. because each office has a unique set of needs. 6 Create as many groups as needed. you can browse to that file and modify it as needed. 25 Click Select. add required parameters. 24 To add a shared project parameter. select a parameter discipline type. If this template will be used by multiple team members. 844 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . 23 Add project parameters as needed. 18 Under Type of Parameter. enter a parameter name. 16 Under Parameter Data. For each parameter group. 11 For each parameter group. Creating Named Print Settings on page 845. click New. and select Shared Parameter.

By going first to the Print command. 29 Add shared project parameters as needed. Notice that the shared parameters created in previous steps are available within the list of available fields. indicate the group to which the parameter belongs. Create multi-category schedules 33 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 3 Under Settings. Creating Named Print Settings on page 845. Creating Named Print Settings | 845 . select Multi-Category. select a printer for which you want to create named settings. In this exercise. 37 When you have completed the schedule. 6 In the New dialog. enter a name for the schedule. 39 Proceed to the final exercise. you create named print settings. or refer to the online help. Create named print settings 1 Click File menu ➤ Print. and print. and make it your default template file. 35 For Name. enter a name for the print setting and click OK. paper placement. For each printer. for Name. Creating Named Print Settings Depending on your office environment. you need only select a setting. For information on creating multi-category tags. 5 Click Save As. 28 Click OK.27 Choose whether you want the shared parameter to be an instance parameter or a type parameter. 31 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load Family. You can also create named settings for printing to DWF and to a PDF writer. The tag is now part of the template. 2 Under Printer. Create and load multi-category tags 30 Create required multi-category tags in the Family Editor. 36 Create the schedule as you did in the previous exercise. select the tag. you can load them into the template. you can select the printer for each set of named settings in the Print Setup dialog. and assign the categories to which this parameter applies. and click Open. you can set options such as sheet sizes. save the file as a template. After you have created the multi-category tags in the Family Editor. make minor modifications if necessary. Click OK. and click OK. click OK. 34 For Category. 4 Modify the printer settings. click Setup. 32 Navigate to the directory. click Schedule/Quantities. you may find it beneficial to add named print settings to the template. and the percent of actual size. This is especially true if you have numerous printers in a large networked office. see the tutorial referenced in the introduction of this exercise. 38 Create additional multi-category schedules as needed. By creating named settings within the template.

you can delete the model geometry and save the empty project as a template file. 25 Click OK. you modified settings. In addition. The changes you made to the template are now the starting point for this project. select Template Files (*. Save the template 12 Click File menu ➤ Save. In this lesson. Use the template 17 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. loaded components. You can also set this template as your default template. 16 Click File menu ➤ Close. and click Open. save it in a network location. 24 Navigate to the template location. TIP You can also create named settings for your DWF and PDF writer. 20 Click OK. If you have a project. and click Open. select it.7 If you want to have multiple settings for this printer.rte). Create additional settings as needed. 9 In the Print dialog. click Save as. 19 Select the template. and saved them to a template. select a different printer. 22 Click the File Locations tab. Your template is complete. and click Save. you ensure that office standards are maintained. modify the printer settings. By investing the time to individualize your template. 18 Click Browse. click Browse. and click OK. and navigate to the location where you saved the template. 13 Navigate to the directory where you want to save the template. 846 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . you significantly reduce the amount of repetitive work that would be done by each employee for each project. TIP There are other ways you can create a template. This can provide a good starting point for a template. In addition. 23 For Default template file. you can use the Transfer Project Standards tool to move standards from one project to another. 8 Click OK when you have finished creating named settings for this printer. If you need to share this file with others. and create new settings for this printer. 14 Under Save as type. 11 Click Close when finished. click Setup. 10 Repeat these steps as needed. 15 Name the template. enter a new name for the printer. The only remaining task is to save it. Set the template as your default template file 21 Click Settings menu ➤ Options.